Notog

KEMENTERIAN PERHUBUNGAN
DIREKTORAT JENDERAL PERKERETAAPIAN
STANDAR
SPESIFIKASI TEKNIS
PEMBANGUNAN TEROWONGAN KEBASEN BH. 1464

(MULTI YEARS 2015 - 2017)
BALAI TEKNIK PERKERETAAPIAN WILAYAH JAWA BAGIAN TENGAH

KEGIATAN PEMBANGUNAN JALUR GANDA CIREBON – KROYA
RAILWAY DOUBLE TRACKING ON JAVA SOUTH LINE PROJECT III, CIREBON - KROYA
BIDDING DOCUMENTS, PART 2- WORKS REQUIREMENTS
SECTION VI-1: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 01001
INTRODUCTION AND SCOPE OF WORK
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
This Section covers the requirements for introductory explanation of the Project
and the Summary of Scope of Work.
2.01 INTRODUCTION:
2.01.1 The items included in this General Provisions apply to the whole of the works of
Construction of Railway Double Tracking on Java South Line Project III, Cirebon -
Kroya Segment I (between Cirebon - Purpuk) and Segment III (between
Purwokerto - Kroya). The sums inserted by the Contractor in the Bill of Quantities
shall be deemed to apply to the whole of the Works carried out under this Contract,
including any omissions or additions ordered by the Engineer under the Conditions
of Contract.
2.01.2 The purpose of this General Provisions is to enable the Contractor to price
separately those major obligations, requirements and items of work which are
necessary for carrying out the Works but which do not form a part of the final
construction for which the Contractor is separately reimbursed under the various
measured pay items.
2.01.3 Unless expressly provided for or implied in the Conditions of Contract or

specifically stated within the various Clauses of this General Provisions of the
Specifications, the sums of money included by the Contractor in the Bill of
Quantities, against the various items in this General Provisions, will not be subject
to alteration or change if a greater or lesser amount of work is carried out by the
Contractor or if the sum included for any item is insufficient to cover the
Contractor’s obligations under that item.
2.01.4 Where the Contractor has inserted an insufficient sum or left un-priced any item
within the General Provisions of the Bill of Quantities, the additional or total cost
will be deemed to have been included in the measured pay items in other sections
of the Bill of Quantities and no separate amounts will be certified for payment. The
Contractor shall provide a detailed breakdown of any lump sum price included in
the Bill of Quantities for any items in this General Provision of the Specifications.
2.01.5 Payment to the Contractor for the various items included in the General Provisions
of the Bill of Quantities shall be made in accordance with the payment conditions
described for each item with the following provisions.
1. If the Engineer considers that the Contractor has inserted an excessive

amount against any lump sum for which a substantial payment would be made
at the early stages of the Contract, the Engineer will certify such amount as the
Contractor is able to substantiate and the balance will be paid in equal
instalments in the monthly certificates throughout the course of the Contract.
01001 - 1
2. Where the payment conditions for any item state that the lump sum amount
shall be paid in equal instalments throughout the duration of the Contract, the
Engineer may, solely at his own discretion and if he considers that the
Contractor has fulfilled all his obligations under that item, certify the full amount
of payment, prior to the completion of the Contract.
2.01.6 The items included in this General Provisions are intended to cover the main items
of the Contractor’s obligations only. The Contractor shall therefore carefully study
all the Contract Documents, including current legislation etc., and if he considers
that there are additional obligations for which no specific item has been included in
the General Provisions, he shall allow for these elsewhere in his Bid as no future
claims will be allowed on the basis that no specific opportunity was given to price a
particular obligation.
3.01 SCOPE OF WORK:
The Works to be carried out are those for Construction of Railway Double
Tracking on Java South Line Project III, Cirebon - Kroya Segment I (between
Cirebon - Purpuk) and Segment III (between Purwokerto - Kroya). The Works are
mainly divided into two (2) categories: the works related to the new second track
construction, and the works for rehabilitation of the existing track. The Contractor
shall fulfil all the Works which are generally described in the following paragraphs.
3.01.1 Civil Work:
1. The scope of Civil Work of this Project involves:
a. The provisions of approximately 98.6 km of a new roadbed adjacent to

the existing railway to form a double tracking railway system starting from
nearly Cirebon station and ending at Prupuk station for Segment I,
starting from Purwokerto station and ending at nearly Kroya station for
Segment III including drainage system, soil improvement and protection
works.
b. The provisions of civil structures related to the requirements of the

rehabilitation of the existing track along the above Segments.
2. The major works involved with the Project include the following works:
a. Demolition and clearing works of existing structures within the Project

limit;
b. Roadbed construction comprising of earth embankments, cutting and

sub-grade layer using designated soil materials;
c. Soil improvement work for roadbed at swampy areas by use of suitable

method with soil condition based on the result of test boring; that is soil
mixing with lime or special cement, counter weight method or concrete
pile net method;
d. Platform and drainage system improvement at every station yard;
01001 - 2
e. Drainage system by use of stone masonry open U-ditch or L-ditch,

French drain, box culvert, or pipe culvert depending on the locations and
situation of the Project;
f. Retaining wall by use of reinforced concrete or stone masonry to protect

slope and roadbed;
g. Improvements of level crossings; and
h. Protection works.
Box Culvert Work is tabulated as follows:
New Box Culvert Existing Box Culvert

Box Culvert
Type of Type of
No. Dimension Dimension
Structure Structure
(SEGMENT-I)
ST.CIREBON
726 Box Culvert 4.00X2.00 Non-Touch 1.50+1.50
730 Box Culvert 3.00X3.00 Non-Touch 2.50X2.750
739 Box Culvert 5.00X3.00 Box Culvert 5.00X3.00
740 Box Culvert 3.00X2.50 Non-Touch 3.00
750 Box Culvert 2-5.00X4.50 Box Culvert 2-4.00X4.50
ST.LUWUNG
757 Box Culvert 2-2.00X2.00 Non-Touch 2-2.0X2.0
ST.SINDANGLAUT
787 Box Culvert 2-4.00X3.00 Non-Touch 3.00+3.00
794C Box Culvert 2-3.00X3.50 Non-Touch 3.00+3.00
800 Box Culvert 2-5.00X1.50 Non-Touch 10.00
ST.KARANGSUWUNG
01001 - 3

ST.LUWUNG
ST.CILEDUG
ST.KETANGGUNGAN BARAT
ST.KETANGGUNGAN
3.60X4.00 + 3.60x4.00 +
951 Box Culvert 5.00X4.00 + Box Culvert 5.00x4.00 +
3.60X4.00 3.60x4.00
954 Box Culvert 2.00X1.50 Box Culvert 2.00x1.50
957 Box Culvert 2-4.00X3.00 Box Culvert 2-4.00x3.00
966 Box Culvert 3.00X2.00 Non-Touch 2.30x1.750
ST.LARANGAN
ST.SONGGOM
ST.PRUPUK
(SEGMENT-III)
ST.PURWOKERTO
01001 - 4

1429A Box Culvert 5.00X4.00 Non-Touch 5.00X4.00
ST.NOTOG
1443A Box Culvert 4.00X3.00 Non-Touch Ø0.70
1451 Box Culvert 5.00X6.00 Non-Touch 3.00+3.00
ST.KEBASEN
4.00X4.00 + 2- 4.00X4.00 + 2-
1493B Box Culvert 3.00X4.00 + Box Culvert 3.00X4.00 +
4.00X4.00 4.00X4.00
ST.RANDEGAN
1496A Box Culvert 3.00X1.00 Box Culvert 3.00X1.00
ST.KROYA
3.01.2 Bridge Work
1. The scope of Bridge Work of this Project involves:
In general, Bridge Work is divided into two categories; construction of bridges

for double tracking and rehabilitation of existing bridge in line with raising the
existing rail level. The Bridge Work is tabulated as follows:
Bridge Substructure
Track Superstructure
No. Abutment Pier
728 New WTT 50 2 -
Existing TT 40 2 -
735 New PCT 25 2 -
Existing Re-use (PT 20) Raising -
736 New PCT 25 2 -
745 New WTP 30 2 -
Existing Non-touch (TP,GT 10 + 10) - -
776 New WTP 20 + WTP 15 2 1
Existing DPG 15 +15 2 1
777 New WTT 50 2 -
Existing TT 40 2 -
785 New D IG6 2 -
Existing Re-use (WTP 15) Raising -
01001 - 5
795 New DT 20 2 -
Existing Non-touch (PCT 25) 2 -
807 New WTP 15 2 -
Existing D IG8 2 -
808 New RCT 15 + PCT 30 + RCT 15 2 2
Existing Non-touch (DPG 8 + PT 20 + 20) - -
809 New D IG2 2 -
Existing Non-touch (RCP 2) - -
824 New WTP 30 2 -
831 New WTP 20 2 -
856 New PCT 25 2 -
878 New DD I G 2 2 -
Existing Non-touch (RCTB 2) - -
883 New WTT 60 + WTT 75 + WTT 60 2 2
Existing Non-touch (TT 60 + 60 +60) - -
911 New PCT 20 2 -
924 New WTP 30 2 -
Existing Non-touch (PT 20) - -
926 New WTP 30 2 -
934 New PCT 20 2 -
937 New WTP 30 2 -
Existing Re-use (PT 20 + D I G 8) Raising Raising
941 New WTT 75 2 -
Existing Non-touch (DPG + TT 10 + 20 + - -
20 + 10)
953 New WTP 15 2 -
Existing Re-use (D I G 8) Raising -
956 New PCT + PCT + PCT (20 +25 + 20) 2 2
Existing Re-use (TP,GP + PT 15 + 20 + Raising Raising
15)
961 New PCT 20 2 -
Existing Non-touch (D I G 4 + DPG 8) - -
990 New WTP 30 2 -
1409 New PCT 20 + PCT 30 + PCT 30) 2 2
Existing Non-touch (DPG + DT 15 + 20 + - -
20 +15)
1411 New PCT 20 + PCT 30 + PCT 20 2 2
Existing Non-touch DPG + DT + RCTB - -
10 + 20 + 12 + 6)
1425 New PCBT + 4Xpcbt + WTT + PCBT 2 6
(30 + 4x44 + 60 + 36)
Existing DT + DPG 2 12
(20x9 + 40 + 20 + 10 +8)
1437 New WTT 50 2 -
Existing Non-touch (TT 40) - -
01001 - 6
1438 New WTT 50 2 -

Existing - - -
1458 New WTT 90 + WTT 90 + WTT 90 2 2
Existing DPG + TT + PT 2 5
(10 + 10 + 60 +90 + 60 + 25)
1469 New DDI G 3 2 -
Existing Non-touch (DOC 1.5 + 1.5) - -
1482 New WTP 30 2 -
Existing TP,GT 12.5 2 -
1503 New WTT 50 2 -
Existing TP,GT 4 x 10 2 3
1504 New WTP 35 2 -
Existing TP,GT + PT (10 + 15 +10) 2 2
1505 New WTP 35 2 -
Existing TP,GT (10 +10) 2 1
Legend:
RCS : Reinforced Concrete Slab WTP : Welded Through Plate Girder

RCT : Reinforced Concrete T Girder WPT : Welded Pony Truss Girder
CHS : Concrete H-shaped Steel Beam WTT : Welded Through Truss Girder
I : I beam Re-use : Re-use of the existing girder
WI : Double I Beam DP : Deck Plate Girder
TP, GT : Through Plate Girder PT : Pony Truss
2. The major works required for the existing bridge:
a. Renewal of substructure;
b. Temporary structure for protection of the adjacent structure;
c. Demolition of existing structure;
d. Strengthening substructures;
e. Raising of structure height of substructure with reinforced concrete;
f. Strengthening superstructures; and
g. Replacement of bearings.
3.01.3 Track Work:
1. The scope of track work is generally divided into three categories:
a. Construction of New Second Track:
With total length of 81.4 kilometres, new second track is to be

constructed along the existing track to form double tracking system
between Cirebon station (Km 219+168) and Larangan station (Km
276+247) for Segment I, Pruwokerto station (Km 349+945) and Kroya
station (Km 377+122) for Segment III.
b. Modification of Station Layout:
Existing station layouts need modifying to meet the double tracking

system at 7 stations in Segment I and 3 stations in Segment III.
01001 - 7
c. Rehabilitation of Existing Track:
On a scale of 41.4 kilometres long, existing tracks are to be rehabilitated

by raising and/or horizontally shifting the tracks with removal
/reinstallation of their track panels and associated roadbed improvement
works so as to improve their alignments and/or prevent them from being
flooded.
In addition to the above 27.1 kilometres long existing tracks are to be

rehabilitated by using multiple tie tamper (MTT) with additional ballast.
2. Major works included are:
a. Total length of the new track laying will be 81.4 km for the new second
track mainline, 9.8 km for the new existing track mainline and 11.4 km for
the siding tracks at station yards;
b. In general, the new track is composed of 1000 m long continuous welded

rails (CWRs) formed by welding 40 pieces of 25 m long standard rails
and 3 track panels installed between CWRs as buffer track which were
formed by jointing 3 pieces of 25 m long standard rails with fishplates;
c. The track structure outside tunnel is generally constructed of sub-ballast,

ballast, rail R54, fastening and pre-stressed concrete sleeper (PC-
sleeper) including turnouts.
d. Synthetic sleeper is used for the tracks on steel bridges and as the
sleepers for mechanical expansion joints with fish plates (normal joints)
and turnouts;
e. Total length of the track laying on steel bridge will be 1.6 kilometres;
f. The track structure in tunnel is constructed of concrete slab, sleeper pad,

elastic pad, PC-sleeper, rail R54 and fastening as direct fixation track
with elastic pad;
g. Total length of the track laying on concrete slab will be 1.7 kilometres;
h. All existing turnouts at station yards shall be removed and sixty three (63)
numbers of new simple turnouts and two (2) numbers of new scissors
crossings shall be installed in conformity with the station layout
modifications;
i. Total length of the temporary diversion track laying will be 2.4 kilometres
for 12 locations at 6 station yards with switch-over works;
j. Total length of the temporary diversion track laying will be 4.0 kilometres
for 20 locations in between stations with switch-over works; and
k. Total length of the temporary diversion track laying around BH 728 will be
650 metres with earth work, temporary bridge work and switch-over
works.
01001 - 8
3.01.4 Facility Work
1. The station buildings to be constructed are Purwokerto and Kebasen stations.

The other ten (10) remaining stations to be rehabilitated or renovated are
Luwung, Sindanglaut, Karangsuwung, Ciledug, Ketanggungan Barat,
Ketanggungan, Larangan, Songgom, Notog and Randegan stations.
2. Construction of 7 new mushola rooms including utilities.
3. Rehabilitation of interior and floor finish for 10 existing stations. And extension
of 8 existing and construction of 1 new signal equipment rooms.
4. Construction and upgrading of 25 watchman huts between Cirebon to Prupuk

and Purwokerto to Kroya stations.
5. Installation of approximately 1960m of new security fence (wire mesh fence)

and concrete paving blocks covering about 7020m2 for 11 stations.
6. Rehabilitation and construction of lighting system on existing main platform

for 11 stations.
7. Modification of additional toilet for JRK in existing PT KAI’s building at

Randegan station and reconstruction of storage for JRK at Songgom station.
Reconstruction of storage and office for JRK at Notog station.
8. Demolition and construction of new high voltage steel tower for PT. PLN near
station as shown on the Drawing.
9. Construction of new 10 passenger toilet.
3.01.5 Tunneling Work
1. The main scope of work under Tunneling Work shall include the construction
of two (2) double-track tunnel with a length of approximately 550 m parallel to
the existing Notog tunnel and 292 m tunnel paralel to the existing Kebasen
tunnel between Purwokerto station and Kroya station.
2. The major work items included in Tunneling Works are as follows:
a. Excavation of a new tunnel and refuge niches;
b. Installing primary supports: steel wire mesh, shotcrete, rock bolts,

forepolling bolts, steel supports, etc.;
c. Construction and installation of drainage facilities: waterproof sheet,

longitudinal drainage, cross drainage pipes, center drainage pipes,
drainage pits, etc.;
d. Construction of secondary supports: lining concrete and invert concrete;
e. Construction of structures inside a tunnel or at tunnel portals: roadbed

concrete, center passage, cable boxes, portal walls, etc;
01001 - 9
f. Cleaning, observation and measurement works of an existing tunnel

and/or a new tunnel.
3.01.6 Signalling and Telecommunications Work
The Scope of the Signalling and Telecommunications Works for this Contract
comprises the design, manufacturing, delivery to site, installation, testing, and
commissioning, setting to work, training and warranty support services during the
Warranty Period of the Delivered System as stipulated in the Conditions of
Contract.
3.01.6.1 Scope of Supply
The scope of supply shall include:
1. Provision of new functional electronic interlocking system for double track

stations, following Signalling requirements to Indonesian Railway standards,
stage works shall be included if required to bring the system up to the final
stage;
2. Provision of new functional Local Control Panel in each station (as depicted
accordance to the sample control panel layout), stage works shall be included
if required to bring the system up to the final stage. A mixture of functional
layout and geographical based layout shall be used in the LCP design;
3. Modification and/or increase capacity of signalling power supply;
4. Provision of new UPS system including new batteries;
5. Provision of new Signalling Distribution system;
6. Modification of the existing electronic interlocking system in Purwokerto

station;
7. Provision of new LED light signals, LED light indicators and markers and
associated peripherals;
8. Provision of new electric point machines and associated peripherals including

electric locks and point detectors for hand points when part of the signalled
area;
9. Provision of new track circuit devices in the station area;
10. Provision of new axle counter system and devices in the block area between
stations;
11. Provision of new CTC system in Purwokerto Central Traffic Control (CTC)
Centre;
12. Provision of new Fibre Optic cable between Purwokerto Central Traffic
Control (CTC) Centre and Kroya station to connect stations on the line Kroya
– Kutoarjo to new CTC Centre;
01001 - 10
13. Provision of new traffic indication display system in Purwokerto Central Traffic
Control (CTC) Centre. Full details shall be described in Section “Centralised
Traffic Control (CTC) System” in the Specification;
14. Provision of new and additional line to the Telecommunication Console in

each LDR at each station and in the CTC centres;
15. Provision of new signal post telephones, new level crossing telephones and
talk back intercom facilities when required;
16. Provision of power supply from station UPS system for level crossings in
station areas as identified in this specification;
17. Interface to equipment and systems between each station and CTC Centre;
18. Provision of spares parts, tools and maintenance devices for signalling and
telecommunication system;
19. Supply of all new cables;
20. Provision of Insulated rail joints materials;
21. Manuals and other documents including as described in the Signalling

Specifications;
22. Transfer of System Software Licence and Ownership to the Employer; and
23. Contractor’s proprietary tools necessary for installation, data configuration and
maintenance of the Delivered System.
3.01.6.2 Scope of Services
Services supplied by the Contractor shall include the following:
1. Signalling advance works if required to allow works by other section, related

to double tracking of the line, to find place;
2. Signalling modification works of the existing signalling system if required to

allow works by other section, related to double tracking of the line, to find
place;
3. Relocation and modification of level crossing control/protection equipment;
4. Relocation and modification of level crossing power connection to PLN

Company;
5. Design, manufacture, delivery, installation and testing, temporary and

permanent commissioning of the equipment arising from the works described
in the Specification;
6. Decommissioning, removal and disposal (or salvage to PT.KAI warehouse as

directed by the Engineer) of the redundant equipment, hardware, associated
cabling, peripheral devices and finishing;
01001 - 11
7. Relocation and/or re-use of the existing signalling equipment to be salvaged

such as signals, point machines and axle counter devices within the Contract;
8. Preparation and submissions of all plans, documents, drawings, programmes,

manuals, method statements, records, reports, etc. including safety regulation
for each station (Reglemen Sementara Pengamanan Setempat) and CTC
(Reglemen Sementara Pengamanan LINTAS Pengendalian Kereta Api
Terpusat) as described in the Specification for Signalling and
Telecommunications;
9. Provision of detailed training and transfer of technology to allow the

Employer's staff to perform operational, maintenance and development duties;
10. Provision of test and inspection for equipment and system by the Employer
and the Engineer at manufacturer’s factory and installation site;
11. Provision of product support during installation and the Warranty Period;
12. Interfacing to existing equipment and systems at each station;
13. The Contractor may provide a changeover device for changing the operation
of systems between the existing system and the new system during the
interim changeover periods;
14. The Contractor shall assure total interlocking system design including power
supply equipment;
15. The Contractor shall provide new cabling system which for temporary works
connects the new Delivered System with the existing System, which is run
and terminated in a manner which allows for quick and easy de-
commissioning and minimises the extent of subsequent re-arrangement of
cabling and terminations;
16. The Contractor shall take any temporary equipment account into during
construction stage including relocation or modification of the existing facilities;
and
17. Renewal of the signal equipment room to obtain enough space for supplied
equipment including related works.
- END OF SECTION -
01001 - 12
SECTION 01002
DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This Section clarifies definitions in addition to those stated in the General
Conditions of Contract.
1.01.2 The following abbreviations and expressions shall have the meaning hereby
assigned to them for the purpose of this Contract except where the Contract
otherwise requires.
2.01 ABBREVIATIONS:
(1) “Government” means the Government of the Republic of Indonesia

including all the Authorities concerned;
(2) “The Employer” means the Directorate General of Railways (DGR), Ministry
of Transportations, Republic of Indonesia;
(3) “PT.KAI” means the Indonesian State-Owned Railways Corporation;
(4) “PLN” means the State-Owned Electricity Corporation (Perusahaan Umum

Listrik Negara);
(5) “PT. TELKOM INDONESIA” means the State-Owned Telecommunication

Corporation.
(6) “PAM” means the State-Owned Water Company (Perusahaan Air Minum);
(7) “Engineer” means the Consulting Engineer appointed by the Employer for
the Consulting Services for the Construction of Railway Double Tracking on
Java South Line Project III, Cirebon - Kroya Segment I (between Cirebon -
Purpuk) and Segment III (between Purwokerto - Kroya);
(8) A - Ampere;
(9) AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and

Transportation Officials;
(10) ACI - American Concrete Institute;
(11) ANSI - American National Standard Institute;
(12) ASTM - American Society for Testing and Material;
(13) AREA - American Railway Engineering Association;
(14) AWS - American Welding Society;
(15) BS - British Standards;
(16) Btl - Bottle;
(17) CCITT - International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative
Committee;
(18) CBR - California Bearing Ratio;
01002-1
(19) CC-bloom - Continuous casting bloom;

(20) CCP - Color Coded Polyethylene;
(21) cu.m or m³ - Cubic meter;
(22) dB - Decibel;
(23) DC - Direct Current;
(24) Dia or diam. - Diameter;
(25) Diaph. - Diaphragm;
(26) DIN - German Industrial Standards;
(27) Drg. or Dwg - Drawing;
(28) Ea - Each;
(29) EIA - Electrical Industry Association;
(30) F - Farad;
(31) g - Gram;
(32) gr - Grain;
(33) ha - Hectare;
(34) hr - Hour;
(35) HB - Brinell Hardness;
(36) HP - Horsepower;
(37) HRC - Rockwell C Hardness;
(38) Hz - Hertz;
(39) in - Inch;
(40) IEC - International Electro technical Commission;
(41) JEC - Standards of Japanese Electrical Committee;
(42) JEM - Standards of Japan Electrical Manufacture’s
Association;
(43) JSCE - Japanese Society of Civil Engineers;
(44) JIS - Japanese Industrial Standards;
(45) lb - Pound;
(46) L.S - Lump Sum;
(47) l or lt - Liter;
(48) lm - Linear meter;
(49) m - Meter;
(50) m2 - Square meter;
(51) Max - Maximum;
(52) Min. - Minimum;
(53) N - Newton;
(54) Ohm - Ohm;
(55) MPa - Mega Pascal;
(56) N/mm2 - Newton Square milli meter;
(57) No. - Number;
(58) P - Pair (30 P = 30 pairs);
(59) PBI - Indonesian Concrete Regulations;
(60) Pc - Piece;
(61) PC - Prestressed Concrete;
(62) PCC - Precast Concrete;
(63) RC - reinforced concrete;
(64) Rp. - Rupiah(s) of the Republic of Indonesia;
(65) sec - Second;
(66) set - Set;
(67) Sht - Sheet;
(68) SNI - Indonesian National Standards;
01002-2
(69) Sites - Construction sites in and around stations area

between Kutoarjo and Yogyakarta;
(70) Spl - Splice
(71) S.P.L.N - Standards of PLN;
(72) SRS - Standards for Steel Railway Bridges;
(73) SS Cable - Self-Suspension Type Cable;
(74) SSPC - Steel Structure Painting Council (USA);
(75) Stn or ST. - Station;
(76) TEL or Tel - Telephone;
(77) UIC - International Union of Railways Technical;
Specification;
(78) V - Volt;
(79) VA - Volt Ampere;
(80) W - Watt;
(81) Wt - Weight; and
(82) Y - Japanese Yen Currency.
Prefix:
1) G - Giga (109);
2) M - Mega (106);
3) k - Kiro (103);
4) c - Centi (10-2);
5) m - Milli (10-3);
6) µ - Micro (10-6);
7) n - Nano (10-9); and
8) p - Pico (10-12).
- END OF SECTION -
01002-3
SECTION VI- 1: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 01003
MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This work shall consist of providing preliminary activities in preparation for
construction work under the Contract and of carrying out final close-out activities in
preparation for completion of construction work under the Contract.
1.01.2 This work shall include the furnishing of all services, labors, materials, tools,
equipment, incidentals, and necessary facilities for providing or performing all the
works including requirements of safety measurements for construction, railway
operations and facilities.
2.01 MOBILIZATION:
2.01.1 Mobilization shall consist of preparatory work and operations, including but not
limited to, those necessary for the delivery and transfer of personnel, equipment,
plants, supplies and incidentals to the project site; for the establishment of all offices,
buildings and other facilities necessary for work on the Project and for all other works
and operations which must be performed, or costs incurred prior to begin to work on
the various contract items on the Project site.
2.01.2 Mobilization will be considered as complete when in the opinion of the Engineer the
Contractor has satisfactorily demonstrated the Works in compliance with the
respective requirements under the Contract completed.
2.01.3 Alteration of the personnel or the construction equipment under the Contract shall be
subject to prior consent of the Engineer.
3.01 DEMOBILIZATION:
3.01.1 Demobilization shall be considered as complete when all of the Contractor’s

equipment, materials, personnel, construction plant or otherwise belonging to the
Contractor have been removed from the Project site.
3.01.2 Demobilization shall include providing required submittals prior to close-out of the
work.
- END OF SECTION -
01003 - 1
SECTION 01004
ENGINEER’S OFFICE
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 The Contractor shall provide project offices for the use of the Engineer and his staff.
The Contractor shall supply and maintain facilities, services, consumables,
furniture, equipment installations and potable water, all as determined by and to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall arrange security services for the Engineer’s offices on a 24
hours basis and shall also provide adequate number of office boys at each office
throughout the course of the Contract. The Contractor shall be responsible for
paying any costs for the Engineer’s use of the office during the normal working
hours and overtime hours.
1.01.2 Locations and Sizes of Engineer’s Offices:
1. Possible Locations of the Engineer’s main, sub and site offices are as follows:
a. Main Office: Purwokerto;

b. Sub Office: Cirebon; and
c. Site Offices: Karangsuwung, Katanggungan, Prupuk and Kebasen.
2. Stuffing and Sizes of the Engineer’s Offices:
Schedule of stuffing at each offices are as follows:
Engineer A Engineer B Inspector Total

Main Office 11 21 5 37
Sub Office 4 17 2 23
Site Offices - - 14 14
Total 15 38 21 74
The exact location of the Engineer’s main, sub and site offices shall be notified
at the pre-bid meeting. The Engineer’s Offices consist of three (3) types of
offices namely main office, sub office and site offices. The main Engineer’s
office shall provide 540 m2 floors to accommodate 54 persons, 180 m2 floors for
conference room and 80 m2 floors for the Employer. The sub office shall
provide 350 m2 floors to accommodate 35 persons, 72 m2 floors for conference
room. The site offices consisting of four (4) same sized units shall provide a
total of 300 m2 to accommodate 30 persons. All offices shall be equipped with
appropriate toilets, air conditioners, lighting and all necessary fittings and
fixtures for permanent use. In addition to the above mentioned, the Contractor
shall provide paved access road and parking space including drain system for
twenty (20) vehicles at the main office and fifteen (15) vehicles at the sub office.
01004 - 1
2.01 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT:
2.01.1 Within twenty-eight (28) days from the Commencement Date of the Contract, the
Contractor shall furnish mobile phones of a type approved by the Engineer and
shall bear all costs and charges in connection with the use of the mobile phones,
which on completion of the Contract shall remain as the property of the Employer.
Seventy-four (74) sets of the mobile phones are necessary in order to facilitate
close contact with the sites.
3.01 EQUIPMENT FOR THE ENGINEER’S MAIN AND SUB OFFICES:
3.01.1 The Engineer’s main and sub offices shall be equipped with new furniture and
equipment listed in Table 1: “Equipment for Engineer’s Main and Sub Offices”,
which on completion of the Contract shall remain as the property of the Employer.
Prior to the supply of any of the following equipment the Contractor shall provide
the office layout plans and samples for the Engineer’s approval and no orders for
equipment shall be placed prior to the Engineer’s written approval of the proposed
equipment.
3.01.2 Throughout the course of the Contract the Contractor shall be responsible for and
pay all the costs in connection with the maintenance, servicing and repairs of the
equipment which shall be in good working order, fair wear and tear excepted, on
handover to the Employer.
3.01.3 Basically the Engineer’s main and sub offices shall be equipped with the
following equipment, but not be limited to.
01004 - 2
Table 1. Equipment for Engineer’s Main and Sub Offices
Qty
No Description Unit
Main Sub
Photocopy machine (black & white and color A3/A4, auto feed facility, with scaner set 2 1
1
reducing/enlarging facility, collate min. 40 copies)
2 Electric typewriter (with computer interface) set 1 -
3 Writing desk and chair for Chief and Co-Chief Engineer, Project Manager set 3 -
4 Standard office table with 6 chairs set 6 2
5 Conference table and chairs for 50 persons for main office and 20 persons for sub set 1 1
office
6 Writing desk and chair for Engineers, Inspector and Employer set 45 25
7 Writing desk and chair for CAD Operator, assistant and surveyor set 12 8
8 Writing desk and chair for Administration staff and Typist set 5 2
9 Metal filing bookshelf (2 doors, 5 shelves) set 26 10
10 Metal filing cabinets (4 drawers) set 30 15
11 Drawing cabinets set 10 6
12 Seating group (1 sofa, 2 easy chairs and 1 low table) set 2 -
13 White boards (copyboard type 900x1762 mm) set 3 1
14 White boards (copyboard type 920x1300 mm) set 2 1
15 Refrigerator (2 door, 220 litter) set 2 1
16 Cups, glasses etc. for 60 persons plus storage cupboard for main office and for 30 set 2 2
persons plus storage cupboard for sub office
17 Standing Electric fan set 6 3
18 Air Conditioners set 20 11
19 4 burner gas stove with 2 gas bottles set 2 1
20 Fax (auto feed, time/date, 10 numbers, redial facility, standard paper) set 1 1
21 Computer System for CAD Operators and Engineers set 28 15
i) IBM Compatible Computer units (The highest and latest version)
Minimum required specification is as follows:
CPU Intel Core-i5 Processor ,4 GB RAM,DVD-RW,500GB Serial ATA
7200RPM,Multimedia Keyboard, Optical Mouse,21”LCD,VGA 512MB, Media
Reader, USB 2.0,Firewire,eSATA,LAN, Audio,Modem Microsofe Windows 7,
Microsoft Word, Excel, Project, Auto CAD, antivirus and necessary software as
required by the Engineer.
22 ii) Laser Printer, 600dpi, A4 size set 12 6
23 iii) Colour Ink Jet Printer, A3 size set 4 2
24 iv) Colour Plotting Printer for drawing (A1 size) set 1 1
25 v) Uninterrupted Power Supply Unit (ICA 220 V 1,600W) unit 29 16
26 vi) Modem: ADSL2,Modem Router,4-port 10/100Mbps unit 1 1
27 vii) Router: Ultimate Wireless N Gigabit Router, IEEE 802.11 n/b/g, 4x Port unit 4 2
10/100/1000 LAN, 1x Port 10/100/1000 WAN,1 x USB port
28 viii) Hub Switch: RJ45 24-ports 10/100Mbps unit 5 3
29 ix) Wireless LAN (Access Point): Wireless-N Access Point, 802 11 b/g/n,Up to 128- unit 1 1
bit Encryption,WEP,WPA2,Wireless MAC Filtering
30 x) Server: Xeon E5504, 4GB RDIMM DDR3-1333,DVD-ROM, VGA ATI 32 MB, unit 1 1
Gbe NIC,Tower Case, including latest server operating system and anti virus
31 xi) Unlimmited internet connection (Cost for Contract with Provider) ls 1 1
32 The system shall include cabling as required ls 1 1
33 Multi Media Projector set 1 1
34 Digital Camera. set 14 7
35 Safety Box set 1 -
3.01.4 The Contractor shall also supply and maintain stocks of all necessary
consumables for the Engineer’s main and sub offices’ use, throughout the period of
the Contract. Any materials surplus on the completion of the Contract shall become
01004 - 3
the property of the Employer. The list of consumables is as follows but not be
limited to:
1. Photocopy paper and toner for photocopy A4 and A3 size;

2. CD-RW Disk and Flash Disk;
3. Fax Paper;
4. Colour Plotting Printer paper and toner;
5. Colour Ink Jet Cartridge; and
6. Stationeries.
3.01.5 Telephone System for Engineer’s Main and Sub Offices:
The Contractor shall at his own cost arrange for and pay all costs in connection
with the installation, maintenance and final disconnection of the telephone systems
for the main and sub offices. The installation of telephone systems shall comprise
minimum of three (3) incoming lines for the main office and two (2) income lines for
the sub office from PT. TELKOM INDONESIA; each one of which shall be
exclusively used for one (1) facsimile machine. Internally the systems shall
comprise a master switchboard connected to twenty-two (22) telephones for the
main office and eleven (11) telephones for sub office. All parts of the telephone
systems shall on completion of the Contract become the property of the Employer.
The Contractor shall at time of installation, inform the Engineer, which items will be
handed over to the Employer.
3.01.6 The Contractor shall bear all expenses of the monthly rental, electrical, city water,
drinking water, gas, city administration, rubbish disposal, internet and telephone
calls charges but the Engineer will reimburse to the Contractor directly for any
international private calls.
3.01.7 Throughout the course of Contract, the Contractor shall provide such staff,
equipment and materials as necessary to maintain the Engineer’s main and sub
offices in a clean habitable and functional condition. When in the opinion of the
Engineer any repairs, maintenance or redecoration are necessary, the Contractor
shall at his own cost and without delay carry out such remedial work as required.
3.01.8 The Engineer’s offices shall be available with all services, furniture and equipment,
for the Engineers occupation within sixty-three (63) days from the Commencement
Date of the Contract. If at the end of the sixty-three (63) days period the
Engineer’s Office is still not complete and available for occupation, the Contractor
shall at his own cost provide such temporary office space as the Engineer may
require accommodating his staff. Provision of temporary office space shall continue
until the Engineer’s Offices are ready for occupation. The Engineer’s Offices shall
be available for the Engineers’ use until sixty-three (63) days after the expiry of
Defects Notification Period.
3.01.9 Until the specified or temporary Engineer’s office with all services, furniture and
equipment are provided, the Contractor shall provide at his own expense, within
twenty-eight (28) days after the date of the Notice to Proceed, reasonable
alternative office (75m2) in a suitable location.
01004 - 4
4.01 ENGINEER’S SITE OFFICES:
4.01.1 In addition to the Engineer’s Main and Sub Offices, the Contractor shall also supply
four (4) temporary site offices for the Engineer’s staff supervising the construction
of the Project.
The offices, of which exact locations will be notified after the award of contract,
shall be located adjacent to both the Project site and the Contractor’s own
temporary facilities for the Project.
4.01.2 Each site office shall be approximately 75 m2 floor area and shall comprise a single
room with a separate compartment for toilet and washing facilities. The Contractor
shall at his own expense provide the furniture, water and electricity service and
equipment as listed in the following table: “Table 2. Equipment for Site Engineer’s
Office (for four site offices)” including all necessary consumables but not be limited:
Table 2. Equipment for Site Engineer’s Office (for four site offices)
No Description Unit Qty

1. Writing desk and chair for Inspector, assistant and surveyor set 34
2. Metal filing bookshelf (2 doors, 5 shelves) set 8
3. White boards (copyboard type 920x1300 mm) set 4
4. Cups, glasses etc. for 10 persons plus storage cupboard. set 4
5. Air Conditioners set 8
6. 2 burner gas stove with 2 gas bottles set 4
7. Computer System set 8
CPU Intel Core-i5 Processor ,4 GB RAM,DVD-RW,500GB Serial ATA
7200RPM,Multimedia Keyboard, Optical Mouse,21”LCD, VGA 512MB, Media
Reader, USB 2.0,Firewire, eSATA, LAN,Audio, Modem Microsofe Windows
7, Microsoft Word, Excel, Project, Auto CAD, antivirus and necessary
software as required by the Engineer.
8. Laser Printer 600dpi,A4 size set 4
9. Uninterrupted Power Supply Unit (ICA 220 V 1,600W) set 8
10. The system shall include cabling as required. Ls 1
11. Digital Camera set 8
12. Standard Office Table with 6 Chairs set 4
13. Seating group set 4
14. Fax (auto feed, time/date, 10 numbers, redial facility, standard paper) set 4
4.01.3 On completion of the Contract, all equipment furnished the Site Engineer’s offices
shall become the property of the Employer.
5.01 ENGINEER’S VEHICLES:
5.01.1 The Contractor shall provide the following vehicles for use of the Employer, the
Engineer and his staffs during the Contract Period.
- Twenty (20) Motor Cycles, 125cc class

- Fifteen (15) Minibuses, 2000cc or equivalent
- Four (4) Cars, 4WD above 4000 cc or equivalent
- One (1) Car, Sedan above 2000 cc or equivalent
01004 - 5
The Contractor shall provide suitable drivers for each of the above vehicles
together with all running costs such as fuel and lubricants, maintenance, and
servicing for the vehicles including fully insurance, supply of tires, spare parts, etc.
All vehicles shall be brand new.
5.01.2 As soon as after the Contract signed or in any case before the Commencement
Date of the Contract, the Engineer will provide the Contractor with a schedule of
the date or dates by which the vehicles shall be supplied. Within twenty-eight (28)
days of the date or dates mentioned in the above schedule, if the Contractor has
not been provided the vehicles and these are so required for use by the Engineer,
the Engineer on behalf of the Employer will provide the vehicles required and
charge all relevant expenses to the Contractor.
5.01.3 Payment to the Contractor shall include all costs in connection with supply and
maintenance of the vehicles for Engineer’s transportation but not the ownership of
the vehicles, which shall become the property of the Employer on the completion of
the Contract. For the purposes of bidding the Contractor shall price this item on the
basis of providing and maintaining all the vehicles from the Date of
Commencement of the Contract until sixty-three (63) days after expiry of Defect
Notification Period referred to in the Contract Documents.
5.01.4 If at any time during the course of the Contract any vehicle shall become
unserviceable, the Contractor shall at his own expense provide a temporary
replacement until the original vehicles is re-available for use. The Contractor at his
own expense shall immediately replace any vehicle, which becomes permanently
unserviceable due to major accident or in the opinion of the Engineer it is unsafe
due to other cause, with a similar vehicle of comparable age but in good running
condition.
6.01 ENGINEER’S HOUSING:
6.01.1 The Contractor shall provide service and maintain the following houses on a rental
basis to accommodate the Engineer and his staffs for the period of Contract:
- One (1) House for Chief Engineer and family;

- Fifteen (15) Houses for Expatriate Engineers and families;
- Thirteen (13) Houses for local Engineers; and
- Nine (9) Houses for Inspectors.
6.01.2 The locations and types of houses should be agreed by the Engineer before the
Contractor enters into rental contracts with the house owners. It is of major
importance that the housings are furnished and equipped with air conditioners and
all houses are able to render safe, comfortable and acceptable to the occupants.
Each house shall comprise at least a living room, dining room, kitchen, three (3)
bedrooms, two (2) bathrooms, and servant’s quarters and double garage. The
Contractor shall arrange servant, adequate security and houses shall be fitted with
telephone.
01004 - 6
6.01.3 The minimum fittings to be provided shall be as listed below:
- Beds, mattress and pillows with sheets, blankets, pillowcases, bedside tables,
wardrobes, chest of drawers, and dressing table with mirror;
- Each bathroom is to be equipped with washbasin with mirror, bath with water
heater and European water closet;
- Kitchen is to be furnished with one refrigerator, cooking stove with oven,
storage space, cupboard drawers and shelves, and microwave oven range;
- Sofa set with coffee table, bookcase and cupboard or wall unit, etc;
- Dining table and chairs;
- Water Dispenser;
- TV set (which can connect overseas channel as like Japan); and
- Internet Connection (speed more than 1M/sec).
6.01.4 The Contractor shall bear all expenses of the monthly rental, electrical, city water,
drinking water, gas, city administration, rubbish disposal, internet and telephone
calls charge but the Engineer will reimburse the Contractor directly for any
international private calls.
6.01.5 As soon as after Contract signed or in any case before the Commencement Date
of the Contract, the Engineer will provide the Contractor with a schedule of the
dates by which the housing shall be supplied. If, the Contractor has not provided
the housings and they are so required for use by the Engineer within twenty-eight
(28) days of the dates mentioned in the above schedule, the Engineer on behalf of
the Employer will provide and furnish the housings and charge all relevant
expenses to the Contractor.
6.01.6 For the purposes of bidding the Contractor shall price this item on the basis of
providing and maintaining the entire Engineer’s housing from the Commencement
Date of the Contract until sixty-three (63) days after the Expiry of Defects
Notification Period referred to in the Contract Documents.
6.01.7 If any house provided by the Contractor for the Engineer’s use shall become
untenable due to fire, structural collapse or for any other reason, the Contractor
shall at his own expense provide a replacement house of similar standard and to
the approval of the Engineer until such time as the original house is available for
re-occupation or if this is not possible the temporary replacement house shall
become a permanent replacement for the untenable house.
7.01 INDEPENDENT LABORATORY:
7.01.1 The Contractor shall maintain for the duration of the Contract, an approved
independent laboratory in accordance with Section 01019: “LABORATORY
SERVICES”. The laboratory shall be equipped with all the necessary apparatus
and materials, as specified below for the performance of all the standard tests
required by the Specifications.
01004 - 7
Item No. Test Item Standard

Soils
1. Particle Size Analysis of Soils AASHTO T 88
2. Determining the Liquid Limit of Soils AASHTO T 89
3. Determining the Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils AASHTO T 90
4. Specific Gravity of Soils AASHTO T 100
5. Density of Soils In-Place by the Sand-Cone Method AASHTO T 191
6. The California Bearing Ratio AASHTO T 193
7. Penetration Test and Split Barrel Sampling of Soils AASHTO T 206
8. Thin-Walled Tube Sampling of Soils AASHTO T 207
9. Diamond Core Drilling for Site Investigation AASHTO T 225
Aggregates
10. Unit Weight and Voids in Aggregate AASHTO T 19
11. Organic Impurities in Sands for Concrete AASHTO T 21
12. Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates AASHTO T 27
13. Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregate AASHTO T 84
14. Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse aggregate AASHTO T 85
15. Lightweight Pieces in Aggregate AASHTO T 113
16. Surface Moisture in Fine Aggregate AASHTO T 142
Concrete
17. Slump of Portland Cement Concrete AASHTO T 119
18. Determining Degree of Pavement Compunction of Bituminous AASHTO T 230
Aggregate Mixture
19. Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixture Using AASHTO T 245
Marshall Apparatus
20 Percent Air Voids in Compacted Dense and Open Bituminous AASHTO T 269
Paving Mixtures
7.01.2 In addition to the tests designated in the Specifications, the following tests may be
instructed by the Engineer to be carried out at an external laboratory.
All the charges for the tests shall be borne by the Contractor.
Item Test Item Standard

No.
Soils
1. Resistance to Abrasion of Small Size Coarse Aggregate by Use of AASHTO T 96
the Los Angeles Machine.
2. Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens AASHTO T 22
3. Compressive Strength of Cubical Concrete Specimens PBI
4. Unconfined Compressive Strength of Cohesive Soil AASHTO T 208
5. Strength parameters of Soils by Tri axial Compression AASHTO T 234
6. One-dimensional Consolidation Properties of Soil AASHTO T 216
7. The California Bearing Ratio AASHTO T 676
7.01.3 The Contractor may, subject to the prior approval of the Engineer, use a
recognised testing company to undertake all testing.
01004 - 8
7.01.4 In any case where testing of material or workmanship is specified by one testing
standard and alternative tests methods are allowed, the method used to determine
compliance with this Specification will be at the absolute discretion of the Engineer.
The Engineer’s decision will be final and claims on the basis of the Engineer’s
selection of a particular allowable test method will be rejected.
7.01.5 All the apparatus and materials necessary for test required under this Contract
shall be supplied by the Contractor and installed in the laboratory. Not later than
twenty-eight (28) days after the issue of the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall
submit for the Engineer’s approval, a list of all equipment to be procured with the
details of suppliers. Upon completion of the Contract all test equipment will remain
the property of the Contractor.
7.01.6 If during the initial twenty-eight (28) days period any works are carried out by the
Contractor for which the testing of materials is required and the laboratory facilities
are not ready for occupation, the Contractor shall arrange for such tests to be
carried out in temporary accommodation on site or if this is not possible, then with
the prior written approval of the Engineer, it may be carried out at an external
laboratory.
7.01.7 These conditions will continue until the laboratory is completely performed and fully
accepted by the Engineer. However, the Contractor shall keep maintaining the
laboratory and equipment on site until the Engineer confirms that no further testing
is required and it may be removed.
7.01.8 If at any time during the course of the Contract the laboratory shall become
untenable in whole or in part, due to any cause, the Contractor shall, at his own
expense, replace or repair the structure damaged thereby, or the testing
equipment broken. The Contractor shall make available such temporary laboratory
and testing facilities, as the Engineer may require.
7.01.9 Payment to the Contractor under this item shall be deemed to include provision of
equipment for the laboratory, the costs of external testing, and all costs in
connection with the maintenance and running of the laboratory during the period of
the Contract and also include but not be limited to the following items:
1. Any charges or levies by local or central city administration in connection with

the laboratory;
2. Provision of suitably qualified laboratory technicians, assistants and labour;
3. The cost of all consumables associated with the testing and running of the
laboratory;
4. Repairs and services required maintaining the installed equipment in an
accurate and serviceable condition; and
5. Daily and periodic cleaning and maintenance of the laboratory.
8.01 SURVEY TEAM FOR THE ENGINEER:
8.01.1 The Contractor shall, as a requirement of the Contract furnish for the exclusive use
of the Engineer all necessary instruments, appliances, personnel and labourers for
survey work and any other relevant work to be done.
01004 - 9
8.01.2 The personnel and equipment to be supplied for the Engineer’s exclusive use shall
be as described hereunder:
1) Eight (8) Surveyors, eight (8) Assistant surveyors and twenty-four (24)
Surveyor’s labourers;
2) Eight (8) Theodolites (360 degrees) with E.D.M. minimum reading 10 sec;
3) Eight (8) Auto Levels or Levels 2mm/40″ and eight (8) steel measuring tapes
of 50m long;
4) Sixteen (16) fibre measuring tapes of 50m long;
5) Sixteen (16) leveling staffs (4m);
6) Twenty-four (24) target poles with tripods and miscellaneous tools and
materials required in surveying.
8.01.3 All surveying instruments shall be supplied with tripods and its auxiliaries related
and these instruments will remain the property of the Contractor. The Surveyors
shall be fully trained and experienced.
9.01 LOCAL SUPPORT STAFF:
The Contractor shall, as a requirement of the Contract, furnish for the exclusive
use of the Engineer, the following office support staff, equipped in the Engineer’s
offices:
1. Assistant for Engineer’s Main Office:
- Three (3) Cad (Computer-aided device) Operators;

- Three (3) Typists; and
- Three (3) Office Boys.
2. Assistant for Engineer’s Sub Office:
- Two (2) Cad Operators;

- Two (2) Typist; and
- Two (2) Office Boys.
3. Assistant for Engineer’s Site Offices:
- Four (4) Cad Operators;

- Four (4) Typist; and
- Four (4) Office Boys.
10.01 EXCESS OVERTIME SUPERVISION:
10.01.1 Supervision of construction and inspection by the Engineer and his staff are based
on the standard fourty (40)–hours working per week in Indonesia. Day work should
take place in accordance with the normal working hours, which will be taken as
follows:
- Monday through Friday: 08.00 to 17.00 hours

- Saturday, Sunday and Holiday: Off Day
01004 - 10
10.01.2 In case the Contractor works overtime in excess of these hours, that is more than
forty (40) hours in a week and if it is a kind of work that requires inspection or
supervision which cannot be deferred to the forty (40) hour period by the judgment
of the Engineer, the Contractor shall pay the Engineer or his nominee the cost of
the excess overtime of supervision and inspection for reimbursement to the
Engineer.
This provision shall apply to Engineer’s local staff only, excluding expatriate staff.
10.01.3 The Contractor’s obligation under this Section shall include all costs in connection
with supervision of the Contractor’s works outside normal working hours including
payment of meal and transport allowances. At the end of each month Engineer will
submit to the Contractor a schedule setting out any costs of excess overtime of
supervision for his staff, and within seven (7) days of receipt of the aforementioned
schedules, the Contractor shall pay to the Engineer or his nominee the due sum as
indicated.
10.01.4 No separate measurement and payment will be made for any work specified in this
Section as this work shall be considered as a part of the Contractor’s obligations
under the various Sections of the Specifications and the pay items applicable
thereto.
- END OF SECTION -
01004 - 11
SECTION 01005
JOB SITE ADMINISTRATION
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
This Section covers the requirements for administration of the job site by the
Engineer and his responsibilities for the Project.
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
2.01.1 The Engineer will provide administration of the Contract as hereinafter

described.
2.01.2 The Engineer shall act for the Employer during construction and will have authority
to act on behalf of the Employer to the extent provided in the Contract Documents.
2.01.3 The Engineer will keep the Employer informed of the progress of the Work, and
will endeavor to guard the Employer against defects and deficiencies in the Work.
2.01.4 The Engineer will not be responsible for (and will not have control or charge of)
construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety
precautions and programs in connection with the Work. He will not be responsible
for the Contractor’s failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents. The Engineer will not be responsible for or have control of acts or
omissions of the Contractors, subcontractors, or any of their agents of employees,
or any other persons performing any of the Work.
2.01.5 Based on the Engineer’s observations and an evaluation of the Contractor’s

Applications for Payment, the Engineer will determine the amounts due to the
Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment.
2.01.6 The Engineer will be the interpreter of the requirements of the Contract
Documents and the judge of the performed thereunder by both the Employer and
the Contractor.
2.01.7 The Engineer will render interpretations necessary for the proper execution or
progress of the Work with reasonable promptness, and in accordance with any
time limit agreed upon. Either party to the Contract may make written request to
the Engineer for such interpretations.
2.01.8 Claims, disputes and other matters in question between the Contractor and the
Employer relating to the execution or progress of the Work, or the interpretation of
the Contract Documents, shall be referred officially to the Engineer for decision,
which he will render in writing within a reasonable time.
2.01.9 All interpretations and decisions made by the Engineer shall be consistent with the
intent of, and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents, and will be in
writing or in the form of drawings. In his capacity as interpreter and judge, he will
endeavor to secure faithful performance for both the Employer and the Contractor,
01005-1
and will not show partiality to either party, and will not be liable for the result of any
interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity.
2.01.10 The Engineer’s decisions in the matters relating to the finished effect will be final if
consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents.
2.01.11 The Engineer will prepare Variation Orders and will have authority to order minor
changes in the Work.
2.01.12 The subcontractors will be allowed access to the Site during the hours worked by
the Contractor. They shall make their own arrangements with the Contractor,
should they desire to work at other hours. The subcontractors shall be held
responsible together with the Contractor for the Project and its contents while they
are working in it.
2.01.13 The Contractor and each subcontractor shall employ full time, on site, a competent
foreman for each trade.
2.01.14 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for placing orders for all material and
equipment required for his work under this Contract. The Contractor shall place
orders for delivery within the following time limits:
1. Late enough to avoid long storage periods and possibility of deterioration,

damage, or theft; and
2. Early enough to avoid delaying the work.
2.01.15 Upon request by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide evidence of placing
orders for materials.
- END OF SECTION -
01005-2
SECTION 01006
PROJECT MEETINGS
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
This Section covers the requirements for pre-construction meeting, regular co-
ordination meeting and progress meetings including distribution of their minutes
and pertinent information.
2.01.1 The Engineer shall schedule and administer a “Pre-construction Meeting”,

“Periodic Progress Meeting”, and “Specially-Called Meeting” for the duration of the
Contract.
2.01.2 Representatives of the Contractor, subcontractors and suppliers attending the

“Project Monthly and Weekly Meeting” shall be qualified and authorized to act on
behalf of the entity representing each.
Pre-construction Meeting:
1. Schedule within twenty-eight (28) days after the Commence Date;
2. Distribute written notice of each meeting four days in advance of meeting date;
3. Make physical arrangements for meetings;
4. Location of the meeting shall be at Engineer’s Main Office, convenient for all
parties, designated by the Engineer;
5. Attendance
Employers
Engineers
Contractor’s Representative
Major Subcontractors
Major Suppliers
Others as appropriate
6. The Engineer is to preside at the meetings, record the minutes including all
significant proceedings and decisions;
7. Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within seven (7) days after each
meeting to all participants in the meeting and all parties affected by decisions
made at the meeting;
8. Suggested Agenda
a) Use of the premises;
b) Distribution of Contract Documents;
c) Procedures for Maintenance Record Documents;
01006-1
d) Procedures for processing;

- Field decisions
- Option and substitution requests
- Submittals
- Variation orders
e) Application for Payment;
f) Project Coordination;
g) Distribution and discussion of;
- List of major subcontractors and suppliers
- Projected Construction Schedules
h) Major materials and equipment delivery and installation dates;
i) Critical work sequencing;
j) Temporary construction facilities and utilities;
k) Safety and first - aid requirements and procedures;
l) Security requirements and procedures;
m) Housekeeping requirements and procedures.
Progress Meetings:
1. Schedule regular periodic meetings, and meetings required as the Works

progress
2. Location shall be at the Engineer’s Main Office.
3. Attendance shall be the Engineer, Contractor, subcontractors as appropriate

to the agenda, and suppliers as appropriate to the agenda.
4. Suggested Agenda
a) Review and approval of minutes of previous meeting;
b) Field observations, problems, and conflicts;
c) Problems which impede the progress of construction, including its
proposals of how to solve the problems;
d) Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules;
e) Corrective measures and procedures required to maintain the projected
schedule;
f) Schedule for work during the succeeding work period;
g) Shop Drawing submittal date and approval date;
h) Review proposed changes for:
- Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date;
- Effect on other contracts of the project.
- END OF SECTION -
01006-2
SECTION 01007
QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL PROGRAMME
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
This Section covers the requirements for Quality Assurance/Control Programme for
this Project.
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL

PROGRAMME:
The following comprises the requirements of the Employer on the Works.
2.01.1 The Contractor shall provide and maintain an effective Quality Control System and
submit a Quality Control Schedule for approval to the Engineer.
2.01.2 The Contractor shall ensure compliance with monitoring of all aspects of the Works.
2.01.3 The Contractor shall establish the Quality Control System and perform sufficient
inspections and tests for the Works, including any sublet work, to ensure
conformance to applicable Specifications and Drawings with respect to materials,
workmanship, construction finishing, functional performance and identification. This
Control shall be established for all works performed under the Contract. The
Contractor's Quality Control System shall specifically include the surveillance and
tests required in the technical provision of the Contract Specification.
2.01.4 The Contractor’s submittals for materials and work methods must include test
results and future testing procedure.
2.01.5 To assure conforming to the specified requirements for quality of materials,

measurements and installation methods, the following must be submitted by the
Contractor:
1. The Curriculum Vitae of an experienced and qualified Laboratory Engineer;

2. A list of field laboratory services including small testing equipment;
3. A list of external laboratory services;
4. An organisation Diagram of Quality Control Team; and
5. Its proposal for main test procedures.
2.01.6 The Engineer may alter testing procedures and the Contractor is obliged to submit
all testing results and testing procedures.
2.01.7 The Contractor's Quality Control System is the means by which the Contractor
assures himself that his construction complies with the requirements of the Contract
Drawing and Specifications.
2.01.8 The Controls shall be adequate to cover all construction operations, including both
On Site and Off Site fabrication and will be keyed to the proposed construction
sequence. The Controls shall include as a minimum at least three phases of
01007-1
inspection for all definable phases of construction as shall be agreed with the
Engineer.
2.01.9 Preparation inspection:
This inspection shall be performed prior to beginning of any work on any definable
phase of construction and as shown in the Contractor's schedule. It shall include a
review of Contract Requirements, a check to assure that all materials and/or
equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved, a check to assure that
provisions have been made to provide required control testing, examination of the
work area to ascertain that all preliminary work has been completed and a physical
examination of materials and/or equipment on hand. The Engineer shall be notified
at least twenty-four hours in advance of the preparatory inspections and such
inspection shall be made a matter of record in the Contractor's Quality Control
(CQC) Reports.
2.01.10 Initial inspection:
This inspection shall be performed as soon as a representative portion of the

particular phase of Construction has been accomplished and shall establish the
acceptable standard of workmanship, including a review of control testing for
compliance with contract requirements, use of defective or damaged materials,
omissions and dimensional requirements. The Engineer shall be notified at least
twenty-four hours in advance of initial inspection and such inspection shall be made
a matter of record in the Contractor's Quality Control (CQC) Reports.
2.01.11 Follow-up inspections:
These inspections shall be performed daily to assure maintaining compliance with

Contract requirements, including control testing, until completion of the particular
phase of construction. Such inspections shall be made a matter of record in the
Contractor's Quality Control (CQC) Reports.
2.01.12 The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer as soon as practicable, and in no event
later than twenty-eight (28) days after receiving the Notice to Proceed the Works, a
Quality Control Plan which shall include the personnel, procedures, instructions and
records to be used.
11 – 1 This document will include as a minimum:
1. The Quality Control Organization Chart;

2. Qualifications of personnel;
3. Authority and area of responsibility of Quality Control Personnel;
4. Plan for accomplishing Quality Control Inspections;
5. Detailed listing and designation of all tests and inspections to be performed.
The Contractor will further indicate which tests will be performed by technicians
employed by the Contractor or by an approved testing laboratory;
6. Method of documenting Quality Control Operations, inspections and testing;
7. A copy of a letter or direction to each Contractor’s representative responsible
for Quality Control, outlining his duties and responsibilities and signed by a
responsible officer of the firm;
8. A narrative discussion of how the Contractor’s Quality Control staff will
accomplish the tasks assigned to Quality Control; and
01007-2
9. An explanation, as to how the quality Control organisation relates to other staff

elements as regards Shop Drawing submittals, As Built Drawings, revisions to
the Contract and safety.
2.01.13 Construction operation will not commence until the Engineer has accepted the
Contractor’s Quality Control Plan, unless otherwise agreed for any specific phase of
construction for which the plan has been submitted and accepted.
Progress Payments will not be processed for any portion of work that has a Quality
Control requirement until that portion of the Quality Control Plan has been submitted
and accepted.
2.01.14 The Contractor's Quality Control System shall be implemented by the establishment
of a separate Quality Control Organisation whose sole duty will be to insure
conformance to the Contract of all contractual activities.
2.01.15 The Contractor's Quality Control Organisation shall be sufficiently staffed to perform
the following tasks:
1. Conduct phased inspections (preparatory, initial and follow-up) in accordance

with the provisions herein before;
2. Perform all testing required under the technical provisions of the Specifications;
3. Review and approve all Shop & Work Drawing submittals;
4. Inspection of materials as they are delivered on site to insure compliance with
approved Drawings and Contract Specifications;
5. Conduct off-site inspections of supplies and services to be incorporated into the
Works. Provide monthly report for off-site QC activities; and
6. Maintain record of all QC activities. These records shall be available for the
Employer's use.
2.01.16 The Contractor shall, within fourteen (14) days after receiving the Notice to Proceed
the Works, report to the Engineer the names and qualifications of personnel
assigned full-time to the Quality Control function. The named personnel shall
prepare a Quality Control Programme and remain as the basis of the Quality Control
Staff until the Quality Control Programme has been submitted and accepted.
2.01.17 If at any time during the duration of the Contract the Engineer determines the Quality
Control staff is not capable of performing all tasks listed above, then the Engineer
may direct the Contractor to revise and/or supplement the present organisation
structure at no additional cost.
2.01.18 The Contractor shall submit a monthly Quality Control Report. The report shall
contain a record of inspections and tests for all works accomplished subsequent to
the previous report and shall include the following information:
1. Phase(s) of construction underway during the time frame of the report;

2. Inspection (preparatory, initial, or follow-up) phase of construction and location
of inspections and/or tests that were made;
3. Results of inspection, including nature of deficiencies observed and corrective
actions taken or to be taken;
4. Report of tests performed, including those specified the results of the tests, and
failures and/or remedial action to be taken. Test results, including all
computations shall be attached to the report form;
01007-3
5. Result of inspection of materials and equipment upon arrival at the job site and
prior to incorporation into the work for compliance with submittal approvals,
damage and proper storage;
6. Instructions received from the Main Contractor's field representatives or
Inspectors; and
7. In all cases, the report must be verified and signed by the one person delegated
this responsibility by the Contractor.
2.01.19 As an opinion, the Work to be performed by laboratory technicians may be

accomplished by an independent testing laboratory. The laboratory used to perform
tests, whether it will be the Contractor's laboratory or the optional independent
testing laboratory, shall be approved by the Engineer.
2.01.20 The Engineer reserves the right to utilise the Contractor's Control Testing
Laboratory and equipment to make spot tests and to check the testing procedures,
techniques, and test results at no additional cost.
2.01.21 If enduring deficiencies indicate that the Quality Control System, Personnel,
Inspections, tests and/or records are not providing adequate control, the Contractor
shall take corrective action as deemed necessary and directed by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall, after receipt of such notice, immediately take corrective action, and
such notice, when delivered to the Contractor or his representative at the site of the
Works, shall be deemed sufficient for the purpose. If the Contractor fails to comply
promptly, the Engineer may issue an order stopping all or part of the Works until
satisfactory corrective action has been taken.
2.01.22 No part of the time lost due to any such stop work orders shall be made the subject
for extension of time, or for excess costs or damages, by the Contractor.
2.01.23 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of any proposed change to the
Contractor's Quality Control System; the Engineer shall implement “No such change
prior to concurrence in writing”.
3.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:
3.01.1 Materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall conform to all applicable
standards and be of the size, make, type, and quality specified unless specifically
exempted from compliance. The Engineer reserves the right to reject materials
and/or workmanship not conforming to the specifications at any time before final
acceptance. The Engineer’s acceptance of materials or workmanship shall not
prevent its subsequent rejection, if defects are discovered later. The Contractor shall
remove installed materials, which are rejected by the Engineer and replace them at
no additional cost to the Employer.
3.01.2 The work shall be fabricated, accomplished, or installed only by competent workmen
with demonstrated experience in the work. Experienced, full time foremen shall
supervise all tradesmen. All material shall be installed as shown on the Drawings or
approved by the Engineer.
3.01.3 The Engineer shall have the right to inspect the work in progress and all materials
and equipment, which are to be used in the installation. The Engineer reserves the
right to order the removal or replacement of any material or equipment, which, in his
01007-4
opinion, is not satisfactory or does not comply with the capacities and standards
specified. If the Contractor refuses to remove the items, which have been rejected,
the Engineer will arrange for these items to be removed and/or replaced with those
specified at the Contractor’s expense. Such action shall not void any other
responsibilities of the Contractor for completion of the installation in accordance with
the Specifications and the Drawings. Any delay caused by these actions shall be the
sole responsibility of the Contractor.
No approval by the Engineer shall relieve the Contractor of his responsibility under
the Contract to provide the quality of materials and standard of workmanship as
specified.
3.01.4 If required, certificates demonstrating proof of compliance of materials with

Specification requirements shall be executed and submitted. Each certificate shall
be signed by an authorized officer of the manufacturing company and all contain the
name and address of the Contractor, the project name and address, and the quantity
and date or dates of shipment or delivery to which the certificates apply. Copies of
laboratory test reports shall be submitted with certificates and shall contain the name
and address of the testing laboratory, the dates of the tests to which the report
applied, and the type of material tested. Certification shall not be construed as
relieving the Contractor from furnishing satisfactory material. If, after tests are
performed on selected samples, the material is found not to meet the specific
requirements, the material and/or equipment will be rejected.
3.01.5 The Work shall be carried out only by experienced subcontractors. The Engineer
shall have the right to disapprove any subcontractor, material suppliers, and
tradesmen for the work. The Contractor will be solely responsible for the
performance of their subcontractors and the quality of the subcontractors’ work.
Contracts between the Contractor and subcontractors shall be in the same way and
to the same degree that the Contractor is bound to the Employer by his Contract.
3.01.6 In general, the Contractor and subcontractors shall examine the areas, in which their
work is to be done, the adjacent areas, adjoining work, and the environmental in
which the work is to be done. Take field measurements as necessary and examine
the areas of work for defects in existing work and/or deviations in existing work
beyond allowable tolerances. Notify the Engineer in writing of any conditions that
are detrimental to the proper execution of the work. Do not proceed with the work
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. No claim based on defective or
improper conditions will be considered upon unless such claim is made in writing to
the Engineer before the work is started. Beginning work shall constitute acceptance
of job conditions.
3.01.7 The installation of work shall comply with manufacturer’s printed instructions. The
Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer detailed printed instructions for the
proper mixing, application, and/or installation of the manufacture’s products. He
shall distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation,
including four (4) copies to the Engineer, and maintain one (1) set of complete
instructions at the job site during installation.
- END OF SECTION -
01007-5
SECTION 01008
SUBMITTALS
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
This Section covers the requirements and procedures for preparing submittals.
2.01.1 The Contractor shall submit Project Programme, Work Programme, Boring Data,
Samples, Products Data, Calculations for temporary works, Shop & Work Drawing,
Bending Schedule, Building Construction Permits, Safety Programme and others
required by the Contract Documents, and any others required by the Employer or
Engineer.
2.01.2 By the Engineer’s approval of required submittals, the Contractor represents that
he has determined and verified all materials, field measurements, and related field
construction criteria (or will do so), and that he has checked and co-ordinated the
information contained in such submittals, the requirements of the Work and of the
Contract Documents.
2.01.3 The Contractor shall submit for the approval required submittals to the Engineer.
a. Submit four (4) sets (copies) of every kind of documents, unless otherwise
specified in each Section, or as approved by the Engineer.
b. Samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate the

functional characteristics of the product.
c. Product or catalogue data shall include manufacturers standard drawings

(modified to delete non-applicable data or to include applicable data),
catalogue sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules, charts, illustrations and
other standard descriptive data:
- Mark each copy to identify pertinent materials, products or model; and

- Show dimensions, clearances required, performance characteristics,
grade, type and size as applicable.
d. Accompany submittals with a transmittal letter in duplicate, containing:
- Date;
- Project title and number;
- Contractor’s name and address; and
- Description of data contained in submittals.
e. Submittals shall include:
- Original date;
- Revision number and date;
01008-1
- Project title and number;

- The names of Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, manufacturer, and
separate detailer, as appropriate.
- Identification of product or materials;
- Connections, connectors, and welds;
- Relationship of product to adjacent structure or materials;
- Clearly identified field dimensions, when known;
- Erection procedures;
- Specification Section number;
- Utility requirements (as applicable);
- Applicable standard, such as JIS, ASTM, AASHTO, SNI, etc;
- A blank space on each drawing 10 cm x 20 cm, for the Engineer’s stamp;
- Identification and description of deviations from Contract
Documents; and
- Cross reference Shop Drawings to Contract Drawings.
For each submission, a minimum time of three (3) weeks shall be allowed for
checking and approval. Delay caused by late submission or non-approval due
to repeated errors would under no circumstances be construed as reasons for
extension of time.
The Contractor shall not order materials or commence manufacturing until the
submittals have been approved and signed by the Engineer.
f. The Engineer will review and approve (or take other appropriate action) upon
the Contractor’s submittals, but only for conformance with the design concept
of the Work and the information given in the Contract Documents. The
Employer or Engineer assumes no responsibility for correctness of
dimensions, details, quantities, or procedures shown on Shop Drawings or
submittals.
g. The Engineer’s approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an

assembly of which the item is a component.
h. Submittals not approved will be marked accordingly and returned to the

Contractor. The Contractor shall make the corrections required or submit
alternative materials for approval until approval is obtained. The cost for
submittals shall be borne by the Contractor.
i. Before starting fabrication or manufacture of any prefabricated or off site

manufactured items, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer each of the
second originals of all approved Shop Drawings.
j. After approval, the Contractor shall distribute copies to:
- Contractor’s file, and project record document file;

- Subcontractors, suppliers, and fabricators as appropriate; and
- Other subcontractors as appropriate.
01008-2
3.01 SHOP DRAWINGS:
3.01.1 The production of Shop Drawings shall be co-ordinated by the Contractor and
shall be shown in the Project Programme, allowing time to permit the Engineer to
check the drawings, make amendments, and check the drawings again before
final approval by the Engineer.
3.01.2 The Contractor shall review; with reasonable promptness all Shop Drawings,
product data, samples and calculations prior to submission to the Engineer.
3.01.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of his responsibility for conforming to the
requirements of the Contract Documents by the Engineer’s approval of Shop
Drawings, product data, calculations or samples. The Contractor shall not be
relieved from the responsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop Drawings,
product data, calculations, or samples by the Engineer’s approval thereof.
3.01.4 Omission in Shop Drawings of any materials indicated in the Contract Drawings,
mentioned in the Specifications, or required for proper execution and completion
of the Work, does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility for providing
such materials. The Contractor is responsible for accuracy, dimensions, quantities,
strength of connections, co-ordination with various trades, and conformance with
project requirements.
4.01 AS BUILT DRAWINGS:
4.01.1 The Contractor shall provide and keep up to date a complete set of “As Built
Drawings” which shall be amended daily to record all changes from the original
drawings and Specifications showing actual locations and type of equipment etc.
installed.
4.01.2 At Provisional Handover, three (3) set of final “As Built Drawings” in full size shall
be submitted to the Engineer together with five (5) copies reduced to A3 size and
two (2) sets of CD-ROMS in which associated CAD data were recorded.
This submission is a condition precedent to issue the Taking-Over Certificate by
the Engineer.
5.01 BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PERMITS:
5.01.1 The Contractor shall obtain building construction permits for permanent structures
to be built, from the Indonesian Architectural Permit Office.
5.01.2 For this purpose, the Contractor shall prepare any necessary drawings, structural
calculations, design certificates, together with any additional descriptive data and
technical information necessary to ensure that he can secure the appropriate
permits from the Indonesian Authorities. The Contractor shall pay any fees or
charges necessary to secure the permits including the costs of engineers licensed
by the Indonesian Government to assist in obtaining the permits.
- END OF SECTION -
01008-3
SECTION 01009
DAILY LOGS, REPORTS AND PHOTOGRAPHS
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
This Section covers the requirements for preparation of daily logs, weekly reports,
monthly reports, photographs and other-related documents.
2.01 DAILY LOG, WEEKLY REPORT AND MONTHLY REPORT:
2.01.1 The Contractor shall maintain a “Daily Log” describing important events pertaining
to the works, the working hours, the number of laborers employed, effective
operation time of equipment, overtime hours, delays due to meteorological and
maritime conditions, the lack of labor, materials or equipment, progress achieved
and instructions, notifications and recommendations made by the Engineer. The
logs shall be submitted daily and approved by the Engineer.
2.01.2 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer five (5) copies of the “Weekly Report”
on Tuesday of every week indicating progress achieved, soil transported,
equipment and materials employed or used, laborers employed and all-important
events in relation to the Works.
2.01.3 The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer five (5) copies of the “Monthly
Progress Report” specified in Section 01010: “PROJECT PROGRAMMING”. The
Report shall be submitted to the Engineer on the 5th day of the month following the
month of the Report made.
3.01 PHOTOGRAPHS:
3.01.1 The Contractor shall include, in the Monthly Report above, photographs relevant to
the Work, which has progressed during the period.
3.01.2 Whenever required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit two (2) copies of
photographs relevant to the Work, deemed necessary to record, in the opinion of
the Engineer, that the Work has been performed in accordance with the
Specifications or other necessities to record, within ten (10) days after the said
photographs were taken or as directed by the Engineer.
3.01.3 The Contractor shall take panorama view photographs of the site from several
different points and locations approved by the Engineer to show the whole
activities and progress of the works. Such photographs shall be taken monthly
from the Commencement Date up to completion of the whole Works. Points and
locations, where such photographs are taken from, shall not be changed unless
otherwise permitted by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit two (2) sets of
such photographs every month at the time the Monthly Report is submitted, which
are in the size sufficient to highlight the activity and progress of the work. Each
print shall be accurately dated and identified for future reference.
01009-1
3.01.4 The Contractor shall provide and submit three (3) sets of albums of all
photographs taken during the Construction Period according to the sequence of
the works progress, at the time the As Built Drawings are submitted to the
Engineer.
4.01 PHOTOGRAPHS UPON COMPLETION:
Upon completion of the Work, the Contractor shall provide color photographs, as
directed by the Engineer, which are taken of railways, bridges and other related
structures. The Contractor shall also submit one (1) set of original negatives and
six (6) prints of each negative – 200 mm x 250-mm size. Number, date, and
annotate for the prints are as same as the progress photographs.
5.01 DOCUMENTARY FILM:
The Contractor shall, at his expense, prepare and submit documentary films of the
construction of the works under the Contract within twenty-eight (28) days after the
date of issuance of Performance Certificate of the Works. The film shall be thirty
(30) minutes long each, sixty (60) minutes in total, video color film, both 8mm and
VHS, with Indonesian / English narration and shall show the exact progress and
the method of construction for demonstration / advertising the activity of the
construction. The Contractor shall, within twenty-eight (28) days after receiving the
Notice of Proceed, submit to the Engineer his method and sequence of
documentary films for Engineer’s Approval.
- END OF SECTION -
01009-2
SECTION 01010
PROJECT PROGRAMMING
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
This Section covers the requirements for preparation of Project Programming.
2.01 GENERAL:
2.01.1 The Contractor shall prepare Programmes and other Scheduling Information in the
manner described below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents throughout the
Contract period.
The Contractor shall provide in writing for the Engineer’s information a general
description of the arrangement or sequence that the Contractor proposes to adopt
for the execution of the Works or any part thereof whenever requested by the
Engineer.
Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, all programmes submitted by the

Contractor shall be produced using the computerised Critical Path Method (CPM)
Networks.
2.01.2 Within twenty eight (28) days after receiving the Notice to Proceed of the Contract,
one (1) original and three (3) copies of each of the following Programmes and
Reports shall be submitted to the Engineer:
a. Programme: Baseline CPM Network:
- The Contractor shall follow the standard coding in the Activity ID Code
Structure to create activity IDs. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer
for his acceptance a Baseline CPM Network – Time Scaled Diagram
design;
- Upon exhausting CAL standard codes provided in the activity code

structure, the Contractor may create additional activity codes within the
spaces of the Activity Code Structure allocated to the Contractor with the
agreement of the Engineer;
- The Engineer may request additional activity coding to the extent available
without restraint to the Contractor’s utilisation of the programme software.
When requested, the Contractor shall add the required additional coding to
the Programme;
- The Contractor shall use additional code fields as requested to comply with
the requirements and for the use of the Contractor;
- The Contractor shall submit a hardcopy of sub-activities for each group

relating to cost loaded activities in A4 size. In the process of development
01010-1
within the Contract period where changes are made, the Contractor shall
resubmit for approval; and
- Sub-activities shall be updated at regular intervals which may be as

frequent as monthly to show the current status of the Works and to serve
as an effective measurement of delay and shortages relative to the cost
loaded activities in their 3-month look-ahead schedule or monthly reports
as and when required by the Engineer.
b. Programme: Baseline Cost Loaded Bar Chart Schedule:
- The Contractor shall also submit to the Engineer for his acceptance a
Baseline Cost Loaded Bar Chart Schedule; and
- The Contractor shall, from each item in the Bid Summary, provide a list of
all the associated activities and their individual costs. The Contractor shall
ensure that the cost of each item in the Bid Summary identifies with and at
the same time, correspond to the costs in the list of associated activities.
Upon review, the Engineer may require the Contractor to adjust the cost of
these activities and/or request for the inclusion of new activities to reflect
the intent of the Contract. General items such as Preliminaries shall be
apportioned appropriately between the respective items in the Bid
Summary.
c. Narrative:
The Narrative shall be a comprehensive statement of the Contractor’s plan

and approach for the execution of the Works and the achievement of Key
Dates, handover dates, submission dates and any intermediate dates. It shall
incorporate outline method statements in respect of major items of work
including construction sequences and primary item of plant, construction
equipment, temporary works and the like. It shall fully explain the reason for
the main logic links in the Programme and include estimated quantities,
production rate, hours per shift, workdays per week and listing of the major
items of construction equipment planned for use on the Project. Activities that
may be expedited by use of overtime or additional shifts shall be identified
and explained. A listing of holidays, and other special non-works days, being
used for the computer reports, shall be included.
d. Baseline Physical Progress “S” Curve:
The Contractor shall also submit a forecast Cumulative Physical Progress “S”
curve based on the time-phased distribution of cost in the CPM Network
Diagram, expressed in percentage terms. This “S” curve shall be generated
from the computerised CPM Network Diagram.
e. Baseline Resource Charts:
- The Contractor shall also submit a Resource Chart, generated from the
Contractor’s CPM Network Diagram, showing the anticipated manpower
and main Constriction Equipment usage during the execution of the Works;
01010-2
- As an additional monitoring facility, indicator resources shall be assigned to

relevant activities for the major items of works. Indicator resources shall be
directly allocated for earthworks (m3), piling (no.), concrete (m3), bridge
steelwork (t), and railway track (tm). Resource indicators may be input as a
daily rate, expected required rate, or as an activity total in the relevant
units;
- The Engineer shall review and comment on the Contractor’s programmes

and information submitted under this clause. The Engineer will confirm his
acceptance or otherwise of the submissions within twenty one (21)
calendar days from the submission;
- The Engineer shall require the Contractor to re-submit within fourteen (14)
calendar days if he is of the opinion that the programme and information
submitted by the Contractor is unlikely to meet the Contract key dates; and
- Failure to include any element of work required for the performance of the
Contract shall not relieve the Contractor from completing all works required
under the Contract to achieve the original or any extended key completion
date.
2.01.3 Monthly Progress Reporting System:
a. Contractor’s Monthly Progress Report:
The summary of the Contractor’s Monthly Progress Report shall be submitted:
- Monthly Contract Status Report:
(i) Narrative; and

(ii) Contract Information Sheet.
- Project Performance Report:
(i) Updated Cost Loaded Bar Chart Schedule;

(ii) Updated Physical Progress “S” – Curve; and
(iii) Updated Resource Charts and Resource Indicator.
The Contractor shall submit five (5) copies of his Monthly Progress Report to
the Engineer covering the execution of the Works. Graphics and photographs
as required by the Engineer may support the Report. The Report shall be
delivered to the Engineer on the 5th day of the month following the month of
the Report. The Monthly Progress Report shall consist of the Monthly
Contract Status Report and the Project Performance Report.
b. Monthly Contract Status Report:
A Monthly Contract Status Report shall be prepared by the Contractor and

submitted to the Engineer as part of his Application for Payment. The
Contract Status Report shall include a Narrative and accompanying Contract
Information Sheet:
01010-3
- Narrative:
The Contractor shall participate with the Engineer in Monthly Meetings on

dates at a location as directed by the Engineer. The purpose of the
meetings is a joint review of the progress of the Works. Work progress
shall specifically include:
(i) Actual completion dates for activities completed during the report
period;
(ii) Actual start dates for activities commenced during the report period;
(iii) Estimated start and finish dates for activities schedule to commence
and finish during the month following the report period, and any
Contractor’s actions necessary to meet the programmed start date;
(iv) Change in the duration of any activity;
(v) Factors related to the quantity of the work;
(vi) Corrective action to be taken by the Contractor, if necessary, to
improve progress and/or maintain Contract completion dates;
(vii) Other factors related to payment such as percentage of the activity
completed;
(viii) Co-ordination topic involving the movement of construction
equipment and other resources, utilities and design consistency and
construction interface completed during the month. Similar activities
anticipated during the month following the Report period shall also be
discussed;
(ix) Status of Shop Drawings and Design Drawings (if applicable) as they
relate to Preliminary, Pre-Final, Final Submission, Contract Drawings
and Specification, and As Built Drawings requirements;
(x) Delay Reports including the anticipation of potential delays and the
Contractor’s proposals to facilitate/provide timely corrective action.
Identify all activities affected by the delay. Report also on delays due
to defective and remedial works undertaken at the Contractor’s cost;
(xi) The estimated Contract value of the Permanent Works executed up
to the end of that month;
(xii) Updates on Outstanding Contractual Matters concerning claims and
variations submitted previously and during the reporting period; and
(xiii) Updates on corrective actions taken to provide all the required safety
measures as proposed and as required by legislation.
- Contract Information Sheet:
In addition to and in support of the Narrative the Contractor shall submit a

Contract Information Sheet to be incorporated in his Monthly Contract
Status Report. The Contract Information Sheet shall contain the following
items:
(i) A title containing Contract number, Contractor’s name, date of award

of Contract, and Report Period;
(ii) The activity ID numbers;
(iii) The activity description;
(iv) The early start date, late start date, early finish date and late finish
date as shown in the latest approved Baseline Schedule Report;
(v) Actual start date, if started;
(vi) Actual finish date, if finished;
01010-4
(vii) Physical percentage progress (%); and

(viii) An indication of the activity on the Critical Paths.
All activities with early start dates prior to the calendar date of the end of
the next reporting period shall be included in the Contract Information
Sheet.
c. Project Performance Report:
The Project Performance Report shall include:
- Updated Earned compared to Baseline Cost Loaded Bar Chart Schedules:
The updated Earned compared to Baseline Cost Loaded Bar Chart

Schedules shall be updated by entering the actual physical progress at the
end of each month onto the CPM Network – Time-scaled Logic Diagram.
The updated Earned Cost Loaded Bar Chart Schedule shall clearly show
those activities which have started, are in-progress or are completed. It
shall also show each activity’s percentage completion and variation from
the baseline-accepted schedule.
- Updated Earned compared to Baseline Physical Progress ‘S’- Curves:
The Earned Physical Progress ‘S’ - Curve shall be updated by entering the
actual physical progress at the end of each month on the Physical
Progress ‘S’ - Curve. Actual physical progress shall be measured by the
accumulation of all those activities specified on the Contractor’s CPM
Network Logic Diagram that are considered approved percentage complete
by the Engineer, plus the aggregate weighted percentage completion of all
those other activities that are in progress at the end of the month. This
aggregated weighted percentage completion must also be agreed by the
Engineer.
If the ‘S’-Curves reflect delay and shortages with reference to the Baseline,
a recovery programme and narrative action plan are required for time lost
and deliverable recovered as to achieve Baseline completion date.
The Physical Progress ‘S’ curve shall have a horizontal time scale showing
the forecast Contract duration in months.
The vertical scale of the Physical Progress ‘S’ - curve shall be a

percentage scale running from 0% to 100%. The forecast physical
progress per month shall be shown along the horizontal time scale. The
forecast cumulative physical progress shall be shown by the forecast
Physical Progress ‘S’-curve.
- Updated Resource Charts:
The Resource Charts shall be updated to show:
(i) Actual resources per month; and

(ii) “Time Now” cursor.
01010-5
2.01.4 Programme and Report Submission Format:
The Contractor shall submit five (5) copies and one (1) reproducible (for
Programmes) of all submissions to the Engineer. All submissions shall be in A0,
A1, A3, or A4 size, as appropriate, except as may otherwise be agreed by the
Engineer. In addition, the computerised programme and report shall be submitted
in 3½ inches diskettes or equivalent.
The format for all Programme and Report submissions shall be strictly in
accordance with the format as stated herein or as requested by the Engineer.
- END OF SECTION -
01010-6
SECTION 01011
SECURITY OF RAILWAY OPERATIONS
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
This Section covers the requirements for safe operation of construction activities in
adjacent to or on the existing track serving the train operations.
2.01 NON-INTERFERENCE WITH RAILWAY OPERATIONS:
2.01.1 The Contractor shall carefully schedule and thoroughly arrange his work to avoid
interference or danger to the operation of the existing railway lines at any time
during the construction works.
2.01.2 The Contractor shall cooperate with, observe all rules and regulations and meet all
requirements of the railway administration so as to avoid interference or danger to
the operation of the railway, and the Contractor shall save harmless and indemnify
the Employer in respect of all claims, demands, damages and costs whatsoever
arising out of or in relation to any such danger or interference.
2.01.3 Assurance of Unobstructed Passage for Train Operation:
a. The Contractor shall where required arrange a system of demarcation to

clarify the boundary of any work site adjacent to the functioning railway tracks
and shall install protective facilities such as temporary fencing where required
along this boundary. The Contractor shall enforce restrictive rules for the
entrance of workers into the active railway track area.
b. The Contractor shall be responsible for foreseeing all works causing

interference by machines or materials, by careless workers and the possibility
of falling down or slipping-out of construction objects or tools, etc.
c. The Contractor shall arrange the work system to prevent such interference by
means of a clarification of work regulations, the disposition of train watchmen,
etc.
2.01.4 Security of Railway and Facilities:
a. When the structural integrity, stability, safety or function of the railway and
facilities are disturbed or affected, or are in danger of being influenced or
affected by the Work, the Contractor shall consult with the Engineer at an
early stage and shall execute the Work according to a procedure approved by
the Engineer.
b. For facilities which cannot easily be observed, such as underground cable,

signalling system, etc., the Contractor shall only begin to work after a
thorough clarification of the existing situation of these facilities. With respect
to the Works undertaken within the danger zone of live cables, the Contractor
shall utilize protective apparatus and shall work under blackout status when
01011-1
necessary, considering the imminent danger of high voltage electricity located

close by construction workers and equipment. The Contractor shall in such
cases submit a written application to the Engineer, at least three weeks prior
to the commencement of the Work, giving details of the work schedule and
reasons for working under blackout status and no work shall be undertaken
prior to the written approval of PT. KAI administration and the Engineer.
3.01 ASSURANCE OF SWITCHOVER WORK OF RAILWAY FACILITIES:
3.01.1 For the complete switchover of the operation or function of the railway system, the
Contractor shall prepare a work plan to be approved by the Engineer at an early
stage and execute the work in the approved manner. Before the beginning of the
switchover work, the Contractor shall confirm the facilities, apparatus, materials,
workers, etc. concerned in detail with the attendance of the Engineer. The PT. KAI
shall be present during switchover work.
3.01.2 The Contractor shall make adequate prior arrangements to secure the cooperation
and approval of the related organization on the plan and execution of the
switchover.
4.01 RESPONSIBLE PERSONS FOR NON-INTERFERENCE WITH RAILWAY

OPERATION:
4.01.1 To secure the above-mentioned non-interference with the railway operation, the
Contractor shall provide responsible personnel throughout the whole construction
time, including full-time personnel in charge of each sector of the work and
workers and others on site, and shall arrange an interference prevention system
as part of the control of the daily work execution.
4.01.2 The above special personnel in charge of this matter shall undertake a training
course in respect of the prevention of interference with railway operation. These
personnel shall establish periodically the schedules and regulations of all works in
respect of the security of railway operations. The Contractor shall be liable and
responsible for the safety of third parties on the construction site.
- END OF SECTION -
01011-2
SECTION 01012
WINDOW-TIME AND SPEED DOWN OF

TRAIN OPERATIONS
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
This Section sets forth window-time including occupation of track for the Works of
the Project so as not to interfere with and to secure the safety of train operations.
2.01 WINDOW TIME FOR CONSTRUCTION:
2.01.1 Window time shall be applied to several cases as will be described hereunder
depending on the method of construction to be executed.
2.01.2 The following cases, which may affect the train operations, shall be taken into
consideration for application of window time:
a. Track shifting;
b. Track raising;
c. Signal Testing and Commissioning;
d. Connecting of track;
e. Setting of turnouts;
f. Construction of new platform and drainage system;
g. Level crossing;
h. Works related with rehabilitation of existing track including on bridges;
i. Relocation and protection of Utilities;
j. Construction of cross French-drain;
k. Construction of U-ditch; and
l. Demolition work.
2.01.3 The determination of the window time shall be left to the discretion of PT. KAI and
its related train operation staff, in consideration of a proposal made by the
Engineer with regard to the same.
3.01 OCCUPATION OF TRACK:
3.01.1 The Contractor shall carefully prepare his Work Programme and submit the
same to the Engineer for his approval; and the Engineer in turn will discuss the
Work Programme with PT. KAI, including its related train operation staff, for
approval.
3.01.2 The Contractor shall, through the Engineer, closely coordinate with PT. KAI
including its related train operation staff, to occupy the railway track before
carrying out his work. PT. KAI in turn will instruct its pertinent staff to ensure the
occupation of track to enable the Contractor safely carry out his work.
01012-1
4.01 SPEED DOWN OF TRAIN OPERATIONS:
The Contractor shall also coordinate with PT. KAI, through the Engineer, for speed
restrictions to allow for safe passage of trains during the construction activities.
- END OF SECTION -
01012-2
SECTION 01013
PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
This Section covers the requirements for handling new or existing utilities and the
protection of properties.
2.01.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for taking precautions to prevent damage to
existing site improvements, drains, gas, water and electricity mains, or any
underground works, new or old. The Contractor shall erect and maintain temporary
bracing, shoring, lights, barricades, warning signs, and guards necessary to
protect streets, sidewalks, and adjoining property from damage in accordance with
applicable local laws and regulations. Should any damage occur it shall
immediately be reported to the Engineer and shall be rectified as directed by the
Engineer, at the Contractor’s expense.
2.01.2 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer promptly of any underground pipes,
cables or other services encountered during excavation, and shall not proceed
with any work, until the utilities services are protected, relocated, or rerouted by
the Contractor under the approval of the utility company, and as approved by the
Engineer.
2.01.3 All flammable materials shall be stored in secure areas with the approval of the
Engineer.
2.01.4 The Contractor’s workmen shall comply with the regulations governing personnel
on the Site, and shall keep to the working space allotted to the Contractor. Any
person interfering with the work or making himself objectionable shall be
dismissed on either verbal or written orders from the Engineer.
2.01.5 The Contractor shall make every effort to safeguard all personnel on the Site and
shall conform to the following minimum standards:
a. All equipment, including electrical equipment, wiring extension, lighting,

temporary wiring, electric arc welders, etc., shall be subject to the approval of
the Engineer. The Engineer reserves the right to condemn such equipment at
any time on the Site and verbally order its immediate removal;
b. Proper care is to be taken for workmen working above ground level, and only
sound scaffolding shall be used;
c. The Contractor shall furnish helmets, safety shoes and the likes as required
for all site personnel; and
d. Where the use of open flame devices are required, adequate protection shall
be provided. The structure, adjacent work, and personnel shall be protected.
01013-1
Suitable fire extinguishers shall be provided at the hazardous location by the

Contractor for the Work.
2.01.6 The Contractor shall provide and maintain all necessary temporary fences around
the Site for the protection of the Work and the public, complete with gateways as
necessary for, pedestrian access and delivery of materials.
- END OF SECTION -
01013-2
SECTION 01014
SECURITY
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
This Section covers the requirements for the execution of security program for the
whole construction works, the Employer, his staffs, and for all personnel.
2.01 GENERAL:
2.01.1 The Contractor shall protect the Work, store products and construction equipment
from theft and vandalism.
2.01.2 If applicable, provide security for PT.KAI’s operations or personnel requiring

security, surveillance, or protection.
2.01.3 Submit details of the proposed security program for the Engineer’s and PT.KAI’s
approval within fourteen (14) days after the Commencement Date. Initiate the
security program as soon as it is approved. Maintain the program until Employer’s
acceptance or occupancy precludes the need for security.
3.01 PERSONNEL:
3.01.1 Provide identification for each construction personnel authorized to enter the Site
showing:
a. Name;
b. Employer;
c. Photograph; and
d. Signature.
3.01.2 Maintain a current list of authorized persons engaged in the construction. Submit a
copy of the list to the PT.KAI’s upon request.
4.01 ENTRANCE CONTROL:
4.01.1 Provide control system for all persons and vehicles entering and leaving the Site.
4.01.2 Control of each person on the Site shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
4.01.3 Maintain a list of visitors to issue temporary identification to authorized visitors.
01014-1
5.0 GUARDING THE SITE:
5.01.1 Employ licensed and experienced patrol’s and/or guard’s service to provide
continuous guard service during working hours and continuous watchman service
at all times when the Wok is not in progress.
5.01.2 Provide suitable guard and/or watchman’s facilities.
- END OF SECTION -
01014-2
SECTION 01015
PROJECT SIGN
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
This Section covers the requirements for erection and maintenance of project
signs.
2.01.1 The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain project signs at the Site.
2.01.2 The signs shall be constructed and painted by a local sign contractor with at least
five (5) years experience.
2.01.3 The Contractor shall pay for all permits, fees, etc., associated with the erection of
the signs.
2.01.4 The Contractor shall remove the signs at his own expense when instructed by the
Engineer.
3.01 LANGUAGE:
3.01.1 The primary language for these project signs is Indonesia, while the second
language is English. Where both languages are required to be on project signs
such as a sign, label, instruction, name or other use, they shall be written in the
manner that the Indonesia text is above or to the right of the English text. All
lettering shall be written in a correct and artistic form.
3.01.2 Both Indonesia and English shall be used for all signs where it is necessary to
inform, warn or instruct the public. In addition, both languages shall be used to
provide instruction for the operation of equipment necessary for the health, safety
or welfare of the population.
3.01.3 Examples of informative bilingual signs are street signs, names of camps, or signs
on tanks showing contents.
3.01.4 Examples of warning bilingual signs are signs showing high voltage, inflammable
liquids, or warning of dangerous or hazardous driving conditions.
3.01.5 Examples of instructive signs are parking signs, instruction for operation of fire-
fighting equipment, or instructions for making emergency telephone calls.
- END OF SECTION -
01015-1
BIDDING DOCUMENTS, PART 2- WORK REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01016
ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATION
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This Section covers the requirements for providing environmental protection and
considerations as result of construction activities.
1.01.2 This Section must be read in conjunction with other related sections specified
elsewhere.
2.01 GENERAL
2.01.1 Environmental issues have been a national concern, as a result of the growing
construction works in a large and wide scale, as a product of the nation economic
growth. The approach of development has been changed by defining that any
constructional work is a part of the environment-based development.
2.01.2 The objectives of this Project is also to give the welfare of the environment better
quality either for nature or for human (population); therefore, it is the obligation of
every construction project, including the Railway Double Tracking Project, to be
carried out to keep and maintain the environment, as mutually committed.
2.01.3 The Contractor shall pay serious attention and take adequate care to anticipate
possible detrimental against environment, so that the goal of this construction
Project can be successfully, satisfactorily achieved,
2.01.4 The Contractor shall understand the environmental impact that is likely to occur
and, if does so, must be readily without delay to recover its detrimental to prevent
extensive detrimental. It is, therefore to advise that the Contractor prior to carry out
physical activities must always prepare and carry the implementations of
environmental management plan in the construction, as is regularly prerequisite.
3.01 RELATED WORKS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
1) Section 02003 TEMPORARY BRIDGE AND ACCESS ROAD

2) Section 02006 DEMOLITION WORKS
3) Section 02007 SITE CLEARING
4) Section 02008 EARTH WORKS GENERALLY
5) Section 02009 GENERAL EXCAVATION
6) Section 02010 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
7) Section 02011 BORROW MATERIAL
8) Section 02013 WASTE
9) Section 02033 PLANTATION
10) Section 03006 BRIDGE SUBSTRUCTURE
11) Section 04000 TUNNEL WORKS
12) Section 02002 MAINTENANCE OF PUBLIC ROAD
13) Section 01007 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL SYSTEM
01016-1
To be included herein is any other relevant informations so as to make more

comprehensive in handling environment impacts and protections issued by
authorized national and local government sources;
4.01 NATIONAL AND LOCAL REGULATIONS
The following codes and standards consisting of by-laws and regulations intended
to provide a general requirements and be used as a guidance in protecting and
preventing the environmental impacts:
1. Law of The Republic Indonesia No. 38 of 2004 on Road

2. Law of The Republic Indonesia No. 23 of 2007 on Railways
3. Law of The Republic Indonesia No. 24 of 2007 on Disaster Management
4. Law of The Republic Indonesia No.26 of 2007 on Spatial
5. Law of The Republic Indonesia No. 18 of 2009 on Waste Management
6. Law of The Republic Indonesia No. 22 of 2009, on Traffic and Road
Transportation
7. Law of The Republic Indonesia No. 32 of 2009 on Protection and
Environmental Management
8. Government Regulation No. 69 of 1998 on Rail Infrastructure
9. Government Regulation No. 27 of 1999 on Environmental Impact
Assesessment (EIA).
10. Government Regulation No.41 of 199 on Air Pollution Control
11. Government Regulation No. 82 of 2001 on Management of Water Quality
and Water Pollution Control.
12. Government Regulation No. 34 of 2006 on Efforts to Control of Level
Crossing
13. Central Java Provincial Regulations No. 5 of 2007 on Environmental Control
in Central Java Province
14. Decision of The State Minister of The Environment No.Kep/48/MENLH/
11/1996 on Quality Standard of Noise Level.
15. Decision of The State Minister of The Environment No.Kep/49/
MENKLH/11/1996 on Quality Standard of Vibration Level.
16. Decision of The State Minister of The Environment No.Kep 45/MENLH/ 1997
on Air Pollution Standard Index.
17. Decision of The Minister of Transportation No.30 of 2002 on Organization of
Transportation of goods on The Street.
18. Decision of Central Java Governor No. 08 of 2001 on Ambient Air Quality
Standard in The Central Java Province.
5.01 IMPLEMENTATIONS OF ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT
5.01.1 Prerequisites to be at least fulfilled as applied to Environmental Management
1. The Contractor shall construct the necessary facilities, such that none of its
work has a detrimental impact on the environment, population, adjacent
railway facilities, adjacent industrial facilities or the areas outside of PT. KAI’s
boundary to the extent indicated on the Drawings.
01016-2
2. Considerations shall be made to the following but not be limited to:
(1) As a potential impacts of physical activities of Civil and Facility

Constructions:
a. Increase employment opportunities as much as possible to local

residents;
b. Reduce noise and vibration levels caused by the transport vehicle,
with maximum allowable noise at a residential location is 55 dB;
c. Prevent road damage through the Limitation of the carrier tonnage by
road class that will be pased;
d. Repair road damage caused by activities after mobilization and
demobilization of equipment and materials;
e. Pressing the emergence of insecurity and social conflict, and;
f. Reduce the risk of landslides.
(2) As a potential impacts of physical activities of Tunnel Constructions:
a. Reduce the risk of landslides;

b. Reduce/minimize the impact of vibration caused by tunnel
construction activities;
c. Reduce the level of public unrest, and
d. Reduce and prevent insecurity and social conflict.
(3) As a potential impacts of physical activities of Construction of railway

and signal systems / communication:
a. Changes in the capacity of the service road;

b. Avoid interference with traffic / road congestion at the road
intersection;
c. Reduce level of public unrest;
d. Keep comfort level of public road users, and
e. Appreciate community acceptance by not allowing vehicle queues
and traffic jams.
5.01.2 Environmental Management Plan to be provided during Constructions
1. The Contractor must be aware of and follow the environmental protection

practices and procedures as stipulated by the relevant Authorities;
2. Protection practices and procedures to be conducted in each main works
during construction, summarized as follows:
a. Related to Civil and Facility Constructions

• Make sure that announcement is open to public;
• Give priority to local people to work based on workforce skills;
• Carry out job opportunities with good management, so as to improve
attitudes and perceptions;
• Schedule mobilization activities at 8.00 am until 16.00 pm;
• Build wall barrier in the descently populated and near public facilities
(such as schools) as high as 2 to 2.5 m;
• Install a silencer on the exhaust noise generator locomotives and
carriages, the carriage of passengers and goods renewal and repair
wheels that have been worn and broken, not bells ringing and reduce
01016-3
speed railway train in dense settlements, improvement of railway tracks

that pass as: welding at the junction, turn of the bearings damaged, the
addition of ballast;
• Employ locomotive with a low rated noise, carry out periodic
maintenance of wheels and railway tracks according to regulations;
• Maintain the rails, bearings and the ballas periodically, using a more
flexible suspension on the train body, installing special equipment
under the ballas to absorb vibration, extending the buffer zone in an
open area that serves to absorb vibrations caused railway;
• Construct drainage channels, which in addition to the discharge
channel can also reduce the vibration caused by railway activities;
• Coordinate and cooperative between the relevant agencies
(environment management agencies in City / District, Environmental
Control Agency (BPLHD) West Java Area and Environmental Bureau
(BLH) Central Java Area ) in environmental management;
• Adjust the capacity of the vehicle / vehicle tonnage limits in accordance
with the class path to be traversed;
• Repair any road damage caused by the activities of mobilization and
demobilization of equipment and materials;
• Make use of rail transport as a means of transporting material;
• Keep washing the dirty wheel transport vehicle prior to the highway so
it will not interfere with comfort on the road;
• Manage primary impact of increased noise and vibration;
• Manage primary impact of road damage;
• Use reinforcement construction in hoarding, and
• As usually applied in the transport work project, use alternative road
other than using the road in urban areas.
b. Related to Tunnel Constructions
c. Related to physical activities of Construction of railway and signal systems

/ communication
• Set the time when transporting materials in off peak hours;
• Determine the rotation and number of transport vehicles not exceeding
the maximum mobilization activities;
• Install and maintain traffic signs;
• Assign field officers in charge of managing and controlling traffic in the
most congested area(s);
• Make use of alternative pathway (detouring);
• Make and obey the schedule of transportation already existed;
• Manage and overcome the impact of increasing vehicles queues and
traffic jams.
6.01 RELATED REFERENCE TO OTHER DOCUMENTS
6.01.1 Bidding Document, Part 3: Conditions of Contract, Part B: Specific Provision,

Clause 14,7: Payment : No separate payment shall be made for environmental
protection but all costs thereof shall be included in the contract prices of the
payable items.
- END OF SECTION -
01016-4
SECTION 01017
SAFETY PROGRAMME
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
This Section covers the requirements for the Safety Programme for the whole
construction works, Employer, his staff, and for all personnel.
2.01 SAFETY POLICY STATEMENT:
2.01.1 The Contractor shall, in the form of a Safety Policy Statement, state his target,
commitment and strategy with regard to safety for the Project.
2.01.2 The General Superintendent and safety officer shall sign the safety policy
statement.
2.01.3 The safety policy statement shall be displayed in a prominent position within the
Contractor’s offices on each jobsite.
3.01 PROJECT SAFETY PLAN:
3.01.1 Within sixty-three (63) days after the Commencement Date, the Contractor shall
provide the Engineer with a detailed Project Safety Plan.
3.01.2 Within twenty-eight (28) days after the Commencement Date, the Contractor shall
submit to the Engineer a preliminary site safety plan, which shall take the structure
and approach of the detailed site safety plan and in particular it shall address the
following:
a. Contractor’s Health and Safety Policy Statement;
b. Those persons within the Contractor’s parent and project organisations who
will be responsible for co-ordinating and monitoring the Contractor’s health and
safety performance on Project and reporting these matters to the Contractor’s
Board of Directors;
c. The proposed level of Project Safety surveillance together with the nomination
of Safety Supervisors and Safety Officer who will have an overview of all
Project safety matters. The responsibilities, qualifications, training and
experience of those nominated shall be specified;
d. The Contractor’s procedures for reporting and investigating accidents,

dangerous occurrences and occupational illness;
e. The Contractor’s procedures for identifying and eliminating potential site

hazards. Reference shall also be made to mitigating measures which include
procedures for the identification of the need for and the provision of personal
protective equipment, permits system, safety rules and safety training;
01017-1
f. Working with major items of plant;
g. The Contractor’s proposals for first aid facilities and arrangements for the
provision of first aid;
h. The Contractor’s emergency plan, especially with regard to deep excavation

works and emergencies affecting the train operation;
i. An outline programme for safety tours and detailed safety inspections;
j. The Contractor’s disciplinary procedures with respect to safety related matters;
k. The Contractor’s procedures for ensuring that his personnel are medically fit
for tasks they are carrying out. The procedures shall take into account working
hours and environment; and
l. The Contractor’s procedures for assessing the suitability of subcontractors with

respect to health and safety.
The detailed project safety plan shall incorporate any directions or requirements
from the Engineer and shall address the subjects in greater depth where working
methods and sequences have been developed.
The detailed Project Safety Plan shall identify works, by segmentation, area or
subject and identify the responsible persons who shall supervise the works on site.
4.01 SAFETY PROCEDURES:
4.01.1 The Contractor shall develop and update as necessary a set of Safety Procedures
that will be required during construction.
4.01.2 The procedures shall include the necessary forms to be completed for various
events. The procedures shall include, but not be limited to, procedures for
reporting and investigation of:
a. Accidents;
b. Dangerous occurrences;
c. The evacuation of worksite, especially deep foundation work;
d. The storage of materials, in particular chemicals, flammable materials and gas
bottles;
e. The transport of materials, in particular gas bottles and large or heavy
materials;
f. Use of materials, in particulars those that may cause injury, illness or require
special personal protective equipment (PPE);
g. The use of PPE;
h. Working at night;
i. Working in a confined space;
j. The use, maintenance and storage of lifting equipment;
k. Electrical systems and appliances;
l. Permits to work;
m. Safety training and task training;
01017-2
n. The operation of a construction of railways;

o. Fire prevention and fire fighting; and
p. Health, welfare and hygiene.
The procedures shall be developed and updated as the Contract progresses.
The procedures shall be transmitted to workforce during tool box talks, safety
presentations, and method statement and supervisions instructions.
5.01 CESSATION:
5.01.1 In order to ensure that attention is given to safety by the Contractor, a cessation of
all works on the Project shall be enforced in the event of any serious accidents, in
order that a review of the safety procedures can be carried out, unless otherwise
directed by the Engineer.
5.01.2 Following a serious accident, the Employer and Engineer shall organise an
accident investigation committee, which shall investigate such accidents or
incidents, and review the safety procedures. The Contractor if required by the
Committee shall implement any revisions of the safety procedures to prevent a
recurrence of the accident or incident.
- END OF SECTION -
01017-3
SECTION 01018
SURVEY
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
This Section covers the requirements for all surveys including topographic,
geological and underground survey need to proceed to commence all construction
works of the Project.
1.01.1 Survey Service:
a. The Contractor shall provide and pay for the surveying services required for
the Project; and
b. The Contractor shall verify all benchmarks established by the Employer and
provide all construction stakes as required.
1.01.2 The Contractor shall perform geographical survey and shall survey all levels, cross
sections and benchmarks.
1.01.3 Utilities Investigation:
a. This Section also includes the requirements for furnishing existing utility
investigation prior to commence the Construction Works; and
b. The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of the investigation

results, for any damage done to existing utilities during excavation shall be
borne by the Contractor.
1.01.4 Subsurface Investigation:
a. The Contractor shall carry out the subsurface investigation whenever required
by the Engineer. The kind of investigation and the location are as directed by
the Engineer or as proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer;
and
b. This section specifies standards for materials, equipment and workmanship to

be used in Subsurface Investigation work and general requirements for
laboratory tests.
2.01 TOPOGRAPHICAL SURVEY:
2.01.1 The Contractor shall, at the earliest possible time, before the start of work on the
job site, have all benchmarks verified by a land surveyor licensed in the area of the
Project, and shall furnish the Engineer with evidence of such verification.
2.01.2 Preserve all permanent reference point during construction:
a. Make no changes or relocations without prior written notice to the Engineer;
01018-1
b. Report to the Engineer when any reference point is lost or destroyed, or

requires relocation due to lost or destruction, or requires relocations due to the
progress of the Work; and
c. The Contractor shall employ a surveyor to replace existing survey monuments

to be disturbed (based upon the original survey control).
2.01.3 Verify levels shown on the Drawings, with existing levels, and notify the Engineer
of any discrepancies before proceeding with the Work.
2.01.4 Establish lines and levels. Locate and lay out by use of instrumentation or other
appropriate means:
- Stakes for grading and elevations;

- Stakes for track elevations;
- Kilometer surveying for track and bridges;
- Controlling lines and levels required for structures; and
- Other lines, corners, or levels.
2.01.5 Maintain a complete, accurate log of all control and survey work as it progresses.
Maintain the survey provided by the Employer.
3.01 UTILITIES INVESTIGATION:
3.01.1 The Contractor shall provide surveyors specialized in existing utilities’ surveying to
detect all existing utilities within the Project limit, which will be an obstruction to the
Project Work.
3.01.2 Existing utilities shall consist of, but not limited to, the following items:
- Water distribution and supply lines;

- Telecommunication lines;
- Electrical distribution and supply lines;
- Gas supply lines;
- Sewers;
- Underground drain piping; and
- Other utilities.
3.01.3 The Contractor shall contact each of the Authorities concerned and obtain detailed
information to include:
a. Utilities drawing layout;

b. Kilometer location;
c. Depth of utilities;
d. Type and size of utilities;
e. Protection method provided for crossing railway track;
f. Conditions of utilities; and
g. Other relevant information.
01018-2
3.01.4 The Contractor shall, upon obtaining foregoing information, prepare a plan
depicting locations of existing utilities with above information and submit to the
Engineer for approval.
3.01.5 The Contractor shall also verify at the Site the locations of existing utilities obtained
from the Authorities concerned.
3.01.6 In the event that the foregoing information are not available from the Authorities
concerned, the Contractor shall conduct a field investigation to detect existing
utilities, based on minimum information and visible inspection.
4.01 SOIL INVESTIGATION:
4.01.1 General:
a. The Contractor shall carry out various kinds of soil investigation and testing on
the field to comprehend the soil situation for executing all works including
roadbed construction, temporary bridges and foundation works;
b. The Contractor shall submit full details of his proposed methods for carrying
out site investigation works including proposed rate of advance and methods
of sampling. No excavation or boring work shall commence until the methods
have been approved by the Engineer;
c. The Contractor shall provide all necessary manpower, materials and

equipment in order to drill borings, obtain disturbed and undisturbed soil
samples and perform field tests in a number of locations and depths indicated
hereinafter;
d. The Contractor shall submit and be responsible for obtaining all necessary
permits from pertinent statutory Authority to enable the Work to be carried out;
e. The Engineer will provide required assistance to the Contractor for obtaining
permits; and
f. Boring records shall be submitted to the Engineer after the completion of each
borehole.
4.01.2 Procedures:
a. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer at least forty-eight (48) hours in
advance of his intention to commence drilling of boreholes. The Contractor
shall be responsible for selecting and setting out the holes and the accurate
determination of position and level of one (1) borehole for each single and
multiple span bridges;
b. The sequence of boring, the type of samples to be taken at each boreholes

and the field tests to be performed shall be in accordance with the
requirements stated hereinafter;
01018-3
c. If any underground utilities or other unnatural obstacles are encountered,

these shall be reported to the Engineer and no further work shall be
proceeded until further instructions are given;
d. The Contractor shall control his operations to the minimum area of ground
required for the Work. When the Work has been completed, the Contractor
shall fill-in and compact all holes and shall bring the site back to a clean and
tidy condition; and
e. At all times during the progress of the Work, responsible personnel from the
Contractor shall supervise the work.
4.01.3 Execution:
a. Rotary drilling shall be carried out for advancing the boreholes. During boring,
casing or drilling fluid can be used to support the sides of borehole and to
prevent the hole from collapsing;
b. Soil samples shall be taken at every change in soil formation and between the
elevations of such changes, at interval not exceeding 1.5 meters. Undisturbed
samples shall generally be taken in soft strata, or three (3) samples per
borehole split-spoon samples in firmer material. A sample shall always be
taken in the first 1.5 meters of each boring;
c. In some cases of thinly stratified formations, the Engineer may direct the
Contractor to take continuous samples so as to establish all the various
changes in the soil profile;
d. Split spoon samples shall be taken with a sampler conforming to ASTM D

1586. The Contractor shall assure that three (3) samplers are adequately
cleaned before taking any samples;
e. Should the Contractor, in securing samples, fail to provide the proper type of
sampling devices or the samples were disturbed by the washing operation, the
Engineer may consider these samples unsuitable and will not be accepted nor
measured for payment;
f. To facilitate determination of the relative resistance of the various strata, the

split spoon samplers shall be driven by 63.5 kg weight hammer specially
manufactured for the Standard Penetration Test (SPT), dropping a distance of
760 mm above. The Contractor shall provide weight certification for the
hammer to be used in the Standard Penetration Test;
g. The taking of undisturbed samples shall be accomplished by the use of a thin

wall tube sampler. The tube to be used shall conform to ASTM D 1587, its
area ratio shall be no more than ten percents (10%) its inside clearance ratio
shall be between 1.0 and 1.5;
h. Daily observations of ground water level shall be made in all completed holes.
The fluctuation of water, as well as any unusual water conditions, in borehole
during operations shall be recorded completely in the boring logs;
01018-4
i. When bedrock is encountered, the Contractor shall perform continuous core

sampling as directed by the Engineer. Drilling operation shall be continued to
the depth designated by the Engineer;
j. Test pits shall be excavated in such a manner that excavated areas in soil
have an open cross section area large enough to permit engineering
inspection and bulk sampling;
k. The Contractor shall obtain jar samples and bulk samples of excavated
material selected by the Engineer. Unless otherwise specified or directed by
the Engineer, a jar sample and bulk sample shall be taken from each type of
soil encountered in the test pit excavation;
l. Each completed surface of the test pit shall be color photographed. The
colored prints are to be at least 125 mm x 90 mm in size. All negatives of the
photographs are being delivered to the Engineer; and
m. On a daily basis upon completion of borings and test pits, all samples should
be packed in approved boxes. On each box name of the Project, contract
number, boring number and sample number contained shall be clearly marked.
The Contractor upon the Engineer’s approval shall deliver all samples to the
testing laboratory.
4.01.4 Record:
a. During the progress of each boring and test pit the Contractor shall keep
continuous and accurate logs of the materials encountered and a complete
record of the operations involved, which shall include at least the following
data:
1. General:
- Project name, contract number;

- Date and weather conditions;
- Names of the Engineer, the Contractor and Inspector as applicable;
- Location and identifying number and type of boring and reference to
survey data; and
- Elevation of ground water table every morning before starting work while
the boring is in progress.
2. Boring Record:
- Elevation of the top and bottom of the borehole and position/location of

the borehole;
- Diameter and description of casing (when used);
- Elevation of each change of stratum with brief description;
- Depth or elevation of top and bottom of disturbed and undisturbed
samples, with notes on any lost recovery;
- Weight and drop of hammer and number of blows used to drive the
spoon sampler for each 150 mm of sample;
- Descriptions of soil represented by the samples; and
- Details of any delays and other special circumstance affecting the
progress of the Works.
01018-5
3. Test Pit Record:
- Site condition and position/location of the test pit;

- Elevation of top and bottom of test pit;
- Dimension of test pit; and
- Field description of each stratum encountered. Where rock is present,
the joint sets should be logged and the dip of the strata measured.
4.01.5 Test:
a. Field Testing shall be carried out in accordance with the standard methods of
testing detailed below. Where no standard methods have been specified the
Contractor shall submit his proposed method of testing for the Engineer’s prior
approval.
Test Approved Standard
Standard Penetration (SPT) ASTM D 1586

Plate Bering ASTM D 1194
Field Density ASTM D 1556
b. Laboratory Testing:
1. The contractor shall ensure that inventory records are prepared for all soil
samples delivered to the testing laboratory. The inventory shall be made of
samples in sequence depth. Copies of these records, which shall be signed
by the laboratory personnel responsible for performing the test, under the
Contractor’s programme shall be submitted to the Engineer.
2. The laboratory testing shall be performed and the results reported in

accordance with the most recent revisions of the following ASTM standards,
unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
Test Item Application testing code
- Moisture contents ASTM D 2216

- Unit Weight ASTM D 2937
- Specific gravity ASTM D 854
- Grain size analysis ASTM D 421-422
- Liquid and plastic limits ASTM D 4318
- Unconfined compression test ASTM D 2166
- END OF SECTION -
01018-6
SECTION 01019
LABORATORY SERVICES
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
This Section covers the requirements for administering Testing Laboratory

Services by the Contractor.
2.01.1 An independent testing laboratory shall be retained by the Contractor to provide

unbiased quality control information and to furnish technical knowledge that may
be of benefit to the Project:
- Refer to individual Specification Section for the required tests and inspections;
- The appropriate subcontractors shall be provided with copies of all test
reports; and
- The testing laboratory shall perform (and report) all specified routine tests and
additional tests which may be necessary.
2.01.2 The testing laboratory is not authorized to:
- Release, revoke, alter, or enlarge upon the requirements of Contract

Documents;
- Approve or accept any portion of the Work; and
- Perform any duty of the Contractor.
2.01.3 The Employment of a testing laboratory by the Contractor in no way relieves the
Contractor of his obligation to perform the Work in accordance with Contract
requirements. Tests and/or inspections showing conformity to the required
specifications shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to furnish
satisfactory work and materials.
2.01.4 The Contractor shall pay for routine tests and inspections. The Contractor shall
also pay for additional tests, and inspections of material and workmanship.
2.01.5 The cost for the testing of materials or procedures that are substitutions shall be
borne by the Contractor if the tests are conducted to determine the acceptability of
the proposed substitution.
2.01.6 Contractor’s Responsibilities:
1. Cooperate with laboratory personnel. Provide access to the Work and

manufacturer’s shops as may be required by laboratory personnel to
complete inspections;
2. Provide the laboratory with required quantities of representing samples of

materials to be tested;
01019-1
3. Furnish copies of any and all test reports, which may be required by the
testing laboratory;
4. Furnish regular labor and facilities to provide access to the work to be tested,
to facilitate inspection and tests, and to obtain and handle samples at the job
site;
5. Notify laboratory sufficiently in advance of need, to allow for its assignment of

personnel, scheduling, and tests;
6. Arrange with laboratory and pay for additional samples and test required for
Contractor’s convenience;
7. Provide storage and protection of material. Remove samples as necessary for

inspection, and replace after inspections have been performed by the
inspection agency; and
8. Notify laboratory of test schedule.
2.01.7 Engineer’s Responsibilities:
1. Verify that required personnel and equipment are present;
2. Verify that specified tests are made as scheduled;
3. Supervise testing to ensure that it is performed in accordance with the

requirements of the Contract Documents;
4. Verify compliance of test results with specified criteria. Administer retest if

required;
5. Arrange with the Employer for special inspections or testing when required;
and
6. Reject work that does not conform to the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
- END OF SECTION -
01019-2
SECTION 01020
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
This Section covers the requirements for furnishing, installing, and maintaining
temporary facilities and utilities required for the construction.
The Contractor shall:
2.01.1 Comply with all applicable local codes and regulations;
2.01.2 Obtain all permits from local utility companies;
2.01.3 Pay all fees as well as all inspection and supervision costs that may be levied by
the utility companies;
2.01.4 Pay for all connection and usage charges for energy;
2.01.5 Provide all necessary temporary construction facilities for excavations, foundations
and protective structures;
2.01.6 Provide all barriers, fences and gates, signs and all other warning and safety
measures required by code, local utility company, or the Employer;
2.01.7 Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their uses are no
longer required and the Engineer approves their removal;
2.01.8 Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary
facilities; and
2.01.9 Restore existing facilities used for temporary services specified or to its original
condition.
3.01 TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHT:
3.01.1 Provide and maintain all temporary lighting and temporary power systems required
for construction;
3.01.2 Provide connections to all construction equipment requiring power;
3.01.3 Provide and maintain temporary feeders to permanent mechanical equipment

requiring service, until permanent feeders are properly connected and energized;
01020-1
3.01.4 Provide temporary site security lighting as directed by the Engineer;
3.01.5 Provide required disconnects, grounding, and all other devices and appurtenances
required by all applicable agencies and codes;
3.01.6 Provide all required transformers, fused main switches, distribution boards, panels,
cut - outs, lighting and grounding, sockets, lamps, fuses, and motor connections to
suit all load requirements;
3.01.7 Size all equipment provided to meet the requirements of connected lighting and
power loads;
3.01.8 Provide all required replacement fuses, replacement lamps, and all other
appurtenances required for the duration of the construction period;
3.01.9 Relocate temporary electric facilities as required, to provide clearance for

installation of permanent work;
3.01.10 Provide and maintain all temporary service equipment required until the
permanent work is adequately installed and activated; and
3.01.11 The Contractor may furnish temporary electrical power by the use of motor
generators instead of (or in addition to) that obtained from the local utility company.
The Contractor must install, maintain and remove the motor generators (and all
associated equipment) in accordance with the provisions of this section and
applicable sections of the ″arrangements with the other Contractors″ regarding
their use of and payment for electrical power. Any interruption or delay of the Work
due to the inadequacy or loss of electrical power shall be solely the responsibility
of the Contractor.
4.01 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SERVICE:
The Contractor shall arrange with the local telephone Service Company to provide
direct line telephone services at the construction site:
- Necessary number of direct line in the Contractor’s office;
- One extension line in the Engineer’s Office; and
- The Contractor shall pay all costs for installation, maintenance and removal,
and service charge for local calls. The party who places the call shall pay for toll
charges.
5.01 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE:
5.01.1 The Contractor shall provide temporary water for construction, drinking and fire
protection.
5.01.2 Provide a suitable drainage system subject to the approval of the Engineer, to
carry construction wastewater from the site to the designated waste location.
01020-2
5.01.3 When required, relocate temporary water system so as not to interfere with
permanent construction.
5.01.4 The Contractor at his own expense and responsibility supplies drinking water.
6.01 TEMPORARY TOILET FACILITIES:
6.01.1 Provide sanitary facilities in compliance with applicable laws and regulations; and
6.01.2 Service, clean and maintain facilities and their enclosures.
7.01 EMERGENCY CALLS:
Provide the list of locations of nearest available police station, hospital and medical
centers at the Contractor’s and the Engineer’s site office for emergency calls.
8.01 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION:
8.01.1 The Contractor shall furnish and pay for and maintain all required temporary
facilities including scaffoldings and working stages constructed on the Site to
facilitate the construction work.
8.01.2 The facilities shall be available for the use of all-appropriate contractors and
workmen.
8.01.3 The Contractor shall remove the temporary construction at his own expense when
the Engineer approves its removal.
9.01 INTERRUPTION OF WORKS DUE TO SAFETY PRECAUTIONS:
When, in the opinion of the Engineer, any operation, works or working conditions
are such as to present a danger to existing railway and/or property, such work
shall be immediately interrupted and the action taken by the Engineer shall, by no
means, be interpreted as relieving the Contractor of any of his responsibilities in
the execution of his work, nor shall be any compensation by extension of time
made to the Contractor or account of any interruption of work due to
implementation of safety measures.
10.01 APPLICATION FOR CONSTRUCTION:
The Contractor shall be responsible for application for construction of the

respective works required under the Contract to the authorities concerned. Such
application may be necessary for, but not limited to and without any responsibility
to what is listed here on the part of the Employer and the Engineer. The electrical
work to Indonesian Electricity Authority (PLN), telephone installation work to
01020-3
Indonesian Telecommunication Authority (PT. TELKOM INDONESIA), potable

water supply (PT PAM), etc. shall be arranged at his expenses in accordance with
the laws and regulations of the Republic of Indonesia.
- END OF SECTION -
01020-4
SECTION 01021
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
This Section covers the requirements for delivery, storage and protection of all
products required under the Contract.
2.01.1 Delivery and Handling:
a. The Contractor shall designate the required delivery date of each material or
item of equipment in the construction schedule.
b. Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with the construction schedules.

And coordinate properly to avoid conflicts with the work and condition at the
Site.
c. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer’s original

containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible.
d. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by following methods,

which will prevent soiling or damage to products or packaging.
e. Upon delivery, immediately inspect shipments to assure their compliance with

the requirements of the Contract Documents and submit required submittals
for the Engineer’s approval verifying that the products are properly protected
and remain undamaged. Report any damaged or defective items and remove
broken, damaged, rusted, or unlabeled items from the Site immediately.
f. Shipping:
- The metal parts shall be protected against rust during long periods of
storage, and by such methods and means as proposed and approved;
- Irrespective of the method of protection adopted, the whole surface area,

especially the main sections, shall be covered with a protective coating;
and
- The packages shall be sealed as necessary, and each package shall bear
the following information as applicable, in clearly indelible characters on
label firmly fixed to the package.
 Name or the mark of the supplier
 Order number
 Description of parts contained
01021-1
 Number and total weight of the parts
g. Customs Clearance:
The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for all taxes, duties, license fees
etc., necessary for customs clearance.
h. The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying railroad and/or trucking

companies of release of cars and/or truck when made empty, and shall be fully
responsible for any demurrage charges against such cars or trucks.
2.01.2 Storage:
a. The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision, erection, maintenance

and removal of storage accommodations, including paying all charges and
expenses in connection therewith. The Contractor shall also be responsible
for all off-site storage necessitated by the lack of the space on the Site; and
b. Store products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, with seals and

labels intact and legible. Store products in a manner to prevent damage,
deterioration and contamination. Marred surfaces, cracked, checked, split or
warped materials shall be rejected. Store products in watertight enclosures so
as not to be damaged by the elements. Maintain temperature and humidity
within the ranges required by manufacturer’s instructions, or the requirements
specified in each section.
c. Exterior Storage:
 Store fabricated products above the ground, on blocking or skids, to

prevent soiling or staining. Cover products, which are subject to
deterioration with impervious sheet coverings and provide adequate
ventilation to avoid condensation;
 Store loose granular materials in a well-drained area on solid surfaces to

prevent mixing with foreign matter; and
 Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make

periodic inspections of stored products to assure that products are
maintained under specified conditions, and are free from damage or
deterioration.
2.01.3 Protection:
a. The Contractor shall protect all materials, equipment, accessories, tools, etc.
during shipping, storage and installation from damage, soiling and theft.
Replace items that have been stolen. Repair, clean, or replace items that
have been damaged or soiled. The Engineer shall be the judge of the
effectiveness of remedial measures;
b. Protect all finishing surfaces after installation and finishing from damage and
soiling. Maintain protection during subsequent work operations, and remove
at Employer’s acceptance or when instructed by the Engineer; and
01021-2
c. Consult individual specification sections for additional specific product

handling and protection requirements.
- END OF SECTION -
01021-3
SECTION 01022
SITE MANAGEMENT, SUPERVISION AND MANUFACTURER’S REPRESENTATIVES
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This Section covers the requirements for providing site management, supervisors,
specialists, manufacturer’s representatives and administrative staff, as required for
the Work.
1.01.2 The Contractor shall at his own expense provide all local and expatriate staff and
personnel required to manage, supervise and administer the Works carried out by
the Contractor and his sub-contractors.
2.01 SUPERINTENDENTS:
2.01.1 The Contractor shall constantly keep on site a full time competent and
experienced person or engineer, who will be in charge of Contractor’s
superintendant or Deputy Project Manager. The Deputy Project Manager shall,
when the Project Manager is absent from the Project, take over and fulfil the role
and responsibilities as the Constrictor’s Representative.
2.01.2 In addition to the foregoing, the Contractor shall in accordance with his program
for the construction of the Works, maintain on site for the periods, necessary
competent and experienced supervisors, foremen and engineers. These personnel
shall be responsible for organizing, coordinating and supervising the construction
of the civil, bridge, tunnelling, track, signalling and telecommunication, and any
other works necessary for the completion of the Project.
2.01.3 The Contractor shall allow manufacturers’ representatives to be available on site

to perform final erection of steel girders and any other specialized or proprietary
plant or equipment.
3.01 SPECIALIST:
3.01.1 Payment to the Contractor under all the pay items listed elsewhere within the
Contract Documents in relation to this Clause shall be deemed to include all costs
in connection with the provision of site management, supervision, administration
and specialist personnel and shall include but not be limited to mobilization and
demobilization, payment of all salaries and overtime payments, expenses, taxes,
accommodation and transport costs, obtaining of visas and permits, and any other
costs or charges which may become due.
3.01.2 Where any other Clause of this Section of the General Provision of the
Specifications contains a specific or implied requirement for the provision of
management, supervisory or administration personnel on a full or part time basis,
the relevant costs shall be included in the Clause in question and the balance
included herein.
01022-1
3.01.3 The costs of security staff, store keepers, checkers, mechanics and such like
personnel shall be included in the item for the Operation and Maintenance of
Contractor’s Temporary Facilities, etc.
3.01.4 The costs of the Contractor’s head office staff who may from time to time be
associated with the Project shall be considered as a part of the Contractor’s
overheads and shall not be included herein.
4.01 ORDERS TO FOREMAN:
4.01.1 Whenever the Contractor or his site engineer is not present on any part of the
Work, the Engineer may decide to give orders or directions. Such orders or
directions shall be received and obeyed by the foreman or other person who is in
charge of the particular work concerned.
4.01.2 No separate payment shall be made for this item which shall be considered as a
part of the Contractor’s obligations to maintain on site at all times competent
persons in charge, whilst the Work is in progress.
- END OF SECTION -
01022-2
SECTION 01023
RIGHT-OF-WAY AND WORKING AREAS
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
This Section covers the requirements for the conditions of right-of-way and
working areas reserved for the construction work.
2.01 RIGHT-OF-WAY:
2.01.1 Right-of-way shall be the land permanently acquired by the Employer, for and
devoted to the Project. The Engineer shall establish the effective width and
boundaries of the working area leased temporarily beyond the right of way.
2.01.2 The Contractor shall strictly observe the working area as established by the
Engineer, and shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to make all arrangements
inclusive of payment, if necessary, for the use of any land required for working
areas, excluding that for the Contractor’s temporary buildings located on the
Employer’s land. The Employer shall not accept any liability in connection with the
use of land outside of the Employer’s land.
2.01.3 No separate payment shall be made for this item which shall be considered as a
part of the Contractor’s subsidiary obligations under the various Clauses of the
Specifications and pay items applicable thereto.
3.01 RIGHT-OF-WAY AND PERMITS:
3.01.1 Any agreements or permits required by the Police or local Authorities for moving
materials and equipment shall be obtained by the Contractor. The Contractor shall
make investigations to determine conditions, restrictions, and difficulties that may
be encountered during the course of the transportation of materials and equipment
into the Work site.
3.01.2 For each part of the Work, the Contractor shall determine either from the field or
from source of the referenced drawings the availability of routes for hauling
materials, and routes for disposing of unsuitable material. This shall be
coordinated with that of the Engineer and well incorporated into a plan of operation
for each phase of the Work. The Engineer must approve plans of operation, prior
to commencement of the Work.
01023-1
4.01 CLEAN UP OF WORKING AREA:
4.01.1 Project sites and work areas shall be maintained in reasonably and orderly manner
and free from encumbrance practically to provide best conditions possible for
various operations and installations required.
4.01.2 The Contractor shall regularly remove construction waste and debris from the
Work area, and periodically removes it from the premises and dispose of in a legal
manner.
4.01.3 The Contractor shall periodically clean slabs, floors, decks and other areas by
broom and keep clean and free from dust, shavings, litter, etc.
- END OF SECTION -
01023-2
SECTION 01024
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
This Section covers requirements for the preparation and submission of warranties
and bonds required for completion of the Works.
2.01 SPECIFIED WARRANTIES AND BOND REQUIRED:
(Individual Specification Sections)
3.01 FORM OF SUBMITTAL:
3.01.1 The Contractor shall bind materials in a commercial quality, hard back and plastic
covered binder, and labeled “Warranties and Bonds” to include the Project name,
address, telephone number of the Contractor and the name of the responsible
principal in the company.
3.01.2 A table of contents using the same section numbers as this Specification shall be
inserted in the binder. List each item included under the appropriate section name.
3.01.3 Provide heavy separator sheets with tabs between the sections. Type or print the
section number on the tab.
3.01.4 For each warranties or bond, provide full information including the name, address
and telephone number of the responsible principal of the Contractor, subcontractor,
supplier, manufacturer or appropriate provider.
4.01 PREPARATION OF SUBMITTALS:
4.01.1 Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicates by responsible contractors,

suppliers, or manufacturers within 10 days after completion of the applicable item
of work. Except for items put into use with the Employer’s permission, leave the
starting date of the warranty blank until the date of Taking Over Certificate is
determined. Use this date as the starting date for the warranty period unless the
Employer has agreed to an earlier date.
4.01.2 Verify that submittals are in the proper form, contain all information, and are
notarized. Co-execute submittals when required.
5.01 TIME OF SUBMITTALS:
5.01.1 For partial work put into service during construction with the Employer’s permission,
submit documents within fourteen (14) days after acceptance.
01024-1
5.01.2 Make other submittals within fourteen (14) days after the date of completion, prior
to submitting the final application for payment.
5.01.3 When acceptance of the work is delayed beyond the date of completion, submit
the required material within fourteen (14) days after acceptance, listing the date of
acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period.
- END OF SECTION -
01024-2
SECTION 01025
DEFECTS NOTIFICATION PERIOD
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
This Section covers requirements for administering the Defect Notification Period
and the obligations of the Contractor during the Period.
2.01 DEFINITIONS OF “DEFECTS NOTIFICATION PERIOD”:
2.01.1 The expression of “Defects Notification Period” used in the Contract shall mean
both “Warranty Period” and “Defect Liability Period” starting from the date of
issuance of Taking Over Certificate of the Works certified by the Engineer under
provisions of General Conditions of Contract.
2.01.2 During the Defects Notification Period the Contractor shall finish the work,
outstanding at the date of completion, as defined under General Conditions of
Contract and shall execute such minor defective work as remarked by the Engineer
including but not limited to repair of shrinkages or other faults.
2.01.3 All such work shall be carried out by the Contractor at his own expense if the
necessity thereof shall, in the opinion of the Engineer, be due to the use of
materials or workmanship which are not in accordance with the Technical
Specifications or Drawings or are due to neglect or failure on the part of the
Contractor to meet any terms expressed or implied in the Contract Documents.
2.01.4 Under this Contract, “Performance Certificate” to be issued by the Employer shall
mean the Contractor’s obligations under the Contract shall be released, except
unperformed obligation at that time.
2.01.5 “Performance Certificate” shall state:
- The date on which the Contractor completed his obligations under the Contract;
- The amount which in the opinion of the Engineer, is finally due under the
Contract;
- The settlement of remaining one half of 5% of the Contract Price retained as

retention money under Conditions of Contract; and
- After giving credit to the Employer for all amounts previously paid by the
Employer and for all sums to which the Employer is entitled under the Contract,
the balance if any, due from the Employer to the Contractor or from the
Contractor to the Employer as the case may be.
01025-1
3.01 DEFECTS NOTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS:
3.01.1 Maintenance by the Contractor:
a. Defects Notification Period:
- Defects Notification Period for the entire Work shall be twelve (12) calendar
months for Civil Works starting from the date of Taking Over Certificate;
- Defects Notification Period for the entire Work shall be twenty four (24)
calendar months for Signaling, Telecommunication and CTC Work starting
from the date of Taking Over Certificate; and
- Where a separate Certificate of Completion has been issued for a

designated portion of Work, Defects Notification Period shall commence from
the date of each certificate issued for the portion.
b. Maintenance by the Contractor shall include:
- Searching, uncovering or any other investigations necessary to examine and

make any determination in regard to apparently defective Work;
- Maintenance Work covering all labor, materials and others defined as Work
involved in removals, repairs, amendments, rectifications or otherwise
required to restore or replace defective Work;
- Repair or restoration of Work where necessarily or inadvertently damaged

during or by Maintenance Work by the Contractor under this Contract; and
c. Defective work found or occurring during the course of Defects Notification

Period shall be repaired or replaced with by the Contractor without delay and
completed as rapidly as possible.
d. Defective work revealed by the Maintenance Inspection by the Engineer or by

the Employer, during Defects Notification Period, shall be repaired or replaced
not later than fourteen (14) days following expiration date of Defects Notification
Period.
e. Contractor’s operations during Defects Notification Period shall be coordinated

with the Employer’s requirements and regulations related to operation of the
Project in regard to times and locations and manner in which Defect rectification
Work is to be performed.
3.01.2 Maintenance by the Employer:
a. The Employer shall be responsible for routine daily cleanup and general
superficial care of the Project and for operation of the systems thereof after
hand-over to him from the Contractor.
01025-2
b. The Employer reserves right to:
- Make temporary or emergency repairs as necessary to keep systems

operable or conditions effective without voiding warranty or relieving the
Contractor of responsibilities; and
- Make repairs not performed by the Contractor and recover from the
Contractor any expense accompanied thereto.
c. The Employer shall immediately notify the Contractor of any action pertaining to
Defect Rectification Work for which the Contractor is liable under provision of
this Contract.
3.01.3 Costs of Maintenance or Defect Rectification work:
a. Upon order of the Employer or the Engineer, when the Contractor is required to
uncover or investigate any apparently defective work or condition, the relative
costs to uncover or investigate and/or for repairs or replacement shall be
covered:
- By the Contractor in case the Work has proved defective in the opinion of the
Engineer; and
- By the Employer in case the work has turned out to be “not defective”.
b. Any Defect Rectification Work performed by the Employer on behalf of the

Contractor, whether urgent or otherwise, or whether by the Employer’s staff or
another Contractor, shall be covered by the Contractor.
4.01 WARRANTY PERIOD (Defect Notification Period):
Civil Works: One (1) year

Signaling Works: Two (2) years
- END OF SECTION -
01025-3
SECTION 01026
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
This Section covers the requirements for material and/or equipment operational
maintenance data.
2.01 EQUIPMENT:
The Contractor shall furnish product data, installation data, and maintenance data
for materials and equipment.
3.01 FORMAT:
3.01.1 Prepare data in the form of an instruction manual. Assemble data in commercial
quality, A4 size binders with hard, plastic covers. Identify the contents of each
binder on the outside.
3.01.2 Arrange the contents by material or system using the same numbering system as
this specification. Provide a heavy divider sheet with a tab for each section and
type or print the section number on the tab.
4.01 CONTENTS OF MANUALS:
4.01.1 Project name, name, address, and telephone number of Engineer and Contractor,
and table of contents arranged by section number or system.
4.01.2 Name, address, and telephone number of suppliers and subcontractors for each
product or system including local source of service and parts.
4.01.3 Mark each sheet of product data to clearly identify the specific products and
components. Do not use Project record drawings as maintenance drawings.
4.01.4 Supplement data sheets with drawings of components.
4.01.5 Supplement manufacturer’s printed data with typewritten text as required to

provide complete, logical, explanation and instruction.
4.01.6 Include in each manual a copy of the warranty, guarantee, or bond required for
each materials or component.
5.01 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES:
5.01.1 Include product name, data, catalog number, size, color, composition, etc. for
each materials, product, and finish.
01026-1
5.01.2 Include manufacturer’s recommendation and instruction regarding cleaning agents

and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and
recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance including installation details
for moisture protection products, and manufacturer’s recommendations for
inspection, maintenance, and repair.
5.01.3 Include form for logging repairs and replacements.
6.01 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS:
6.01.1 Include a description of each system, unit, and component. Give the function,
normal operating characteristics, performance curves, and limiting conditions.
6.01.2 Provide the original manufacturer’s part list, list of spare parts, and all information
required for ordering replacement parts.
6.01.3 Provide operating procedures for start-up, break-in, and normal, routine operation.
6.01.4 Provide panel board circuit directories, as-installed, color coded wiring diagrams
and electrical service characteristics.
6.01.5 Provide as-installed control diagrams, and sequence of operation by control

manufacturer.
6.01.6 Provide manufacturer’s printed maintenance instructions including routine

procedures, disassembly and repair instructions, and a guide to trouble shooting.
6.01.7 Provide a lubrication schedule and a list of lubrications required.
6.01.8 Include test and balancing reports.
7.01 INSTRUCTION:
7.01.1 Before the final inspection, instruct personnel designated by the Employer’s in the
operation, adjustment, and maintenance of the products and equipment.
7.01.2 Use the operation and maintenance manuals as the basis for instruction. Review
the contents of the manuals with the Employer’s personnel, and explain all the
aspects of the operation and maintenance.
7.01.3 Prepare additional data and instruction manuals when the need for such data
becomes approved.
7.01.4 When deemed necessary for the best interests of the Project and the Work
installed thereof and where the complexities of Work or system so demands,
verbal instruction periods shall be extended beyond the referenced Date of
Performance Certificate within reasonable and practical limits.
01026-2
8.01 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE:
8.01.1 Submit two (2) copies of proposed format for the manuals and a table of contents
for each within twenty-eight (28) days after award of contract. The Engineer will
review the material and return one (1) copy with his comments.
8.01.2 Submit one (1) copy of each of the completed volumes in final form fourteen (14)
days prior to the Test on Completion. The copy will be returned after the Test on
Completion with the Engineer’s comments. Revise the material as required, and
resubmit four (4) copies within fourteen (14) days of receipt of the reviewed copy.
- END OF SECTION -
01026-3
SECTION 01027
COMPLETION OF WORKS
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
This Section covers the requirements for administering Taking Over by the
Employer, Test on Completion, and Final Statement of the Contract.
2.01.1 The Contractor shall execute final cleaning in accordance with Section 01028:
“FINAL CLEANING” prior to Test on Completion.
2.01.2 At the Completion of the Works, deliver Record Documents to the Engineer in
accordance with Section 01007: “QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL
PROGRAMME”.
2.01.3 At the Completion of the Works, deliver Record Documents to the Engineer in
accordance with Sections 01026: “OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA”.
2.01.4 At the Completion of the Works, deliver all required warranties and guarantees to
the Engineer in accordance with Section 01024: “WARRANTIES AND BONDS”.
3.01 COMPLETION OF WORK:
3.01.1 The Completion shall be defined as such degree of completion of the Project that
will enable the Employer to occupy, put into effect, commence services of the
Project legally and safely, and furnish all normal services to the public.
3.01.2 When the Contractor considers the Work is complete, he shall submit to the
Engineer:
a. A written notice that the Work (or a designated portion thereof) is complete,
specified cleaning has been accomplished, and temporary facilities have been
removed from the site, or specified cleaning has been accomplished for the
signalling spaces or rooms; and
b. A list of items to be completed or corrected.
3.01.3 Within a reasonable time after the receipt of such notice, the Engineer will make
an inspection to determine the status of completion.
3.01.4 Should the Engineer determine that the Work is not completed:
a. He will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, giving the reasons thereof and
listing any additional items to be completed or corrected;
01027-1
b. The Contractor shall remedy the deficiencies in the Work, and send a second
written notice of completion to the Engineer; and
c. The Engineer will re-inspect the Work.
3.01.5 When the Engineer concurs that the Work is completed, he will:
a. Prepare a Taking Over Certificate; and
b. Submit the Certificate to the Employer and Contractor for their written
acceptance of the responsibilities assigned to them in the Certificate.
3.01.6 The Contractor shall complete or remedy the items of work listed in the certificate.
3.01.7 Should the Engineer perform re-inspection due to failure of the Work to comply
with the claims of the status of completion made by the Contractor, the Employer
will compensate the Engineer for such additional services and deduct the amount
of such compensation from the final payment to the Contractor.
4.01 TEST ON COMPLETION:
4.01.1 When the Contractor considers the Work is completed, he shall submit written
certification that:
- Contract Documents have been reviewed;

- Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents;
- Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents;
- Equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of the Employer’s
personnel from operational area; and
- Work is completed and ready for Test on Completion.
4.01.2 The Engineer will make an inspection to verify the status of completion with
reasonable promptness after receipt of such certification.
4.01.3 Should the Engineer consider that the Work is incomplete or defective:
- The Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, listing all
incomplete or defective works;
- The Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies,
and send a second written notice to the Engineer that the Work is complete;
and
- The Engineer will re-inspect the Work.
4.01.4 When the Engineer finds that the Work is acceptable under the Contract
Documents, he will request the Contractor to make Completion Submittals.
01027-2
5.01 CONTRACTOR’S COMPLETION SUBMITTALS TO THE ENGINEER:
5.01.1 Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities:
a. Certificate of Occupancy
b. Certificates of Inspection for:
- Track Work;
- Civil Work;
- Building Work;
- Railway Bridge Work;
- Tunnel Work;
- Signalling and Telecommunication Work; and
- Other systems as specified.
5.01.2 Master keys of signalling and telecommunication spaces, or rooms and

Watchman’s Hut shall be provided to the Engineer.
5.01.3 Evidence of payment and release of lines (as per requirements of general and
supplementary conditions).
5.01.4 Certificate of insurance for products and completed operations.
5.01.5 The Engineer shall review the Contractor’s submittals and transmit them to the
Employer with his recommendations for action.
6.01 ENGINEER’S COMPLETION DUTIES REGARDING SIGNALLING AND

TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT START- UP
6.01.1 Direct the inspection of Signalling and Telecommunication systems, and

equipment.
6.01.2 Assist in initial start-up and testing.
6.01.3 Record the dates of start of operation of systems and equipment.
6.01.4 Submit to the Employer a written notice of the beginning of the Warranty period for
equipment put into service.
7.01 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS:
7.01.1 The Contractor shall submit a final statement of accounting to the Engineer.
7.01.2 The statement shall reflect all adjustments to the Contract price
including:
a. The original Contract Price;
b. Additions and deductions resulting from;
01027-3
- Change orders
- Deductions for liquidated damages
- Deductions for re-inspection payments
- Other adjustments
c. Total Contract Price as adjusted considering the above;
d. Previous payments;
e. Other remaining dues or outstanding accounts; and
f. Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract.
7.01.3 The Engineer will prepare a final Change Order, reflecting approved adjustments
to the Contract Price which were not previously made by Variations Orders.
7.01.4 The Contractor shall submit the Final Payment Application in accordance with
procedures and requirements stated in the Conditions of the Contract.
- END OF SECTION -
01027-4
SECTION 01028
FINAL CLEANING
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
This Section covers the requirements for providing final cleaning operation for a
dust and dirt free spaces for signaling and electronic equipment.
2.01 GENERAL:
2.01.1 The Contractor shall clean exposed-to-view surfaces prior to the Test on
Completion.
2.01.2 Protect surfaces until Employer’s acceptance of the work.
3.01 PRODUCTS:
3.01.1 Use only the materials and methods recommended by the manufacturer of the
materials to be cleaned.
3.01.2 Use cleaning materials that will not damage the surfaces or create hazards to
health or property.
4.01 EXECUTION:
4.01.1 Rooms or spaces in which sensitive signal, electrical or electronic equipment is to

be installed, under this Contract, shall be positively dust and dirt free when turned
over for such installation work.
4.01.2 As minimum requirement, upon completion of all other cleaning required within
respective spaces, provide additional vacuuming, additional replacement of filters
for respective air conditioning or ventilating systems, temporary seals or dust
barriers around or at doors or other openings where dust might enter, and/or other
safeguards as may be necessary to maintain said spaces in dust free condition
until completion of equipment installations.
4.01.3 In addition, respective air conditioning and/or ventilating systems shall be operated
throughout each spaces or rooms less than three (3) work days prior to start of
equipment installations, after new replacement filters have been provided as
specified.
4.01.4 Clean interior and exterior exposed-to-view surfaces as required.
4.01.5 Remove temporary protection not required to remain in place.
4.01.6 Clean transparent and glossy materials to a polished condition. Polish reflective
surfaces to a clear shine.
01028-1
4.01.7 Clean, damp mop, wax, and polish resilient and hard surfaces floors as required.
4.01.8 Clean surfaces of equipment; remove excess lubrication.
4.01.9 Clean permanent filters of ventilating equipment and replace disposable filters
when units have been operated during construction; in addition, clean ducts,
blowers, and coils when units have been operated without filters during
construction.
4.01.10 Clean light fixtures and lamps.
4.01.11 Maintain cleaning until final completion.
4.01.12 Remove waste, foreign matter, and debris from roofs, gutters, and drainage
systems.
4.01.13 Remove waste, debris, and surplus materials from the site. Clean grounds,
remove stains, spills, and foreign substances from paved areas and sweep clean.
Rake clean other exterior surfaces.
- END OF SECTION -
01028-2
BIDDING DOCUMENTS, PART 2-WORKS REQUIREMENTS
SECTION VI-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 02001
TEMPORARY WORKS GENERALLY
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This Section shall cover the requirement for furnishing, installing, maintaining and
removal of temporary works such as temporary access road, temporary bridge,
temporary diversion track and temporary platform.
1.01.2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere
Section 02002 “MAINTENANCE OF PUBLIC ROAD”

Section 02003 “TEMPORARY BRIDGE AND ACCESS ROAD”
Section 02004 “TEMPORARY SUPPORT FOR BRIDGE AND BRIDGE
RISING”
1.02 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS:
(Not Applicable)
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL PROGRAMME:
Comply with the applicable reference described in Section 01007: "QUALITY

ASSURANCE/CONTROL PROGRAMME" and as specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
1.04.1 Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Section 01008:
“SUBMITTALS” and as specified herein.
1.04.2 The Contractor shall submit the Work Program, Shop Drawings and calculations
for the Temporary Works to the Engineer for his approval.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
(Not Applicable)
02001 - 1
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL:
3.01.1 Temporary Works shall consist of all construction activities that are not part of the
Permanent Works but are required in order to complete the Permanent Works.
3.01.2 The Contractor shall design, provide, maintain and remove on completion all
Temporary Works as may be necessary for the execution of the Works, unless
otherwise stated in the Contract Documents.
3.01.3 Any temporary Works shall only commence once the Work Program, Shop
Drawings and calculations have been approved by the Engineer.
3.01.4 Loading and/or removal of the Temporary Works shall not be carried out without
the approval of the Engineer.
3.01.5 Temporary Works’ calculations shall take into account all possible loading
combinations and provide a suitable factor of safety in the most onerous state.
3.01.6 Acceptance of the Temporary Works by the Engineer does not relieves the
Contractor from his responsibilities under the Contract.
3.01.7 All Temporary Works shall be to the same standard as the Permanent Works,
unless agreed by the Engineer.
3.01.8 Calculations shall be carried out to the relevant Standards:
• American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM);

• American Association of state Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO);
• American Welding Society (AWS);
• Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS);
• Indonesian Industrial Standards (SII);
• Standar Nasional Indonesia (SNI).
3.01.9 All materials used as load-carrying components shall conform to the relevant
Standards described above.
3.01.10 The design and construction of the Temporary Works shall be bound by the same
conditions as the Permanent Works. The summation of the effects, such as
settlement, of both the Temporary and Permanent Works shall not exceed the
limits specified in the Contract.
3.01.11 Temporary Works shall be inspected after any adverse weather conditions.
- END OF SECTION -
02001 - 2
SECTION 02002
MAINTENANCE OF PUBLIC ROAD
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This Section covers the requirements for furnishing and maintaining of public
roads utilized by the Contractor and admitted by the Engineer as access road to
sites. The public road shall include any existing road, streets and paths those are
served for pedestrians, carriages and vehicles in the local communities.
1.01.2 The Contractor shall at any time to communicate with local communities and
authorities concerned so as to continue the usage and not to cause any disputes
regarding the traffic safety, pollution, noises and deterioration of roads.
1.01.3 The Contractor shall monitor periodically the practical condition of the public roads
and incidental facilities / structures, and shall remedy any defects and deterioration
immediately to the original condition if confirmed that those defects and
deterioration were caused by the vehicle usage of the Contractor.
Section 01016 “ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATION”

Section 02013 “WASTE”
Section 02025 “OPEN DRAIN”
Section 02063 “SUB BASE”
Section 02065 “BITUMINOUS PRIME COAT AND TACK COAT”
Section 02066 “ASPHALT CONCRETE SURFACE COURSE, ASPHALT
BINDER COURSE AND ASPHALT TREATED BASE
COURSE”
The following codes and standards are intended to provide an acceptable level of
quality for materials and products. The Contractor may propose alternative codes
and standards provided that they give an equivalent degree of quality as the
referenced codes and standards and are submitted for the Engineer’s review and
approval in advance of their use.
• The American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

(AASHTO);
• The American for Testing and Materials (ASTM);
02002 - 1
• Peraturan Konstruksi Kayu Indonesia NI-5 PKKI 1973;
• Standar Nasional Indonesia (SNI).
The Contractor shall comply with the applicable reference described in Section
01007: “QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL PROGRAMME” and the criteria
specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
1.04.2 The Contractor shall submit the Work Program for Engineer’s approval in which
the location, route, pavement structure, materials to be used, lighting and other
necessary information for maintenance work be stated.
1.04.3 The Contractor shall submit every week the monitoring report for observation of
public roads to the Engineer for approval.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
2.01.1 Sub-base Material:
Sub-base material shall comply with the requirements specified in Section 02063:
“SUB-BASE”.
2.01.2 Pavement:
Pavement materials shall comprise all that are the same as the existing, and
materials of asphalt pavement shall comply with the requirement specified in
Sections 02065: “BITUMINOUS PRIME COAT AND TRACK COAT” and 02066:
“ASPHALT CONCRETE SURFACE COURSE, ASPHALT BINDER COURSE
AND ASPHALT TREATED BASE COURSE”.
2.01.3 Drainage system, if instructed to be repaired shall comply with the requirements
specified in Section 02025 “OPEN DRAIN”.
02002 - 2
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL:
3.01.1 The Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits and approval from the relevant
authorities for use of public roads.
3.01.2 The Contractor shall provide means and facilities for maintaining construction
vehicles, especially their wheels, in clean conditions, in order to prevent soiling on
the public roads, streets and paths.
3.01.3 The damaged pavement shall be repaired in accordance with the manner
specified in Section 02065: “BITUMINOUS PRIME COAT AND TRACK COAT”
and/or the instruction of the Engineer.
3.01.4 The damaged drainage shall be repaired in accordance with the manner specified
in Section 02066: “ASPHALT CONCRETE SURFACE COURSE, ASPHALT
BINDER COURSE AND ASPHALT TREATED BASE COURSE” and/or the
instruction of the Engineer.
3.01.5 If required, the Contractor may use existing level crossing as access road, as
approved by the Engineer. When using level crossing as access road, the
Contractor shall either reinforce existing level crossing to prevent from damage
owing to passage of constructional traffics, or repair and/or restore damaged
facilities of level crossing to their original conditions whenever the damages are
caused.
- END OF SECTION -
02002 - 3
SECTION 02003
TEMPORARY BRIDGE AND ACCESS ROAD
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This Section covers the requirements for temporary bridge and access road that are
required on access to construction sites across streams, paddy field and rivers or
any obstructions.
1.01.2 The Contractor shall furnish all labour, materials, tools and equipment required to
complete the work.
1.01.3 Prior to commencement of work, the Contractor shall perform the field investigating
and surveying to determine the route.
Section 01011 “SECURITY OF RAILWAY OPERATIONS”

Section 01012 “WINDOW-TIME AND SPEED DOWN OF TRAIN
OPERATIONS’
Section 01013 “PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY”
Section 02009 “GENERAL EXCAVATION”
Section 03001 “STRUCTURAL STEEL”
The following codes and Standards are intended to provide an acceptable level of

(AASHTO);
• Peraturan Konstruksi Kayu Indonesia NI-5 PKKI 1973.
specified herein.
02003 - 1
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
1.04.2 The Contractor shall submit the Work Program for Engineer’s approval in which the
location, route, structure, materials to be used, schedule and other necessary
information shall be described.
1.04.3 The Contractor shall submit the Shop Drawings with structural calculation to the
Engineer for his approval.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
2.01.1 Temporary Steel Bridge:
The material designated to be used for temporary steel bridge shall be in

accordance with the Specification specified in Section 03001: “STRUCTURAL
STEEL”.
2.01.2 Temporary Wooden Bridge:
The material designated to be used for wooden bridge shall be class III or IV in
accordance with the following Table 1.
TABLE 1. ELASTIC MODULE (E) OF WOOD
Class Elastic Modulus Compressive Strength Shearing Stress

(N/mm²) (N/mm²) (N/mm²)
III 8 6 0.8
IV 6 4.5 0.5
The material, which shall be allowed to use, is as follows:
1) The diameter shall be more than 30-cm.

2) The shape shall be straight and round as much as possible.
3) The bend shall be less than 10-cm within the 5-m length pile.
4) The damage area shall be less than 5% against the square measure of material.
2.01.3 Temporary Concrete Pipe Culvert:
The material designated to be used for temporary concrete pipe culvert shall be in
accordance with the requirements specified in Section 02022: “BOX CULVERT AND
PIPE CULVERT”
02003 - 2
2.01.4 Roadbed Material:
Roadbed materials shall comprise all that which is acceptable in accordance with the
Contract for use in the works and which is capable of being compacted in the
manner specified in Section 02012: “FILLING, GRADING AND EMBANKMENT
CONSTRUCTION” and Section 02011: “BORROW MATERIAL”.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 TEMPORARY BRIDGE:
3.01.1 The Contractor shall select the suitable material and structure for the temporary
bridge after considering every aspects of the site condition and shall submit his
proposal in his Work Program to the Engineer for approval.
Minimum requirements for temporary bridge are as follows:
• Temporary steel bridge shall be capable of spanning a distance of 10.0-m in a

single span.
• Temporary wooden bridge shall be capable of 5.0-m in a single span.
• Each temporary bridge shall be capable of supporting the traffic with axle loads of
21 tons at 2-meter centres without significant deflection.
3.01.2 Each temporary bridge shall be located in an adequate distance from the permanent
bridge construction area in order to avoid disturbance of the permanent work.
3.01.3 Temporary bridge shall be constructed in accordance with the approved Shop
Drawings and shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer.
3.01.4 The Contractor shall verify that the quality of the materials and workmanship are
consistent with requirement in the Shop Drawings.
3.01.5 The maintenance of temporary bridge shall include daily inspection, tightening of
loose parts, restoration of displaced structure. Where any partial or complete failure
occurred, the temporary bridge shall be replaced with sound materials as soon as
possible at the Contractor’s expense.
3.02 USING ROADBED AS ACCESS ROAD:
3.02.1 If required, the Contractor may use roadbed embankment as access road, as
3.02.2 When using roadbed as access road, the Contractor shall reinforce roadbed to be
protected by suitable soil materials and/or sub-base materials, or repair and/or
restore damaged roadbed to designated conditions.
02003 - 3
3.03 TEMPORARY ACCESS ROAD STRUCTURE:
3.03.1 The access road may be a non-paved earth surfaced road, using available soil
material from the earth cutting operation within the Project limit. However, temporary
pavement shall be provided at such principal location as junction with public roads,
congested traffic with construction vehicles and beside bridges.
3.03.2 Proper temporary drainage shall be provided for the temporary access road to drain
storm water but shall be diverted so that the drained water will not cause any
flooding or damages to the adjacent inhabitants, cultivation lands, or outside the
Project limits.
3.03 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY ACCESS ROAD:
3.03.1 After the permanent structure is completed and temporary access road is no longer
required, the Contractor shall remove temporary access road and shall restore the
land used for the road to its original condition, as approved by the Engineer.
3.03.2 Damaged soil materials available from the removal of access road shall be disposed
of outside the Project limit under the responsibility of the Contractor at his own
expense.
- END OF SECTION -
02003 - 4
SECTION 02004
TEMPORARY SUPPORT FOR BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION AND BRIDGE RISING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This Section covers the requirements for furnishing, providing, maintaining and
removal of temporary support for various types of bridge construction and bridge
rising in the field if so required.
1.01.2 Temporary support for bridge construction shall be provided for construction of new
bridges and shall include any structures made temporarily such as piling, shoring,
bracing and sheeting required for work platforms and approach thereto.
1.01.3 Temporary support for bridge raising shall be provided for works of raising /
heightening girders / substructures and / or renewal of the existing bridges under the
normal train operation services, and shall include any structures made temporarily
such as piling, shoring, bracing and sheeting required for work platforms and
approaches thereto.

OPERATIONS”
Section 03002 “STEEL GIRDER”
Section 03003 “CONCRETE GIRDER”
Section 03004 “PRE-STRESSED CONCRETE GIRDER”
Section 03006 “BRIDGE SUBSTRUCTURE”
and standards provided that they give an equivalent degree of quality and that are
submitted for the Engineer’s review and approval in advance of their use.

(AASHTO);
• Indonesian Industrial Standards (SII).
02004 - 1
specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
location, route, structure, materials to be used, schedule and other necessary
information shall be described.
1.04.3 The Contractor shall submit the Shop Drawings with structural calculation to verify
stability of structures to the Engineer for approval.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
The material designated to be used for temporary support shall be in accordance

with the requirements specified in Section 03001: “STRUCTURAL STEEL”.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL:
3.01.1 The Contractor shall perform surveys and measurements, including subsurface
survey and soil investigation in accordance with Section 01018: “SURVEY” for
planning the temporary support works.
3.01.2 The Contractor shall select the suitable material and structure for the temporary
support after considering every aspects of the site condition and shall submit his
proposal in his Work Program to the Engineer for approval.
3.01.3 Each temporary support shall be located in an adequate distance from the
permanent bridge construction area in order to avoid disturbance of the permanent
work.
3.02 EXECUTION:
3.02.1 Temporary support shall be constructed in accordance with the approved Shop
Drawings and shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer.
3.02.2 The Contractor shall not start the construction of any temporary support until the
02004 - 2
Shop Drawings have been approved by the Engineer. Such approval will not relieve
the Contractor’s responsibility to the results occurred with these drawings.
3.02.3 The Contractor shall verify that the quality of the materials and workmanship are
consistent with requirement of the Shop Drawings.
3.02.4 The maintenance of temporary support shall include daily inspection, tightening of
loose parts, restoration of displaced structure. Where any partial or complete failure
occurred, the temporary support shall be replaced with sound materials as soon as
possible at the Contractor’s expense.
3.02.5 After the permanent construction is completed, accepted by the Employer or

Engineer, and temporary support is no longer required, the Contractor shall remove
temporary support to its original condition, as approved by the Engineer, and the
materials demolished shall be carried away from the site by the Contractor.
- END OF SECTION -
02004 - 3
SECTION 02006
DEMOLITION
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
This work shall consist of the removal, wholly or in part, and satisfactory disposal
of masonry, of all buildings, fences, structures, old pavements, platform and any
other obstructions, which are not designated or permitted to remain except for the
obstructions to be removed and disposed of under other sections in the Contract
Documents.
It shall also consist of the salvaging of designated materials resulting from

construction of trenches, holes and pits.
Section 01007 “QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTOROL PROGRAMME”

OPERATIONS”
Section 02008 “EARTHWORKS GENERALLY”
Section 02010 “STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL”
Section 02012 “FILLING, GRADING AND EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION”
Section 02022 “BOX CULVERT AND PIPE CULVERT”
Section 02029 “STONE MASONRY”
Section 03002 “STEEL GIRDER”
Section 03003 “CONCRETE GIRDER”
(Not Applicable)
specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Section 01008:

02006 - 1
The Contractor shall submit the works program for carring out this work comprising
schedule and an outline of equipment to be used, to the Engineer for approval,
prior to commence demolition works.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
(Not Applicable)
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL:
3.01.1 The Contractor shall carefully perform the demolition work, within and adjacent to
the work site, on the right-of-way, as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer.
3.01.2 Materials recovered from demolition shall remain the property of the Employer or
Authorities concerned unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract
Documents, or instructed by the Engineer.
3.01.3 If the Employer designates materials not to be re-used then the Contractor may
dispose of them. All designated saleable material shall be removed, without
unnecessary damage, in sections or pieces that may be readily transported, and
shall be stored by the Contractor at specified places as directed by the Engineer.
3.01.4 All existing facilities within the Site shall be removed unless otherwise specified.
Structures which include foundations shall have walls removed to a minimum 500
mm below Ground level where such remaining structure do not interfere with
construction.
The Contractor shall remove the existing pier within river according to the
instruction by the Engineer.
3.01.5 Basements or cavities left by structure removal shall be filled with acceptable
material to the level of the surrounding ground and, if within the limits of
construction, shall be compacted in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
3.01.6 Performance of these works under the Contract shall include salvage of materials
removed, their custody, preservation, storage in the right-of-way or any other
places as may be designated by the Engineer or the Employer, or disposal as
provided herein.
3.01.7 Bridges, culvert and other drainage structures in use by track and/or traffic shall
not be removed until satisfactory arrangements have been made to accommodate
to track and/or traffic.
3.01.8 Where portions of the existing structure lie wholly or in part within the limits for a
new structure, they shall be removed as necessary to accommodate the
construction of the proposed structure.
02006 - 2
3.01.9 Where only a section of the existing structure is to be demolished, the Contractor
shall execute this work in such a way as to avoid damage to the section designed
to remain, if any damage occurs due directly or indirectly to the Contractor’s
operation it shall be made good at his own expense. All details of the Contractor’s
proposed Working Program shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
3.01.10 Every demolish work shall be undertaken carefully in accordance with Section
01011: “SECURITY OF RAILWAY OPERATIONS”, Section 01012: “WINDOW-
TIME AND SPEED DOWN OF TRAIN OPERATION” and Section 01013:
“PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY”.
3.02 REMOVAL OF CONCRETE OR REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURES:
Existing concrete or reinforced concrete structures designated for removal like

cross drainage system, including their foundation, and like abutment shall be
broken into convenient sized pieces by appropriate equipment for removal and
shall be disposed of as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall carefully
undertake to demolish old, small or needless cross drainage system and abutment
without any damage to new structure so as not to disturb train operation.
Existing Concrete or Reinforced Concrete structures shall be removed are as

follows:
• Abutment;
• Pire;
• Concrete Girder;
• Concrete Pipe;
• Siphon;
• Box Culvert;
• Concrete Plate.
3.03 REMOVAL OF PAVEMENTS, SIDEWALKS, PASSAGEWAY, ETC:
3.03.1 Irrespective of thickness, all asphalt concrete or concrete pavements except

platforms or other hard surfaces designated for removal, shall be broken into
pieces, and shall be removed and stockpiled at designated locations on the site for
use of Employer, or otherwise disposed of as directed by the Engineer.
3.03.2 The removal of pavement shall be carefully undertaken to avoid damage to

abutting sections of pavement or structures designated to remain.
3.03.3 If the removal of ballast, gravel or similar sub-base or base material is necessary,
this work shall be considered as General Excavation, and shall conform to the
requirements of Section 02009: “GENERAL EXCAVATION” of these
specifications.
3.03.4 If the surface, after the removal of sidewalk or passageway, is so soft or muddy
that will make it unsuitable for pedestrian to pass, the Contractor shall provide
some means to cover the area to keep a satisfactory path for the pedestrians.
02006 - 3
3.04 REMOVAL OF CONCRETE CURBS:
3.04.1 The existing concrete curbs designated for removal, including their bases, shall be
removed as original pieces or shapes and stockpiled at designated locations on
the site for use of Employer, or otherwise disposed of as directed by the Engineer.
3.04.2 Removal of the existing concrete curbs shall be undertaken in such a manner to
avoid damage to existing pavements and curbs, which are designated to remain.
3.05 REMOVAL OF FENCES:
Existing fences made of rail, steel net or rail post designated for removal shall be
removed, together with their foundations, and stockpiled at designated locations on
the site for use of Employer, or otherwise disposed of as directed by the Engineer.
3.06 REMOVAL OF STONE MASONRY:
3.06.1 The portion of the existing stone masonry designated for removal shall be
removed, together with their foundation by appropriate means into original or
convenient sized pieces for removal and shall be stockpiled at designated
locations on the site for use of Employer, or otherwise disposed of as directed by
the Engineer.
3.06.2 The ends of the remaining stone masonry shall be dressed so that they are left in a
neat without any protruding jagged or other unsightly or potentially harmful
exposed parts.
3.06.3 If directed by the Engineer, sufficient backfilling of any cavities or holes left after
demolition shall be carried out to leave the ground in a safe and presentable
condition.
Existing stone masonry shall be removed are as follows:

• Stone masonry wall;
• Stone masonry curb;
• Stone masonry U-ditch, drainage, siphon and other drain or irrigation system;
• Stone masonry ballast stopper; and
• Stone masonry abotment.
3.07 REMOVAL OF BUILDINGS:
3.07.1 Kebasen station building, watchman’s hut, storage and other facility buildings
designated for removal, including their foundation, shall be broken into convenient
sized pieces by appropriate equipment for removal and shall be disposed of as
3.07.2 Any operation necessary for the removal of an existing structure or obstruction,
which may damage new structures, shall be completed prior to placing the new
work, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
02006 - 4
3.07.3 Where buildings are to be partly demolished only, the Contractor shall take care to
demolish only that portion of the buildings designate by the Engineer.
3.07.4 Any damage to the remaining portion including ensuring the structural stability of
the same shall be made goods and the ends of the remaining section shall be
dressed so that they are left in a neat without any protruding jagged edges or other
unsightly or potentially harmful exposed parts.
3.08 REMOVAL OF STEEL STRUCTURES:
3.08.1 As shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer, complete units and
portions of existing steel structures shall be removed which may include the
following:
• Existing Aqueduct near kebasen tunnel ;

• Guard Rail of level crossing;
• Steel Pipe; and
• Any other steel structures.
3.08.2 These steel structures and components shall be carefully dismantled and
transported to a storage area designated by the Engineer and PT KAI.
3.08.3 The various steel members shall be neatly stockpiled in the storage area to the
satisfaction of the Engineer, where portions of steel structures are designated to
remain, members shall be cut as neatly as possible with a torch or saw, leaving a
small surplus for filling and/or accurate attachment to new construction, as directed
by the Engineer.
3.09 REMOVAL OF EXISTING PLATFORMS:
This work shall consist of the removal of platform walls, platform pavement and the
soil between the walls.
Platform walls shall be removed and then compacted to conform to the
requirements of Section 02012: “FILLING, GRADING AND EMBANKMENT
CONSTRUCTION”.
3.10 REMOVAL OF GABION:
Removal of gabion shall be carefully undertaken for widening side without any
damages to existing track on the roadbed during widening of embankment for
double tracking shall be conducted as directed by the Engineer.
If necessary, the Contractor shall take countermeasure as temporary to avoid

collapse of roadbed during removal.
After removal of gabion, it would be disposed from site to suitable place.
02006 - 5
3.11 REMOVAL OF GABION INCLUDING RAIL PILE:
Removal of gabion including rail pile shall be carefully undertaken for widening
side without any damages to existing track during widening of embankment for
double tracking shall be conducted as directed by the Engineer.

collapse of roadbed during removal.
After removal of gabion included rail pile, it would be disposed from site to suitable
each place.
3.12 REMOVAL OF RAIL PILE:
Removal of rail pile shall be carefully undertaken for widening side without any
damages of existing track during widening of embankment for double tracking shall
be conducted as directed by the Engineer.

collapse of road bed during removal.
After removal of rail pile, it would be disposed from site to suitable place.
- END OF SECTION -
02006 - 6
RAILWAY DOUBLE TRACKING ON JAVA SOUTH LINE PROJECT III, CIREBON-KROYA
SECTION 02007
SITE CLEARING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This work shall consist of clearing, grubbing, leveling, and removing and disposing
of all vegetation, debris including old rails, sleepers and other obstructive objects
lying on or in the ground within the limits except such objects as are designated to
remain in place or are not to be removed in accordance with other Sections of
these Specifications.
1.01.2 This work shall also include the preservation from injury or defacement of all
vegetation and objects designated to remain, or if destroyed and so ordered by the
Engineer, their replacement.

OPERATIONS”
1.02 APPLICABLE CODE AND STANDARDS:
(Not Applicable)
specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:

PART 2: PRODUCTS
(Not Applicable)
02007 - 1
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01.1 The Engineer shall establish the limits of work and designated all trees, shrubs,
plants and other things to remain or to be removed. The Contractor preserve all
items designated to remain or he shall replace them at his own expense to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.01.2 The contractor shall take all necessary steps during site clearing to protect
adjoining properties, fences, public roads and track and will be held responsible for
making good any damage to the same or the replacement to the acceptable
equivalent should the material be no longer obtainable in the market.
3.01.3 Site clearing shall be carried out in such a manner as to cause as little
inconvenience as possible to adjoining properties and the public; the Contractor
will be held responsible for any claims arising therefrom.
3.01.4 The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions before and during site
clearing, as specified in Section 01013: “PROTECTION OF WORK AND
PROPERTY”, not to disturb existing electricity supply cables, drains, water supply
pipes, ducts, telephone cables, pipe lines and other service pipes and fittings
across and/or along the site.
3.02 EXECUTION:
3.02.1 Clearing and Grubbing and Tree Removal:
a. All surface objects and all trees, down timber, rotten wood, stumps, roots,
snags, brush, other vegetation, rubbish, and other protruding obstructions, not
designated to remain or to be replaced, shall be cleared and/or grubbed,
including disposal as required.
b. In areas under embankments, from which topsoil or unsuitable materials are

to be removed or which are designated to be compacted, all stumps and roots
shall be removed to a depth at least 50cm below the original ground surface.
c. In cut areas, all stumps and roots shall be removed to a depth at least 50cm
below the finished subgrade level.
d. Clearing and grubbing of pits, drain, and ditches shall be required only to the
depth necessitated for the excavation within those areas.
e. Voids left after removal of roots shall be filled with compacted suitable
material.
02007 - 2
3.02.2 Topsoil Stripping:
a. In areas under embankments or where designated by the Engineer, the

Contractor shall remove the topsoil and dispose it as directed by the Engineer.
b. In general the removal of topsoil shall include only the removal of soil which is
sufficient fertile to encourage or sustain a growth of vegetation.
c. Removal of topsoil over any designated area shall be executed to the depth
as directed by the Engineer, and the topsoil shall be kept separate from the
other excavated material.
3.02.3 Protection of Areas Designated to remain:
In areas designated by the Engineer, the Contractor shall be responsible for the
protection and routine maintenance of existing shrubs, trees and grassed areas.
On completion of the works these areas shall be returned to the Employer in the
same condition as before and any damages due directly or indirectly to the
Contractor’s operations shall be made good at his own expense.
3.02.4 Disposal of Cleared Material:
a. The Contractor shall have the right to use the not saleable timber or saleable
timber, when permission is granted in writing by the appropriate Government
agency or authority, for his own purpose in connection with the Contract,
always provided that he has ascertained and complied with the requirements
of the appropriate Government Agency or Authority.
b. Saleable timber shall be neatly stored in approved accessible place within or

near the right-of-way as directed and shall be trimmed and stacked in
accordance with the requirements of the appropriate Government Agency or
Authority.
c. All other timber, except to be used, and all brush, stumps, roots, logs, and
other refuse from the clearing and grubbing operation shall be disposed of at
locations provided by the Contractor.
d. Materials and debris, which shall not be burned and perishable materials, shall
be removed from within the limits of work and disposed of.
e. The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements with property owners
for obtaining or using suitable disposal locations.
f. The cleared site and adjacent areas shall be left with a neat and finished
appearance. No accumulation of debris shall remain on or adjacent to the
right-of-way.
02007 - 3
3.02.5 a. Railway construction areas, including structures, frontage areas, ditches and
channels, and all other accessory areas those are to be constructed. Such
areas shall extend to a width of 2.0 meters outside of structures and
excavation and full width of embankment slope lines, except that where
opposing slopes are to be protected under cut section, the areas shall extend
to the outside limits of embankment slope lines.
b. Ditches and channels having a bottom width of less than 4 meters. Such
areas shall extend to a width of 1.0 meter outside the slope lines.
c. Material sites within the limits of work.
- END OF SECTION -
02007 - 4
SECTION 02008
EARTHWORKS GENERALLY
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 The earthworks shall consist of excavation and placing or disposal of earth or rock
or other material, cuts, fills or embankments, roadways, roadbeds or areas
adjacent there to, for construction of bridge foundation and pier, box culvert,
drainage, ditches, approaches and other structures. The removal of unsuitable
material shall also be included in this work.
1.01.2 The work shall be made with the lines, grades, cross-sections shown on the
Drawing or as instructed or approved by the Engineer.
1.01.3 Related Work Specified Elsewhere:
Section 01018 “SURVEY”

Section 02006 “DEMOLITION”
Section 02007 “SITE CLEARING”
Section 02011 “BORROW MATERIAL”
Section 02021 “DRAINAGE GENERALLY”
1.02 APPLICABLE, CODES AND STANDARDS:
(Not Applicable)
specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:

02008 - 1
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
Soil to be used for the Work to be defined as follows:
2.01.1 Top Soil shall mean the top layer of soil that can support vegetation.
2.01.2 Suitable Material shall be any soil material derived from the excavation work or
from the borrow pit which conform to Borrow Material specified in Section 02012:
“FILLING, GRADING AND EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION”.
2.01.3 Unsuitable Material shall mean other than the suitable material and shall include:
1. Material from swamps, marshes or bogs;
2. Peat, logs, stumps or other organic matter and perishable and tonic materials;
3. Any materials classified by the Unified Soil Classification System as OL, OH or

Pt;
4. Material susceptible to spontaneous combustion; and
5. Clay of liquid limits exceeding 80 and/or plasticity index exceeding 55.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL:
3.01.1 The Contractor shall carry out all earthworks in such manner as to prevent erosion
or slips and shall limit working faces to safe slopes and height. The Contractor
shall ensure that all surfaces have at all times sufficient gradients to enable them
to shed water without causing erosion.
3.01.2 Hauling of material from cuttings or the importation of fill material to the
embankments or other areas of fill shall proceed only when sufficient compaction
plant is operating at the place of deposition, if it is within the works, to ensure
compliance with the requirements of Section 02012: “FILLING, GRADING AND
EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION”.
3.02 SOIL INFORMATION:
3.02.1 Any information on the properties of the soil may be shown on the Drawings or
obtained by the Contractor.
3.02.2 The Contractor is responsible for this interpretation of information supplied by the
Employer.
02008 - 2
3.02.3 The Contractor shall visit the site and possible borrow pits before making his
Tender and shall ascertain the nature of the soil, its quantity, locations and
suitability to meet the specified requirements.
3.02.4 The Contractor shall base his tender estimates on the Employer’s soil data and
supplemented by his own soil investigations.
3.03 HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL ALIGNMENT:
3.03.1 The Engineer will supply the Contractor with the locations of the Points of
Intersection of Tangents and Grade lines. The Drawings will indicate the properties
of horizontal and vertical curves, together with the rates of super-elevation,
transitions, etc. where required.
3.03.2 The Contractor shall prepare cross-sections based upon the above properties,
secure the Engineer’s approval of these cross-sections and stake out before
proceeding with construction.
3.03.3 If, in the opinion of the Engineer, any modification of the line or grade is advisable,
either before or after stake out, the Engineer will issue detailed instruction to the
Contractor for such modifications and the Contractor shall revise the stake out for
further approval.
3.04 QUANTITIES:
3.04.1 The quantities of the various excavation and embankment to be measured for the
payment under the Contract will be based on the lines shown on the approved
profiles and cross sections or as instructed by the Engineer.
3.04.2 The Engineer may decide the angle of the slope of cuts and fills or the formation of
benches in the slopes as the work proceeds based on his evaluation of the soil
characteristics.
3.04.3 The cross section will form the basis of the earth works calculations but they will be
supplement by such site measurements as to accurately determine the quantity for
each pay item.
3.04.4 The actual lines of the cuts and fills as made shall be duly measured and recorded
by the Contractor.
3.04.5 The Engineer will check these records and will approve the measurements, if
correct, as a basis of payment.
3.04.6 Suitable excavated material surplus to the requirements for backfilling Section
02010: “STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL”, shall be considered as
available for incorporation in fill areas, and should be stockpiled even if not
required at the time of excavation.
3.04.7 Excess excavation material shall be backfilled, as directed by the Engineer, with
sub-base or other suitable material without extra payment.
02008 - 3
3.05 REMOVAL OF EXISTING OBSTRUCTIONS:
The tender price for the classes of excavation shall include the cost of removal of
all material, regardless of its nature, encountered within the approved limits for
excavation, including the removal and disposal, as required by the Engineer, of
sections of existing brick, stone, concrete or masonry, rock boulders or fragments
of old pavements encountered during earthworks.
3.06 WORKING IN AND DEALING WITH WATER:
3.06.1 The Contractor shall arrange for the rapid dispersal of water shed on to the
earthworks or completed formation during construction, or which enters the
earthworks from any source. Where practicable, the water shall be discharged into
the existing drainage system.
3.06.2 Adequate means for trapping silt shall be provided on temporary systems
discharging into existing drainage systems. The arrangement shall be made in
respect of all earthworks including excavations whether for pipe trenches,
foundations or cuttings.
3.06.3 The Contractor shall provide where necessary temporary watercourses, ditches,
drains, pumping or other means of maintaining the earthworks free from water.
Such provision shall include carrying out the work of forming the cuttings and
embankments in such a manner that their surfaces have at all times a sufficient
minimum cross-fall and, where practicable, a sufficient longitudinal gradient to
enable them to shed water and prevent ponding.
3.06.4 Pumping shall not be regarded as meeting provisions of this Section where a
dumping temporary obstructs the free drainage of a cutting. In such circumstances
the Contractor shall construct temporary drains to a suitable out-fall or install the
existing drainage through the dumpings.
3.06.5 The Contractors shall take special care that naturally occurring materials within the
site are not rendered unsuitable by his method of working.
3.06.6 Areas of cuttings and excavation shall be so worked that rainfall is conducted
rapidly away from the exposed material and at times of expected heavy rain that
the cutting areas are protected by appropriate methods of working and drainage
provisions. If any material that was suitable in its original position is rendered
unsuitable by the Contractor’s method of working an equivalent volume of Suitable
Material shall be provided by the Contractor at this own expense.
3.06.7 The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to remove from the area of his
work for the protection of completed work or to allow satisfactory execution of work
in progress.
3.06.8 Water disposal shall not damage the terrain, plants, trees, construction work or
structures, and shall not lead onto nor across existing track way, established roads,
parking areas, planting areas, or adjacent properties, unless otherwise specifically
approved for each case.
02008 - 4
3.06.9 Not all water so removed shall be allowed to accumulate on the site but shall
suitably conveyed to the nearest drainage channel for disposal.
3.06.10 As the work progresses permanent drainage system shall be installed and the
temporary drainage and other facilities shall progressively be removed and surface
restored.
3.07 TOP SOIL:
3.07.1 All Top Soil (including turf) shall be removed at least more than 0.5m from the top
surface on the areas of cuttings and embankments. Top Soil shall also be
removed from existing embankments required to receive paving or additional fill
and from areas of new ditches and watercourses. All removed Top Soil shall be
stockpiled for re-use to soil slopes of cutting, embankments, berms, verges,
reserves and for the provision of beds for the cultivation of trees and shrubs.
3.07.2 The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for stockpiling of Top Soil for the
provision of appropriate areas for the purpose.
3.08 EXCAVATION
3.08.1 The work shall consist of all the required excavation within the limits of the right of
way except excavation otherwise classified; the removal, hauling and proper
utilization or disposal of all excavated materials and shaping of excavation and
preparation of exposed surfaces of excavation on the entire length of the railway
and approaches, in accordance with these Standards and the lines, leves, grades,
dimentions and cross sections shown on the Drawings and as required by the
Engineer.
3.08.2 Excavation shall be classified into earth excavation and rock excavation. Rock
excavation shall consist of igneous, metamorphic and sedimentary rock which
cannot be excavated without blasting or the use of rippers, and all boulders or
other detached stones each having a volume of 0.75m3 or more
3.08.3 Rock excavations shall be classified as two types; soft or hard. Soft rock can be
excavated by rippers. Hard rock can be removed with the use of pneumatic tools,
drilling and blasting.
3.09 USE AND DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL:
3.09.1 All surplus material excavated within the limit and scope of the project shall be
used in the most effective manner for the formation of embankments or other
areas of fill, unless otherwise specified or instructed by the Engineer, or
designated as unsuitable by the Engineer.
3.09.2 Any material surplus to these requirements, or any material declared in writing by
the Engineer to be unsuitable, shall be disposed by the Contractor outside the
right-of-way or as directed by the Engineer in accordance with the provisions of
these Specifications, and shall be considered as Waste, which shall be subject to
the provisions of Section 02013: “WASTE”.
02008 - 5
3.09.3 Where the excavation reveals a combination of suitable and unsuitable materials,
the Contractor shall, unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, carry out the
excavation in such a manner that the suitable materials are excavated separately
for use in the works without contamination by the unsuitable materials.
3.10 DITCHES:
3.10.1 The Contractor shall construct drainage channels, side and interception ditches,
inlet and outlet ditches as shown on the Drawings or where instructed by the
Engineer, for temporary drainage.
3.10.2 In order to keep water away from the embankment, subgrade, sub-base, sub-
ballast and/or base during the course of construction, the Contractor shall at all
times ensure that adequate drainage shall be operative before commencement of
the construction.
3.10.3 The Contractor shall clean and trim all such drainage ditches from time to time so
that there may be a free flow of water throughout the whole Contract Period and
Warranty Period.
3.10.4 Damage attribute to wetting through failure to provide adequate drainage will result
in an order to repair the damage at the Contractor’s expense.
3.10.5 Irrigation of areas on which earthworks are to be executed shall have been halted
at least two months in advance of the construction. All surface water shall be a
drained off and temporary ditch constructed in good time to allow the area to dry
out.
3.11 RELOCATION OF STREAM AND CHANNELS:
3.11.1 Where indicated on the Drawings or where required by the Engineer, the
Contractor shall take cross-sections of existing streams and channels and, in
collaboration with the Engineer, mark them with details of the excavation required
for their relocation if required or so ordered by the Engineer.
3.11.2 The Contractor shall also take levels to allow the profile elevations of existing box
or pipe culverts and their extensions to accurately fixed by the Engineer.
3.11.3 Work shall not proceed without approval of the marked cross-sections by the
Engineer.
3.11.4 The work of stream or channel excavation shall be considered as General

Excavation and paid for at the Contract unit prices for this item, subject to the
provisions of Section 02009: “GENERAL EXCAVATION” and Sections relating to
“DRAINAGE”.
3.12 LOOSE EARTH OR ROCK, LANDSLIDES, BENCHES, FLATTING OF SLOPES:
3.12.1 Loose earth or loose rock shall be removed from slopes when required by the
Engineer. The Engineer may also instruct the removal of material resulting from
02008 - 6
landslide, the construction of benches in or above the cut slopes, or, where in his
opinion the slope, after cutting, shows signs of instability, the flattening of the slope.
3.12.2 Performance of this work under the contract is not payable directly but shall be
considered as a subsidiary obligation of the Contract covered under the unit rate
for General Excavation or Borrow Material, except that the volume of cut material
shall be measured for payment under the pay item for General Excavation, when
so approved by the Engineer.
3.13 FILLING EXISTING WATERCOURSES:
Where watercourses have to be diverted form sites of embankments or other

works, the original channels shall be cleared of all vegetable growth and soft
deposits and carefully filled with suitable materials deposited and compacted as
specified in Section 02012: “FILLING, GRADING AND EMBANKMENT
CONSTRUCTION” to the extent indicated by the Engineer. See also the Sections
relating to “DRAINAGE”.
3.14 DAMAGE TO THE PUBLIC ROADS AND LEVEL CROSSING:
3.14.1 The Contractor shall abide by all regulations and codes regarding the use of
existing roads, streets and highways as hauling route to the Project site.
3.14.2 The Contractor shall prevent the soiling of public roads and shall clear away any
debris left on public roads and sidewalks during the execution of earthworks.
3.14.3 Any damages done to the existing roads shall be repaired, replaced or restored to
their original conditions, as approved by the Engineer, or the Authorities in
concerned, at the expense of the Contractor.
- END OF SECTION -
02008 - 7
SECTION 02009
GENERAL EXCAVATION
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 General Excavation shall consist of all excavation within the limits of the right of
way except Structure Excavation; the removal, handling and proper utilization or
disposal of excavated materials, other than the suitable material defined
elsewhere and shaping of excavation and preparation of exposed surface of
excavation for entire length of the trackbed or roadway, in accordance with these
Specifications and the lines, levels, grades, dimensions and cross-sections shown
on the Drawings and as required by the Engineer.

OPERATIONS”
• American Association of state Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
T 180 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 10-lb (4.54 kg)

Rammer and 18-in. (457-mm) Drop
specified herein.
02009 - 1
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements specified in Section

01008: “SUBMITTALS”.
Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall submit the work program for
carrying out this work comprising of the work procedure, schedule, an outline of
equipment to be used and field-testing, to the Engineer for approval.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 SUITABLE MATERIALS:
Suitable materials shall be any soil material derived from the excavation work or
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXCAVATION:
3.01.1 Excavation shall be carried out to the dimensions, lines, levels and slopes as
indicated on the drawings. If the Contractor excavates deeper than the depths on
the drawings or as instructed by the Engineer, then he shall fill in such excessive
with acceptable materials to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.01.2 The bottom of all excavations shall be free from mud and water, trimmed clean,
protected from the effects of weather and thoroughly compacted and consolidated
by approved manners and means.
3.01.3 All soft or defective portions of soil bellow formation level shall be cut out and filled
in with suitable material well consolidated in layers of approved thickness.
3.01.4 The Contractor shall, before backfilling, measure and determine in the presence of
the Engineer the volume of poor quality soil cut out and replaced. Brick and
concrete foundations to structures removed during excavation may be
incorporated in fill areas.
3.01.5 The Contractor shall provide and maintain all necessary temporary access and
haul roads. Temporary roads shall be provided with temporary drainage along
their full length.
3.02 CUTTING AND CUT SLOPES:
3.02.1 Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, the top edges of permanent
cuttings shall be neatly rounded to the dimensions shown on the drawing.
02009 - 2
3.02.2 Unless otherwise specified, no portion of the earth cutting shall very from the
specified or ordered formation level by an amount exceeding 150mm. In the case
of cut slopes, no portion of the completed slope shall vary by an amount
exceeding 300 mm (measured at right angles to the slope), and no portion of the
toe of the cutting shall be less than the specified distance from the road and track.
3.02.3 In all cuttings, undulations in the general plane of the slope will not be permitted.
3.02.4 Cavities and any large fissures shall be filled with suitable material in the case of
foundation pits or trenches.
3.03 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF UNSUITABLE MATERIAL:
3.03.1 When so directed in writing by the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove
unsuitable materials for use in the embankment and shall dispose of it as provided
in Section 02008: “EARTHWORKS GENERALLY” and Section 02013: “WASTE”.
3.03.2 Where the excavation reveals a combination of suitable and unsuitable materials,
the Contract shall carry out the excavation in such a manner that the suitable
materials are excavated separately for use without contamination by the unsuitable
materials, unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer.
3.03.3 When unsuitable material below sub-grade level in cut or below embankment
foundation level is ordered to be removed, the soil left in place after the removal of
the unsuitable material shall be compacted, to a depth of 20 cm, to a density of 90
percent of the maximum dry density determined according to AASHTO T180.
3.03.4 Backfilling shall be with suitable material compacted to 90 % of the maximum dry
density determined according to AASHTO T180.
3.04 CONGLOMERATE OR SOFT ROCK:
When the material in cut is soft or weathered rock, in the opinion of the Engineer,
it is not firmly consolidated as to require drilling and blasting, the Contractor shall
use an excavator with suitable steel tines, or other appropriate equipment for
ripping for its removal, such ripping work shall be considered as General
Excavation.
3.05 HARD ROCK
Where blasting is not permitted and if the Engineer so desire, the excavation shall
be done by chiseling and wedging or any other agreed method and crush until
suitable dimension. For hard rock excavation the operating line should be in safe
operation mode with protection described in Section 02005: “TEMPORARY
FENCE FOR FALLING STONE” and as specified herein
- END OF SECTION -
02009 - 3
SECTION 02010
STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 Structure Excavation and Backfill shall consist of excavation and backfilling at
locations and places for provision of structures with or without sheeting supported
by strut and wale, within the limits of the work as specified herein or as shown on
the Drawings.
1.01.2 Structure Excavation with Support shall mean the excavation work made under the
conditions with structural supporting and free of standing water. The structural
supporting shall include cofferdam consists of shoring, sheeting, decking and
bracing which are well designed sufficient for the load and force involved.
1.01.3 Structure Excavation without Support shall mean the excavation work for placing
structures of concrete and / or masonry at locations where need no support for
any loading or forces. This excavation work is deemed to be carried out with light
equipment and tools in relatively narrow areas.
1.01.4 Structure Excavation shall include backfilling with suitable material accepted by the
Engineer; incorporating surplus material in the fill area as described in Section
02012: “FILLING, GRADING AND EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION” and Section
02014: “GRANULAR BACKFILL”.

OPERATIONS”
Section 02011 “BORROW MATERIALS”
Section 02014 “GRANULAR BACKFILL”
Section 02015 “FREE DRAINING MATERIAL”
Section 02030 “RETAINING WALL”
1.02 APPLICABLE PROVISIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS:
02010 - 1
• American Association of state Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO);

• American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
1.04.1 General:

1.04.2 Shop Drawing and Work Program:
1. The Contractor shall submit the Work Program and Shop Drawings to the
Engineer for approval, which shall not relieve the Contractor’s responsibility
for selecting the adequate cofferdam.
2. The Working Program and Shop Drawings shall show the calculations and
proposed methods of cofferdam, including details of the arrangement and
method of construction for each proposed system.
3. The Shop Drawings shall show the relative positions of existing tracks,
stations, railway bridge structures, water course, drainage structures, roadway
and adjacent buildings, struts and bracing if applicable.
4. The Shop Drawings shall show the permissible depth, to which excavation
may be carried out before cofferdam shall be installed and pre-loaded.
5. The full load to be carried by each member of the cofferdam, and if required,
necessary pre-loads, shall be indicated on the Shop Drawings. No structural
excavation shall be allowed to commence until the Engineer has approved the
Contractor’s proposed Work Programs and Shop Drawings.
6. The Contractor shall verify the actual locations of existing utilities in relation to
the cofferdam and show his proposals to overcome the interference with such
existing utilities. Necessary diversions and/or cofferdam shall be fully detailed
on the Shop Drawings.
7. Working program shall indicate the sequence of removal of bracing as related

to concrete placement and back filling operations.
8. In case the proposed cofferdam includes tieback anchor, the Contractor shall
show it on the Shop Drawings:
a. The soil profile for which each anchor is intended,
02010 - 2
b. The design load for full depth of the excavation,

c. The maximum design and proof loads and the criteria proposed for
deformations under proof loads.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 SUITABLE MATERIALS:
Suitable material shall be any soil material derived from the excavation work or
“BORROW MATERIAL”.
2.02 BACKFILL:
Backfill material to be placed contacting the structure shall conform to Section

02014: “GRANULAR BACKFILL” and Section 02015: “FREE DRAINING
MATERIAL”.
2.03 SHEETING MATERIAL:
2.03.1 Temporary Steel Piling:
Steel sheet piling shall be of the continuous interlocking type and shall comply with
ASTM A328M, or equivalent.
Steel H-Piles, Fabricated Connections and Other Structural Steel Sections shall
comply with ASTM A36M and ASTM A6M, or equivalent.
2.03.2 Timber:
All timber used in support of excavations shall be of structural grade complying

with AASHTO M163 and shall be subject to approval of the Engineer. Where
treated timber is used, the preservative process shall comply with AASHTO M133,
or equivalent.
2.03.3 Concrete:
Cast-in place concrete shall comply with the requirements specified in Section
02068: “CONCRETE”.
2.03.4 Reinforcement:
Reinforcing steel bar shall comply with the requirements specified in Section
02070: “REINFORCING STEEL BARS”.
02010 - 3
2.03.5 Strut and Bracing Members:
Structural steel shall comply with ASTM A36M and A6M, or equivalent. Steel pipe
shall comply with ASTM A53 and A120, or equivalent.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GROUND WATER:
3.01.1 Whenever groundwater is encountered during Structure Excavation, the

Contractor shall take such measures as are described in item of this Section to
ensure that the excavation and subsequent footing or bottom slab construction are
kept free from water – “dry” condition.
3.01.2 Further, preventive measures shall be taken to prevent the entry of surface water
into the excavation by covering during rains, diverting surface flow by means of
dykes, etc.
3.01.3 Upon request, the Contractor shall submit the Work Program showing his
proposed method of water control needed for proper construction to the Engineer
for his approval.
3.02 COFFERDAMS:
3.02.1 General:
1. Except where the design of cofferdam is furnished by the Engineer, the

Contractor shall be responsible for the selection and design of all temporary
cofferdams, subject to the approval of the Engineer.
2. The Contractor shall design the cofferdam and its components to support the
any live load, dead load, earth pressures and hydrostatic pressures in
accordance with the existing circumstances at the site.
3. The cofferdam shall allow for the safe and expeditious construction of the
permanent structures and prevent damage to adjacent track, structures,
embankment and utilities.
4. In general, Cofferdam for foundation construction shall be constructed to a

depth well below the bottom of the footings to prevent lateral and vertical earth
movement and shall be well bracing and as nearly watertight as practicable.
5. In general, the interior dimensions of cofferdam shall be such as to give

sufficient clearance for the construction of forms and the inspection of their
exteriors, and to permit pumping outside of the forms.
6. Cofferdams, which are titled or moved laterally during the process of sinking,
shall be righted or enlarged to provide the necessary clearance. In any case,
02010 - 4
safety of the excavation shall be the primary consideration together with the
construction under “dry” conditions.
7. The Contractor shall compare the revealed ground conditions during the
structure excavation with the design assumptions of the cofferdam. If
necessary, the cofferdam shall be modified or additional measure shall be
adopted in order to ensure the stability of the structure excavation and the
adjacent structures. The Contractor shall maintain, protect and be responsible
for the safety, stability of all existing and new structures affected by its work.
8. Members of cofferdam shall be installed and maintained in tight contact with

each other and with the surface being supported.
9. Strut shall be pre-loaded by jacking in accordance with the submitted Work

Program and Shop Drawing for Engineer’s approval. Steel shims and wedges
shall be used to maintain the pre-loading force in the strut and bracing after
release of the jacking force.
10. The strut load shall be measured by means of load cells or strain gauges if
required the by Engineer.
11. Suitable and practically watertight cofferdams may be used or other effective
water control systems (well points, deep wells, etc.) wherever water bearing
strata are encountered significantly above the elevation of the bottom of the
excavation.
12. Cofferdams shall be designed and constructed to be safe against sudden

rising of the water and to prevent damage to the foundation.
13. Any pumping that may be permitted from the interior of any foundation
enclosure shall be done in such a manner as to preclude the possibility of any
portion of the concrete materials being carried away. Any pumping required
during the placing of concrete, or for a period of at least 24 hours thereafter,
shall be done from a suitable pump located the concrete forms.
3.02.2 Steel Sheet Piling:
1. Piles shall be driven vertically with each pile interlocked with adjoining piles for
its entire length, and shall be driven to the depths indicated on the approved
Shop Drawings.
2. The methods of driving, cutting, and splicing sheet piling shall conform to the
approved Shop Drawings.
3.02.3 Soldier Piling with Lagging:
1. Soldier piles shall be installed by driving or pre-boring methods to the

elevations shown on the approved Shop Drawings. Pre-bored holes for piles
shall be cased or slurry supported as required.
2. Timber lagging shall be installed as excavation proceeds. No gap between the

excavation surface and the lagging shall be left and this gap shall be
backfilled with sand or soil rammed into place.
02010 - 5
3.03 REMOVAL OF COFFERDAM:
3.03.1 If the removal of soldier piling shall be required wholly or in part, such removal
work shall be carried out in a manner that shall not disturb or damage the adjacent
structures, construction, and utilities.
3.03.2 The lowest strut and bracing above the invert slab of deep foundation shall remain
in place for at least 48 hours after casting the invert concrete. All other levels of
strut and bracing shall also remain in place until the concrete compressive
strength shall reach at least 80% of the specified 28-day compressive strength.
3.04 EXCAVATION OPERATIONS:
3.04.1 Before starting excavation operations in any area, The Contractor shall:
1. Take steps on his own initiative to regulate the natural drainage of the water
flowing on the surface of the ground, in order to prevent it running into the
excavations to be opened.
2. Ensure that all necessary “Site Clearing” and “Demolition” in that area has been
performed in accordance with these Specifications.
3. Notify the Engineer sufficiently in advance of the beginning of any excavation so

that cross-sectional elevations and measurements can be taken of the
undisturbed ground. The existing ground adjacent to the structures shall not be
disturbed without the permission of the Engineer.
3.04.2 Trenches or foundation pits for structures or structure footings shall be of sufficient
size to permit the placing of structures or structure footings of the full width and
length shown. The sides of trenches or pits shall be adequately supported with
sheet or soldier type sheeting together with H-beams planking wale and strut at all
time, if necessary.
3.04.3 The elevations of the bottoms of footings as shown on the Drawings shall be
considered as approximate only and the Engineer may order, in writing, such
changes in dimensions or elevations of footings as may be deemed necessary to
secure a satisfactory foundations.
3.04.4 Rock excavation work shall be undertaken in accordance with Section 02008
“EARTHWORKS GENERALLY”.
3.04.5 Boulders, logs, and any other unsuitable material encountered in the excavation
shall be removed from the site and shall not be used for backfilling purposes.
3.04.6 After each excavation is completed, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer to that
effect, and no footing or bedding material shall be placed until the Engineer has
approved the depth of excavation and the character of the foundation material.
02010 - 6
3.04.7 Excavation to final grade shall not be made until just before the footing is to be
placed and the foundation material shall be compacted to 90 % of the maximum
dry density as determined in accordance with AASHTO T180, or as otherwise
specified, for spread footing type structures.
3.04.8 In the case of piled foundations, the final grade shall be thoroughly compacted
using mechanical tampers. When the foundation material is soft or mucky or
otherwise unsuitable, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove
the unsuitable material and replaced it with selected fill.
3.04.9 This foundation fill shall be placed and properly compacted in accordance with
AASHTO T180. The source and suitability of the fill material shall be as approved
by the Engineer.
3.04.10 If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the foundation material is unsuitable solely
because of the Contractor’s failure to fulfill his obligation to maintain the bottom of
the excavation in a dry condition, the Contractor shall:
1. Carry out his own expense the removal and replacement described above; or
2. Suspend work in that excavation until the foundation material becomes
suitable.
3.04.11 All excavated suitable material, which is approved by the Engineer, shall be
utilized as backfill or embankment, or shall be removed from the site if surplus to
requirements.
3.04.12 Where a box culvert or pipe culvert is to be located or extended in embankment,

the excavation shall be performed after the embankment has been constructed to
the proposed sub-grade level or to at least 10 cm above the top surface of the
culvert, and compacted sufficiently.
3.05 BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES:
3.05.1 On completion of structure, excavated areas if not to be backfilled in accordance

with Section 02014: “GRANULAR BACKFILL” or Section 02015: “FREE
DRAINING MATERIAL”, shall be backfilled with approved material to the level of
the finished ground surface. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, all
backfill shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of section 02012:
“FILLING, GRADING AND EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION”
3.05.2 All material surplus to the requirement of this Section shall, if instructed by the
Engineer, be considered as waste and treated in accordance with section 02013:
“WASTE”.
- END OF SECTION -
02010 - 7
SECTION 02011
BORROW MATERIAL
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This Section covers the clearing and stripping of borrow pits, the excavating and
hauling, and stockpiling of materials obtained from approved sources for
constructing embankment, sub-grade and other parts of the work or for backfilling as
required by the Contract or instructed by the Engineer.
Section 02008 “EARTHWORKS GENERALLY”;

Section 02009 “GENERAL EXCAVATION”;
Section 02010 “STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL”; and
Section 02012 “FILLING, GRADING AND EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION”.
1.02 APPLICABLE PROVISIONS, CODES AND STANDARD:
• American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
D 2166 Unconfined Compressive Strength Test.
• American Association of state Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):
ASTM AASHTHO;
D 421 Grain Size Analysis of Soils;

D 422 T88 Particle-Size Analysis of Soils
D 854 T100 Determination of Specific Gravity of Soil Using Vacuum
Method;
D 1194 T221 Plate-load Testing;
D 1556 T191 Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method;
T180 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate
Mixtures Using 10 lb (4.54-kg) Rammer and 18-in,
(457-mm) Drop;
D 1883 T193 California Bearing Ratio;
D 2166 Determination of Unconfined Compressive
Strength;
D 2216 Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture), Content of
Soil, Rock, and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures;
02011 - 1
D 2937 Density of Soil in Place by the Drive-Cylinder Method;

and
D 4318 T89, 90 Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils.
specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:

01008: “SUBMITTALS” and as specified herein.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL:
2.01.1 Borrow material shall be obtained from approved private sources. Permission to
open borrow pits, including advice as to its suitability, shall first be obtained in writing
from the Engineer. Nevertheless, the total amount of surplus material from common
excavation and structure excavation of this specification, after deduction of the
material declared unsuitable by the Engineer, shall be considered to be available for
use in the embankment.
2.01.2 Red Soil, or equivalent, of the characteristics that the soil shall be readily compacted,
shall be stable against external force, and shall not yield to compression settlement.
The borrow material shall be within the following limits:
Standards Value Remarks
ASTM D1883 6% Laboratory soaked minimum CBR

value
ASTM D1883 2% Volume change during soaking
2.01.3 Value of unconfined compressive strength of material for embankment shall be

greater than 0.2 N/mm² in accordance with ASTM D2166-91, when the material is
compacted to 95% maximum dry density in accordance with AASHTO T180-90 and
fully soaked with water.
2.01.4 Borrow material for embankment shall not contain Montmorillonite. When required
by the Engineer, a mineralogical test analysis shall be performed.
2.01.5 Borrow material shall be selected to meet the requirements and conditions of the
particular fill or embankment for which it is to be used. Materials shall be free from
detrimental quantities of organic material such as leaves, grass, roots and sewage.
02011 - 2
2.01.6 Any material classified by the Unified Classification System as OL, OH or Pt shall not
be used. Other satisfactory material may be used with the prior written approval of
the Engineer, with or without any tests required as directed by the Engineer.
2.01.7 The required minimum CBR of the borrow material shall be 50% per AASHTO T
193.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 BORROW PITS:
3.01.1 The distance of borrow pits from the work site shall not be replaced for extra
payment or revision of the Contract Price. In making his tender the Contractor shall
visit the site and form his estimate of the haulage costs on the basis of his own
survey of the possible nature and locations of the borrow pits.
3.01.2 Where suitable material for embankments is available adjacent to the Embankment,
the Engineer may order the excavation of drainage channels wider and deeper than
normally required in which case such excavation will be measured and included in
cross-sections as General Excavation.
3.02 PLACING AND COMPACTION:
Borrow material shall be incorporated in the permanent works in accordance with

the requirements of Section 02010: “STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL”
and Section 02012: “FILLING, GRADING AND EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION”.
3.03 DAMAGE TO THE PUBLIC ROADS AND LEVEL CROSSING:
3.03.1 The Contractor shall abide by all regulation and codes regarding the use of existing
road, streets and highways as hauling route from the borrow pits to the projects site.
3.03.2 The Contractor shall prevent the soiling of public roads and shall clear away any
debris left on public roads and sidewalks during the construction. Any damages
done to the existing roads shall be repaired, replaced or restored to their original
conditions, as approved by the Engineer or the Authorities in concerned, at the
expense of the Contractor.
- END OF SECTION -
02011 - 3
SECTION 02012
FILLING, GRADING AND EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This work shall consist of the construction of embankment and backfill unless
otherwise so stated, the work shall also include furnishing, placing, compacting
and shaping suitable material of acceptable quality obtained from approved
sources in accordance with these Specifications. The work shall be done with the
lines, levels, grades, dimensions and cross-sections shown on the Drawings and
as required by the Engineer.

OPERATIONS”
Section 02061 PUBLIC UTILITY”
1.02 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARD:
• American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
• American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

(AASHTO):
ASTM AASHTO
D 421 Grain Size Analysis of Soils;

D 422 T88 Particle-Size Analysis of Soils;
T221 Repetitive static Plate Load Tests of Soils and
Flexible Pavement Components for Use in
Evaluation and Design of Airport and Highway
Pavements;
02012 - 1
D 854 T100 Determination of Specific Gravity of Soil Using

Vacuum Method;
D 1194 T221 Plate-load Testing;
D 1556 T191 Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method;
D 1557 T180 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-
Aggregate Mixtures Using 10-lb (4.54-kg) Rammer
and 18-in, (457-mm) Drop;
D 1883 T193 California Bearing Ratio;
D 2166 Determination of Unconfined Compressive Strength;
D 2216 Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture)
Content of Soil, Rock, and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures;
D 2937 Density of Soil in Place by the Drive-Cylinder
Method; and
D 4318 T89, 90 Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of
Soils.
• Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS):
A1215 Method of Plate Load Test on Soils for Road.
specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:

PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL:
2.01.1 Material defined as suitable material under the Section 02009: “GENERAL
EXCAVATION” and the Section 02010: “STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION”.
2.01.2 Material defined by Section 02011: “BORROW MATERIAL”.
02012 - 2
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 SUBGRADE PREPARATION:
Subgrade preparation shall be in accordance with Section 02008:

“EARTHWORKS GENERALLY”.
3.02 PLACING:
3.02.1 Transporting and conveying of fill materials shall be controlled and supervised by
the Contractor for convenience of completion of the work.
3.02.2 Prior to placing any fill, the Contractor shall satisfactorily demonstrate that the
compaction method or methods, and the equipment that he proposes to use, will
provide the degrees of compaction hereinafter specified.
3.02.3 The Contractor shall place fill materials in horizontal loose layers and spread, mix
and place in such manner as to produce a uniform thickness of material.
Placement shall start in the deepest area and progress approximately parallel to
the finished grade.
3.02.4 No fill material shall be placed on areas where free water may be standing. Clods
or hard lumps shall be broken up before compacting the material in embankments.
3.02.5 When the location of advance construction of embankment would cut off water-
ways, severely restrict draining of run-off water, or otherwise result in blockage or
damming of water, temporary cross channels shall be cut through the
embankment as are needed to effect drainage; and which shall be maintained for
as long as necessary until drainage facilities are completed and useable.
3.03 STANDARD CROSS SECTION OF EMBANKMENT:
3.03.1 Embankment shall be shaped and graded in accordance with the Drawings.
3.03.2 Width of formation level of embankment from the centre shall be minimum 3.15 m,
taking into account the width required to secure ballast thickness below the rails
and the required surplus width for maintenance work.
3.03.3 Additional surplus width shall be accounted for, in addition to the above
requirement, against settlement and at raised embankment slope at curve section.
3.03.4 Gradient of embankment slope shall be a standard value of 1:1.51:2, when using
Red Soil as embankment material.
3.03.5 At slopes where the embankment exceeds 6 m in height, a 1.5 m wide berm shall
be provided at 3 m location from the formation level.
02012 - 3
3.03.6 Provide a gradient of 5% towards the slope direction for required drainage at
embankment crown (bellow sub-ballast) as well as at berm and counterweight
crown.
3.04 TEST EMBANKMENT:
3.04.1 Prior to commencement of permanent embankment construction, the Contractor

shall construct trial test embankments using borrow fill material and excavated in
situ material at the locations selected by the Contractor and approved by the
Engineer. The length of test compaction by equipment shall be 20m long.
3.04.2 The Contractor shall submit laboratory and field test results as specified below for
material and equipment that are most appropriate for the work, and also for
determination of the thickness of fill material of each layer, intervals between
successive filling works and testing method for approval by the Engineer.
Test Item Application Testing

Code
a. Moisture Content ASTM D 2216

b. Unit Weight ASTM D 2937
c. Specified Gravity ASTM D 854
d. Grain Size Analysis ASTM D 421-422
e. Liquid and Plastic Limits ASTM D 4218
f. Plate-load testing ASTM D 1194
3.04.3 Any changes in borrow material, or compaction equipment, a new trial

embankment test shall be performed, and standard shall be revised accordingly.
3.04.4 The Contractor shall determine compaction velocity and frequency for obtaining
required soil coefficient, after consolidation settlement.
3.04.5 The Contractor shall also select the types of compaction equipment.
3.04.6 The Contractor shall be well aware of the information regarding over compaction
and work efficiencies of the compaction equipment.
3.04.7 Base ground of the trial embankment test shall represent actual embankment
ground, as a general, but the first and second layers of trial embankment are
easily affected by the bearing ground. Prior measurement of strength and water
content is required, and if there is any effect to the strength and water content of
trial embankment, third and fourth layers will be required.
3.04.8 Measurement of surface settlement and CBR test will be required for both before
compaction and after required final compaction.
02012 - 4
3.05 COMPACTION:
3.05.1 Compaction work shall conform to the requirements as specified hereunder.
3.05.2 Trenches, holes, and other depressions outside of the areas where embankments
are to be constructed, but are within the limits of work, shall be graded to provide a
well – drained area.
3.05.3 Where embankments are to be constructed across the puddle, the base shall be
drained and dried prior to the permanent construction.
3.05.4 Pits, holes or other depression below adjacent ground levels shall be filled with
suitable material and compacted.
3.05.5 Construction work shall not be permitted when the weather is rainy and the
material, which contains excessive moisture, shall not be compacted until the
material is dry enough to obtain the required compaction.
3.05.6 At locations where it would be impracticable to use mobile power compacting

equipment, embankment layers shall be compacted to the specified requirements
by any method that will obtain the specified compaction.
3.05.7 Embankments shall be constructed in layers of uniform thickness and each layer
shall be tested in accordance with AASHTO T 221 using 30 cm in diameter steel
bearing plate, and the result of test shall be not less than 7 kg/cm3 at the top
surface of each layer compacted. The test as specified shall be performed by at
least one (1) group of test for each 100-meter long construction lot. One group of
test shall consist of three (3) individual tests to be provided at the location of the
center and the locations 2-m a part toward both sides of embankment shoulder
along the perpendicular to the centerline of the embankment.
3.05.8 Borrow material shall have an optimum moisture content of –2% and +4%.
Determine optimum moisture content and dry density from compaction test in
accordance with ASTM D 1557 and AASHTO T 180. Method of compaction test
shall be in accordance with ASTM D 1556.
3.05.9 Compaction test shall be performed at every 500 m2 for each layer of soil
compacted.
3.05.10 Thickness of each spreading layer shall conform to the result obtained from the
test embankment work specified in this section, but shall not be greater than 30
cm in thickness.
3.05.11 Slope of embankment shall be graded and shaped as indicated on the drawings,
and shall be compacted thoroughly as specified herein before and also shall be
temporary protected from erosion by rainfall by the use of suitable material
approved by the Engineer until such time that Slope Protection has been
completed.
- END OF SECTION -
02012 - 5
SECTION 02013
WASTE
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This item shall consist of excavating, ripping, loading, hauling and spreading in
waste areas, soil material designated as waste.
Section 02006 “DEMOLITION WORK”

(Not Applicable)
specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:

PART 2: PRODUCTS
(Not Applicable)
02013 - 1
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 WASTE MATERIAL:
Material shall be designated as ‘WASTE’ in following cases.
3.01.1 When the material resulting from the excavation made for construction is declared
in writing by the Engineer to be unsuitable in accordance with Section 02008:
“EARTHWORK GENERAL”, in the embankment or other work.
3.01.2 In general, highly organic clays, peat, soil containing large amounts of roots, grass
and other vegetation matter, domestic or industrial waste such as vinyl sacks and
refuse are recognized unsuitable.
3.01.3 Materials that are soft or unsuitable merely because they are too wet or dry are not
to be classified as unsuitable unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
3.01.4 The material proposed for wasting shall not be dumped until approved or directed in
writing by the Engineer.
3.02 WORK REQUIREMENTS:
3.02.1 Waste material shall be excavated below subgrade level in cut and below
embankment foundation level to the depth directed by the Engineer.
3.02.2 Where unsuitable material is excavated below the normal sub grade level or below
embankment foundation or for benching under embankment, the excavation shall
be backfilled with suitable material and in a manner that conforms with the
provisions of Section 02012: “FILLING, GRADING AND EMBANKMENT
CONSTRUCTION”.
3.02.3 Waste shall be removed and disposed of in waste areas provided by the Contractor
in such manner as to present a neat appearance and not to obstruct drainage of any
railway, road, property and/or public works. If it becomes necessary for the
Contractor to locate or relocate any waste areas, the Engineer shall approve them
before spreading any waste.
3.02.4 Waste areas shall be left in a smooth, neat and dry condition, as directed by the
Engineer, and all waste material shall be placed in such manner that adjacent
property will not be damaged or endangered.
3.02.5 Soil slopes shall not be steeper than 2:1, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
3.02.6 Execution of this work shall be considered as a subsidiary obligation of the

Contractor covered under the unit rates of Section 02006: “DEMOLITION WORK”,
Section: 02007: “SITE CLEARING”, Section 02009: “GENERAL EXCAVATION”,
Section 02010: “STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL” and Section 02011:
- END OF SECTION -
02013 - 2
SECTION 02014
GRANULAR BACKFILL
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This item shall consist of furnishing, placing and compacting granular backfill to be
placed behind the structure to form drainage layers shown on the Drawings.
1.01.2 The material shall be placed behind the various concrete structures as shown on the
Drawings or directed by the Engineer.

Section 02022 “BOXCULVERT AND PIPE CULVERT”
T 180 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 10-lb (4.54 kg) Rammer

and 18-in. (457-mm) Drop.
specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:

PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL:
The material shall be well-graded crushed or uncrushed gravel, stone, rock fill or
natural sand or a well-mixed combination of any of these.
02014 - 1
Grading requirement for the material shall be as follow:
Maximum size 40 mm;

Passing 4.75 mm sieve 25% to 90%;
Passing 0.075 mm sieve 0% to 10 %; and
Plasticity Index 10 max.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXECUTION:
The granular backfill shall be placed in layers not exceeding 15 cm and compacted
to a density of 95% of the maximum dry density determined according to AASHTO
T-180.
- END OF SECTION -
02014 - 2
SECTION 02015
FREE DRAINING MATERIAL
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This work shall consist of supplying and installing free draining material adjacent to
structures in accordance with these Specifications and in locations as shown on the
Drawings or instructed by the Engineer.
Section 02025 “OPEN DRAIN (U-DITCH AND L-DITCH)

Section 02035 “LEVEL CROSSING FACILITIES”
• American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):
D 698 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of

Soil Using Standard Effort
specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:

02015 - 1
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
Material shall be hard, clean crushed rock or gravel complying with the following
grading.
Sieve Size Passing by weight Percentage

63 mm 100
37.5 mm 85 - 100
19 mm 0 - 20
9.5 mm 0- 5
PART 3: EXECUTIONS
3.01 EXECUTION:
The method of construction will be at the discretion of the Contractor, but details
must be submitted for the Engineer’s approval before commencement of the work.
All details of the free draining material shall be as shown on the Drawing and the
degree of compaction shall be as instructed by the Engineer.
- END OF SECTION -
02015 - 2
SECTION 02016
FOUNDATION WORK
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This Section covers the material and construction requirements for leveling
foundation consist of cobble stone or sand with or without concrete as shown on the
Drawings.
1.01.2 The Contractor shall complete the work with the line, grades, sections and
dimensions as shown on the Drawings.
1.01.3 The Contractor shall furnish all labor, tool and equipment required to complete the
work.

Section 02068 “CONCRETE”
T 180 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 10-lb (4.54 kg)

Rammer and 18-in. (457-mm) Drop.
specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:

02016 - 1
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
2.01.1 Material to be used for the cobble stone foundation shall be a cube of hard and
durable limestone or andesite or granite of the size ranging from 10 cm to 15 cm of
practical size.
2.01.2 Sand shall be of the quality as specified in Section 02068: “CONCRETE”.
2.01.3 Leveling concrete shall be 15 N/mm2 in accordance with Section 02068:

“CONCRETE”.
PART 3: EXECUTIONS
3.01 EXECUTION:
3.01.1 Prior to placement of cobble stone or sand, excavated surface of bearing soil shall
be compacted thoroughly with mechanical tampers or suitable manners to the
required degree of 95% of the dry density as determined by AASHTO T180.
3.01.2 Sand or cobble stone shall be placed thoroughly over the finished bearing soil.
3.01.3 Concrete placement over the cobble stone shall be made so as not to disturb the
finished line.
3.01.4 Placement of concrete 15 N/mm2 shall be in accordance with Section 02068:

“CONCRETE”.
- END OF SECTION -
02016 - 2
SECTION 02017
SOIL MIXING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This Section covers the requirement for furnishing and implementing stabilization
of soft soil in situ, with special cement at the locations and extent as shown on the
Drawings.
1.01.2 The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment required to
complete the work.

• American Association for State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)

Standards:
T 89-81 Liquid Limit Test of Soil;

T 90-81 Plastic Limit Test of Soil;
T 100-75 Specific Gravity of Soil; and
T 265-79 Moisture Content of Soil.
D 421 Grain-Size Analysis of Soils;

D 422 Particle-Size Analysis of Soils;
D 854 Determination of Specific Gravity of Soil Using Vacuum
Method;
D 2216 Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture)
Content of Soil, Rock, and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures; and
D 4318 Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils.
02017 - 1
specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
1.04.2 Before commencement of this work, the Contractor shall submit the Work
Program describing as follows for approval of the Engineer:
1. The proportions of all ingredients that shall be used in the manufacture of

special cement.
2. Mix proportion of in situ soil improvement.
3. Test results from an independent commercial testing laboratory.
4. Detailed description of methods and equipment to be used of each operation,

the sequence of operations, and other required work associated with the
permanent construction.
5. No toxic certificate.
6. Result of environmental pollution test.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
Special cement to be used for stabilizing soil shall be a type absorbed completely
in water.
Chemical composition shall be as follows:
SiO2 Aℓ2O3 Fe2O3 CaO MgO SO3
15.09 4.26 4.26 65.90 1.77 1.52
Water shall be potable water.
02017 - 2
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION:
3.01.1 Before commencement of this work, the Contractor shall perform test boring,
survey, and field investigation covering entire section to determine the area for soil
mixing work and prepare a plan indicating procedures and methods of soil mixing.
3.01.2 Before commencement of this work, all stumps, roots of plant, boulders, rubbish,
and other combustible or non-combustible materials shall be removed in
accordance with the requirements specified in Section 02007: “SITE CLEARING”.
3.02 STORAGE AND HANDLING:
Special cement shall be stored in the same manner as Portland Cement. Special
cement shall not be placed directly on the ground but on pallets or square timbers.
Special cement shall be stored in a location where rainwater will not intrude, or be
in contact with the cement.
3.03 WATER CUT-OFF MEASURES:
3.03.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing temporary structures, in the case
that there are water paddies at the backside of the soil improvement area that,
when excavated, the water might intrude into the excavated pit. Under such
circumstances, water cut-off measures shall be provided prior to the excavation
work.
3.03.2 During excavation, if any water pockets are found, temporary drain ditch shall be
provided to drain water from the excavation.
3.04 EXECUTION:
3.04.1 The Contractor shall provide temporary dike, if required, to secure the existing
track and roadbed preventing damage due to the excavation.
3.04.2 Excavated unstable materials shall be neatly cleared from the site. Then the
borrow material temporarily stockpiled at an enough distance from the excavated
area.
3.04.3 Moisture content of the improved soil with special cement shall be adjusted by
watering with approved sprinkler equipment or drying out, as may be required, in
order that the degree of compaction specified in Section 02012: “FILLING,
GRADING AND EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION” may be attained.
3.04.4 The improved soil shall be backfilled, laid and compacted to the required depth by
approved equipment in line and grade as shown on the Drawing.
02017 - 3
To prevent surface from drying, or to protect surface from the impact of rainwater,
cover the soil improvement area with plastic sheet for 7 days after the completion
of compaction work.
3.04.5 Embankment material shall not be placed onto the finished soil mixing area before
the Engineer’s approval.
3.05 TESTING
3.05.1 Pre-Construction Testing:
1. Before commencement of the soil improvement work, the Contractor shall

perform the following laboratory tests specified below, in order to determine
the characteristics of the existing soft soil where the roadbed work shall be
executed.
2. Two representative samples shall be obtained from every locations where the
soil improvement work is to be applied.
Test Type Applicable Standard
Moisture Content ASTM D 2216 or AASHTO T 265-79

Unit Weight ASTM D 2937
Specific Gravity ASTM D 854 or AASHTO T 100-75
Grain Size Analysis ASTM D 421 and ASTM D 422
Liquid and Plastic Limits ASTM D 4318 or AASHTO T 89-90
and AASHTO T 90-81
3. Enclose soil samples in airtight plastic bags; in order to preclude variation in

water content of samples. Soil samples shall be sieved through a 37.5 mm
standard sieve.
4 Put soil samples and special cement in soil mixer and blend until the mixture
is uniform. Perform compaction in accordance with AASHTO T 180.
5. After 3 days of atmospheric curing under preserved humidity, perform 4 days

of immersion curing.
6 Perform CBR test in accordance with ASTM DD 1883-67 or AASHTO T 193-

81. By using 80, 90, and 100 kg/m³ of soil cement, the water content of soil
samples to be used for the CBR test shall be in 5 stages, using natural water
content as a base.
7. Test results shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Aside from the
CBR value and swelling, the test results shall include factors necessary to
analyze test results. Mixing amount of special cement, water and other
mixture shall be determined based on the test results approved by the
Engineer.
02017 - 4
3.05.2 Post-Construction Testing:
1. After the in situ soil has been stabilized with special cement and has been
cured for 3 days, the Contractor shall perform on site CBR test for every 250
m2 of stabilized soil. CBR test shall be performed in accordance with ASTM D
1883, or AASHTO T 193.
2. CBR test results shall indicate that the CBR value of stabilized soil is equal to
or higher than 20 percent. Submit CBR test results to the Engineer for
approval.
In the event that the CBR test results indicate a value is less than 20 percent,
the Contractor shall re-stabilize the in situ ground using different mix
proportion of special cement until 20 percent of CBR value is attained at his
own expense.
3. All test results of CBR test shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
- END OF SECTION -
02017 - 5
SECTION 02018
SOIL REPLACEMENT - GEOTEXTILES
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This Section covers the materials and construction requirements for reinforcement
of unstable bearing layer within the new embankment area. The work consists of
removal of unstable soil, installation of Geotextile and placement of borrow
material or suitable fill material as shown on the Drawings.
complete the work.
1.01.3 Prior to the commencement of the work, the Contractor shall perform the
laboratory test of soil sample taken from the boring where soil replacement to be
applied.
Section 02007 “SITE CLEARING”;

Section 02010 “STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL”;
Section 02011 “BORROW MATERIAL”;
Section 02012 “FILLING, GRADING AND EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION”;
Section 02013 “WASTE”.
• American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):
D 1117 Trapezoidal Tear Test;

D 1682 Mono-directional Tensile Test; and
D 1777 Measurement of Geotextile Thickness.
specified herein.
02018 - 1
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
1.04.2 The Contractor shall submit the sample product of Geotextile to the Engineer for
review and approval and certificate of conformance that the material furnished
conforms to the referenced standards specified herein. The Contractor shall also
submit manufacturer’s instruction manual and product catalogs of Geotextile for
review and approval of the Engineer. Related Shop Drawings shall also be
submitted.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
2.01.1 Geotextile
1. Geotextile material shall be made of 100 percent polypropylene non-woven

continuous, thermally bonded filaments.
2. Minimum thickness of Geotextile under compression of 2 N/mm² shall not be

less than 0.90 mm in accordance with ASTM D1777; under the compression
of 200 N/mm² , the Geotextile shall not be less than 0.83 mm with minimum
mass per unit area of not less than 350 gr/ m2 .
3. Tensile strength shall not be less than 24 N/mm² in accordance with ASTM D
1682 with maximum elongation of 50 percent, while tensile strength at 5
percent shall not be less than 9 N/mm².
4. Grab strength shall not be less than 1650 N in accordance with ASTM D
1682.
5. CBR puncture resistance shall not be less than 3700 N.
6. Geotextile integrity against dynamic pressure in test applying Drop Cone

Method shall not be more than 13 mm.
7. Coefficient of permeability under vertical pressure of 200 N/mm² shall not be

more than 1.7 x 10-4 m/sec.
8. Flow rate at 10 cm head shall not be more than 26  /m2/sec.
9. Apparent opening size O95 shall be the maximum of 40µm.
2.01.2 Fill Material
Fill material shall be in accordance with the requirements specified in Section

02011: “BORROW MATERIAL”
02018 - 2
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION:
3.01.1 Before commencement of this work, the Contractor shall perform test boring
survey and field investigation work entire site to determine the soft soil area and
prepare a plan indicating procedures and methods of soil replacement -
Geotextiles.
3.01.2 Before commencement of this work, all stumps, roots of plant, boulders, rubbish,
and other combustible or non-combustible materials shall be removed in
accordance with the requirements specified in Section 02007: “SITE CLEARING”.
3.02 STORAGE AND HANDLING:
3.02.1 Geotextiles delivered to the site shall be equipped with a cover for protection
against solar radiation.
3.02.2 Storage and piling of geotextile material rolls shall not result in any physical
damage.
3.02.3 The Contractor shall take care in handling Geotextile material.
3.03 WATER CUT-OFF MEASUREMENT:
3.03.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for required temporary structures, especially if
there are water paddies at the backside of the soil replacement area that, when
excavated, the water might intrude into the excavated pit. Under such
circumstances, a water cut-off measurement shall be implemented prior to the
excavation of the work.
3.03.2 After excavation, if there are any water poundings, provide temporary trench drain
to dewater the excavation. In addition, if the water intrudes into the pit during the
excavation work, use pump to dewater the excavation pit.
3.04 EXECUTION:
3.04.1 The Contractor shall provide temporary dike, if required, to secure the existing
track and roadbed preventing damage due to the excavation of soil replacement
area.
3.04.2 Excavated materials shall be disposed in accordance with the requirements

specified in Section 02013: “WASTE”
3.04.3 Geotextile material shall be approved by the Engineer in advance and then
installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation.
02018 - 3
3.04.4 Geotextile material shall be placed evenly over the excavated area. Each
Geotextile sheet shall be sewed to the suitable width for fieldwork in advance with
the manufacture’s guideline, or their edge shall be overlapped with practical
manner at the field to cover one lot of work.
3.04.5 Fill the pit with borrow material from the embankment side towards the outside, in
a way that the soft soil beneath the Geotextile will be pushed out to the outside by
the borrow material.
3.04.6 Replacement area with borrow material shall be compacted with approved
equipment.
3.04.7 Before compaction, the moisture content shall be adjusted by watering with
approved sprinkler equipment or drying out, as may be required, in order that the
degree of compaction specified in Section 02012: “FILLING, GRADING AND
EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION” shall be attained.
3.04.8 The edges of Geotextile shall be weighed with soil or aggregate to prevent sheet
to uplift by wind force and shall be carried in accordance with the referenced
standards.
- END OF SECTION -
02018 - 4
SECTION 02019
DEEP MIXING METHOD
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This Section covers the material and construction requirements for reinforcement
or improvement of the bearing layer of the embankment in the unstable area
designated in the Drawing. Deep mixing method is consisted of geogrid and
composite column which is structured with deep soil mixing method.
1.01.2 The deep soil mixing method is also composed of cement slurry and the exisiting
site soil mixed with special machinery system.
1.01.3 This method shall be selected from viewpoint of noise prevention, short work
period and economic reasons in order to improve and reinforce soft soil ground
under the embankment.
complete the work.
laboratory test of soil sample taken from the boring where column structure to be
constructed.

Section 02012 “FILLING, GRANDING AND EMBANKMENT
CONSTRUCTION”
Section 02070 “REINFORCING STEEL BARS”
• Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS)
• Indonesia Industrial Standards (SII)
02019 - 1
specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:

“SUBMITTALS” and criteria specified herein.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
Deep mixing method is consisted of column and geogrid. The column is a column
shaped body for soft soil improvement, which shall be structured by stirring and
mixing soil cement slurry and ground soil at the site mechanically. And top of each
column shall be connected by geogrid in order to reinforce equally the soft ground
under the embankment.
This method shal be selected for conforming to the settlement and load condition
basing upon the soil test result.
2.01.1 Column Materials
Following materials shall be applied for this method. And the strength to be gained
by soil test evaluation and soil cement slurry shall be approved by the Engineer in
advance.
(1) Column Diameter : Ø 1,000 mm

(2) Column Length : Length to be required for bearing capacity
(3) Column Pitch : 2.5 m (depends on soil condition)
(4) Design Strength : Fc= 800 KN /m2 (depends on soil condition)
(5) Cement Slurry : Basic composition shall be Portland cement (JIS R 5201
or equivalent) 90% and anhydrite 10% in weight with
some additive.
2.01.2 Cement additive amount shall be enough to conform to target strength by mix
proportion at laboratory test to gain design standard strength. The additive amount
shall be adjusted by laboratory test in advance.
2.01.3 Geogrid
The material shall be durable against the chemicals including acidity and alkalinity
effect, the bacteria and other biological effect, etc. and with light weight. This
material used for deep mixing method shall be ductile and flexible to reinforce soil
structure even under earthquake or the like.
02019 - 2
Locations of the Geogrid shall be proposed by the Contractor and approved by the
Engineer. The material shall be clean and without any slash in it, and also shall be
product of or supplied by the reliable manufacture or the supplier.
The physical properties of the material to be used in this method shall satisfy at
least the following requirement or equivalent:
GEOGRID FOR DEEP MIXING METHOD
Material Polyester Fibber coated by synthetic

resin
Longitudinal 200 ~ 700 kN/m
Design Strength
Transverse 50 ~ 100 kN/m
Grid Size 25 × 40 mm
Product Safety Creep 1.45
Factor Durability 1.10
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION:
3.01.1 Prior to commencing the construction work, the Contractor shall perform site
verification work on entire site, which referred to the Drawings, to determine the
area and prepare a plan indicating procedures and methods.
3.01.2 All stumps, roots of plant, boulders, rubbish, and other injurious materials shall be
removed in accordance with the requirements specified in Section 02007: “SITE
CLEARING” with the line, grades, and sections as required.
3.01.3 The Contractor shall neatly install the cofferdam or temporary facilities to protect
the work site from the ground water during the work.
3.01.4 The Contractor shall investigate the location of underground utilities such as
electric cables, water pipes.
3.01.5 Setting out of the center lines for the layout of piles shall be completed prior to
commencement of the driving work.
3.02 COLUMN NET:
The column is a column shaped body for soft soil improvement; so that the column
is structured by special machine stirring and mixing soil cement slurry and ground
soil at the site. And top of each column shall be connected by geogrid in order to
reinforce equally the soft ground under the embankment.
02019 - 3
3.02.1 Preparation for mixing work
It is very important to select soil cement additive and slurry condition, or coagulant,
soil stabilizer, which must be clearly in conformity with the actual soil ground
condition or property and the upper load from the embankment. The Contractor
have to provide abundant and sufficient experienced engineer with know-how for
this method, which shall be approved by the Engineer.
(1) The Contractor have to take away surface water or spring water on the
formation level prior to actual works.
(2) Scale Indication of Cement mixing plant shall be checked.
(3) Flow-meter and actual discharge amount of the grout pump shall be
checked.
3.02.2 Machinery
The most important point is stirring and mixing cement slurry with the site soil. In
case of clay, there might be risk that soil and stirring blade rotate together and it
causes insufficient strength due to the poor mixing. Therefore, the machine shall
be equipped with blade designed especially so as that soil does not rotate together
with the blade.
(1) Column Size

It shall be confirmed in trial work in advance whether designated column
size (diameter, length and depth) can be structured or not.
(2) Machinery shall be provided with a real time checking device to measure
mixing speed, blade rotation speed at each column length unit.
(3) Blade rotation shall be more than 350 rotation / m depth.
(4) It must be conformed that actual cement input amount is equivalent to
design amount. And it shall be monitored stable or constant discharge
amount.
3.02.3 Geogrid Installation Work
(1) Prior to installation of geogrid, leveling soil foundation shall be required in

order to secure good geogrid material. Any stone or rock shall be removed so
as not to damage the geogrid.
(2) Geogrid shall be spread on the leveld ground surface with overlap 1.0 m
or more each and without slack.
3.03 EMBANKMENT FILL:
3.03.1 First layer of the embankment fill on the geogrid shall be placed carefully so as not
to disturb the geogrid. The layer shall be compacted with hand tools. No heavy
equipment shall be permitted until the embankment fill on the geogrid has
accumulated deep enough to support the heavy equipment. Such depth shall be
determined by the Contractor based on the trial test embankment.
3.03.2 Successive embankment fill shall be done with the manner in accordance with
Section 02012: “FILLING, GRADING AND EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION”.
- END OF SECTION –
02019 - 4
SECTION 02020
CONCRETE PILE NET
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This Section covers the material and construction requirements for reinforcement
of the bearing layer of the embankment in the unstable area designated in the
Drawing. As a basic method in this section, the structure of pile net consists of
mass piles and steel net formed by steel re-bars connecting the pile heads as
shown on the Drawings. Pervious layer shall be constructed on such pile net
together with Geotextile and graded gravel as shown on the Drawings. However,
some alternative methods such as Column Net can be proposed by the Contractor
from viewpoint of noise prevention, short work period and economic reasons in
order to improve and reinforce equally soft soil ground under the embankment and
it shall be approved by the Engineer in advance.
complete the work.
laboratory test of soil sample taken from the boring where pile net structure to be
applied.

Section 02018 “SOIL REPLACEMENT-GEOTEXTILES”
• Peraturan Konstruksi Kayu Indonesia NI-5 PKKI 1973.
02020 - 1
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE / CONTROL PROGRAMME:
The Contractor shall comply with the applicable reference standards listed in
Section 01007: “QUALITY ASSURANCE / CONTROL PROGRAMME” and the
criteria specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:

“SUBMITTALS”.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
In this section, materials for basic method, concrete pile net, and materials for alternative
method, so-called “Column Net” are described as a reference.
2.01 MATERIALS OF CONCRETE PILE NET:
The material designated to be used in case of concrete pile net shall conform to
the following.
2.01.1 Concrete Pile
The mechanical property of wood material for pile shall be as follows:
- Bending Strength not less than 12.5 N/cm2

- Compressive Strength not less than 13 N/cm2
- Shearing Strength not less than 2 N/cm2
Dimensions and tolerance of the material shall be as follows:
- Diameter : More than 20-cm;.

- Shape : Straight, round and bend shall not more than 10
cm within 5 m; and
- Damaged area in Section : Less than 5% against the sectional area.
2.01.2 Steel Net:
Steel bars to be used for the steel net shall conform to Section 02070:
“REINFORCING STEEL BARS”
2.01.3 Geotextile:
Material shall conform to Section 02018: “SOIL REPLACEMENT-GEOTEXTILES”.
02020 - 2
2.01.4 Graded Gravel:
The maximum size shall be 37.5 mm and the grading shall be in accordance with
the following table:
Sieve Designation Percentage Passing by Weight
37.5 mm 100%
9.5 mm Up to 100%
4.75 mm Not more than 85%
2.02 MATERIALS OF COLUMN NET:
The Column net method is consisted of column and geogrid. The column is a
column shaped body for soft soil improvement, which shall be structured by stirring
and mixing soil cement slurry and ground soil at the site mechanically. And top of
each column shall be connected by geogrid in order to reinforce equally the soft
ground under the embankment.
The Contractor shall have to propose column net as an alternative method
conforming to the settlement and load condition based upon the soil test result.
2.02.1 Column Materials:
Following materials shall be applied for this method. And the strength to be gained
by soil test evaluation and soil cement slurry shall be approved by the Engineer in
advance.
1. Column Diameter : Ø 1,000 mm

2. Column Length : Length to be required for bearing capacity
3. Column Pitch : ctc 2.0 m
4. Column Strength : Fc= 10 KN /m2
2.02.2 Geogrid:
effect, the bacteria and other biological effect, etc. and with light weight. This
material used for column net method shall be ductile and flexible to reinforce soil
structure even under earthquake or the like.
Locations of the Geogrid shall be proposed by the Contractor and approved by the
product of or supplied by the reliable manufacture or the supplier.
The physical properties of the material to be used in this method shall satisfy at
02020 - 3
GEOGRID FOR COLUMN NET METHOD
Material Polyester Fibber coated by synthetic

resin
Vertical 200 ~ 700 kN/m
Design Strength
Horizontal 50 ~ 100 kN/m
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION:
3.01.1 Prior to commencing the construction work, the Contractor shall perform site
verification work on entire site which referred to the Drawings to determine the
area and prepare a plan indicating procedures and methods.
3.01.2 All stumps, roots of plant, boulders, rubbish, and other injurious materials shall be
removed in accordance with the requirements specified in Section 02007: “SITE
CLEARING” with the line, grades, sections as required.
3.01.3 The Contractor shall neatly install the cofferdam or temporary facilities to protect
the work site from the ground water during the work.
3.01.4 The bark of wooden pile shall be taken off and, in principle, the bottom edge of the
wooden pile shall be made a point head.
3.01.5 In case, the part of the wooden piles to be remained above the ground water, that
part shall be applied the preservative treatment conscientiously.
3.01.6 The Contractor shall investigate the location of underground utilities such as
electric cables, water pipes.
3.01.7 Setting out for the center lines for the layout of piles shall be completed prior to
commencement of the driving work.
3.02 PILE DRIVING:
3.02.1 Pile shall be driven vertically into the predetermined depth with a confirmation of
its position in advance. Every pile head shall be protected from the rammer by pile
head cap.
3.02.2 Piles shall be pitched accurately and driven in the positions according to the
Drawings or fixed by the Engineer. Piles deflected from the vertical shall, be
withdrawn and re-pitched so that the pile is driven vertically.
3.02.3 Piles driven out of proper position (offset from required centre line of piles or at in
correct spacing) shall be also be withdrawn and re-driven in correct location.
02020 - 4
3.03 STEEL NET:
3.03.1 All pile head extruded from the ground shall be cut off 50 cm above the finished
ground level. The pile head shall be successively connected to the neighboring
piles by steel re-bars to form the grids.
3.03.2 The re-bar shall be fastened or wound tightly to the wood pile.
3.03.3 No notch or hole onto the trunk to ease the re-bars shall not be allowed.
3.04 PERVIOUS LAYER:
3.04.1 After the pile net has been completed, graded gravel shall be placed with the
depth of 250 mm from the finished pile head. The Contractor shall not start the
placement of graded gravel until the area covered by the pile net have been
checked and approved by the Engineer.
3.04.2 The graded gravel shall not be compacted. Surface of the finished layer shall be
levelled uniformly.
3.04.3 The geotextile shall be spread out evenly over the finished layer. Each geotextile
sheet shall be sewed to the suitable width for fieldwork in advance with the
manufacture’s guideline, or their edge shall be overlapped with the practical
manner at the field to cover one lot of work.
3.05 EMBANKMENT FILL:
3.05.1 First layer of the embankment fill on the geotextile shall be placed carefully so as
not to disturb the geotextile. The layer shall be compacted with hand tools. No
heavy equipment shall be permitted until the embankment fill on the geotextile has
accumulated deep enough to support the heavy equipment. Such depth shall be
determined by the Contractor based on the trial test embankment.
3.05.2 Successive embankment fill shall be done with the manner in accordance with
02020 - 5
SECTION 02021
DRAINAGE GENERALLY
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This work shall consist of pipe culverts, box culverts, open U-ditches, French drain,
open channel, siphon and other drainage facilities, and other work items involved,
all in conformity with the lines, grades and dimensions as shown on the Drawings
and as instructed by the Engineer.

Section 02008 “EARTHWORKS GENERALLY”.
1.02 APPLICABLE, CODES AND STANDARD:
(Not Applicable)
01007: “QUALITY ASSURANCE/ CONTROL PROGRAMME” and the criteria
specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:

PART 2: PRODUCTS
(Not Applicable)
02021-1
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL:
3.01.1 The types and characteristics of the drainage structures shown on the Drawings
may be subject to modification by the Engineer due to the changes of the site
condition and/or alternation of the Government’s planning.
3.01.2 Before commencement of the drainage works, the Contractor shall undertake a
survey of the site to confirm or to determine the location, pipe or channel size, invert
level and estimated discharge of all storm water and/or sewer flows entering into the
site.
3.01.3 On the basis of the result of this survey, the final types, lines, characteristics and
quantities shall be decided by the Engineer, who will inform the Contractor in writing
in due time in relation to approved schedule of work submitted by the Contractor.
3.01.4 Responsibility for accurately locating all existing flows will rest with the Contractor.
3.01.5 Survey work shall be done in accordance with the requirements specified in Section
01018: “SURVEY”
3.01.6 The Engineer reserves the right to inspect and test all pre-cast concrete items before
their delivery to the site and any time prior to and during laying.
3.02 SEQUENCE OF WORK:
3.02.1 The Contractor shall schedule the construction of drainage works that the discharge
of run-off from rain or other sources, both during and after construction, is properly
provided for.
3.02.2 To avoid damage to work in course of construction the Contractor shall provide in
due time adequate means of protection, including all necessary temporary outlet
ditches, dams, or diversion channels.
3.02.3 Culverts or other drainage works for the discharge of run-off water either during or
after construction shall not be constructed until adequate facilities for the in-flow and
out-flow of the water have been completed, and they shall be kept clear of all
obstructions that might impede the flow of water.
3.02.4 All culverts, ditches, drains and other drainage works shall be operative before work
is commenced on the construction of sub-grade, sub-base, sub-ballast or shoulders.
3.02.5 Where new drainage connects to existing, the existing drainage shall be thoroughly
cleaned out at Contractor’s cost before the final connection is made.
3.02.6 These requirements shall be met without additional payment and all costs thereof
shall be included in the unit price for the pay item being installed or constructed.
02021-2
3.03 MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING DRAINAGE:
3.03.1 The Contractor shall clean and maintain the existing drainage entering, crossing or
affecting the Works.
3.03.2 This shall include, if affected by the Contractor’s operations and where required by
the Engineer, the cleaning of all existing channels, ditches, siphons, irrigation and
pipes upstream and downstream to an e100-m from beyond the Construction limits
and the right-of-way or until the irrigation will become function again, and the
removal and disposal of rubbish recovered from cleaning.
3.03.3 Should the maintenance work necessitate, in the opinion of the Engineer, repair,
remedial or reconstruction work to the existing drainage, except where such work is
due to the damage caused by the Contractor, the Engineer will instruct the extent of
such work required and the Contractor will be entitled to payment under the
appropriate pay item or items included in other sections of the Specifications.
- END OF SECTION -
02021-3
SECTION 02022
BOX CULVERT AND PIPE CULVERT
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This Section shall consist of reinforced concrete drainage pipe furnished and
installed in general locations, across tracks and roads, and the construction of box
culverts as shown on the Drawings.
1.01.2 All works shall be done in accordance with these Specifications and in conformity
with the lines, levels, grades and dimensions shown on the Drawings or as
directed by the Engineer as a result of the Contractor’s survey mentioned in
Section 01018: “SURVEY” and 02021: “DRAINAGE GENERALLY”.

OPERATIONS”
Section 02016 “FOUNDATION WORK”
Section 02069 “CEMENT MORTAR”

• Japanese Industrial Standard (JIS);
• Standard Industrial Indonesia (SII);
• Peraturan Beton Bertulang Indonesia 1971;
• Standard Nasional Indonesia (SNI) Concrete 2002.
02022 - 1
All works shall comply with the applicable reference standards listed in Section
01007: “QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL PROGRAMME” and as specified
herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01008: “SUBMITTALS” and in the

requirements specified herein.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL:
2.01.1 All drainage pipes and box culverts shall be in accordance with the details shown
on the Drawings and to the requirements of JIS A 5303, or SII standards or PBI
71, SNI Concrete 2002.
2.01.2 The centrifugal pre-cast reinforced concrete pipe shall be Class A as specified by
JIS A 5303, or SII standards, unless otherwise modified by the Engineer.
2.01.3 Concrete for box culverts shall be Class C and leveling concrete shall be Class K
designated in Section 02068: “CONCRETE” and Section 02016: “FOUNDATION
WORK”
2.01.4 Reinforcing Steel Bars shall comply with the requirements specified in Section
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXCAVATION:
3.01.1 Before commencement of excavation, the Contractor shall take all necessary
measures to keep the excavation free from free surface water or surface water
run-off.
3.01.2 Excavation shall be performed in accordance with the relevant requirements of

Section 02010: “STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL”, Section 02021:
“DRAINAGE GENERALLY” and specified herein.
3.01.3 Reference is made to Section 01011: “SECURITY OF RAILWAY OPERATIONS”

and Section 01012: “WINDOW-TIME AND SPEED DOWN OF TRAIN
OPERATIONS”, which shall apply to the construction of Box culvert and pipe
culvert.
02022 - 2
3.01.4 The Contractor shall place a temporary steel rail bundle bridge across the
excavation of adequate strength to support train loads when necessary during the
culvert and pipe construction, or other means to carry train loads as approved by
the Engineer.
3.01.5 The sides of pits and trenches shall be thoroughly supported at all times.
3.01.6 Excavation undertaken within 2.5-m of any track shall be continuously supported,
and the method to be used shall not extend above ground level excessively.
3.01.7 Support systems shall be sheet piles, wales and adjustable struts, or planking,
soldiers, wales and adjustable struts.
3.01.8 The supports may be left in pits or trenches only if approved by the Engineer.
3.01.9 Excavation shall be performed in accordance with relevant requirements of

Section 02010: “STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL”.
3.01.10 All excavated material not required for back filling shall be dealt with in accordance
with the requirements specified in Section 02012: “FILLING, GRADING AND
EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION” or Section 02013: “WASTE”
3.01.11 Soft spots in the bottom of excavation shall be removed and resulting void
immediately backfilled with Granular back fill in accordance with the requirements
specified in Section 02014:“GRANULAR BACKFILL”.
3.01.12 Any suitable material below the level of the concrete pipe bed which is removed
unnecessary shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense, undertake the
additional excavation and replacement with Granular back fill to the satisfaction of
the Engineer
3.01.13 In case that additional drainage pipes are required by the Engineer in where the
filling has been completed, excavation shall be carried out so as to minimize
damage to the existing surface.
3.01.14 Excavation for box culverts and pipe culverts shall be of sufficient size to permit
the placement and removal of forms for the full length and width of structure and
foundation as shown on the Drawings.
3.01.15 At places of jointing, adequate excavation shall be made for ease of installing
joints and shall be backfilled and compacted. Loose disintegrated rock and thin
strata, or unsatisfactory material, shall be removed.
3.02 BEDDING, LAYING AND SURROUNDING OF PIPES:
3.02.1 All pipes shall be laid, using cradles if necessary, to the designated line and level
as directed by the Engineer. Joints shall be sealed with 1:2 cement mortar, except
where otherwise specified, so that water will not leak.
02022 - 3
3.02.2 The inside of the joint shall be wiped and finished smooth and outside shall be
protected and cured for two days or as otherwise directed by the Engineer to
prevent cracking.
3.02.3 After the Engineer’s approval of the pipes and joints, the Contractor shall complete
the concrete bedding and haunching or surrounding as instructed by the Engineer.
3.02.4 Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted below and around the pipe to the
dimensions shown on the Drawings, but special care should be taken to avoid
dislodging the pipes or damaging the joints.
3.03 FOUNDATION AND JOINTS:
3.03.1 Cobble stone base and leveling concrete shall be constructed in accordance with
the requirements specified in Section 02016: “FOUNDATION WORK”.
3.03.2 Masonry foundation and open channel shall be constructed in accordance with the
requirements specified in Section 02029: “STONE MASONRY”.
3.03.3 Construction joint for concrete and stone masonry shall be installed using asphalt
coating as indicated on the Drawings.
3.04 CONCRETE WORK:
3.04.1 Concrete:
1. Concrete work shall be in accordance with the requirements specified in

Section 02068: “CONCRETE” and specified herein.
2. To the maximum extent as possible, the Contractor shall cast concrete for the
main components of the concrete work, such as the slab and the side walls, in
a single mass operation.
3.04.2 Formwork:
1. Formwork shall be designed for the loads and lateral pressures, vibration and
other loads as outline in ACI 347.
2. Maximum deflection of facing materials of concrete surface exposed to view

shall be not greater than 1/240 of the span between the structural supports.
3. Adequate supports shall be provided so that the forms can withstand the
hydrostatic pressure of concrete when poured.
4. Surface of forms shall be designed to provide the required finishes as

specified in Section 02068: “CONCRETE”.
02022 - 4
3.04.3 Placing Concrete:
1. Concrete shall not be placed until all form work, reinforcement and other
embedded items have been inspected and approved by the Engineer, and
until when applicable precautions against casting concrete in hot weather
conditions have been taken.
2. Concrete shall be placed and consolidated in horizontal layers, which shall not
exceed 400 mm in thickness. Concrete shall not be allowed to flow laterally a
distance greater than 1.0 meter from the point of deposit. All concrete shall
be re-vibrated as long as the running internal vibrator will sink of its own
weight.
3. Concrete shall be compacted in its final position within two hours from the
time of introduction of the cement into the aggregates, but in all cases at least
90 minutes less than the certified initial set time of the cement.
4. Casting concrete in hot weather shall be in accordance with the requirements

specified in Section 03001: “CONCRETE” and specified herein.
5. The temperature of concrete at the point of placement shall at all times be

less than 32 degree.
6. Any concrete, which has reached a temperature greater than, that specified
shall not be used.
Temperature of concrete shall be measured 50 mm below the surface immediately
prior to placement in the forms.
7. Reinforcing steel bars and forms shall be protected from direct sunrays.
Reinforcing steel bars and forms shall be cooled off with fog misting
immediately before concrete placing.
8. Concrete shall not be placed when the work will be affected by wind-blown
sand conditions.
3.05 BACK FILLING AND REINSTATEMENT:
3.05.1 Backfilling shall not commence until in the opinion of the Engineer, the concrete
has achieved sufficient strength.
Backfilling shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements specified in
Section 02010: “STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL” and Section
02014: “GRANULAR BACKFILL”, except that the maximum thickness of loose
material shall not exceed 15-cm.
3.05.2 Where insufficient suitable material is available from any particular pipe
excavation, surplus material from any other excavation shall be used.
3.05.3 On completion of backfilling the area excavated shall be reinstated to its original
condition but the Engineer may waive or modify this requirement if the area is to
be overlaid or reconstructed under other Section of Contract.
- END OF SECTION -
02022 - 5
SECTION 02023
SIPHON
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This Section covers the requirements for furnishing and providing two types of
reinforced concrete siphon traversing new track to connect with the existing one as
shown on the Drawings.
Section 01018: “SURVEY” and 02021: “DRAINAGE GENERALLY”
Section 01011 “SECURITY OF RAILWAY OPERATIONS”;

OPERATIONS”;
Section 02010 “STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL”;
Section 02011 “BORROW MATERIALS”;
Section 02013 “WASTE”;
Section 02014 “GRANULAR BACKFILL”;
Section 02016 “FOUNDATION WORK”;
Section 02021 “DRAINAGE GENERALLY;”
Section 02029 “STONE MASONRY”;
Section 02068 “CONCRETE”;
Section 02069 “CEMENT MORTAR”; and
Section 02070 “REINFORCING STEEL BARS”.
02023 - 1
D 1751 Performed Expansion Joint Filter for concrete Paving and

Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient
Bituminous Types).
• American Concrete Institute (ACI).
• Japanese Industrial Standard (JIS).
• Standard Industri Indonesia (SII).
• Standard Nasional Indonesia (SNI).
Comply with the applicable reference described in Section 01007: “QUALITY

ASSURANCE/CONTROL PROGRAMME” and as specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:

PART 2: PRODUCT
2.01 CONCRETE:
Concrete work shall be in accordance with the requirements specified in Section

02068: “CONCRETE” and specified herein.
Compressive strength of the concrete siphon shall be Class 24 N/mm2.
2.02 NON-SHRINK GROUT:
Non-shrink grout shall be a non-shrink additive of a standard manufacturer’s

product, such as iron fillings (powder) or aluminum powder, as approved by the
Engineer. Compressive strength shall be 40 N/mm².
2.03 FOUNDATION:
Cobble stone and leveling concrete shall be in accordance with the requirements
specified in Section 02016: “FOUNDATION WORK” and Section 02068:
“CONCRETE”, and as specified herein.
02023 - 2
2.04 STONE MASONRY:
Stones masonry walls and bases to be used for water ways on the ground shall be
in accordance with the requirements specified in Section 02029: “STONE
MASONRY” and as specified herein.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 DEMOLITION:
3.01.1 Demolition work shall be in accordance with Section 02006: DEMOLITION and as
specified herein.
3.01.2 Before beginning of any demolition work, the Contractor shall carefully survey the
existing site and examine the drawings and specifications to determine the extent
of the work. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to insure against
damage to existing work to remain in place, especially against obstruction to
existing train operation, and any damage to such work shall be repaired or
replaced as approved by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Employer. The
Contractor shall carefully coordinate the work of this section with all other work
and construct and maintain shoring, bracing, supports and any other temporary
work, as required, to insure safe train operation.
3.01.3 The Contractor shall provide temporary diversion for ensuring water flow during
the construction. Any disturbance of water flowing or stagnating water shall not be
allowed.
3.01.4 Refer to Section 02006: “DEMOLITION” for serviceability of existing siphon.
3.02 EXCAVATION:
run-off.

Section 02010: “STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL”, Section 02021:
“DRAINAGE GENERALLY” and specified herein.

OPERATIONS”, which shall especially apply to the construction of open channel
section.
siphon construction, or other means to carry train loads as approved by the
Engineer.
02023 - 3
3.02.6 Excavation undertaken within 2.5-m from any track shall be continuously
supported, and the method to be used shall not extend above ground level
excessively.
3.02.7 Support systems shall be sheet piles, wales and adjustable struts, or planking,
soldiers, wales and adjustable struts.
3.02.9 All excavated material required for back filling and for disposal shall be dealt with
in accordance with the requirements specified in Section 02010: “STRUCTURE
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL” and/or Section 02013 “WASTE”
3.02.10 Soft spots in the bottom of siphon excavation shall be removed and resulting void
shall be immediately backfilled with Granular backfill in accordance with the
requirements specified in Section 02014: “GRANULAR BACKFILL”.
3.02.11 Excavation for siphon shall be of sufficient size to permit the placement and
removal of forms for the full length and width of structure and foundation as shown
on the Drawings.
3.02.12 At connection joints, adequate excavation shall be made to allow for ease of
making required joints. Loose disintegrated rock and thin strata, or unsatisfactory
material, shall be removed.
3.03 FOUNDATION AND JOINTS:
3.03.1 Cobble stone base and leveling concrete shall be constructed in accordance with
the requirements specified in Section 02016: “FOUNDATION WORK”.
3.03.2 Masonry foundation and open channel shall be constructed in accordance with the
requirements specified in Section 02029: “STONE MASONRY”.
3.03.3 Concrete’s and stone masonry’s construction joint shall be constructed as

indicated on the Drawings.
3.03.4 The Contractor shall be required to carry out any countermeasure for discrepancy
of longitudinal direction between existing and new structure or construction joint.
3.04 CONCRETE WORK:
3.04.1 Concrete
1. Concrete work shall be in accordance with the requirements of the

Specifications specified in Section 03001: “CONCRETE” and the
02023 - 4
main components of the concrete work, such as the slab and the side-wall, in
3.04.2 Formwork
1. Formwork shall be designed for the loads and lateral pressures, vibration and

Surface of forms shall be designed to provide the required finishes as specified in
Section 02068: “CONCRETE”.
when applicable precautions against casting concrete in hot weather
conditions are taken.
distance greater than 1.0 meter from the point of deposit. All concrete shall be
re-vibrated as long as the running vibrator will sink of its own weight.
4 Casting concrete in hot weather shall be in accordance with the requirements

specified in Section 02068: “CONCRETE” and the specified herein.

6. Any concrete, which has reached a temperature greater than specified, shall
not be used.
7. Temperature of concrete shall be measured 50 mm below the surface

immediately prior to placement in the forms.
sand conditions.
02023 - 5
3.05 BACKFILLING AND REINSTATEMENT:
Backfilling shall not commence until in the opinion of the Engineer, the concrete
has achieved sufficient strength. Backfilling shall be carried out in accordance with
the requirements in Section 02010: “STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND
BACKFILL” and the maximum thickness of loose material shall not exceed 15-cm.
Where insufficient suitable material is available from any particular siphon

excavation, surplus material from any other excavation shall be used.
On completion of backfilling the area excavated shall be reinstated to its original
- END OF SECTION -
02023 - 6
SECTION 02024
OPEN CHANNEL
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This Section covers the requirements for furnishing and providing reinforced
concrete open channel for the new track and slope protection in accordance with
the details shown on the Drawings.

OPERATIONS”;
Section 02021 “DRAINAGE GENERALLY”;
• American Concrete Institute (ACI);

• Standard Industri Indonesia (SII);
02024-1
specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:

PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 STRUCTURAL STEEL:
2.01.1 Structural steel shall be in accordance with the requirements specified in Section
02067: “STEEL STRUCTURES” and specified herein.
Rail support shall be R42

Anchor rebar for rail support shall conform to Section 02070: “REINFORCING
STEEL BARS”.
2.02 CONCRETE:
Concrete work shall be in accordance with the requirements specified in Section

02068: “CONCRETE” and specified herein.
Compressive strength of the concrete for Open Channel shall be Class 24N/mm2.
2.03 NON-SHRINK GROUT:
Non-shrink grout shall be a non-shrink additive of a standard manufacturer’s

product, such as iron fillings (powder) or aluminum powder, as approved by the
Engineer. Compressive strength shall be 40 N/mm².
2.04 FOUNDATION:
Cobble stone and leveling concrete shall be in accordance with the requirements
specified in Section 02016: “FOUNDATION WORK” and Section 02068:
“CONCRETE”
02024-2
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL:
measures to keep the excavation free from surface water or surface water run-off.

Section 02010: “STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL” and Section
02021: “DRAINAGE GENERALLY” and specified herein.

OPERATIONS”, which shall apply to the construction of Open Channel.
excavation of adequate strength to support train loads when necessary during
Open Channel construction, or other means to carry train loads as approved by
the Engineer.
3.01.5 Excavation shall be of sufficient size and depth to allow for placement of concrete
abutments and their inspection by the Engineer for the full length and width of
structure and foundation as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer. Loose disintegrated rock and then strata, or unsatisfactory material,
shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory material.
3.01.6 The Contractor may use material available from excavation or borrow material for
backfill. Backfill shall be accomplished in 30-cm lifts and compacted in accordance
with Section 02012: “FILLING, GRADING AND EMBANKMENT
CONSTRUCTION” or as approved by the Engineer.
3.02 FOUNDATION BASE:
3.02.1 Cobble stone base shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements
specified in Section 02016: “FOUNDATION WORK” and as indicated on the
Drawings. Cobble stone base shall be well compacted and approved by the
Engineer.
3.03 CONCRETE WORK:
3.03.1 Concrete:

Section 02068: “CONCRETE” and specified herein.
main components of the concrete work, such as the slab and the side walls, in
02024-3
3.03.2 Form work:
1. Form work shall be designed for the loads and lateral pressures, vibration and

Surface of forms shall be designed to provide the required finishes as
1. Concrete shall not be placed until all formwork, reinforcement and other
until when applicable precautions against concreting in hot weather conditions
have been taken.
re-vibrated as long as the running internal vibrator will sink of its own weight.
4. Placing concrete in hot weather shall be done in accordance with the

requirements specified in Section 02068: “CONCRETE” and specified herein.

6. Any concrete, which has reached a temperature greater than specified, shall
not be used.

sand conditions.
02024-4
3.04 RAIL SUPPORT (R42) AND ANCHOR REBAR:
3.04.1 Rail support shall be 4 pieces and secured with two anchor rebar for each side.
Rail support shall cut flat, and all edges shall be reasonably free from burrs, shear
deformations or other conditions which prevent full continuous rail support on the
supporting main rail R54.
3.04.2 Holes for anchor rebar shall be drilled and/or reamed only and edges made free
from burrs. Holes shall be sufficiently oversized to facilitate easy setting of anchor
rebar without the use of force.
3.04.3 Rail support shall be accurately set at the location and position indicated on the
Drawings. Rail support shall be in full contact with the surface of non-shrink grout
and the anchor rebar. No voids shall exist between the rail support and the non-
shrink grout.
3.04.4 Anchor rebar shall be carefully installed utilizing rail support or comparable
template such as facilitate easy placement and to permit true position as shown on
the Drawings. Anchor rebar shall be accurately placed at the installed position until
placement of concrete.
3.04.5 Anchor rebar shall be set to a depth that permits full grip by the steel wire and
without excessive projection of the shank end above the anchor rebar.
3.04.6 When anchor rebar shall be installed in place and concrete shall be cast in place,
anchor rebar shall be jointed for full with reinforced steel structure without
overstress that could result in failure or damage.
3.05 FILLING AND REINSTATEMENT:
3.05.1 Backfilling shall not commence until in the opinion of the Engineer, the concrete
has achieved sufficient strength. Backfilling shall be carried out in accordance with
the requirements in Section 02010: “STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND
BACKFILL” and Section 02014: “GRANULAR BACKFILL”, and the maximum
thickness of loose material shall not exceed 15-cm.
3.05.2 On completion of backfilling the area excavated shall be reinstated to its original
- END OF SECTION -
02024-5
SECTION 02025
OPEN DRAIN (U- DITCH AND L-DITCH)
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This Section covers the requirements for furnishing, providing of materials and
construction of precast concrete open drain and outlet along the new track way as

OPERATIONS”
• Indonesian Industrial Standards (SII).
specified herein.
02025 - 1
1.04 SUBMITTALS:

PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
2.01.1 Foundation materials such as cobble stone and coarse sand shall be in
accordance with the requirements specified in Section 02016: “FOUNDATION
WORK”.
2.01.2 Bakfill material shall be in accordance with the requirements specified in Section
02015: “FREE DRAINING MATERIAL”.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXCAVATION:

Section 02009: “GENERAL EXCAVATION”
3.01.2 Excavation shall be performed to the lines and grades as shown on the Drawings,
and shall include removal and disposal of material classified as unsuitable
material.
3.01.3 Excavated suitable material shall be stockpiled with the manner at a place
distance from the banks of trench to be re-used as backfill material, if the material
meets the requirements specified in Section 02010: “STRUCTURE EXCAVATION
AND BACKFILL”.
3.01.4 Grading or adequate slope shall be provided around the excavated trench so as to
prevent surface water flow into the excavation area, and any stagnant water
therein shall be removed.
3.01.5 Unauthorized over excavation shall be backfilled at no additional cost to the

Employer
3.01.6 Bottom of the trenches shall be accurately graded to provide uniform bearing and
support for ditch. Saturated soft material shall be removed and replaced with
satisfactory material. Loose soil shall be thoroughly compacted with equipment
well suited for the type of material encountered.
02025 - 2
3.02 BACKFILL AND COMPACTION:
3.02.1 Bedding material shall consist of coarse sand provided in thickness shown on the
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
3.02.2 Thickness of each spreading backfill layer shall not more than 30 cm and shall be
compacted with appropriate equipment. Compacting of layer of cohesive backfill
shall be 85% of maximum density and 90% of maximum density for non-cohesive
backfill.
3.03 LAYOUT:
3.03.1 All work on standardized open drain shall be carefully set out and constructed so
that the upper surfaces must be incorporated smoothly into curbs, sidewalks,
existing drainage system, etc.
3.03.2 The Engineer may reject any item of work under this section when the upper
surfaces do not meet the tolerances for curb, sidewalks and existing drainage
system given elsewhere in these Specifications.
- END OF SECTION -
02025 - 3
SECTION 02026
FRENCH DRAIN
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This Section covers the requirements for furnishing and providing French drains in
the station yards and in new embankments and gabion outlets as shown on the
Drawings.
with the lines, levels, grades and dimensions shown on the Drawings or the
Engineer’s instruction to be made on the basis a result of the Contractor’s survey
specified in Section 01018: “SURVEY” and Section 02021: “DRAINAGE
GENERALLY”.

OPERATIONS”
Section 02028 “GABION”
D 1777-64 (1975) Method for Measuring Thickness of Textile Materials;

D 3776-85 (1990) Test Methods for Mass per Unit Area (Weight) of
Woven Fabric;
D 3786-87 Test Methods for Hydraulic Bursting Strength of
Knitted Goods and Non-woven Fabrics: Diaphragm
Bursting Strength Tester Method;
02026 - 1
D 4491-92 Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by

Permittivity;
D 4595-86 Test Methods for Tensile Properties of Geotextiles by
the Wide Width Strip Method;
D 4751-87 Test Methods for Determining the Apparent Opening
Size of a Geotextile; and
D 4833-88 Test Method for index Puncture Resistance of
Geotextiles, Geomembrane, and Related Products.
• Indonesia Normalization Standard (SNI) Publications:
03/6154/99 Heavy Galvanized Wire for Gabion.
• Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS) Publications:
G 3112 Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
The Contractor shall comply with applicable reference described in Section 01007:
“QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL PROGRAMME” and as specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
1.04.2 The Shop Drawings shall include all shop and erection details. Members and
connections not shown on the Drawings shall be detailed by the fabrication
drawing indicated on the Shop Drawings which shall be submitted to Engineer for
his approval prior to commencement of the work.
1.04.3 Certificates of compliance shall be submitted for gabions and geotextile materials
by the fabricator attesting that the materials provided are in accordance with the
standards specified herein.
1.04.4 Manufacturer’s instructions and catalog cuts shall be submitted for the assembly
and installation of gabions and geotextiles.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
2.01.1 Wire Mesh
1. Heavily galvanized wire shall conform to the requirements of SNI 03 / 6154 /

99.
02026 - 2
Tensile strength of steel wire shall not be less than 410 N/mm² and shall not
exceed 510 N/mm².
2. Wire diameters, tolerances and weight of zinc coating shall be in accordance

with the following table:
Wire Diameter (mm) Tolerance (mm) Min. Zinc Coating (gr/m2)
3.20 ± 0.12 275
3. The adhesion of the zinc coating to the wire shall be such that when the wire
is wrapped six times around wire diameter mandrel shall not flake or crack to
such an extent that any zinc cannot be removed by rubbing with bare fingers.
2.01.2 Geotextile shall be non-woven synthetic filter cloth with the following properties:
Physical Properties
Test Method Standard Units

Unit Weight (Mass) ASTM D3776 225 g/m²
Thickness ASTM D1777 1.9 mm
Mechanical Properties

Tensile Strength ASTM D4595 12.3 kN/m
(Wide strip)
Mullen Burst ASTM D3786 2.58 Mpa
Elongation (Wide strip) ASTM D4595 50 %
Puncture ASTM D4833 530 N
(U.S. Rod Method)
Hydraulic Properties

Pore Size ASTM D4751 0.15 mm
(Apparent Opening)
Water Flow Rate (Vertical) ASTM D4491 88 l/m²/sec
Permeability ASTM D4491 0.32 cm/sec
2.01.3 Reinforcing steel bars shall conform to SR 24, JIS G 3112.
2.01.4 Foundation materials such as cobble stone and coarse sand shall be in
WORK”.
2.01.5 Backfill material shall be in accordance with the requirements specified in Section
02026 - 3
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL:
3.01.1 Excavation will be unclassified regardless of the nature of material encountered.

The Contractor shall perform excavation of every type of material encountered
within the limits of the work to the lines, grades, and elevations indicated.
3.01.2 Excavations below indicated depths will not be permitted. Material removed below
the depths indicated without specific direction of the Engineer shall be replaced, at
no additional cost to the Employer, to the indicated excavation grade with
satisfactory materials.
3.01.3 Excavated material shall be stockpiled at a distance from the excavation pit to
preclude cave ins, but at a location where the stockpile will not be an obstruction
to the existing track way. Backfill shall be accomplished using existing stockpiled
and excavated materials placed in 30-cm layers to ease compaction work.
3.01.4 Steel rail piles shall be driven using gravity drop hammer to the depth and
elevation indicated on the drawings. Driven pile shall be plumb and the head of the
pile shall be plainly embedded in the gabion steel net without the use of any
bonding material.
3.02 GRANULAR BACKFILL:
Granular backfill material shall be backfilled to the thickness in accordance with

the requirements specified in Section 02014: “GRANULAR BACKFILL” and
3.03 GABION AND GEOTEXTILE FABRICATION:
3.03.1 Gabion fabrication shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction and
the requirements specified herein.
3.03.2 Wire mesh shall be mechanically pre-fabricated to become a uniform hexagonal

woven mesh wherein the joints are formed by twisting each pair of wires through
three half-turns (commonly known as double twist), in such a manner that
unraveling is prevented.
3.03.3 The tightness of the twisted joints shall be such that a force of not less than 0.17
ton is required when pulling one wire to separate it from the other wire, provided
each wire is prevented from turning the applied forces and the wires are all on the
same plane.
3.03.4 Gabions shall be mechanically pre-fabricated in such a manner that the side,
ends, and lids can be assembled at the construction site into rectangular baskets
of the standard sizes shown on the Drawings.
02026 - 4
3.03.5 Use steel bars to maintain the wire mesh gabion in rectangular shape.
Geotextile fabrication shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
3.04 INSTALLATION:
3.04.1 Gabion Assembly and Installation:
1. Assembly and installation of gabions shall be in accordance with the

manufacturer’s instructions and as specified herein.
2. Open and unfold the gabion on a hard surface. Press out creases in the mesh
and kinks in the selvedge wires, for these are not intended to indicate the
corners of the unit.
3. Lift up the sides, ends and diaphragms into a vertical position to form an open
box shape. Ensure the tops of the corners are level and then join together with
projecting thick selvedge wire. Then lace the corners.
4. Manual lacing shall be carried out in a continuous wiring operation, not with
individual ties or twists. Single and double twists shall be required alternately
at approximately 100 to 150mm spacing. A manageable length of binding wire
shall be complete turn from the coil as supplied.
5. Place a number of empty gabions in position and securely lace adjoining units
together before they are tensioned and filled. A cable winch shall be used to
tension the units.
6. Keep the gabions stretched and under tension longitudinally during filling to
give a good alignment and finish.
3.04.2 Geotextile Installation
1. Geotextile material shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendation and approved shop drawings.
2. Joint shall be sewed at the site, using portable hand-operated double stitching
machine.
3. Geotextile shall be laid horizontally and shall not be unrolled more than 15 m.
The edges of geotextile shall be weighed with soil or aggregate to prevent
sheet to uplift by wind force.
- END OF SECTION -
02026 - 5
SECTION 02027
MANHOLES AND DRAIN PIPE
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This Section covers the requirements for furnishing and providing drain pipe such
as PVC or porosity pipe drain and manholes in the station yards and other
locations where shown on the Drawings.
Section 02021: “DRAINAGE GENERALLY”

OPERATIONS”
Section 02021 “DRAINAGE GENERALLY"
1.02.1 The following codes and standards are intended to provide an acceptable level of
• Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS) Publications.
The Contractor shall comply with applicable reference described in Section 01007:
“QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL PROGRAMME” and as specified herein.
02027 - 1
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
1.04.1 Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements specified in Section
1.04.2 Shop Drawings shall include all shop and installation details. Members and
connections not shown on the Drawings shall be detailed by the Contractor.
1.04.3 Manufacturer’s instructions and catalog cuts shall be submitted for the assembly
and installation of PVC pipes.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
2.01.1 Concrete:
Concrete for manholes shall be 21 N/mm2and leveling concrete used for

foundation shall be 15 N/mm2, as designated in Section 02016: “FOUNDATION
WORK” and Section 02068: “CONCRETE”.
2.01.2 Reinforcing Steel Bars:
Reinforcing Steel Bars shall comply with the requirements specified in Section
02070: “REINFORCING STEEL BARS” and shall be positioned as shown on the
2.01.3 Foundation materials:
Foundation materials such as cobble stone and coarse sand shall be in

WORK”.
2.01.4 Backfill material:
Back fill material shall be in accordance with the requirements specified in Section
2.01.5 PVC pipe:
PVC pipe shall conform to the requirement of JIS K 6741 or SII K 0344 with fittings
conforming to JIS K 6739.
2.01.6 Porous pipe:
Material using Polyethylene, Dimension diameter Ø150 and length 4,000mm with
pressure strength 0.29-1.47 kN/m at flatness 10%.
02027 - 2
2.01.7 Geotextile:
The geotextile used for reinforcement, filtratio and drainage shall be composed of
polypropylene non-woven type textile. The material shall be durable against the
chemicals including acidity and alkalinity effect, the bacteria, other biological effect
and etc., and shall be light weight. Tensile strength of this material shall be equal
ireespective of the direction on the textile, lengthwise and crosswise.
Location of the Geotextile is shown on the Drawings or designated by the

product supplied by the reliable manufacture ir the supplier. This geotextile is used
for reinforcement, filtration and drainage of soil structure like the roadbed,
embankment or the like to protect them from contamination of embankment soil
and soft soil of subgrade.
The physical properties of the material to be applied for this project shall satisfy at
least the following requirement or equivalent.
Type 1 is used for layer control in order to secure compaction work and also as
filter for subdrainage together with porous pipe. Type 2 is used for drainage sheet
that shall be installed in embankment.
Test Type 1 Type 2

Descriprion Unit
Standard Layer Control Drainage
Chemical Resistance Not Influence at Range 2 -13
Thickness JIS L 1980 mm 1.2 2.4
Tensile Strength JIS L 1908 kN/m 5.8 15.6
Elongation Ditto % 80 / 40 80 / 40
2
Mass JIS L 1085 g/m 140 or more 300 or more
Premeability JIS A 1218 cm/sec 1 x 10-2 1 x 10-2
(Note): Type 1 is also used as filter of sub-drainage with porous pipe in drainage
work.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXCAVATION AND BACK FILL:
run-off.
3.01.2 Reference shall be made to Section 01011: “SECURITY OF RAILWAY

OPERATIONS” and Section 01012: “WINDOW-TIME AND SPEED DOWN OF
TRAIN OPERATIONS”, which shall be applied to the construction of PVC pipes
and manholes.
PVC pipe drain and manholes construction, or other means to carry train loads as
02027 - 3
3.01.5 Excavation undertaken within 2.5-m from any track shall be continuously
supported, and the method to be used shall not extend above ground level
excessively.
3.01.6 Excavation shall be performed in accordance with relevant requirements of Section

02010: “STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL”.
3.01.7 Excavation for PVC pipes and manholes shall be of sufficient size to permit the
placement and removal of forms for the full length and width of structure and
foundation as shown on the Drawings.
3.01.8 At places of jointing, adequate excavation shall be made for ease of installing
joints and shall be backfilled and compacted. Loose disintegrated rock and thin
strata, or unsatisfactory material, shall be removed. Excavation will be unclassified
regardless of the nature of material encountered.
3.01.9 The Contractor shall perform excavation of every type of material encountered
within the limits of the work to the lines, grades, and elevations indicated.
Excavations below indicated depths will not be permitted.
3.01.10 Material removed below the depths indicated without specific direction of the
Engineer shall be replaced, at no additional cost to the Employer, to the indicated
excavation grade with satisfactory materials.
3.01.11 Excavated material shall be stockpiled at a distance from the excavation pit to
preclude cave-ins, but at a location where the stockpile will not be an obstruction to
the existing track way. Backfill shall be accomplished using existing stockpiled and
excavated materials placed in 30-cm layers to ease compaction work.
3.02 LAYING OF PIPES:
3.02.1 Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, normally horizontal drain piping shall be
fixed at a gradient of 1 in 100 for porous pipe of 150-mm diameter and larger.
3.02.2 Pipe shall run, as straight as possible with changes of direction only as shown on
the Drawings or as required clearing obstructions. All changes of direction shall be
made using standard fittings only and only at the location required and approved.
3.02.3 All pipes shall be sloped uniformly between given elevations where invert levels
shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall lay the pipe at the normal gradient
for the pipe diameter in question and form a suitable back-drop with rodding eye at
lower end of the pipe run.
- END OF SECTION -
02027 - 4
SECTION 02028
GABION
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This Section covers the requirements of furnishing and providing the gabions for
retaining track ballast between the existing track and new track, the stopper of
counterweight for embankment and outlet to French drains as shown on the
Drawings.
Section 02008 “EARTHWORK GENERALLY”

Section 02012 “FILLING, GRADING AND EMBANKMENT
CONSTRUCTION”
Section 02026 “FRENCH DRAIN”
D 1777-64 (1975) Method for Measuring Thickness of Textile Materials;

D 3776-85 (1990) Test Methods for Mass per Unit Area (Weight) of
Woven Fabric;
D 3786-87 Test Methods for Hydraulic Bursting Strength of Knitted
Goods and Nonwoven Fabrics: Diaphragm Bursting
Strength Tester Method;
D 4491-92 Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by
Permittivity;
D 4595-86 Test Methods for Tensile Properties of Geotextiles by
the Wide Width Strip Method;
D 4751-87 Test Methods for Determining the Apparent Opening
Size of a Geotextile;
D 4833-88 Test Method for index Puncture Resistance of
Geotextiles, Geomembrane, and Related Products;
D1556 Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method; and
D1557 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate
Mixtures Using 10lb (4.54-kg) Rammer and 18-in, (457-
mm) Drop.
02028 - 1
• Indonesia National Standard (SNI) Publications:
03/6154/99 Heavy Galvanized Wire for Gabion; and

03/0090/99 Gabions.
• Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS) Publications:
G 3112 Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
• Indonesia Industrial Standard (SII):
038/88 Heavy Galvenized Wire

1.04 SUBMITTALS:
“SUBMITTAL” and as specified herein.
1.04.2 Certified copies of statements from the supplier indicating that the material
complies with the requirements of this specification shall be furnished for wire
mesh gabion.
1.04.3 Shop Drawings shall include location and extent of installation, dimensions,
structure details, erection details, members and connections, and shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to commencement of the work .
1.04.4 Manufacturer’s instruction manuals shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval
for fabrication and installation procedures of gabion.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL:
Material shall be provided as specified herein or as specified elsewhere.
Gabions shall incorporate factory fixed diaphragm wire mesh to form cells having
width and length as indicated on the Drawings. The diameter and quality of
diaphragm shall conform to the wire mesh used for forming a gabion basket.
Heavily galvanized wire shall conform to the requirements of SII 038/80 or SNI 03 /
6154 / 99.
02028 - 2
2
Tensile strength of steel wire shall not be less than 410N/mm and shall not
exceed 510N/mm2.
Wire diameters, tolerances and weight of galvanize coating shall be in accordance

with the following table:
Wire Diameter (mm) Tolerance (mm) Min. Zinc Coating (gr/m2)
3.20 ± 0.12 275
The adhesion of the galvanize coating for the wire shall be such that when the wire
is wrapped six times around wire diameter mandrel shall not flake or crack to such
an extent that any zinc cannot be removed by rubbing with bare fingers.
Cobble stone used for fills shall be clean, hard and durable stone, rounded and
angular shape. No rock particles or boulders shall exceed the maximum size
indicated below, and at least 85% by weight of the particle shall have a size equal
to or larger than the minimum size. Cobble stone size for gabion shall range from
100 - 300 mm.
Bedding shall consist of coarse sand of the size range of 2 to 5 mm.
Reinforcing steel bars shall conform to Section 03003: “REINFORCING STEEL

BARS”.
Salvage, lacing and bending wire shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendation as approved by the Engineer.
Borrow material shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 02011:

PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXCAVATION AND FILL:
3.01.1 Excavation:
The Contractor shall perform excavation of every type of material encountered

within the limits of the work to the lines, grades and elevations indicated.
Excavation below the indicated depths will not be permitted. Material removed
below the depth indicated without specific direction of the Engineer shall be
replaced, at no additional cost to the Employer, to the indicated excavation grade
with satisfactory materials.
Excavated materials shall be disposed to outside the limits of the Project by the
Contractor in accordance with the requirements of the Specifications specified in
Section 02013: “WASTE”.
02028 - 3
3.01.2 Fill:
Fill excavated pit to lines and grades to receive gabions. After gabions are
positioned on the right location, the remaining excavated pit shall be filled with
borrow material in loose layers and spread, mix and place in such a manner as to
produce a uniform thickness of material.
3.02 GABION FABRICATION, ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION:
3.02.1 Fabrication:
Gabion fabrication shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction and

the requirements specified herein.
Gabions shall be mechanically pre-fabricated in such a manner that the side,
ends, and lids can be assembled at the construction site into rectangular baskets
of the standard sizes shown on the drawings.
Use steel bars to maintain the wire mesh gabion in rectangular shape.
3.02.2 Gabion Assembly and Installation:
1. Assembly and installation of gabions shall be in accordance with the

manufacturer’s instructions and as specified herein.
2. Open and unfold the gabion on a hard surface. Press out creases in the mesh
and kinks in the selvedge wires, for these are not intended to indicate the
corners of the unit.
3. Lift up the sides, ends and diaphragms into a vertical position to form an open
box shape. Ensure the tops of the corners are level and then join together with
projecting thick selvedge wire. Then lace the corners.
4. Manual lacing shall be carried out in a continuous wiring operation, not with
individual ties or twists. Single and double twists shall be required alternately at
approximately 100 to 150mm spacing. A manageable length of binding wire
shall be complete turn from the coil as supplied.
5. Place a number of empty gabions in position and securely lace adjoining units
together before they are tensioned and filled. A cable winch shall be used to
tension the units.
6. Keep the gabion stretched and under tension longitudinally during filling to give
a good alignment and finish.
7. Do not treat gabions individually by adding to the structure and filling gabions
one at a time, which is time consuming, detrimental to the finished appearance,
and may lead to a loss of structural integrity of the finished structure.
8. Minimize number of voids by using a well-graded stone and avoid large stones
in order to achieve a dense, compact compartment.
9. Overfill the gabion by approximately 50 – 45 mm to allow for natural settlement.
- END OF SECTION -
02028 - 4
SECTION 02029
STONE MASONRY
PART I: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This work shall consist of stone masonry in retaining walls for both cut and
embankment sections, siphons, ballast stopper, in other structures, and in other
places where called for on the Drawings.
1.01.2 The stone masonry shall be constructed on a compacted soil bed in accordance
with these Specifications and specifications for other work items involved and in
conformity with lines, grades, sections, and dimensions shown on the Drawings or
1.01.3 The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and perform all operations required
for the masonry work as specified herein and on the drawings.

OPERATIONS”
• American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)

standard:
M 85 Portland Cement.

C 39 Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
C 150-81 Portland Cement;
C 192 Making and Curing Concrete Test specimens in the laboratory;
C 207 Hydrated Lime;
D 2487 Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes;
02029 - 1
C 216 Specification of Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from

Clay or Shale);
C 62 Specification of Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units
Made from Clay or Shale); and
C67 Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and
Structural Clay Tile.
R 5210 Portland Cement; and

R 1250 Common Bricks.
• Indonesia Industrial Standard (SII):
0013 Portland Cement.

CONTROL "and as specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
1.04.2 Submit one sample of material for approval of the Engineer.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
2.01.1 Stone:
Cobblestone shall be a cube of hard and durable limestone or andesite or granite

of the size ranging from 10 cm to 12 cm, or other appropriate size approved by the
Engineer. The stone shall be flat, wedge or convex shaped. The base surface
shall be not less than 1/16 of the front surface, and the shorter length of the base
surface shall be more than 1/10 of the longer length. The standard number of
stones per square meter shall be 14. However, minor deviation will be allowed
when approved by the Engineer.
2.01.2 Bricks:
All bricks shall be hard, sound, well-fired, even and uniform in shape, free from
cracks and other defects, shall be made from selected clay. Bricks with absorption
of more than 20% by weight after immersion in water for 24 hours shall not be
accepted. All bricks to be used for wall construction, septic tank and others shall
be from the same source and shall be ordinary red local bricks.
02029 - 2
2.01.3 Mortar:
Mortar shall be in accordance with the requirements specified in Section 02069:

“CEMENT MORTAR”.
2.01.4 Testing:
The initial absorption rate of all types of material selected for the work shall be
determined by an approved independent testing laboratory in accordance with
ASTM C67 and the test report shall be furnished to the Engineer prior to laying
work.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 STONE MASONRY:
3.01.1 Excavation
1. Stone masonry shall be laid on previously prepared surfaces to line and grade
indicated.
2. Excavation bed for the placement of concrete foundation for masonry retaining
wall shall be excavated in accordance with the cross sections, grades and lines
shown on the drawings, after staking has been inspected and approved by the
Engineer. Where the excavation dimensions are not specifically specified, the
dimensions shall be selected by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
3. In addition to the above requirements, the excavation and backfill shall conform
to Section 02010: “STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL”.
3.01.2 Concrete foundation
1. Prior to placing concrete, the cobblestones shall be firmly compacted with

approved equipment to provide uniform bearing and support for the concrete
foundation.
2. Lean concrete shall be laid over the select granular material, after initial backfill
has been thoroughly compacted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3. Concrete foundation shall be constructed to the shape and dimensions

indicated on the drawings. Concrete work shall conform to Section 02068:
“CONCRETE”.
3.01.3 Masonry wall
1. Placing of stone masonry shall not begin until the finishing stakes set according
to the design have been inspected and approved by the Engineer.
02029 - 3
2. Stones shall be washed with water before placing. A mortar bed shall be spread
on the sides of adjacent stones before the next stone is laid.
3. The thickness of the mortar shall be the minimum necessary to ensure that
there is no direct contact between stones. Stones shall be thoroughly
hammered into place and any stone whose face is deviating more than 20 mm
from the true face or more than 30 mm the face of the adjacent stone, shall
immediately be made good by lifting and relaying. Face joints between stones
shall be flush-pointed as work proceeds.
4. Walls of stone masonry shall be provided with weep holes. Unless otherwise
shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer, weep holes shall be
spaced at one for every 2 square metres and shall be PVC pipes 50 mm in
diameter.
5. Provide granular material of size to avoid plugging weep holes at the back face
of the wall. At the entrance of weep holes, provide porous, palm fibber (10 mm),
or geotextile wick material or equivalent to prevent loss of fine materials.
6. Coping shall be as shown on the Drawings. The upper surfaces of masonry wall
shall be mortar finished smoothly by wooden float.
7. Expansion joint asphaltic spacer shall be formed at a maximum spacing of 20

meters. Joints shall be 10 mm in width and shall extend through the complete
wall including the footing concrete. Stones used for joint forming shall be
selected so as to form a clean vertical joint of the dimension specified above.
8. The masonry shall be satisfactorily protected from the sun and shall be kept
wet for a period of at least three days after completion.
3.02 BRICK MASONRY:
3.02.1 Concrete foundation
Concrete foundation shall be the same as 3.01.2 in this Section.
3.02.2 Masonry wall
1. All masonry shall be built plumb, square and true to dimension and lines, with
full mortar joints. Horizontal joints shall be level and true. For bed joints a thick
bed of mortar shall be spread and only slightly furrowed, so that the joint will be
filled completely with mortar. The ends of the units shall be buttered with an
ample quantity of mortar and the unit shoved into place, so that the end joint is
filled completely with mortar. In making closures, an ample shall be spread in
the closure space, the closure units buttered on both ends and rocked into
place, so that both end joints and the bed joint are filled completely with mortar.
Over-plumbing and pounding of corners and jambs to fit units after being set in
position shall be avoided. Where an adjustment must be made after the mortar
has lost its plasticity, the unit and mortar shall be removed and fresh mortar
shall be used to reset the work.
02029 - 4
2. All brick work shall be laid with joints of uniforms thickness of 10 mm. Joints
shall be not less than 6.4 mm nor more than 12.7 mm. End joints in exposed
brick work shall be not wider than the bed joints. Holes left in exposed joints by
the removal of nails, line pins and put log irons shall be filled immediately with
fresh tuck-pointing mortar.
3. All bricks shall be thoroughly soaked with water before being laid if the last
course laid has become dry it shall be well wetted before any further courses
are laid.
4. Reinforced concrete bond beams shall be provided within every 3 meters of the
height unless otherwise specified.
5. All brick work shall be laid in running bond of mortar.
6. Bonding to concrete columns shall be done by means of 6-mm diameter mild

steel rods not less than 45 cm long cast into the concrete at 40 cm vertical
centers and projecting 30 cm from the concrete face and built into joints of brick
work.
7. Brick walls shall be mortar finished, both exterior and interior sides of the wall,
after bare surfaces of the brick wall has been approved by the Engineer.
- END OF SECTION -
02029 - 5
SECTION 02030
RETAINING WALL
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This Section covers the construction of retaining wall made of reinforced concrete
or stone masonry to be applied for both cut and embankment section and slope
protection as shown on the Drawings.
1.01.2 The retaining walls shall be constructed on the foundations in accordance with
these Specifications and specifications for other work items involved and in
conformity with lines, grade, sections, and dimensions shown on the Drawings or
101.3 Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

OPERATIONS”;
Section 02014 “GRANULAR BACKFILL”;
Section 02015 “FREE DRAINING MATERIAL”;
Section 02068 “CONCRETE”; and
The codes and standards listed below form a part of this specification.
• American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO);

• Indonesia Industrial Standard (SII);
• Peraturan Beton Bertulang Indonesia 1971.
02030 - 1

ASSURANCE / CONTROL PROGRAMME" and as specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:

PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
2.01.1 Cobble stone for retaining walls shall be in conformity with the requirements
specified in Section 02016: “FOUNDATION WORK”
2.01.2 Mortar shall be in accordance with the requirements specified in Section 02069:
“CEMENT MORTAR”
2.01.3 Concrete for retaining walls shall be 21 N/mm2 and leveling concrete or footing
stone masonry wall shall be 15 N/mm2 designated in Section 02068: “CONCRETE”
and Section 02016: “FOUNDATION WORK”
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXCAVATION:
measures to keep the excavation free from free surface water and/or surface water
run-off.

OPERATIONS”, which shall apply to the construction of retaining wall.
3.01.3 Excavation shall be in accordance with the cross sections, grades and lines shown
on the Drawings after staking has been inspected and approved by the Engineer.
3.01.4 When the excavation method and dimensions are not specified, the method shall
be selected by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
3.01.5 Excavation and backfill shall be made in accordance with the requirements of
02030 - 2
3.01.7 Support systems shall be sheet piles, wales and adjustable struts, planking and
soldiers.
3.02 CONCRETE WORK:
3.02.1 Concrete:
1. Concrete work shall be in accordance with the requirements specified in Section

02068: “CONCRETE” and the requirements specified herein.
main components of the concrete work in a single mass operation.
3.02.2 Form work:

4. Surface of forms shall be designed to provide the required finishes as specified

in Section 02068: “CONCRETE”.
3.02.3 Casting Concrete:
when applicable precautions against casting concrete in hot weather conditions
are taken.
re-vibrated as long as the running internal vibrator will sink of its own weight.
3. Concrete shall be compacted in its final position within two hours from the time
of introduction of the cement into the aggregates, but in all cases at least 90
minutes less than the certified initial set time of the cement.

specified in Section 02068: “CONCRETE” and the requirements specified
herein.
02030 - 3
5. The temperature of concrete at the point of placement shall at all times be less
than 32 degree.
6. Any concrete, which has reached a temperature greater than, that specified
shall not be used.

8. Reinforcing steel and forms shall be protected from direct sunrays. Reinforcing
steel and forms shall be cooled off with fog misting immediately before concrete
placing.
9. Concrete shall not be placed when the work will be affected by wind-blown sand
conditions.
3.03 STONE MASONRY WORK:
3.03.1 Stone masonry shall not be placed until the concrete footing and other related
items have been inspected and approved by the Engineer.
3.03.2 The surface of concrete footing shall be rough, cleaned from other materials and
washed with water before placing stone masonry.
3.03.3 Bonding to stone masonry shall be done by mean of 6 mm diameter steel bar not
less then 45 cm long, cast into the concrete footing every 50 cm horizontal
distance length.
3.03.4 The thickness of the mortar shall be the minimum necessary to ensure that there is
no direct contact between stones.
3.03.5 Stone masonry wall shall be constructed to the shape and dimensions that
3.03.6 The upper surface of stone masonry wall shall be mortar finished smoothly, coping
shall be as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
3.03.7 Cohesive soil shall be installed on top of the draining material as shown on the
3.04 BACKFILL AND BACKING CONCRETE:
Granular back fill material shall be placed as shown on the Drawings,

Specifications or as directed by the Engineer.
Cobble stone and leveling concrete shall be placed and compacted with
consideration being given to the need to provide expansion joints and weep holes
as directed elsewhere in this clause.
Backfill material and leveling concrete shall only be placed to such heights as can
be adequately compacted.
02030 - 4
3.05 WEEP HOLES:
Weep holes shall be provided to retaining walls.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer, weep holes
shall be spaced at one for every 2 square maters and shall be PVC pipes 50 mm
in diameter including filter at the backside.
3.06 JOINTS:
Expansion joints shall be formed at a maximum spacing of 20 meters. Joints shall

be 10-mm in width and shall extend through the complete wall to the footing.
- END OF SECTION -
02030 - 5
SECTION 02031
GRASSING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
This work shall consist of providing grasses as required and planting grasses to
prevent soils on embankment and cutting section from erosion as shown on the
Drawing.
• State of California, Departement of Transportation (Caltrans), Standard

Specification :
Section 20 Erotion Control and Highway Planting
specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:

Samples of grassing materials shall be submitted for inspection and acceptance,

when requested by the Engineer.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL:
2.01.1 Grasses shall be of species native to West Java, harmless and inoffensive to
people and animals and not of a kind recognized as a nuisance to agriculture. It
shall be rapid spreading, free of disease and noxious weeds and shall be deep
rooted.
02031- 1
2.01.2 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer not less than 3 days before cutting of
grasses begins. The source of grasses will be approved by the Engineer before
cutting and delivery to the Project.
2.01.3 Grasses shall be planted with their root system substantially undamaged and cut
into blocks with moist earth in which they have grown. Grasses shall be laid within
5 days of cutting. Grass blocks shall be hauled and stored in such manner that
they will be protected from direct sunrays, provided with air circulation and
prevented against drying.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 SUPPLY AND SPREADING OF TOPSOIL:
3.01.1 All topsoil supplied by the Contractor shall be of approved quality, free from
rubbish, roots, stumps, stones or other extraneous materials, and well mixed with
sludge in proportion of 3:1.
3.01.2 Sludge delivered to site shall be used for the turfing work as soon as possible.
Sludge stockpiled on the site for turfing work shall be evenly covered with a layer
or lime and a layer of topsoil.
3.01.3 The soil and sludge mixture shall be laid 50-mm below the desired turf level and
spread uniformly over the site, slopes and/or berms etc. where directed and shall
be lightly watered if necessary, and then tamped with wooden tampers and
trimmed to a consolidated thickness of 100-mm or as specified. The turf sods shall
be planted using topsoil only.
3.01.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and fixing the turves promptly
after top-soiling in order to prevent erosion thereof due to wet weather or other
causes. A thin layer of topsoil shall be broadcast on the turf to fill all depressions
and give a smooth finish.
3.02 SUPPLY AND FIXING OF TURFS:
3.02.1 All turves supplied by the Contractor shall be healthy and vigorous stock and from
approved sources. The grass of turf shall be cut square and approximately 0.3 x
0.3 m in size, and be 50-mm in thickness. All turves supplied shall be free from
weeds and care shall be taken to include as much of the root growth as possible.
The turves shall not be broken up into small pieces for planting shall be planted as
soon as possible.
3.02.2 Turves shall be laid side by side on the ground with gaps not exceeding 30-mm
where close turfing is specified. When spot turfing is specified, gaps on all sides of
the turves shall not be more than 100-mm.
3.02.3 In the case of embankments, close turfing is required, and each sod shall be held
in position by wooden or bamboo pegs to prevent movement or displacement of
any kind, and turfing shall thereafter be tamped down and rolled (except on slopes)
with a suitable hand roller.
02031- 2
3.02.4 The pieces of turf shall be sunk into the ground so that they are flush with the
surface. All turfing shall on completion present a uniform and regular appearance.
3.02.5 After planting of turf and watering of the turfed areas, no additional spreading of
sludge on the turfed areas shall be allowed.
3.03 MAINTENANCE OF TURVES:
3.03.1 The Contractor shall maintain all completed turfing until the satisfactory handover
to the Employer or Authorities. Prior to handover to the Employer or Authorities,
the Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of the turf, namely the
watering, weeding, repair and replacement of any defective work until the
handover to the relevant Employer or Authorities.
3.03.2 Throughout the period of the Contract, all turfing shall be watered regularly and
weeded until it is accepted by the Engineer. The Contractor shall allow for such
watering and tending. Any dead turves, badly growing turves or otherwise
unsatisfactory turves shall be removed by the Contractor at his own expense. All
weeds shall be removed at least twice a month.
3.03.3 About one month after planting, the grass shall be manured with a complete
chemical fertiliser which supplies Nitrogen, Phosphorus, Potassium and
Magnesium approximately in the following proportion 18:12:6:3. This shall be
applied at the rate of 125kg/ha of grass after all weeds have been removed. The
fertiliser shall be mixed with the top-dressing and spread evenly over the field. The
application shall be repeated after three month.
3.03.4 After one-month growth, the grass shall be cut with a suitable rotary mower to
encourage the grass to creep on the ground instead of growing upright. This
operation shall be repeated at fortnightly intervals until the ground is completely
covered with grass. A mechanised reel cut mower shall now be used to cut grass.
This normally shall be done about three months after planting. Thereafter mowing
shall be done fortnightly by reel cut mower until the end of the defects liability
period.
3.03.5 Approximately two months after planting, when the grass has grown and produced
a continuous cover over the whole area, the whole of the turfed areas shall be
lightly rolled (roller shall not exceed 150 kg in weight) to an even surface. Rolling
shall be repeated at monthly intervals until the surface is accepted by the Engineer.
A heavy roller shall not be used, as it is likely to damage the sub-soil drainage
system if one has been installed. A heavy roller will also compact the ground
unduly and this is detrimental to good turf growth.
3.03.6 Grass shall be close cut as short as possible following the general contours of the
ground. The stock of blade of the grass after each cutting shall not stand higher
than 20-mm above the ground level. On fairy extensive and open grass areas,
sidetables or fields, the Contractor shall use mechanical mowers powered by small
tractors.
3.03.7 The edge of all sidetables, and other grassed areas adjoining roadways, footpaths,
kerbs, dividers and concrete paved areas shall be cut back to proper straight lines
02031- 3
or curves as the case may be, and trimmed thereafter to produce a neat and tidy
appearance. This work shall be carried out immediately after the grass in the area
has been cut.
3.03.8 Grass growing in the cement joints of footpath and along the edge of the roads
adjacent to or directly fronting the sidetables, centre medians, circuses etc. shall
be cut or manually weeded out and cleared. The Contractor shall allow for such
provision in his tender.
3.03.9 All cut grass, cuttings together with trimmings, loose stones, rubbish etc. shall be
collected and removed from the site and disposed off expeditiously to the
Contractor’s own dumping ground.
- END OF SECTION -
02031- 4
SECTION 02032
SLOPE PROTECTION
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This Section covers the requirements for furnishing and providing Slope Protection
which is made of open channel drain and reinforcing concrete frame with grass to
prevent landslide and erosion designated in the Drawings.

OPERATIONS”
CONSTRUCTION”
1.02 APPLICABLE, CODES AND STANDARDS:
• American Association of state Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)

• American Concrete Institute (ACI)

1.04 SUBMITTALS
"SUBMITTALS" and ones specified herein.
02032 - 1
1.04.2 Certified copies of statements from the supplier indicating that the material
complies with the requirements of this specification shall be furnished for precast
concrete drainage.
1.04.3 Shop Drawings shall include location and extent of installation, dimensions,
structure details members and connections especially diaphragm.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL:
2.01.1 Material shall be provided as specified in relevant Sections or as specified herein.
2.01.2 Concrete for frame and open channel shall be 21N/mm2 and leveling concrete
shall be 15 N/mm2 as specified in Section 02068: “CONCRETE”.
2.01.4 Cobble stone shall be in accordance with the requirements specified in the Section
02016: “FOUNDATION WORK” .
2.01.5 Grassing shall comply with the requirements specified in Section 02031:
“GRASSING”.
2.01.6 Shotcrete shall comply with the requirements specified in Section 04002:
“SHOTCRETE AND ROCKBOLT FOR SLOPE PROTECTION”.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXCAVATION:
Land slopes shall be trimmed and dressed to conform to the slope, grade and
shape of the section indicated. Over-excavation shall not be permitted and shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor to restore over-excavation to the required grade.
Unsuitable excavated material shall be disposed of by the Contractor.
3.02 CONCRETE WORK:
3.02.1 Concrete:

Section 02068: “CONCRETE” and ones specified herein.
2. To the maximum possible extent, the Contractor shall cast concrete for the
main components of the concrete work in a single mass operation.
02032 - 2
3.02.2 Form Work:
other loads as outlined in ACI 347.

shall not be greater than 1/240 of the span between the structural supports.
4. Surface of forms shall be designed to provide the required finishes as

3.02.3 Casting Concrete:
applicable precautions against casting concrete in hot weather conditions have
been taken.
2. All concrete shall be re-vibrated as long as the running internal vibrator sinks
by its own weight.
3. Concrete shall be compacted in its final position within 90 minutes after the
introduction of cement into aggregates.

specified in Section 02068: “CONCRETE” and ones specified herein.
5. The temperature of concrete at the point of placement shall be less than 32

degree at all times.
6. Temperature of concrete shall be measured at 50 mm below the surface

7 Reinforcing steel bars and forms shall be protected from direct sunrays.
8. Concrete shall not be placed if the work is affected by wind-blown sand

conditions.
3.03 COBBLE STONE INSTALLATION
3.03.1 On soft or sandy slopes, pegs shall be used to hold cobble stone in position during
filling.
3.03.2 On slopes, diaphragms shall be kept out during filling operation, using wire stays,
boards, etc.
02032 - 3
3.03.3 Fill material shall be placed and compacted in the compartments by equipment
approved by the Engineer, but some hand placing shall be done to ensure the
compartment is completely filled. Fill material shall be completely compacted.
- END OF SECTION -
02032 - 4
SECTION 02033
PLANTATION
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
This work shall consist of furnishing, planting and nurturing new trees as required to
ease the noise from the operating track at the hospital located near the station or as
1.02 APPLICABLE PROVISIONS, CODES AND STANDARD:
Not Applicable.
Section 01007: “QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL PROGRAMME” and the
1.04 SUBMITTALS:

Samples of trees shall be submitted for inspection and acceptance, when requested
by the Engineer.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL:
PALM, DADAP, AKASIA or DAMAR shall be suitable for the trees to be planted.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 PLANTING HOLES AND BED:
Material for back filling of plants holes and beds for trees, palms, shrubs, and
groundcover shall consist of approved quality top soil transported to the site and
thoroughly mixed with sand, coco-peat and sludge.
Size of planting holes:
02033-1
1. 1m x 1m x 1m: For tree and palm planting;

2. 0,6m x 0,6m x 0,6m: For shrubs planting.
3.02 TOPSOIL FOR PLANTING:
3.02.1 Topsoil shall be fertile natural red/brown top soil transported to the site, free from
stones, clay, wood and sod, and obtained from naturally well drained area. Topsoil
shall neither be excessively acidic or alkaline and shall be free from any toxic matter
liable to be harmful to plant growth.
3.02.2 The topsoil composition shall be mixed thoroughly according to the following listed
items:
1. Fine, loamy topsoil: 60% (by volume)

2. White, washed sand: 15% (by volume)
3. Sludge or equivalent manure: 15% (by volume)
4. Coco-peat: 10% (by volume)
3.02.3 Topsoil, sand, sludge and coco-peat must be delivered to the site when tress to be
planted and be mixed on site immediately thereafter. It should not be left exposed
for more than 40 hours, nor obstruct access to the site by others or be exposed to
inclement weather thereby creating problematic run-offs, silting drains, tracks, etc.
3.02.4 Topsoil shall generally be reasonably loose in a form containing not more than 10 –
15% of moisture content. Topsoil delivered in a wet and soggy condition will be
rejected by the Engineer.
3.03 USE OF SLUDGE:
3.03.1 The Contractor shall comply strictly with the following when using sludge in carrying
out planting and turfing works.
3.03.2 Sludge delivered to site shall be used immediately and if possible within the same
day.
3.03.3 When it is not possible for various reasons to use up the sludge on the same day,
the sludge shall be evenly covered with a layer of lime and covered with a layer of
topsoil. This requirements shall apply to stockpile sludge on site where accepted by
the Engineer.
3.04 PLANT SPECIFICATION:
3.04.1 All palms, shrubs and groundcover to be used under this Contract (herein after
collectively referred to as Plants) shall be varieties, sizes and quantities shown in
the Drawings.
02033-2
3.04.2 All plants shall be of cultivated stock. The Contractor shall furnish all plants shown
on the Contract Drawings. No substitutions or omissions thereof will be permitted
unless accepted by the Engineer.
3.04.3 All plants shall be typical of their respective species or variety and shall have normal
growth and be legibly tagged with proper botanical names.
3.04.4 The height of the plant (measured from the crown of the roots to the average height
of the top branches) shall be not less than the minimum size designated on the
Drawings. The trunks of each tree shall be a single trunk growing from the single
unmitigated crown of root. No parts of such trunks shall be conspicuously crooked
as compared with normal trees of the same variety. Such trunks shall be free from
wound, abrasions, or other damage from whatever cause. No pruning having a
diameter exceedang 250 mm or showing vigorous bark on all edges shall be
present on the ground.
3.04.5 Shrubs used in the works shall meet the requirements for spread or height specified
on the Drawings. Measurement for the height of shrubs shall be taken from the
ground level to the average height of the tallest branches of the shrubs and not to
the longest branch or stem. Single stemmed or thin plats will not be accepted. The
side branches shall be generous, well twigged and all shrubs, as a whole, shall be
well – branched to the ground.
3.04.6 All plants must come with pots or plastic bags in which they were originally grown
and established in the nursery. The only exception being instant plants and large
shrubs that has to be specially transplanted.
3.04.7 All planting works shall have the appearance of established growth. Plants shall be
arranged with their foliage showing off their best face so that the intended design
effect will be fully realized.
3.04.8 Rooted cuttings of ground covers shall be paid at approximately 200 mm centers or
as specified.
3.05 TREE PLANTING:
The preparation of tree planting hoes, planting and the maintenance of trees shall
be to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall in his tender allow for
the care and regular maintenance of trees until they are fully established and
growing satisfactorily and accepted for handover to the Employer or landowner.
3.06 TREE PLANTING SPECIFICATION:
3.06.1 All saplings shall be securely staked and tied.
3.06.2 All semi-matured trees shall be staked and tied.
3.06.3 Roots and earth bells of all plants shall be kept damp and thoroughly protected from
the sun and wind during transportation to the site at all times until plated. All plants
02033-3
shall accurately set in the center of the planting holes and at the same depth to final
ground surface levels as upright in the holes before backfilling.
3.06.4 All backfill be brought to finished level (after settlement) identical to the level of the
surrounding area except directed otherwise by the Engineer. Backfill shall not be
compacted by ramming. Shrubs or plants so that it is sufficient to retain 150 mm
deep of water in the case of trees and 100 mm deep in the case of shrubs and
plants. Such saucers shall be of the same diameter as that of planting holes.
Sauces to trees shrubs and plants shall be flooded with water immediately after
planting and thereafter flooded once everyday for 30 days except on the days with
significant rainfall.
3.06.5 Material for back filling of plants holes for trees shall consist of approved quality
topsoil transported to the site and through mixed with sand, cocopeat and sludge in
the ratio of 6:1.5:1.5:1 before application. Topsoil for planting shall be fertile natural
red/brown topsoil, free from stones, roots, sticks, clay, wood and sod and shall be
free from any toxic matter liable to be harmful to plant growth.
3.07 MAINTENANCE OF LANDSCAPING AND PLANTING:
3.07.1 The Contractor shall maintain all completed works and rectify all defects for a period
commencing from the contract completion date up to end of the defects liability
period.
3.07.2 During the period, the Contractor shall be responsible for the repair and
replacement of any defective works to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.07.3 The period of maintenance shall commence only after the acceptance in writing of
the completion of the entire works by the Engineer. The extent of maintenance shall
be as provided hereunder.
1. Watering of Plants:
a. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to water and spray water to remove

dust to all plants regularly.
b. All the external plants shall be watered twice daily in the absence of
sufficient natural rainfall.
2. Weeding:
All weeds found growing in the landscape area under maintenance must be
removed.
All plants beds must be weeded weekly.
3. Forking:
All plants beds must be forked fortnightly to loosen the soil and provide
sufficient aeration for the roots. Changkol should not be used to loosen the soil.
4. Pruning:
02033-4
a. Plants must be pruned when necessary. All trees, palms, shrubs and
groundcovers shall be pruned by thinning out and shortening branches to
the extent of one third of the existing growth.
b. Dead wood and broken or badly bruised branches shall be removed.
c. Main leaders shall not be cut.
d. Pruning shall be done with clean, sharp tools to produce clean-cut face.
5. Topdressing/Mulching:
Plant with exposed root planting beds and turfing with low topsoil level and
those affected by rainwater splashing and erosion shall be top-dressed at every
3 months. A mulching can reduce the amount of water lost through surface
evaporation, weed generation and soil erosion. All planting bed must be
mulched with coco-peat at every 3 months interval.
6. Spraying of Plants:
All foliage and flowering plants must be sprayed with a fungicide, miticide and
an insecticide once every two weeks or when directed by the Engineer.
7. Fertilizing of Plants:
Slow release of NPK combine with fast release organic fertilizer shall be
applied regularly to ensure healthy growth, repeating the application once 4 – 6
weeks or when directed by the Engineer.
All trees, foliage and flowering plants are to be given fertilizer according to the
following dosage, fertilizer type and frequency.
Fertilizer Plants Dosage Frequency

N : 12 P Trees 25 g/plant Once/ month
X : 2 Mg Palms 8 g/ plant Once/month
8. Replacement of Plants:
All dead plant/turf and plants not growing properly are to be replaced by healthy
plants of the same species at the Contractor’s own expense.
9. Inspection and Acceptance of Works:
a. Upon completion of the Works, the Contractor shall request the Engineer in
writing to inspect and determine whether all plants are acceptable to the
Engineer. Should any plant be unacceptable to the Engineer, the
Contractor shall replace all such plant at his own expense as and when
directed by the Engineer and to the satisfaction to the Engineer.
b. The Contractor must ensure that all plants beds are tidied up and free from
any debris or dead plant materials immediately on completion of the
planting works.
02033-5
c. All areas affected by horticulture activities must be thoroughly cleaned and

soil stains etc., removed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
d. Prior to handing over of the work at contract completion and at the end of
the defects liability period, all plants must be groomed and neatly trimmed
to show off their best for the purpose of inspections.
- END OF SECTION -
02033-6
SECTION 02034
REINFORECEMENT OF EMBANKMENT
PART I: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This section covers the construction of embankment reinforced with geosynthetic
materials and sub-drainage and slope protection as shown on the Drawings.
1.01.2 The embankment to be reinforced shall be constructed in accordance with the

specification for other work items involved and in conformity with lines, grade,
section and dimensions shown in the drawings or required by the Engineer.
for the reinforcement and subdrainage work as specified herein and on the
drawings.

OPERATIONS”
• American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)

standard;
• Indonesia Industrial Standard (SII).

ASSURANCE/CONTROL PROGRAMME "and as specified herein.
02034 - 1
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
2.01.1 Geogrid:
Geogrid is used for reinforcement of soil structure, the roadbed, embankment and
slope, and protect them from landslide or collapse.
In this project, the geogrid is categorized into I and II as mentioned below.
“The geogrid I” used for reinforced soil wall and embankment shall be made by
high density polypropylene (HDPE), and “the geogrid II” used for the base or
foundation reinforcement shall be polyester fiber coated product with synthetic
resin so as not to be easily cracked or broken like vinyl chloride materials.
In case a slope of embankment is very steep, “the geogrid I” can be used

combined with reinforced concrete panel or wall, or wall made with soil bags
wrapped with geogrid to protect a slope of embankment. This method is called as
Reinforced Railroad with Rigid Facing Method (RRR method), which has been
developed by The Japan Railway Technical Research Institute.
effect, the bacteria, other biological effect, and etc., and shall be light weight.
Locations of geogrid is shown on the Drawings or designated by the Engineer.

The material shall be clean and without any slash in it, and also shall be product
supplied by the reliable manufacture or supplier.
The physical properties of the material to be used in this project shall satisfy the
following requirement or equivalent:
GEOGRID I
(Reinforced soil wall, embenkment)
Material High Density Polypropylene (HDPE)
Parmanent 19kN/m
Design Strength Temporary 31 kN/m
Earthquake 31 kN/m
Design parameters of Geogrid shall be evaluated by the specified test method
designated by the Japan Railway Technical Research Institute.
02034 - 2
GEOGRID II
(Base of reinforcement)
Material Polyester Fiber coated by synthetic
resin
Vertical 200 ~ 700 kN/m
Design Strength
Horizontal 50 ~ 100 kN/m
2.01.2 Geotextile:
The geotextile used for reinforcement, filtration and drainage shall be composed of
polypropylene non-woven type textile. The material shall be durable against the
chemicals including acidity and alkalinity effect, the bacteria, other biological effect
and etc., and shall be light weight. Tensile strength of this material shall be equal
irrespective of the direction on the textile, lengthwise and crosswise.
Locations of the Geotextile is shown on the Drawings or designated by the

product supplied by the reliable manufacture or the supplier. This geotextile is
used for reinforcement, filtration and drainage of soil structure like the roadbed,
embankment or the like to protect them from contamination of embankment soil
and soft soil of subgrade.
The physical properties of the material to be applied for this project shall satisfy at
least the following requirement or equivalent.
Type 1 is used for layer control in order to secure compaction work and also as
filter for sub drainage together with porous pipe. Type 2 is used for drainage sheet
that shall be installed in embankment.
Type 1 Type 2
Description Test Standard Unit
Layer control Drainage
Chemical
No Influence at Range 2 -13
Resistance
Thickness JIS L 1908 mm 1.2 2.4
Tensile Strength JIS L 1908 kN/m 5.8 15.6
Elongation Ditto % 80 / 40 80 / 40
2
Mass JIS L 1085 g/m 140 or more 300 or more
Permeability JIS A 1218 cm/sec 1×10-2 1×10-2
(Note): Type 1 is also used as filter of sub-drainage with porous pipe in drainage
work.
2.01.3 Vegetation Sand Bag:
The vegetation sand bag shall be a composite of woven net bag and cotton paper
with fertilizer for faster growth of grass from the seeds, which exists in the natural
environment so as not to violate the surrounding nature. This bag packed with soil
or sand shall have a function to protect erosion of steep slope of the embankment
by being wrapped with geogrid.
02034 - 3
Locations of the vegetation sand bag is shown on the Drawings or designated by

the Engineer. The material shall be cleaned and without any slash in it, and also
shall be product supplied by the reliable manufacture or supplier.
The physical poperties of the materials shall have strength enough and satisfy at
the least the following requirement or equivalent.
Description Width Length Volume Remarks

Without any kinds of seeds
Vegetation Sand 0.015
40cm 60cm
Bag m3 With non woven net processed
with fertilizer
2.01.4 Vegetation Mat:
The Vegetation mat shall be a composite of woven net with cotton sheet with
fatilizer and capture grass seeds from the surrounding field. This mat shall be
made of cotton soft fabric and decomposed in the slope soil within few years and
have a function to protect erosion ecologically for long gentle slope.
Locations of the vegetation mat is shown on the Drawings or designated by the

product supplied by the reliable manufacture or supplier.
The physical poperties of the materials shall have strength enough and satisfy at
the least the following requirement or equivalent.
Description Material Stitch Size Remarks

Without any kinds of seeds
Vegetation Breakable 25×25
With non woven net
Mat Resin (mm)
processed with fertilizer
2.01.5 HDPE Porous Pipe:
The High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) porous pipe used for drainage shall be
high density polyethylene product so as not to be easily cracked or broken like
vinyl chloride materials due to its elasticity. It shall have large open ratio with net-
type pore on the surface. The material shall be durable against the chemicals
including acidity and alkalinity effect, the bacteria, other biological effect, and etc.,
and shall be light weight and some flexibility. And coupling and jointing of straight
pipe shall be easy without any other additional material. However, in case of
jointing this pie with usual PVC pipe, it shall be avilable to use PVC coupling
socket for the connection.
Locations of the HDPE Porous Pipe is shown on the Drawings or designated by

the Engineer. The material shall be clean and without any slash in it, and also shall
be product supplied by the reliable manufacture or supplier. This porous pipe is
usually used for drainage of soil structure as sub-drain of the roadbed,
embankment or the like.
The physical properties of the material to be used for this project shall satisfy at
02034 - 4
Description Allowable Value Remarks

Material Polyethylene
Diameter (mm) Φ100 ~Φ300
Length (mm) 4000
Dimension Open Full Open 9~13
Ratio
2/3 Open 7~10
(%)
Load capacity on the
Pressure Strength 0.29~1.47 kN/m at flatness 10%
pipe
2.01.6 Geocomposite, Drain Mat:
The Drain mat shall be a composite of geotextile manufactured from hi-density

polyethylene with three dimensional mesh characteristics. Polyethylene net shall
have a function to collect water from soil at the whole surface. Polypropylene filter
shall have a function to prevent clogging. This material is used for drainage in
embankment and road bed as horizontal drainage, and backfill drainage of
concrete retaining wall as vertical drainage.
The drain mat shall be durable against the bacteria and other biological effect, the
soil acidity effect and the soil alkalinity, and have a sufficient flexibility. The
physical properties of the materials shall satisfy at least the following requirement
or equivalent.
Description Allowable Value Remarks

5.0 ×10-1 (cm/sec) or more Vertical Drainage by
Water
JIS A 1218 or
Permeability at 200 kPa (Vertical Load)
equivalent
Around 50% Based on JIS B 7733
Break point at
at 6.3 kN (Lengthwise) or equivalent
maximum Load
and 4.4 kN (Widthwise)
Thickness (mm) 30
Dimension Width (mm) 200
Length (m) 10
2.01.4 Testing:
The initial absorption rate of all types of material selected for the work shall be
work.
02034 - 5
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 REINFORECEMENT WORK:
The basic construction of embankment shall be conformed in accordance with the

specification in the Section 02012: “FILLING, GRADING AND EMBANKMENT
CONSTRUCTION. Especially, the followings shall be considered in relation with
reinforcement work of embankment as shown in the Drawings.
3.01.1 Reinforcement Work on Soil Wall, Embankment:
1. Geogrid shall be spread on the level ground surface without slack. And
vegetation soil bag shall be piled up at the position of soil wall so as to
structure with designated incline;
2. The vegetation soil bag shall be prepared and filled with around 0.015m3 of
soil in advance to pilling up, and shall be piled up by around 27 bags/m2 of the
embankment surface area;
3. Soil shall be spread and compacted on the geogrid so as to be 20 ~ 30 cm

high at the completed level for each layer.
4. Work item 2 shall be repeated up to the layer height designated, and shall be
installed with the next geogrid. The piled bag shall be wrapped with the
geogrid without slack. And the geogrid shall be fixed by anchor at the end.
5. Work items, 2 and 3 shall be repeated upto the embankment, or soil wall
height designated; and
6. In case of the RRR method if necessary, concrete wall reinforced with steel
bar shall be structured on the soil wall surface.
3.01.2 Reinforcement on the foundation:
1. Geogrid shall be spread on the leveld ground surface without slack;
2. Soil shall be spread and compacted on the geogrid so as to be 20 ~ 30 cm

high at the completed level for each layer; and
3. In case of the foundation height with more than a single layer to be required
on the base, or foundation structure, work item 1 and 2 shall be repeated after
item 2 up to the designated height of the base, or foundation.
3.01.3 Vegetation mat installation on the slope:
1. The slope surface shall be cleaned and weeds, needless sand or pebbles
shall be removed, so as that the the vegetation mat can be contacted closely
with the soil surface;
2. The cotton paper side of the vegetation mat shall be put on the slope surface
and spread on the slope in close contact with the soil. End of the mat shall be
covered by 10 cm long with shoulder soil;
02034 - 6
3. Overlap width of the mat shall be 2 cm vertically;
4. The mat shall be fixed by designated number of anchor;
5. Especially, end of the mat shall be fixed carefully without being peeled away;
and
6. Work shall not be proceeded under rain.
3.02 SUB DRAINAGE WORK:
3.02.1 HDPE Porous Pipe:
HDPE porous pipe shall be installed with some incline in accordance with the
Drawings and direction of the Engineer. This material is generally installed in some
gravel wrapped with geotextile as shown in Drawings. Especially compressing
gravel at the both sides of the HDPE porous pipe shall be enough so as to retain
roundness under vertical soil pressure.
3.02.2 Geocomposite, Drain Mat:
Drain mat shall be installed directly in the soil with some incline and shall be kept
some interval to perform required drainage capacity with thr Drawings and the
direction of the Engineer. Drain mat shall be jointed each other or with other pipe
by the proper method or material specified by its manufacture or the authorized
supplier after the approval of the Engineer;
In case of more than a single layer installation in the embankment, drain mat shall
be installed zigzags between each layer in order that drain mat line of each layer
should not be overlapped vertically;
Especially, in case this drain mat is used for backfill drainage as vertical drainage
for retaining wall or shortcrete wall, the drain mat shall be covered with water-proof
sheet at the one side facing to structure which will be concreting later, in
accordance with the Engineer’s instruction or the authorized method by its
manufacturer or supplier; and
Meanwhile upper end of the drain mat inclined shall be closed with geotextile or
method instructed from the Engineer in order to protect the end against mud or
soil flowing into.
- END OF SECTION -
02034 - 7
SECTION 02035
LEVEL CROSSING FACILITIES
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This Section covers the requirements for constructing of level crossing and
approach road inclusive of several types of road facilities as shown on the
Drawings or the Engineer’s instruction.
Section 02006 “DEMOLITION”;

Section 02009 “GENERAL EXCAVATION”;
Section 02015 “FREE DRAINAGE MATERIAL”;
Section 02022 “BOX CULVERT AND PIPE CULVERT”;
Section 02026 “FRENCH DRAIN”;
Section 02027 “MANHOLES AND DRAIN PIPE”;
Section 02029 “STONE MENSONRY”;
Section 02036 “LEVEL CROSSING PAVEMENT”;
Section 02037 “APPROACH ROAD”;
Section 02054 “PAINTING”;
Section 02062 “SUB-GRADE PREPARATION”;
Section 02063 “SUB-BASE”;
Section 02064 “SUB-BALLAST”;
Section 02065 “BITUMINOUS PRIME COAT AND TACK COAT”;
COURSE”;

• Indonesian Industrial Standards (SII)
• Indonesian National Standards (SNI)
02035 - 1
specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
01008: “SUBMITTALS” and as specified herein. The Contractor shall submit the
Shop Drawings showing all miscellaneous works and their locations, types of
material to be used, standards, dimensions, grades, strengths, and others, as
1.04.2 The Contractor shall submit catalogue cuts, literatures, and manufacturers’
installation instructions for the materials specified herein.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 EARTH MATERIAL:
2.01.1 Material for approach embankment fill shall conform to Section 02011: “BORROW
MATERIAL”.
2.01.2 Material for sub-base shall conform to Section 02064: “SUB BALLAST”.
2.02 DRAINAGE:
2.02.1 Concrete shall conform to Section 02068: “CONCRETE”.
2.02.2 Reinforcement steel shall conform to Section 02070: “REINFORCING STEEL

BARS”.
2.02.3 Chloride vinyl pipe shall conform to Section 02027: “MANHOLES AND DRAIN
PIPE”; and
2.02.4 Concrete pipe shall conform to Section 02022: “BOX CULVERT AND PIPE
CULVERT”.
2.03 FENCE:
2.03.1 PT. KAI’s used R33 rail shall be used for rail fence.
02035 - 2
2.04 PAVEMENT:
2.04.1 Material for asphalt pavement shall conform to Section 02065: “BITUMINOUS
PRIME COAT AND TACK COAT” and Section 02066: “ASPHALT CONCRETE
SURFACE COURSE, ASPHALT BINDER COURSE AND ASPHALT TREATED
BASE COURSE”.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL:
3.01.1 Prior to commencement of any work of level crossing, the Contractor shall prepare
and submit for the approval of the Engineer an detailed work schedule showing
sequence of work, relation with other works such as track, drainage, earth
signalling, work method, manner of traffic control of road including permission of
track block if necessary and measures to maintain the safety of train operation.
3.01.2 Construction of level crossing shall be made simultaneously with such principle
work as banking, sub-grade preparation, ballast and track laying. Preparation of
materials, equipment and manpower for these works shall be well planned and
executed.
3.01.3 Every work shall be undertaken carefully in accordance with the requirements
specified in Section 01011: “SECURITY OF RAILWAY OPERATIONS”, Section
01012: “WINDOW-TIME AND SPEED DOWN OF TRAIN OPERATION” and
Section 01013: “PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY”.
3.02 DEMOLITION:
Demolition work shall be executed in accordance with the requirement specified in

Section 02006: “DEMOLITION”.
3.0.3 EARTH WORK:
3.03.1 Excavation and Disposal work shall be constructed in accordance with the
requirements specified in Section 02009: “GENERAL EXCAVATION”.
3.03.2 Back fill shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements specified in
Section 02011: “BORROW MATERIAL”
3.03.3 Sub-ballast shall be installed in accordance with the requirements specified in

Section 02064: “SUB-BALLAST” and the following requirements.
3.03.4 Sub-ballast shall be installed in conjunction with the sub-ballast laying operation of
embankment and shall be thoroughly compacted to a maximum dry density of 90
percent.
02035 - 3
3.03.5 Sub-base shall be installed in accordance with the requirements specified in

Section 02063: “SUB-BASE”.
3.04 MANHOLE:
Manhole shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements specified in

Section 02027: “MANHOLES AND DRAIN PIPE”.
3.05 FRENCH DRAIN:
French drain shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements specified in

Section 02026: “FRENCH DRAIN”.
3.06 PIPE DRAIN:
3.06.1 Pre-cast concrete pipe shall be installed in accordance with the details shown on
the Drawings, and the requirements specified in Section 02022: “BOX CULVERT
AND PIPE CULVERT”.
3.06.2 The pipe shall be supported on stone masonry cradle. The stone masonry cradle
shall be constructed by using cement mortar joint stone masonry structure.
Cement mortar shall also be used to adjust elevation of the pre-cast concrete pipe.
3.07 COBBLE STONE:
Cobble stone base shall be constructed to thickness as indicated on the drawings.

The cobble stone base shall be compacted to a density as approved by the
Engineer.
3.08 GUARD RAIL AND STEEL POST:
3.08.1 Fencing shall be constructed to the lines and grades and in the exact positions
shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
3.08.2 After the setting of concrete or cobble stone foundations, holes shall be back filled
with the excavated material. Back fill material shall be thoroughly compacted to the
same degree of compaction as adjacent soil, as a minimum.
3.08.3 Steel not galvanized shall be painted in accordance with the requirement of
Section 02054: “PAINTING” or directed by the Engineer.
3.09 ASPHALT PAVEMENT:
Asphalt pavement shall be constructed in accordance with the requirement

specified in Section 02036: “LEVEL CROSSING PAVEMENT” and Section 02037:
“APPROACH ROAD”.
- END OF SECTION -
02035 - 4
SECTION 02036
LEVEL CROSSING PAVEMENT
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This Section covers the materials and construction requirements for asphalt
pavement at level crossing as designated on the Drawings or as instructed by the
Engineer.
1.01.2 The requirements not contained in this Section are specified elsewhere as
instructed herein.

OPERATIONS”;
Section 01013 “PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY”;
COURSE”;
Section 05015 “BALLAST DELIVERY AND SPREADING”;
Section 05016 “TRACK LAYING AND GENERAL INCLUDING INITIAL
TAMPING”; and
Section 05024 “FINAL TAMPING (MTT) INCLUDING TRIAL OPERATION
AND RE-TAMPING”.

• Indonesian Industrial Standards (SII)
• Indonesian National Standards (SNI)
02036- 1
specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
01008: “SUBMITTALS” and the requirements specified herein.
When required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit samples and
certificate of conformance that the materials to be used for this part of the work
conform to the standards and requirements specified herein.
1.04.2 Prior to commencement of any work of level crossing, the Contractor shall prepare
and submit the Work Program showing the sequence of work; relation with other
works such as track, drainage, earth, signalｌing, work method, manner of traffic
control of road and measures to maintain the safety of train operation for approval
of Engineer.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 BASIC MATERIALS:
The following materials are forming the basic materials, which are specified in the
referred sections.
2.01.1 Bituminous prime and tack coat to be used shall be in accordance with
the requirements specified in Section 02065: “BITUMINOUS PRIME COAT AND
TACK COAT”.
2.01.2 Asphalt to be used for pavement shall be in accordance with the requirements
specified in Section 02066: “ASPHALT CONCRETE SURFACE COURSE,
ASPHALT BINDER COURSE AND ASPHALT TREATED BASE COURSE”.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL:
measures to keep the excavation free from surface water or surface water run-off.

OPERATIONS”, which shall apply to the construction of asphalt pavement on the
track, if required by the Engineer.
02036- 2
3.01.3 Construction of level crossing pavement shall be performed simultaneously with

such principle work as demolition and grading, sub-grade preparation, sub-ballast
and track laying.
3.01.4 Preparation of materials, equipment, and labour for these works shall be planned
and well executed.
3.02 DEMOLITION AND GRADING:
3.02.1 Before beginning of any demolition or excavation work, the Contractor shall
carefully survey to determine the extent of the works related.
3.02.2 Demolition and excavation of existing road pavement and foundation shall be
made within the limits of works to the lines, grades and elevations indicated on the
Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer.
3.02.3 Immediately after excavation to the indicated depths, the surface of ground soil
shall be graded and compacted in accordance with requirement specified in
The Contractor shall dispose of excavated materials outside the limits of the
Project.
3.03 SUB-GRADE PREPARATION:
Sub-grade shall be prepared on the graded surface in accordance with the

requirements specified in Section 02062: “SUB-GRADE PREPARATION”.
3.04 BALLAST AND TRACK LAYING:
3.04.1 Ballast shall be properly delivered and spread onto the sub-grade and shall be
compacted more than 15 percent of CBR when they are tested in accordance with
ASTND 1883: “The Method for CBR of Laboratory” or JIS 1211: “Method of Test
for the CBR of Soils”.
3.04.2 Horizontal and vertical track alignment shall be made accurately as indicated in
the Drawing and in accordance with the requirements specified in Section 05024:
“FINAL TAMPING (MTT) INCLUDING TRIAL OPERATION AND RE-TAMPING”.
3.05 ASPHALT PAVEMENT:
3.05.1 Installing and fixing semicircular steel pipe shall cover fastening devices on
sleepers.
3.05.2 Well-graded crushed stones shall be spread onto ballast to the height of rail top
and be compacted.
3.05.3 The road pavement shall be built up of successive layers of different types of
materials and specified in Section 02065: “BITUMINOUS PRIME COAT AND
02036- 3
TACK COAT” and Section 02066: “ASPHALT CONCRETE SURFACE COURSE,

3.05.4 Each layer of material shall be properly levelled and compacted before the next
layer is placed.
3.06 TEMPORARY ROAD WORKS:
3.06.1 The Contractor shall furnish, maintain, and remove the temporary road for traffic if
necessary when the level crossing construction is executed. Such temporary road
works shall be constructed to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and shall be
maintained by the Contractor who shall be responsible for any damage done to or
caused by such temporary road works in any way.
3.06.2 Before constructing temporary road works, the Contractor shall make all
necessary arrangements, including payment if required, to the Public Authorities
or landowners concerned, for the use of the land and he shall obtain the prior
approval of the Engineer. Such approval will be dependent on the Engineer being
satisfied with the Contractor’s proposals for items such as signing, lighting and
riding quality of the temporary road together with the proposed maintenance
arrangement. However such approval will not relieve the Contractor’s
responsibilities under the Contract. Upon completion of the works, the contractor
shall clean up and restore the land to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.06.3 In case where it is necessary or required by the Engineer, the contractor shall
construct and maintain temporary traffic ramps, and furnish all the labour and
materials required therefore.
3.06.4 In order to facilitate traffic through or around the works, or wherever ordered by
the Engineer, the contractor shall erect and maintain at prescribed points on the
site and the approaches to the site, traffic signs, lights, flares, barricades and
other facilities as required by the Engineer for the direction and control of traffic.
3.06.5 The existing number of traffic lanes on roads at the project site should be
maintained at all times during the work and if diversions are provided these should
be of the same traffic capacity as the original road.
3.06.6 Notwithstanding the above, the Contractor shall obtain all necessary approvals
from the national Traffic Authority (DLLAJR) and other pertinent agencies
regarding traffic control and all details will be subject to the Engineer’s approval, if
the Contractor wishes to reduce the traffic capacity and can show that this will not
cause excessive delay to traffic.
3.06.7 If such approval is given, the Engineer may specify the hours during the day when
the reduction in capacity may be applied and it should be anticipated that these
hours may not include the peak period for the traffic movement under
consideration.
3.06.8 Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, a detour is not feasible or possible,
construction or reconstruction of existing public roads shall be undertaken only
over half of the full width of the roadway. The length of such half-width
construction shall be kept as short as possible.
02036- 4
3.06.9 When single lane traffic becomes necessary over a particular length of the works
or over the approaches thereto, the Contractor, in maintaining through traffic, shall
provide a single lane at least three and half meters wide on the roadway.
3.06.10 The Contractor shall so conduct his operations as to offer the least possible
obstruction, inconvenience, and delay to the traffic and shall be responsible for the
adequate control of the traffic using such length of single lane.
3.06.11 Where required, or where directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall construct
the temporary fence around his work to provide a visual barrier between his work
area and adjacent traffic. The barrier shall be of 1.8-m height and of acceptable
construction and appearance to the Authorities and the Engineer. The movement
of labor, materials and plant into and out of the project area shall be controlled by
the flagman.
- END OF SECTION -
02036- 5
SECTION 02037
APPROACH ROAD
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This section covers the materials and construction requirements for asphalt
approach road on the existing public road, which as designated on the Drawings
or as instructed by the Engineer.
1.01.2 The requirements not contained in this section are specified in other related
sections as instructed herein.

OPERATIONS”;
Section 02065 “BITUMINOUS PRIME COAT AND TACK COAT”; and
COURSE”.
1.02.1 The following codes and Standards are intended to provide an acceptable level of

• Indonesian National Standards (SNI).
specified herein.
02037 – 1
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
1.04.2 Prior to commencement of any work of approach road construction, the Contractor
shall prepare and submit a detailed Work Program showing sequence of works,
relation with other works such as drainage, earth and track, work method, manner
of road traffic control for the approval of the Engineer.
1.04.3 When required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit samples and
certificate of conformance that the materials to be used for this part of the work
conform to the standards and requirements specified herein.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 BASIC MATERIALS:
The following materials are forming the basic materials, which are specified in the
referred sections.
2.01.1 Bituminous prime and tack coat to be used shall be in accordance with
the requirements specified in Section 02065: “BITUMINOUS PRIME COAT AND
TACK COAT”.
2.01.2 Asphalt to be used for pavement shall be in accordance with the requirements
specified in Section 02066: “ASPHALT CONCRETE SURFACE COURSE,
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL:
Every work shall be undertaken carefully in accordance with Section 01011:

“SECURITY OF RAILWAY OPERATIONS”, Section 01012: “WINDOW-TIME AND
SPEED DOWN OF TRAIN OPERATION” and Section 01013: “PROTECTION OF
WORK AND PROPERTY”.
3.02 DEMOLITION AND GRADING:
3.02.1 Before beginning of any demolition or excavation work, the Contractor shall
carefully survey to determine the extent of the works related.
3.02.2 Demolition and excavation of existing road pavement and foundation shall be
made within the limits of works to the lines, grades and elevations indicated on the
Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer.
02037 – 2
3.02.3 Immediately after excavation till the indicated depths, the surface of ground soil
shall be graded and compacted in accordance with requirement specified in
3.02.4 The Contractor shall dispose of excavated materials outside the limits of the
Project.
3.03 SUB-GRADE PREPARATION:
Sub-grade shall be prepared on the graded surface in accordance with the

requirements specified in Section 02062: “SUB-GRADE PREPARATION”.
3.04 EMBANKMENT:
Where the existing approach road is constructed on embankment, the

embankment shall be increased in height and extent as shown on the Drawings
and using materials and construction manners specified in Section 02012:
The shape and dimension of embankment shall be the same as shown in the
Drawing or as instructed by the Engineer.
3.05 ROAD PAVEMENT:
3.05.1 The road pavement shall be built up with successive layers of different types of
materials as specified in Section 02066: “ASPHALT CONCRETE SURFACE
COURSE, ASPHALT BINDER COURSE AND ASPHALT TREATED BASE
COURSE” or as may be instructed by the Engineer.
3.05.2 Each layer of materials shall be properly leveled and compacted before the next
layer is placed.
3.05.3 The Contractor shall determine the pavement design for each approach road,
which shall be approved by the Engineer before any pavement is started.
3.05.4 The prepared surface shall be treated with bituminous prime coats and tack coats
in accordance with the requirements specified in Section 02065: “BITUMINOUS
PRIME COAT AND TACK COAT”.
3.05.5 As soon as possible after application of the tack coat the Contractor shall
construct the asphalt treated base course and asphalt concrete surface course of
the road pavement in the thickness as shown in the drawings and in accordance
with the requirement specified in Section 02066: “ASPHALT CONCRETE
SURFACE COURSE, ASPHALT BINDER COURSE AND ASPHALT TREATED
BASE COURSE”.
02037 – 3
3.06 SHOULDERS:
Shoulders shall be built up to the level of the finished pavement surface in the
width shown in the Drawings.
3.07 TEMPORARY ROAD WORKS:
3.07.1 The Contractor shall furnish, maintain, and remove the temporary road for traffic if
necessary when the level crossing construction is executed. Such temporary road
works shall be constructed to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and shall be
maintained by the Contractor who shall be responsible for any damage done to or
caused by such temporary road works in any way.
3.07.2 Before constructing temporary road works, the Contractor shall make all
necessary arrangements, including payment if required, to the Public Authorities
or landowners concerned, for the use of the land and he shall obtain the prior
approval of the Engineer. Such approval will be dependent on the Engineer being
satisfied with the Contractor’s proposals for items such as signing, lighting and
riding quality of the temporary road together with the proposed maintenance
arrangement. However such approval will not relieve the Contractor’s
responsibilities under the Contract. Upon completion of the works, the contractor
shall clean up and restore the land to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.07.3 In case where it is necessary or required by the Engineer, the contractor shall
construct and maintain temporary traffic ramps, and furnish all the labor and
materials required therefore.
3.07.4 In order to facilitate traffic through or around the works, or wherever ordered by
the Engineer, the contractor shall erect and maintain at prescribed points on the
site and the approaches to the site, traffic signs, lights, flares, barricades and
other facilities as required by the Engineer for the direction and control of traffic.
3.07.5 The existing number of traffic lanes on roads at the project site should be
maintained at all times during the work and if diversions are provided these should
be of the same traffic capacity as the original road.
3.07.6 Notwithstanding the above, the Contractor shall obtain all necessary approvals
from the national Traffic Authority (DLLAJR) and other pertinent agencies
regarding traffic control and all details will be subject to the Engineer’s approval, if
the Contractor wishes to reduce the traffic capacity and can show that this will not
cause excessive delay to traffic.
3.07.7 If such approval is given, the Engineer may specify the hours during the day when
the reduction in capacity may be applied and it should be anticipated that these
hours may not include the peak period for the traffic movement under
consideration.
3.07.8 Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, a detour is not feasible or possible,
construction or reconstruction of existing public roads shall be undertaken only
over half of the full width of the roadway. The length of such half-width
construction shall be kept as short as possible.
02037 – 4
3.07.9 When single lane traffic becomes necessary over a particular length of the works
or over the approaches thereto, the Contractor, in maintaining through traffic, shall
provide a single lane at least three and half meters wide on the roadway.
3.07.10 The Contractor shall so conduct his operations as to offer the least possible
obstruction, inconvenience, and delay to the traffic and shall be responsible for the
adequate control of the traffic using such length of single lane.
3.07.11 Where required, or where directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall construct
the temporary fence around his work to provide a visual barrier between his work
area and adjacent traffic. The barrier shall be of 1.8-m height and of acceptable
construction and appearance to the Authorities and the Engineer. The movement
of labour, materials and plant into and out of the project area shall be controlled by
the flagman.
- END OF SECTION -
02037 – 5
SECTION 02038
ROAD FACILITY
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This work shall consists of furnishing and installing the specified types of traffic
signs, traffic guide signs, road marker at the level crossing or as directed by the
Engineer and as required by the Ministry of Transportation Decree No. PM/L/Phd-
75:” Procedures of Installing, location and other Rules for Guide Signs of Roads
and Highway” and No. KM 170/L/Phb-75: “The Indonesian Traffic Signs”.
Section 02035: “LEVEL CROSSING FACILITIES”.
1.02.1 The following codes and Standards are intended to provide an acceptable level of

• American Association for State Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO) Standards;
• Rules for Guide Signs of Roads and Highway.
specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:

02038-1
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL:
2.01.1 Steel and aluminium materials shall be of durable quality and shall be approved by
the Engineer.
2.01.2 Steel poles for traffic signs shall be galvanized or other protection shall be treated.
2.01.3 Rust prevention paint and galvanising shall conform to Section 02054:
“PAINTING” of these Specifications.
2.01.4 Paint to be used for road marker shall conform to Section 02054: “PAINTING” and
2.01.5 Concrete curbs shall be non-reinforced pre-cast. The concrete for pre-cast curbs
shall be Class D, and any base or foundation shall be of concrete Class K or
blinding stone as instructed by the Engineer.
2.01.6 The concrete shall meet the requirements specified in the Section 02068:
“CONCRETE”.
2.01.7 Bedding and joint mortar for pre-cast curbs shall comply with the requirements
specified in the Section 02069: “CEMENT MORTAR”.
2.01.8 The tolerance for dimension of curb shall be plus minus 10 mm.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL:
3.01.1 Prior to commencement of the work, the Contractor shall submit the Shop
Drawings showing the type, number and location of all related work based on the
Contractor’s survey for Engineer’s approval.
3.01.2 After the completion of all related work, the Contractor shall back fill and tidy up
the work site to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.02 TRAFFIC SIGN & TRAFFIC GUIDE SIGNS:
3.02.1 When traffic signs are to be installed on an existing road, extreme care shall be
exercised to prevent obstruction of traffic. Any damaged portion of the road shall
be repaired to its original condition immediately after installation.
3.02.2 The Contractor shall obtain permission from Traffic Department for the traffic sign
installation.
02038-2
3.02.3 Traffic signs shall be carefully handled so as not to cause damage, and the
Contractor shall repair or replace signs at his own cost in the event of damage.
3.03 CONCRETE CURB:
3.03.1 The construction requirement shall conform to Section 02068: “CONCRETE”
3.03.2 Before placing the exposed section of the curb, all lines and levels shall be
checked by the Engineer.
3.03.3 Pre-cast curbs shall be set on a concrete base with an adjusting mortar bed.
3.04 ROAD MARKER:
Road marker shall be constructed in accordance with Rules for Guide Signs of
Roads and Highway.
- END OF SECTION -
02038-3
SECTION 02039
FENCING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This Section covers the requirements for furnishing, delivery and
installation of steel fences at the locations shown on the Drawings.
1.01.2 The Contractor shall furnish all labour, materials, tools and equipment to
complete the work.
1.01.3 The Contractor shall comply with the applicable reference standards listed
in Section 01007: “QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL PROGRAMME”
and as specified herein.
1.02 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
The codes and standards for steel fence listed below form a part of this
Specification:
B 1180 Hexagon Head Bolts and Hexagon Head crews;

B 1181 Hexagon Nuts and Hexagon Thin Nuts;
B 1256 Plain Washers;
G 3101 Rolled Steel Tubes for General Structure;
G 3444 Carbon Steel Tubes for General Structural Purposes;
G 3551 Welded Steel Wire Fabric;
H 8641 Zinc Hot Dip Galvanising;
• Standard Industri Indonesia (SII)
• Standar Nasional Indonesia (SNI)
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
1.03.1 Submittals shall be made in accordance with the requirements of Section

1.03.2 Shop drawings shall include all shop and erection details. Members and
connections for any portion of the fence not shown on the Drawings shall
be detailed by the Contractor. Shop drawings shall also show details of
reinforcement, sizes and grade of steel, and bending and splicing details.
1.03.3 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review and approval the
items listed herein:
02039-1
- The manufacturer drawings and specifications.

- Certificate of compliance stating that material used for fabrication of
fence conform to all requirements of this specification.
- Certificate of testing including test data to show that all tests specified
have been performed and all requirements have been met.
1.03.4 When required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit design of
mixing concrete giving the maximum nominal coarse aggregate size and
the proportions of all ingredients that will be used in the manufacture of
required strength of concrete. Aggregate weights shall be based on the
saturated surface dry condition.
1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING:
1.04.1 The Contractor shall inspect the steel fences at the time of delivery for
compliance with the specifications.
1.04.2 The material handlings (store, transport, loading and unloading) shall
comply to the manufacturer’s instructions.
1.04.3 When the products are damaged, which will require replacement, or which
do not comply with the specification, immediate action shall be taken to
replace the products, so that the project performance and schedule are not
impaired.
1.04.4 The Contractor shall store and handle the fences at the construction site in
a manner to prevent damage and deterioration.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 STEEL MESH FENCE:
2.01.1 Steel mesh shall be welded steel wire fabrics conforming to JIS
G 3551. Dimensions shall be in accordance with the Drawings. Zinc
coating shall conform to JIS H 8641.
2.01.2 Steel posts shall be of structural steel pipe conforming to JIS G 3444,
Class 2, STK 41. The minimum outside diameters and wall thickness of the
pipe shall be in accordance with the Drawings. All steel pipes shall be zinc
coated in accordance with the requirements of JIS H 8641.
2.01.3 Clip shall conform to JIS G 3101, Class 2, SS41. Steel bolts, nuts and
washers shall conform to JIS B 1180, B 1181 and B 1256, receptively.
Weight of zinc coating shall be the same as for members on which clips,
bolts, nuts and washers are used.
02039 - 2
2.01.4 Cobblestones shall be a cube of hard and durable limestone or andesite or

granite of the size ranging from 10 cm to 12 cm, or other appropriate size
approved by the Engineer. The stone shall be flat, wedge or convex
shaped. The base surface shall not be less than 1/16 of the front surface,
and the shorter length of the base surface shall be more than 1/10 of the
longer length. The standard number of stones per square metre shall be
14. However, minor deviation will be allowed when approved by the
Engineer.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
3.01.1 The fence shall be installed on the foundation previously prepared to line
and grades indicated.
3.01.2 Excavation for cobblestone foundation shall be of the dimensions

indicated. After excavation to final grade, the remaining subgrade shall be
thoroughly compacted with mechanical tampers or other approved
equipment well suited to the type of material being compacted, to the
3.01.3 Where excavation dimensions are not indicated the dimensions shall be
selected by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. Excavation shall
be large enough to construct cobblestone foundation.
3.02 COBBLESTONE FOUNDATION:
3.02.1 Placing of cobblestones shall not begin until the finishing stakes set
according to the design have been inspected and approved by the
Engineer.
3.02.2 Stones shall be washed with water before placing. A mortar bed shall be
spread on the sides of adjacent stones before the next stone is laid.
3.02.3 The thickness of the mortar shall be the minimum necessary to ensure that
hammered into place and any stone whose face is deviating more than 20
mm form the true face or more than 30 mm the face of the adjacent stone,
shall immediately be made good by lifting and relaying. Face joints
between stones shall be flush-pointed as work proceeds.
3.02.4 The masonry shall be satisfactorily protected from the sun and shall be
kept wet for a period of at least three days after completion.
02039 - 3
3.03 STEEL AND MESH FENCE:
3.03.1 Post setting shall be set plumb and in alignment. Posts shall be set with
concrete column. Concrete of columns, when prefabricated, shall be cured
a minimum of 72 hours before any further work is done on the posts.
3.03.2 Steel mesh fabric shall be installed on posts using clips with bolts, nuts and
washers. Damaged surfaces or fence members shall be repaired at the
cost of Contractor when so instructed by the Engineer.
- END OF SECTION -
02039 - 4
SECTION 02040
PLATFORM
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This Section covers the requirements for furnishing and providing renewal,
rehabilitation and construction of new platforms within the railway stations as
1.01.2 This section also covers the requirements for removal of existing platform.
1.01.3 During the execution of the work, temporary platforms shall be prepared for the
passengers by the Contractor if it is deemed necessary or instructed by the
Engineer for the safety reasons.

OPERATIONS”
Section 02016 “FOUNDATION WORK’
Section 02042 “LINE BUILDINGS”
• American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):
B 1051 Mechanical Properties of Steel Bolts and Screws;

B 1181 Hexagon Nuts and Hexagon Thin Nuts;
B 1187 Hexagon Head Screws with Washers;
M 85 Portland Cement;
02040 - 1

• Standard Industrial Indonesia (SII)
• Standard nasional Indonesia (SNI)
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
1.04.2 Before commencement of the work, the Contractor shall prepare a well-planned
Work Program for approval by the Engineer. This Work Program shall include the
outline of the work within the window time, preparatory arrangement of the work,
required temporary facilities, proper assignment of personnel and other means
necessary for proper performance of work.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE:
2.01.1 Concrete work shall be in accordance with the requirements specified in Section
02068: “CONCRETE”, Section 02069: “CEMENT MORTAR” and Section 02070:
“REINFORCING STEEL BARS” and the requirements specified herein.
2.01.2 The compressive strength of the concrete, using cube sampling and testing, shall
be as follows:
Concrete Foundation: - CLASS fc = 21 N/mm2

Concrete Slab: - CLASS fc = 21 N/mm2
Leveling Concrete: - CLASS fc = 15 N/mm2
2.01.3 Reinforcing bars specified as being 13 mm diameter or less shall conform to SII
0136 (Grade U-24).
Hook bolt shall be fabricated in accordance with JIS B 1051.
Bolts, nuts and washers shall conform to JIS B 1187 and B 1181, respectively.
2.02 STONE MASONRY:
2.02.1 Stone masonry shall be in accordance with the requirements specified in Section
02029: “STONE MASONRY”.
02040 - 2
2.02.2 The stone shall be sound, have sufficient strength, no seams, shall be of good
quality, and shall be resistance to weathering.
2.02.3 The base surface shall be not less than 1/16 of the front surface, and the shorter
length of the base surface shall be more than 1/10 of the longer length.
Portland cement shall conform to AASHTO M 85, Type I, or SII 0013, or JIS
R5210, Class I.
2.03 SAND:
2.03.1 Sand shall be in accordance with the requirements specified in Section 02016:
“FOUNDATION WORK”
2.03.2 Sand Layer material shall consist of well-graded sand of tough and durable
particle, and shall contain not more than 10 percent by weight of material passing
a No. 200 sieve and no less than 95 percent by weight passing 25.4 mm sieve.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL:
run-off.
3.01.2 Every work shall be undertaken carefully in accordance with Section 01011:
3.02 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL:

construction, or other means to carry train loads as approved by the Engineer.
3.02.3 Support systems shall be performed in accordance with the Specifications

specified in Section 02010: “STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFIILL” under
the item “COFFERDAMS”.
The sides of pits and trenches shall be thoroughly supported at all times.
02040 - 3
3.02.6 All excavated material not required for back filling shall be dealt with in accordance
with the requirements specified in Section 02012: “FILLING, GRADING AND
EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION” or Section 02013: “WASTE”
3.02.7 Soft spots in the bottom of excavation shall be removed and resulting void
immediately backfilled with Granular Backfill in accordance with the requirements
specified in Section 02014: “GRANULAR BACKFILL”.
3.02.8 When Engineer instructs this additional treatment, it will be paid for under the
relevant Section of these Specifications. Where the Engineer considers that soft
spots are due to the Contractor’s failure to fulfill his obligations under any Section
of these Specifications then the Contractor shall, at his own expense, undertake
the additional excavation and replacement, with Granular Backfill to the
3.03 REMOVAL OF EXISTING PLATFORM:
3.03.1 Irrespective of thickness, all asphalt concrete or concrete pavements or other hard
surfaces including stone masonry wall designated for removal, shall be broken into
pieces, and shall be removed and stockpiled at designated locations on the site for
use of Employer, or otherwise disposed of as directed by the Engineer.
3.03.2 The removal of platform pavement shall be carefully undertaken to avoid damage
to abutting sections of pavement or structures designated to remain.
3.03.3 If the removal of stone masonry, ballast, gravel, similar sub-base or base material
is necessary, this work shall be considered as General Excavation, and shall
conform to the requirements of Section 02009: “GENERAL EXCAVATION” of
these specifications, for construction.
3.03.4 If the surface, after the removal of platform pavement, is so soft or muddy that will
make it unsuitable for new platform and/or other structures, the Contractor shall
provide some means to cover the area to keep a satisfactory path for the
pedestrians.
3.03.5 Where portions of the existing platform lie wholly or in part within the limits for a
new platform, they shall be removed as necessary to accommodate the
construction of the proposed structure.
3.03.6 Where only a section of the existing platform is to be demolished, the Contractor
shall execute this work in such a way as to avoid damage to the section designed
to remain, if any damage occurs due directly or indirectly to the Contractor’s
operation it shall be made good at his own expense. All details of the Contractor’s
proposed Work Program should be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
3.03.7 Platform walls shall be removed and then compacted to conform to the
requirements specified in Section 02012: “FILLING, GRADING AND
EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION”.
02040 - 4
3.04 CONCRETE WORK:
3.04.1 Concrete work shall be undertaken in accordance with the requirements specified
in Section 02068: “CONCRETE” and as specified herein.
3.04.2 Site-mixed concrete shall comply with Section 02068: “CONCRETE”.
3.04.3 Within 24 hours after forms are removed, surface defects shall be remedied as
specified herein. For all surfaces, honeycomb and other defective areas shall be
cut back to sound concrete and to a depth of not less than 2 cm. For surfaces
permanently exposed to view, the cement used shall be a blend of job cement with
white cement proportioned so that the final color after curing will be the same as
the adjacent concrete.
3.04.4 Concrete with excessive honeycomb, or other defects, which affect the strength of
the member, will be rejected or the defects shall be corrected as directed by the
Engineer.
3.04.5 Placing concrete shall be continuous so that each unit of operation will be
monolithic. Concrete shall be consolidated, screened to grade, and prepared for
the specified finish. Jointing shall be as shown on the drawings. Forms shall
remain in place for at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
3.04.6 Finished surfaces shall be plane, with not deviation greater than 3 mm when
tested with a 3 m straightedge. Surfaces shall be pitched to drains.
3.04.7 Immediately after consolidation, slabs shall be screened with straight edges to
bring the surface to the required finish level with no coarse aggregate visible.
3.04.8 Placing concrete of foundation shall not begin until the finishing stakes set
according to the design have been inspected and approved by the Engineer.
3.04.9 Sand layers shall be laid beneath the concrete floor slab base to the thickness
indicated on the drawings. Sand layer shall be compacted to 90 percent maximum
dry density or as approved by the Engineer.
3.05 STONE MASONRY FOOTING:
3.05.1 Stone masonry work shall be undertaken in accordance with the requirements
specified in the Section 02029: “STONE MASONRY” and as specified herein.
3.05.2 Stone shall be washed with water before placing. A mortar bed shall be spread on
the sides of adjacent stones before the next stone is laid.
3.05.3 The thickness of the mortar shall be the minimum necessary to ensure that there
is not direct contact between stones. Stones shall be thoroughly hammered into
place and any stone whose face is deviating more than 20 mm from the true face
or more than 30 mm the face of the adjacent stone, shall immediately be made
good by lifting and relaying. Face joints between stones shall be flush-pointed as
work proceeds.
3.05.4 The masonry shall be satisfactorily protected from the sun-heat and shall be kept
- END OF SECTION -
02040 - 5
SECTION 02041
PASSAGE WAY AND SLOPE
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This Section covers the materials and construction requirements of passage way
and slope between new platforms or between the new platform and the existing
platform as shown on the Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer.
1.01.2 The requirements not contained in this Section are specified in other related
Sections as instructed herein.

OPERATIONS”;
Section 02042 “LINE BUILDING”;
COURSE”; and
Section 02067 “STEEL STRUCTURE”.
• Indonesian Wood Construction Regulation (PKKI);

• Indonesia Industri Standard (SII);
specified herein.
02041 - 1
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
1.04.2 Prior to commencement of any work, the Contractor shall prepare and submit for
the approval of the Engineer a detailed Work Program showing the sequence of
work; relation with other works such as track, work method, and measures to
maintain the safety of train operation.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL:
2.01.1 All materials and products covered by these Specifications shall, when available,
be procured from a local manufacturer or supplier.
2.01.2 Timbers used for shoulder block of pavement for passenger crossing shall be hard
wood types similar to those used in wooden sleeper as ‘Ulin’, ‘Mebau’, ‘Bangkirai’.
2.01.3 Bituminous prime and tack coat in accordance with the requirements specified in
Section 02065: “BITUMINOUS PRIME COAT AND TACK COAT”.
2.01.4 Asphalt for pavement shall be of the “ASPHALT CONCRETE SURFACE

COURSE” produced in accordance with the requirements specified in Section
02066: “ASPHALT CONCRETE SURFACE COURSE, ASPHALT BINDER
COURSE AND ASPHALT TREATED BASE COURSE”.
2.01.5 Bolt and nut for fixing shoulder block shall comply with the requirements specified
in Section 02067: “STEEL STRUCTURE”.
2.01.6 Non Slip tile to be used shall durable and heavy duty quality of 200 x 200 mm as
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL:
Every work shall be undertaken carefully in accordance with Section 01011:

3.02 EXECUTION:
3.02.1 The Contractor shall survey the location and prepare detailed Shop Drawing for
approval of the Engineer.
02041 - 2
3.02.2 The construction of passenger crossing and walk away shall be executed after all
tracks have been laid in stations.
3.02.3 Wood shoulders shall be installed at accurate locations as shown on the Drawings
by fixing with U-bolt and nut.
3.02.4 Well-graded coarse aggregate shall be spread on well-tamped ballast to the height
of rail top.
3.02.5 After compaction of course aggregate, the prepared surface shall be treated with
bituminous prime coats and tack coats in accordance the requirements specified
in Section 02065: “BITUMINOUS PRIME COAT AND TACK COAT”.
3.02.6 As soon as possible after tack coats have been applied, bituminous surface
course shall be treated in accordance with the requirements specified in Section
02066: “ASPHALT CONCRETE SURFACE COURSE, ASPHALT BINDER
COURSE AND ASPHALT TREATED BASE COURSE”.
- END OF SECTION -
02041 - 3
SECTION 02042
LINE BUILDINGS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This Section shall consist of architectural and structural work to complete the
renewal or modification of various types of line buildings and construction of New
CTC Building and New Kebasen Station as shown on the Drawings.
1.01.2 The term of “new building” in this Section shall means construction of new
buildings at the location away from existing position and the term of
“reconstruction” or “rehabilitation” shall means modification of existing structures
without relocation.
1.01.3 The scope of this Section shall also include the provision of the following works :
- Partial or full demolition of existing structure

- Excavation and backfilling works
- Concrete and reinforcement works
- Structural steel and handrail works
- Roof, wall, tiles works
- Utilities work
- Electricity work
1.01.4 The work for renewal or improvement for platform is specified in Section 02040:
“PLATFORM”.
1.01.5 The Contractor shall provide all necessary labor, materials, tools and equipment
required to complete the work.
Section 02006 “DEMOLITION”

Section 02040 “PLATFORM”
Section 02048 “SEALANT”
Section 02044 “CONCRETE WORK IN BUILDING”
Section 02045 “WALL AND FOUNDATION”
Section 02046 “GLAZED CERAMIC TILE”
Section 02047 “PLASTER WORK”
Section 02048 “BITUMINUOUS MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING”
Section 02050 “MISCELLANEOUS STEEL”
Section 02051 “WOOD WORK”
Section 02052 “GLASS AND GLAZING”
Section 02053 “DOORS AND WINDOWS”
Section 02054 “PAINTING”
Section 02055 “STONE CLADDING”
Section 02056 “GYPSUM BOARD”
Section 02057 “CEILING WORK”
02042 - 1
Section 02058 “FURNITURE”

Section 02059 “BUILDING MECHANICAL SYSTEM”
Section 02060 “BUILDING ELECTRICAL SYSTEM”
1.01.7 Structural steel for buildings:
This work shall consist of the supply, fabrication, delivery to the Site and
installation steels and other steel members for the Building Works only in
accordance with these Specifications and Drawings or as instructed by the
Engineer. All workmanship shall be of the highest standard and where necessary
this Specification shall be supplemented by the relevant clauses from appropriate
Indonesian specification (PPBBI).

• Standard Nasional Indonesia (SNI);
• Peraturan Konstruksi Kayu Indonesia NI -5 PPKI 1973.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
1.04.2 The Contractor shall submit the sample product to the Engineer for review and
approval and certificate of conformance that the material furnished conforms to the
requirements herein.
The Contractor shall also submit manufacturer’s instruction manual and product
catalogs for review and approval. Related shop drawings shall also be submitted.
1.04.3 The Contractor shall submit a detailed work program and schedule for approval of
the Engineer, which should indicate how and when he proposes to execute the
various steps and sequence of the work. The work schedule shall include outline of
the work, preparatory arrangement for the work, required temporary facilities, task
of workers, and other means of the work.
1.04.4 The Contractor shall provide and submit for Engineer’s approval all safety
measurements which conform to Section 01011: “SECURITY OF RAILWAY
02042 - 2

TRAIN OPERATIONS”.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL:
2.01.1 Concrete shall be in accordance with Section 02068: “CONCRETE” unless

otherwise specified.
2.01.2 Steel reinforcement for concrete shall be in accordance with Section 02070:
“REINFORCING STEEL BARS”.
2.01.3 Brick and natural stone for foundation shall be in accordance with Section 02045:
“WALL AND FOUNDATION”.
2.01.4 Ceramic Tile shall be in accordance with Section 02046: “GLAZED CERAMIC
TILE”.
2.01.5 Materials to be used for Plaster shall be in accordance with Section 02047:
“PLASTER WORK”.
2.01.6 Joint sealant shall be in accordance with Section 02048: “SEALANT”.
2.01.7 Materials for waterproofing shall be in accordance with Section 02049:

“BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING”.
2.01.8 Steel shall be in accordance with Section 02050: “MISCELLANEOUS STEEL”.
2.01.9 Glass and other related materials shall be in accordance with Section 02052:
“GLASS AND GLAZING”.
2.01.10 Materials for building door shall be in accordance with Section 02053: “DOORS
AND WINDOWS”.
2.01.11 Paint material shall be in accordance with Section 02054: “PAINTING”.
2.01.12 Natural stone for cladding shall be in accordance with Section 02055: “STONE
CLADDING”.
2.01.13 Materials for wall and ceiling shall be in accordance with Section 02056:
“GYPSUM BOARD”.
2.01.14 Structural steel members for buildings shall comprise “H” and “I” shaped steel plate,
“L” shaped steel and channel steel, all of which shall conform to the requirements
of the Specifications or equivalents as shown on the Drawings. High strength
friction type bolts shall be used for all bolted connections and they shall conform to
the requirements of JIS B 1186 or PPBBI. Prior to the use of any materials, the
Contractor shall submit the technical data from the manufacturers for the
Engineer’s approval.
02042 - 3
2.01.15 Corrugated aluminium and zinc sheet or other metal sheet:
Corrugated aluminium or zinc or other metal sheeting shall be approved by the

Engineer
2.01.16 Skylight Polycarbonate Sheet:
Corrugated polycarbonate sheet for skylights shall be monolithic type of 1.5 mm

nominal thickness and shall be a product which can be made available locally.
Corrugations shall match to those of the aluminium sheet.
2.01.17 Multiplex with painting:
Multiplex shall be of 6 mm thickness, of good quality available locally. The surface

shall be free from any defects which would impair its appearance. Multiplex with
high water resistance shall be used. The multiplex ceiling shall be painted.
2.01.18 Timber framing:
Timber framing used to install suspended ceilings shall be of good quality wood of
suitable dimensions to carry all loads without visible deflection.
2.01.19 Glass wool insulation:
This shall be 50 mm thick with density of 16 kg/m3 installed above ceilings as

PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL:
3.01.1 The work shall be performed so as not to hinder the function of the existing line
buildings.
3.01.2 Prior to the work, the Contractor shall perform the field survey and submit the work
plan together with the safety measures applicable for passenger’s traffic control for
approval by the Engineer.
3.02 CTC BUILDING AT PURWOKERTO STATION:
3.02.1 Erection:
Prior to starting any fabrication work the Contractor shall submit for approval his
Working Drawings and material take-off sheets. The Drawings should show full
details of all proposed joints and include clear instruction for the fixing of anchor
bolt locations. Splices and field connections shall only be made as shown on the
approved Working Drawings. Generally, welded and/or high tension bolts are used
and shall be installed as directed by the Engineer.
a) Anchor Bolts and Anchors:
02042 - 4
They shall be properly located and built into connection work. Bolts and
anchors shall be presented by the use of templates or such other methods as
may be required to locate the anchors and anchor bolt accurately.
b) Column Bases and Bearing Plates:
They shall be provided under columns, beams, girders and trusses resting on
walls or footings. Base and bearing plates may be attached as approved on
the Shop Drawings. Base plates and bearing plates shall be supported and
aligned on steel wedges or shims. After the supported members have been
plumed and properly positioned and anchor nuts tightened, the entire bearing
area under the plate shall be dry-packed solidly with bedding mortar. Wedges
and shims shall be cut off flush with the edge of the column base and bearing
plate, and shall be left in place.
c) Welding:
All the procedures of welding works shall conform to the requirements as

prescribed in the AWS, DI.1-81 (Structural Welding Code). The Contractor
shall prepare a detailed program for quality control of welds in consultation
with the Engineer. This program shall fulfil the requirements of the above Code
and the Contractor may not deviate from the program without the approval of
the Engineer.
Butt welds shall be terminated at the ends of a joint in a manner that will
ensure their soundness. Where possible, this should be done by use of
extension bars or run-off plates.
Where required, multiple-layer welds may be peened with light blows from a
power hammer, using a round nose tool. Peening shall be done after the weld
has cooled to a temperature warm to the hand. Care shall be exercised to
prevent scaling, or flaking of weld and base metal from over-peening.
d) Bolting:
Bolts shall be driven accurately into the holes without damaging the thread.
Bolts head shall be protected from damage during driving. Bolts heads and
nuts shall rest squarely against the metal. Where self-locking nuts are not
furnished, bolt threads shall be upset to prevent the nuts from backing off.
e) Unfinished Bolts Transmitting Shear:
It shall be treated to such a length that not more than one thread will be within
the grip of the metal. The bolts shall be of the length that will extend entirely.
3.02.2 Field Assembly:
After assembly, the various forming part of a completed frame or structure shall be
aligned and adjusted accurately before being fastened. Bearing surfaces and
surfaces that will be in permanent contact shall be cleaned before the members
are assembled. As erection progresses, the work shall be accurately fastened to
take care of all dead load, wind, and erection stresses. Splices will be permitted
02042 - 5
only where indicated. Poor matching of holes shall be corrected by drilling to the
next larger size. Welding for re-drilling will not be permitted.
a) Driftpins:
Driftpins may be used only to bring together the several parts, and shall be not
used in such manner as to distort or damage metal.
b) Gas Cutting:
The use of gas-cutting torch in the field for the correction of fabrication errors
will not be permitted on any major member in the structural framing. The use of
gas-cutting torch will be permitted only on minor members, when the member is
not under stress, and then only after the written approval of the Engineer has be
obtained.
3.02.3 Painting:
All work on painting shall be done only under direct control of qualified supervisor
and in accordance with the manufactures recommendations. Only the highest
standard of painting workmanship will be accepted by the Engineer.
Structural steel to be encased in concrete shall be power brushed clean

immediately before pouring of the concrete. All other steel shall be painted and
surfaces shall be clean and dry when paint is applied. Except as otherwise
specified, structural steel shall be power brushed and given a shop coat of zinc
phosphate primer, immediately after completion of any cutting, drilling or welding.
Steel that is subject to mill and shop inspection shall not be painted until after such
inspection has been made or waived. Welded areas shall be subject treatment
before painting and contact surfaces in bolted joints will require special cleaning,
but no painting. Immediately after erection, all damaged areas of structural steel
work shall be repaired and the entire structure given a second coat of primer.
After the second primer has been applied, all structural steel shall be painted with
two coats of chlorinated rubber paint approved by Engineer. Any damage to, or
disfiguration of paintwork up to the time of Provisional Handover will be repaired by
the Contractor at his own expense.
3.03 STEEL HANDRAILS FOR BUILDING:
3.03.1 This work shall consist of the fabrication, erection, surface, finishing and all other
work indicated or required that is normally done by this trade for stainless steel
handrails for buildings including all anchors, bolts, screws and all necessary
accessories
3.03.2 Complete shop drawings shall be submitted for all items of work of this Clause
showing materials, thickness, dimensions, elevation to adjoining construction,
finishes and all other details to fully illustrate all item of work.
3.03.3 Cut samples of stainless steel which shows welding, anchoring, other connections
of members and surface finishing.
02042 - 6
3.03.4 Steel Pipe with painting shall conform to PPBBI standards.
3.04 ROOF WORK:
3.04.1 This work shall consist of furnishing and constructing a variety of roof and fascia
and materials comprising corrugated aluminium sheet, zinc sheet or other
approved metal sheet necessary to complete the works in accordance with these
Specifications and in reasonably close conformity to the details shown on the
Drawings or directed by the Engineer.
3.04.2 Complete material list of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this
Clause.
3.04.3 Manufacturer’s specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance

with the specified requirements.
3.04.4 Samples of all materials proposed for use in the work.
3.04.5 Manufacturer’s recommended procedures. The manufacturer’s recommended

installation procedures, when approved by the Engineer, will become the basis for
inspecting and accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used.
3.04.6 The Contractor shall submit a detailed work program and schedule for approval of
the Engineer, which should indicate how and when he proposes to execute the
various steps and sequence of the work. The work schedule shall include outline of
the work, preparatory arrangement for the work, proper assignment of workers,
and other means of the work.
3.04.7 The Contractor shall provide and submit for Engineer’s approval all safety
measurements which conform to Section 01011: “SECURITY OF RAILWAY
TRAIN OPERATIONS”.
3.04.8 Broken, chipped, cracked or otherwise damaged materials shall be removed from
the site. All corrugated sheet materials specified herein with improper or miss-
located drill holes shall be considered damaged and removed from the site.
3.04.9 Materials shall be delivered to the site in a dry and undamaged condition and
stored above ground with weather tight coverings.
3.05 NEW MUSHOLA:
3.05.1 Construction of new Mushola room shall be performed at Luwung, Sindanglaut,

Karangsuwung, Notog, Kebasen and Randegan as shown on the Drawings.
3.05.2 Mechanical and electrical works necessary to complete the station building shall
be of the work included.
3.05.3 The Contractor shall construct all other structures such as walkways, steps,
retaining walls, well point and drainages as directed on the Drawings.
02042 - 7
3.06 NEW WATCHMANS’ HUT:
3.06.1 This work shall be applicable for the construction of new watchman’s huts to be
located within the new track area in connection with the double tracking as shown
on the Drawings.
3.06.2 Furnishing of water supply, well point, and drainage system, septic tank and
absorption area shall be of the work included in this Section.
3.06.3 Mechanical and electrical works necessary to complete the watchman’s hut shall
be of the work included. As for electricity supply, the Contractor shall maintain the
interface panels (distribution board), conduit feed and subsequent cabling and
connection by others in Signaling works.
3.07 ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY:
3.07.1 This work shall be applicable only for the new installation of the electrical system at
Kebasen New Station as shown on the Drawings.
3.07.2 The work shall include all cabling/wiring together with excavation, backfilling,
disposal and connecting cables to the existing lighting facilities.
3.08 LIGHTING SHELTER AND POLES:
3.08.1 Lighting system of station at Ketanggungan and Kebasen New Station shall be
provided by this Section as shown on the Drawings. The scope of work varies at
each station.
3.08.2 The work shall include installation of lighting poles, supply / installation of control
box and cabling / wiring from the distribution board. Construction of protective
conduit for cable through new track, and testing / commissioning shall also be
including in the work.
3.09 SOCKET OUTLET AND PUBLIC ADDRESS:
3.09.1 Socket outlet will be placed at a distance from the floor 35 cm. Wiring installations
of socket outlet is with cable type NYM and conduit PVC.
3.09.2 Socket outlets shall be according to DIN standard two-pin type for live and neutral
with grounding connection, and the rating capacity shall be in accordance with SNI
04-0225-2000 (PUIL) regulations.
3.09.3 Socket outlet shall be made of bakelite inserts around the pin apertures.
3.09.4 The contractor shall install Public Address at each station building.
Data public address equipment is:
1. Mixer amplifier, power: 120W, input: mix. 16W,via 1.2 Kohm, speaker output :
180/120W.
02042 - 8
2. Table Top Microphone, portable undirectional, rated impedance 200 ohm,

frequency 100 Hz to 16 kHz.
3. 5Coloumn Metal Speaker, rate input 30/40W, sound pressure level 105 dB/92
dB, impedance 500-8 ohm.
3.10 GROUNDING FACILITIES:
The grounding facilities shall be provided in full compliance with the requirements
specified in Section 09007: “ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE
PROTECTION SYSTEM”.
3.11 LIGHTNING PROTECTION:
3.11.1 The lightning protection systems and equipment shall be provided in full
compliance with the requirements specified in Section 09007:
“ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE PROTECTION SYSTEM”.
3.11.2 All lightning arrestors shall be capable of withstanding multiple strikes.
3.12 WIRES:
3.12.1 The wires between power supply devices shall be 600V grade PVC insulated
stranded copper conductor, providing suitable current capacity to meet the loads
required. The cross sectional area of the wires between the power cubicle and the
external cable rack shall not be less than 10 sq mm.
3.12.2 Where necessary, the Contractor shall undertake all such remedial works that shall
be required to ensure the grounding system shall fully comply in all respects with
this specification.
3.13 NEW BUILDING:
3.13.1 This work shall be applicable for at Kebasen Station.
3.13.2 Mechanical and electrical works necessary to complete the station building shall
be of the work included.
3.13.3 The Contractor shall construct all other structures building, as directed on the
Drawings.
3.13.4 Modification of equipment room will be an additional building as an Interlocking

room (New). It will be built at Luwung, Sindanglaut, Ciledug, Ketanggungan,
Songgom, Notog, Kebasen and Randegan station.
The expansion signal equipment room will be equipped with air conditioning
facilities, lighting, socket outlets, switch lamp and Fire Extinguisher. All these
facilities have been adjusted to the needs of the expansion signal of the new
equipment room.
02042 - 9
3.13.5 Location case Building will be built at north and south side nearby Turn out and in
parallel with station building in Luwung, Sindanglaut, Ciledug, Ketanggungan,
Songgom, Notog, Kebasen and Randegan station. The dimension of this building
is 2.5m x 2.5m as the Signal and Telecom team requirement.
3.13.6 Public Toilet has been installed at all stations. However, there are many problems
with no function for all stations. Therefore, Modification Plan for Public Toilet has
been designed for all stations.
3.14 REHABILITATION:
3.14.1 Rehabilitation of station building is for roof and ceiling of the existing station.
3.14.2 Modification of existing water supply system shall be required to install water tower
tank for new water supply system to public toilet and PPKA toilet. The water tower
tank placed in strategic areas and affordable and meet the requirements for
installation of water by taking into account the spatial location of building that does
not interfere with the movement of passengers and railway operational. Certainly
consider the source of water and water quality.
Toilets in PPKA room, mushola and public toilets will be distributed from the water
tank above the water source as clean water while using existing wells and the
water pump to the water tower tank.
Consideration of using a water tower tank is as the following;
• Minimize use of water pumps.

• By minimizing the use of water pumps, the electricity usage can be reduced
(energy savings)
• Can serve backup water if the pump is damaged or if the electric power is shut
down.
Data of pump and water tower capacity:
• Capacity = 40 liter/ min

• Head pump = 34 meter
• Water tank capacity = 500 liter
3.14.3 Modification/repair of septic tank for waste and sewage water system shall be
required to connect each toilet. Wastewater containing toxic and hazardous
materials should not be combined with domestic wastewater and for domestic
waste water before being discharged into open channels must be processed in
accordance with the guidelines and technical standards applicable.
It has been provided re-design for the waste water system and dirty water from the
toilets, where for the former waste water will be channeled to the city / local
channels located around the station, while for dirty water disposal will be provided
by a septic tank.
-END OF SECTION -
02042 - 10
SECTION 02043
PROTECTIVE FENCE AND HANDRAIL
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This section covers the construction of various types of protective fence and
handrails to be placed on the reinforced concrete or masonry foundation as shown
on the Drawings.
1.01.2 The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment to complete
the work.

Section 02067 “STEEL STRUCTURES”
B 1180 Hexagon Head Bolts and Hexagon Head Screws

B 1181 Hexagon Nuts and Hexagon Thin Nuts
B 1256 Plain Washers
G 3101 Rolled Steel Tubes for General Structure
G 3444 Carbon Steel Tubes for General Structural Purposes
G 3466 Carbon Steel Square Pipe for Ordinary
G 3452 Carbon Steel Pipes for Ordinary pipes
G 3532 Low Carbon Steel Wires
G 3551 Welded Steel Wire Fabric
H 8641 Zinc Hot Dip Galvanizing
• Standard Nasional Indonesia (SNI)
02043 - 1
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
1.04.2 Shop Drawings shall include all in shop works and erection details. Members and
connections for any portion of the fence not shown on the Contract Drawings shall
be prepared in details by the Contractor and indicated completely in the shop
drawings. Shop drawings shall show details of reinforcement, sizes and grade of
steel, and bending and splicing details.
1.04.3 When required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit design concrete mix
giving the maximum nominal coarse aggregate size and the proportions of all
ingredients that will be used in the manufacture of required strength of concrete.
Aggregate weights shall be based on the saturated surface dry condition.
1.05 HANDLING:
Store and handle steel fence members at the construction site in a manner to
prevent damage and deterioration.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 TYPE I: WIRE MESH FENCE:
2.01.1 Wire mesh fence shall consist of prefabricated galvanized steel mesh and
galvanized steel posts.
2.01.2 Diameter of steel wire shall not be less than 7 mm and distance between adjacent
vertical steel wires in the fence shall not be wider than 100 mm.
20.2 TYPE II: STEEL POST FENCE:
2.02.1 Steel posts shall conform to Section 02067: “STEEL STRUCTURES”.
2.02.2 Concrete pillar shall conform to the requirements of Section 02068: “CONCRETE”.
Maximum aggregate size shall be 20 mm with a minimum compressive strength of
21 N/mm2 at 28 days.
2.02.3 Cement mortar shall conform to Section 02069: “CEMENT MORTAR”.
02043 - 2
2.02.4 Cobble stone shall be a cube of hard and durable limestone or andesite or granite
of the size ranging from 10 cm to 12 cm, or other appropriate size approved by the
Engineer. The stone shall be flat, wedge or convex shaped. The base surface shall
be not less than 1/16 of the front surface, and the shorter length of the base
surface shall be more than 1/10 of the longer length. The standard number of
stones per square meter shall be 14. However, minor deviation will be allowed
when approved by the Engineer.
2.03 TYPE III: GSP HAND RAIL:
2.03.1 Handrail shall consist of galvanized steel pipes conforming to specified in Section
02067: “STEEL STRUCTURES”. Dimensions shall be in accordance with the
Drawings.
2.03.2 Steel posts shall be structural steel pipe conforming to JIS G3444, Class 2, TK 41.
The minimum outside diameters and thickness of the pipe shall be in accordance
with the Drawings. All steel pipes shall be zinc coated in accordance with the
requirements of JIS H 8641or equivalent.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
3.01.1 Fence:
1. The fence shall be installed on previously prepared surfaces to line and grade
indicated;
2. Excavation for rubble stone foundation shall be of the dimensions indicated.

After excavation to final grade, the remaining sub-grade shall be thoroughly
compacted with mechanical tampers or other approved equipment well suited
to the type of material being compacted, to the satisfaction of the Engineer;
and
3. Where excavation dimensions are not specifically specified, the dimensions

shall be selected by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. Excavation
shall be large enough to construct rubble stone foundation.
3.01.2 Cobblestone foundation:
1. Placing of cobblestone shall not begin until the finishing stakes set according
to the design have been inspected and approved by the Engineer;
2. Stones shall be washed with water before placing. A mortar bed shall be
spread on the sides of adjacent stones before the next stone is laid;
3. The thickness of the mortar shall be the minimum necessary to ensure that
hammered into place and any stone whose face is deviating more than 20 mm
02043 - 3
form the true face or more than 30 mm the face of the adjacent stone, shall
immediately be made good by lifting and relaying. Face joints between stones
shall be flush-pointed as work proceeds; and
4. The masonry shall be satisfactorily protected from the sun and shall be kept
3.01.3 Steel post:
Steel post shall be set plumb and in alignment. Posts shall be set in concrete
pillars of dimensions indicated. Concrete shall be cured for a minimum of 72 hours
before any further work is done on the posts.
3.01.4 Steel mesh fabric shall be installed on the posts using clips with bolts, nuts and
washers. Damaged surfaces or fence members shall be repaired at the cost of
Contractor when so instructed by the Engineer.
- END OF SECTION -
02043 - 4
SECTION 02044
CONCRETE WORK IN BUILDING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This work applicable for concrete work for footing, column, beams, roof slab and
any other reinforced concrete work necessary to complete various types of line
buildings as indicated on the Drawings. Floor slab shall be plain leveling concrete.
Section 02042 “LINE BUILDINGS”.
1.02 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARS:
The following Codes and Standards are intended to provide an acceptable level of

1.04 SUBMITTALS:

02044 - 1
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL:
2.01.1 Concrete:
Concrete work shall be in accordance with Section 02068:”CONCRETE” and the

Compressive strength of the concrete shall be as follows:
Concrete Structure Compressive Strength
Cube Sampling Cylinder Sampling Class

N/mm2 N/mm2
Continuous Footing 21 18 H
Column 21 18 H
Beam 21 18 H
Roof Slab 21 18 H
Floor Slab 14 15 K
2.01.2 Steel Reinforcing:
Steel reinforcing bar shall be in accordance with Section 02070: “REINFORCING

STEEL BARS”
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
Concrete works shall be in accordance with Section 03001: “CONCRETE” and

02069: “CEMENT MORTAR” and the requirements specified herein.
3.01.1 Site-mixed concrete shall comply with ACI 301.
3.01.2 Placement of concrete shall be continuous so that each unit of operation will be
monolithic. Concrete shall be consolidated, leveled with screed to the grade, and
prepared for particular finish. Forms shall remain in place according to the
following guideline.
Minimum Period
Beams 14 days
Slabs 14 days
Walls 3 days
Side of beams and all other vertical surfaces 3 days
3.01.3 For finishes of concrete other than slabs, fins and loose material shall be removed.
Unsound concrete, voids and holes shall be cut back to solid concrete, reamed,
02044 - 2
brush-coated with cement grout, and filled with a stiff Portland-cement-sand

mortar mixture. Patchwork shall be finished in such a way as to match its texture
and color with adjoining surfaces. Patchwork shall be cured for 72 hours. White
Portland cement shall be used as needed to attain color matching. When required
by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide strength tests and concrete
specimens in accordance with Section 02068: “CONCRETE”.
3.02 FINISHING CONCRETE FLOOR
3.02.1 Finished surfaces shall be plane, with no deviation greater than 3 mm when tested
with a straightedge of 1 meter length.
3.02.2 Immediately after consolidation, slabs shall be screed with straight edges to bring
the surface to the required finish level.1
3.02.3 After the wood floating, the surface shall be troweled to produce a smooth dense
surface. A final hard trowelling shall be done by hand.
- END OF SECTION -
02044 - 3
SECTION 02045
WALL AND FOUNDATION
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
for the masonry work as specified herein and on the drawings.
Section 02016 “FOUNDATION WORK”; and

referenced codes and standards and are submitted for the Engineer's review and
C 216 Specification of Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or
Shale); and
C 62 Specification of Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units
Made from Clay or Shale).
R 1250 Common Bricks.
• Indonesia Industrial Standard (SII)
01007: “QUALITY ASSURANCE / CONTROL PROGRAMME” and the criteria
specified herein.
02045 - 1
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
1.04.2 The initial absorption rate of all types of material selected for the work shall be
work.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 BRICKS:
2.01.1 All bricks shall be hard, sound, well-fired, even and uniform in shape, free from
cracks and other defects, shall be made from selected clay. Bricks with absorption
of more than 20% by weight after immersion in water for 24 hours shall not be
accepted.
2.01.2 Bricks shall conform to SII 0021 - 81, or ASTM C 216, C 62, or JIS R 1250.
2.01.3 All bricks to be used for wall construction and others shall be from the same
source and shall be ordinary red local bricks conforming to the following
dimensions and tolerances:
Length: 240 mm (Tolerance 3 %);

Width: 115 mm (Tolerance 4 %); and
Thickness: 52 mm (Tolerance 5 %).
2.02 NATURAL STONE:
Material shall conform to samples as indicated in the Drawings. Any materials

rejected shall be replaced at the Contractor’s Cost. For limestone white creamy
color and textile surface to be cut with proper power tool, approximately 250 mm
round, 20 mm thickness.
2.03 CEMENT AND MORTAR:
Cement and sand for mortar shall conform to the requirements specified in Section
02016: “FOUNDATION WORK”.
02045 - 2
2.04 INSPECTION:
Products, shape, dimensions, texture, colour and glaze of the materials shall be
approved by the Engineer. All material shall be inspected and sorted by each
colour and dimension until installation.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 IMPLEMENTATION:
3.01.1 Contractor shall furnish, erect, maintain as long as necessary, and remove when
no longer needed, and safe and adequate scaffolding and other equipment
required for the proper execution of the work shall be used. All equipment for
mixing, transportation and handling of mortar shall be kept clean and free from set
mortar, dirt and other foreign matter.
3.01.2 No brick masonry work shall be performed when the ambient temperatures above
40 degrees C. Temperatures of the separate materials, including mixing water,
when placed in the mixer, shall not exceed 60 degrees C. No masonry units
having a film of water on their surfaces shall be laid in the work.
3.01.3 All masonry shall be built plumb, square and true to dimension, and lines with full
mortar joints. Horizontal joints shall be level and true. For bed joints a thick bed of
mortar shall be spread and only slightly furrowed, so that the joint will be filled
completely with mortar. The ends of the units shall be buttered with an ample
quantity of mortar and the unit shoved into place, so that the end joint is filled
completely with mortar. In making closures, an ample mortar shall be spread in the
closure space, the closure units buttered on both ends and rocked into place, so
that both end joints and the bed joint are filled completely with mortar. Over-
plumbing and pounding of corners and jambs to fit units after being set in position
shall be avoided. Where an adjustment must be made after the mortar has lost its
plasticity, the unit and mortar shall be removed and fresh mortar shall be used to
reset the work.
3.01.4 All brick work shall be laid with joints of uniforms thickness of 10 mm. Joints shall
be not less than 6.4 mm nor more than 12.7 mm. End joints in exposed brick work
shall be not wider than the bed joints. Holes left in exposed joints by the removal
of nails, line pins and put log irons shall be filled immediately with fresh tuck-
pointing mortar.
3.01.5 All bricks shall be thoroughly soaked with water before being laid if the last course
laid has become dry, it shall be well wetted before any further courses are laid.
3.01.6 Reinforced concrete bond beams shall be provided within every 3 meters of the
height unless otherwise specified.
3.01.7 All brick work shall be laid in running bond of mortar.
02045 - 3
3.01.8 Bonding to concrete columns shall be done by means of 6-mm diameter mild steel
rods, not less than 45 cm long, cast into the concrete at 40 cm vertical centers and
projecting 30 cm from the concrete face and built into joints of brick work.
3.01.9 Brick walls shall be mortar finished, both exterior and interior sides of the wall,
after bare surfaces of the brick wall has been approved by the Engineer.
3.01.10 Periodic field verifications of brick absorption rate shall be performed by drawing a
circle of 25 mm diameter on the surface of a brick, with a wax pencil, and dropping
20 drops of water within the circle rapidly with a medicine dropper. If all of the
water has been absorbed in less than 1 1/2 minutes, the initial rate of absorption is
excessive and the brick shall be wetted.
3.01.11 The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for weather tightness of the exterior
masonry walls. There shall be no leaks from exterior walls. All joints shall be filled
completely with mortar and all flashing shall be properly installed.
3.01.12 All items of the various trades to be built into the masonry work shall be installed
as the work progresses. Other trades shall be consulted in advance and provisions
made for the installation of their work to avoid unnecessary cutting and patching.
All sleeves for pipes, anchors, plates and supports shall be built in. Mason shall
assist in setting all window, door and louver frames positioned in masonry work, fill
mortar in the joint between masonry and frames to within 12.7 mm from a face of
frame and rake out the joint to provide space for caulking not less than 19 mm
deep.
3.01.13 The Contractor shall leave out or cut all chases and openings shown or as
required for the installation of the work of other trades, and make tight around
same if required:
1. Only masons shall perform cutting and patching of masonry; and
2. Masons shall build in or cut out all regrets for flashing as shown or evidently
required. Cutting and raking shall be avoided as far as possible by cooperation
with the trades involved.
3.01.14 All masonry shall be cleaned and all defects repaired before acceptance of the
work as follows:
1. Masonry shall be cleaned with trisodium phosphate and detergent, 0.24 liters of
each to 3.8 liters of water. All dirt, excess loose mortar shall be scraped or
brushed off, and masonry shall be saturated with clean water. The cleaning
solution shall be scrubbed on with stiff brushes as required and rinsed off
thoroughly with clean water until all mortar, dirt and cleaning solution are
removed;
2. As the cleaning progresses, all joints shall be examined for cracks, holes and
imperfect pointing. Defective joints shall be cut out and repaired by tuck
pointing;
3. Top of new work shall be covered with suitable waterproof covering, turned
down at the edges and held in place by plank or other suitable means when
work is stopped. The staging plank next to the walls shall be turned back from
02045 - 4
the face of the masonry work when work is stopped, to prevent spattering and
staining of masonry in the event of rain. The Contractor shall protect all sills and
projecting against mortar dropping and damage. Bases of walls shall be
protected from soil staining by covering adjacent soil; and
4. When starting masonry work after work has been stopped for the night or other
reasons, the exposed bearing surface of the masonry shall be cleaned with a
wire brush, all loose mortar removed to obtain the best possible bond between
new work and the previously installed work.
- END OF SECTION -
02045 - 5
SECTION 02046
GLAZED CERAMIC TILE
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 The work shall consists of furnishing and installation for the various elements of
buildings and platform as shown on the Drawings including mortar screed, bedding
mortar, joint grouting and all required incidentals to complete the work.
• American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
A108.1 Installation of Glazed Roof, Wall Tile, Ceramic Mosaic Tile,

Quarry Tile, and Paver Tile, with Portland Cement Mortar;
R 5209 Ceramic Tiles;
• Standards industrial Indonesia (SII)
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
02046 - 1
1.04.2 Several tiles with different color patterns shall be submitted for selection and
approval by the Engineer.
1.04.3 Copies of manufacturer’s technical information and installation instructions for all
required materials shall be submitted.
1.04.4 The Contractor shall submit shop drawings showing tile layout of the floor to the
Engineer for approval.
1.05.1 Deliver all products in the manufacturer’s original unopened containers with grade,
seals unbroken and labels legible and intact.
1.05.2 Store all containers aboveground and in a dry place.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL:
2.01.1 Ceramic Tile:
1. Tile shall be ″Standard Grade″ ceramic with cushion edges conforming to JIS
R 5209. Tile shall be made by the dust-pressed process of natural clay
composition and shall be 6 mm to 9 mm thick. Tile shall be vitreous with water
absorption of 0.5 to 3 percent;
2. Floor tile shall be heavy duty quality of unglazed and glazed tiles specified by
SII 0584 – 81, the size of which is 100 x 200 mm or 200 x 200mm as shown
on the Drawings; and
3. Wall tile shall be glazed cushion edge with matt glaze having size of 100 x
200mm or 200 x 200mm.
2.01.2 Flexural strength shall not be less than 35 N/mm² and scratch hardness of tile
shall not be less than 6 scale Mhos. Tile shall be acid, alkali and weather resistant.
All floor tiles shall be non-slip types.
2.01.3 Cement mortar setting material shall be in accordance with the requirements
specified in Section 02016: “FOUNDATION WORK.”
02046 - 2
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
3.01.1 Patterns shall be laid out to permit setting of tile with a minimum of cutting. Floors
shall be laid out from one side to end, with adjustments made at opposite walls.
Dimensions shall be controlled to avoid tile become smaller than one-half of the
original size.
3.01.2 Floor tile shall be installed as shown on the approved shop drawings. For all floor
tile areas, straight edges shall be set to the lines established. Tile shall be laid to
the straight edges. Tile layout shall be such that to eliminate cut tile to the greatest
extent possible. Where required, tile shall be cut with a suitable cutting tool and
rough edges shall be rubbed smooth. Misfit cut tile shall be replaced with properly
cut tile. Tiles that are out of true plane or misplaced shall be removed and reset.
Damaged or defective tile shall be replaced.
3.02 SURFACES:
3.02.1 Use of cement mortar for bonding tile over concrete surfaces shall conform to
ANSI A108.1.
3.02.2 Apply 6 mm to 8 mm thick setting bed. Setting bed shall be applied to scratch or
scratch-and-leveling coats of cement plaster after they have dried for 24 hours.
3.02.3 While the setting bed is still plastic, trowel or dust on 0.75 mm to 1.5 mm thick
neat cement paste (float method) or apply to back tile (buttering method), and set
tile firmly on bed.
3.02.4 Beat tile into mortar. Cut through setting bed horizontally or vertically every 425
mm to 600 mm.
3.02.5 Grout, clean, and prevent too-rapid drying. Damp cure for three days.
3.02.6 Examine surfaces to receive ceramic mosaic tile to be tiled to be within the
maximum variation of 6 mm in 3 m.
3.02.7 The Contractor shall correct all non-conforming surfaces before proceeding with
the work.
3.02.8 Surfaces to receive tile shall be firm, dry, clean and free of oily or waxy films.
3.02.9 Wood pattern on plywood for roof construction shall be applied in accordance with
Section 02051: “WOOD WORK.”
3.02.10 Grounds, anchors, plugs, hangers, bucks, electrical and mechanical work in or
behind tile to be installed prior to proceeding with tile work.
02046 - 3
3.03 CLEANING:
3.03.1 Clean tile surface as thoroughly as possible on completion of grouting.
3.03.2 Remove all grout haze, observing both tile and grout manufacturer’s
recommendations as to use of acid and chemical cleaners.
3.03.3 Rinse tile work thoroughly with clean water before and after chemical cleaners.
3.03.4 Polish surface of tile work with soft cloth.
3.03.5 Cover all tile floors with heavy-duty, non-staining construction paper, masked in
place.
3.03.6 Just before initial acceptance of tile work, remove paper from all tile surfaces.
3.04 PROTECTION FROM TRAFFIC:
3.04.1 Prohibit all foot and wheel traffic from using newly tiled floors for at least 7 days
except as stated below.
3.04.2 Where use of newly tiled floors with cement-type grout is unavoidable, all foot and
wheel traffic shall be permitted 3 days after the installation, only if minimum of 25-
mm thick and 550-mm wide flat boards are placed in walkways and wheel ways.
- END OF SECTION -
02046 - 4
SECTION 02047
PLASTER WORK
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 Plaster work shall consist of plastering on exterior and interior walls, columns,
beams, and ceiling of Line Buildings to receive painting finishes or brick masonry
surfaces.
C144 Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar;

C150 Specification for Portland Cement;
C207 Specification for hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes;
C270 Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry;

Section 01007: “QUALITY ASSURANCE / CONTROL PROGRAMME” and criteria
specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
02047-1
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MORTAR MATERIALS:
2.01.1 Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C-150.
2.01.2 Hydrated lime shall conform to ASTM C-207, Type ′S′.
2.01.3 Masonry cement conform to ASTM C-91, Type II, may be used in place of cement
and lime mortar.
2.01.4 Sand shall be clean, hard, siliceous, in accordance with ASTM C-144, free from
loam, silt or other impurities, composed of grains of varying sizes within the
following limits:
Percent Passing Percent Passing

Sieve Size Natural Sand Manufactured Sand
No. 4 (4.75 mm) 100 100

No. 8 (2.36 mm) 95 - 100 95 - 100
No. 16 (1.18 mm) 70 - 100 70 - 100
No. 30 (600 microns) 40 - 75 40 - 75
No. 50 (300 microns) 10 - 35 20 - 40
No.100 (150 microns) 2 - 15 10 - 25
No.200 ( 75 microns) 0 - 10
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01.1 Deliver, handle and store all materials in such a manner as to prevent damage,
store aboveground and in a dry place.
3.01.2 Portland cement, lime and sand, if bag, shall be delivered in their original sealed
bags. Each bag shall bear the name of the manufacturer, type of cement, lime or
sand (aggregate), minimum weight and approximate volume.
3.01.3 Accessories shall be bundled or delivered in their original containers bearing the
name of the manufacturer and item identification.
3.02 TEMPERATURE:
3.02.1 All plaster work shall be done with the air temperature between 13 degrees C and
35 degrees C. Temperature shall be maintained in a uniform range above 13
degrees C for an adequate period prior to application of plaster, while plastering is
being done, and until plaster is dry.
02047-2
3.02.2 In hot weather, no plastering shall be done when the temperature is above 35
degrees C unless the Contractor provides cooling to maintain a uniform
temperature below 35 degrees C.
3.03 WATER:
Water repellents and other admixtures shall be used only when approved by the
Engineer. Water shall be fresh, clean and potable. When used, they shall be the
product of a manufacturer who can demonstrate successful usage of his product
for a period of not less than 3 years prior to being offered for the work and shall
be used in strict accordance with the printed directions of the manufacturer.
3.04 MORTAR MIXING AND USE:
3.04.1 Mortar materials shall be measured by weight or by volume and the methods of
measurement shall be such that the proportions can be controlled with an error not
over 2 percent. One bag of Portland cement weighing not less than 42.6 kg shall
be considered as 0.028 m3. Mortar shall be mixed in a mechanical batch mixer, not
less than 3 minutes after all the materials are in the mixer. Hand mixing will be
permitted for small batches provided the quantities of materials and water are
accurately controlled and that the method of mixing is approved by the Engineer.
Hand mixing for small batches shall be continued until the mortar is completely
and uniformly mixed. Mortar shall be used within 30 minutes after it leaves the
mixer and no re-tempering of mortar in which the cement has begun to set will be
allowed.
3.04.2 Unless otherwise required by the Engineer, mortar shall conform to ASTM C-270
Type ′N′, composed by volume of one part Portland cement, 1/2 to 1-1/4 part
hydrated lime, and with sand not less than 2-1/4 nor more than 3 times the sum of
volumes of cement and lime used.
3.05 INSPECTION:
3.05.1 Prior to all plaster work, carefully inspect the installed work of all other sections
and verify that all such work is complete to the point where plastering may properly
commence.
3.05.2 Verify that lath and plaster may be installed in accordance with the reference
codes and standards and the design requirements.
3.05.3 Do not install plaster work over any work, including mechanical and electrical
which require inspection, until such inspections have been made and all work is
certified to be complete.
3.05.4 Ensure that all required and necessary pipes and other items have been installed.
3.05.5 Examine construction, grounds, and accessories to insure that finished plaster
surfaces will be true to line, level, and plumb, without requiring additional thickness
02047-3
of plaster. Maximum variation of surface to receive plaster shall be 6 mm in 1.2

mm from the required plane when measured with a straight edge.
3.06 PLASTER WORK:
3.06.1 Prepare surfaces to receive plaster by cleaning and removing loose material and
other deleterious substances which might impair the work and in accordance with
the plaster manufacturer’s recommendations. Masonry surfaces shall be wet down
before plaster is applied. Concrete surfaces shall be plastered with bond plaster.
3.06.2 Mechanically mix plaster materials, do not hand mix except where small amounts
are needed which require less than one bag of plaster material.
3.06.3 Plaster shall consist of two-coat work on all surfaces, except on roof top.
3.06.4 Plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories
ground.
3.06.5 Do not use materials which are caked or lumpy, or are contaminated with foreign
materials.
3.06.6 Weather, reduce maximum placing time as required to prevent premature

stiffening of plaster. Do not re-temper stiffened plaster with additional water.
3.07 FINISH COAT APPLICATION:
3.07.1 Apply finish coat to 3 mm nominal thickness to base coat, scratch-in tight and
double back to uniform surface and uniform thickness.
3.07.2 Remove trowel marks and surface imperfections by drawing-up or laying down the
surface with light trowel pressure when plaster has stiffened.
3.07.3 Water trowel to density and polish the surface.
3.07.4 For a floated finish, when plaster has stiffened, float with a wood float to produce a
surface free from slick spots or other blemishes.
3.08 MOISTURE RETENTION, CURING:
3.08.1 Dampen previous plaster coats which have dried out prior to time for applications
for next coat.
3.08.2 The Contractor shall responsible for determining the most effective procedure for
curing and time lapse between application of coats based on climatic and job
conditions.
3.08.3 Cutting, patching, repairing and point-up plaster as required or necessary to

accommodate other work. Repair cracks and indented surfaces. Point-up surfaces
02047-4
around items which are built into or penetrate plaster surfaces. Repair or replace
the work to eliminate blisters buckles, craze cracking, dry out, efflorescence,
sweat-outs, and similar imperfections.
3.08.4 The maximum variation of the finished plaster surface, in any direction, shall be 3
mm in 3 m when measured in any direction.
3.08.5 Contractor shall furnish, erect, maintain as long as necessary, and remove when
no longer needed, safe and adequate scaffolding and other equipment required
for the proper execution of the work. All equipment for the mixing, transportation
and handling of mortar shall be kept clean and free from set mortar, dirt or other
foreign matters.
3.08.6 The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for weather tightness of the exterior
brick walls. The workmanship shall be in such a way that no leaks to the interior
shall occur from the exterior walls because of defective workmanship or materials.
3.08.7 No masonry work shall be performed when the ambient temperature is above 40
degrees C or is likely to rise above the maximum during the 24 hours period after
laying, unless the approval of the Engineer is received and adequate protection is
provided. Temperatures of the separate materials, including mixing water, when
placed in the mixer shall not exceed 60 degrees C. When the mortar is being
used, it shall have a temperature above 10 degrees C and the mortar shall be
maintained at this temperature until it has been placed in the masonry. No
masonry units having a film of water on their surfaces shall be laid in the work.
3.08.8 Top of new work shall be covered with suitable waterproof covering, turned down
at the edges and held in place by plank or other suitable means when work is
stopped. The staging plank next to the walls shall be turned back from the face of
the plaster work when work is stopped, to prevent spattering and staining of
plaster in the event of rain. The Contractor shall protect all sills and projection
members with suitable and sufficient boxing as a protection against mortar
dropping and damage. Bases of walls shall be protected from soil staining by
covering adjacent soil.
3.08.9 When starting plaster work after work has been stopped for the night or other
reasons, the exposed bearing surface of the plaster shall be cleaned with a wire
brush, all loose mortar removed to obtain the best possible bond between new
work and the previously installed work.
3.08.10 All items of the various trades to be built into the masonry work shall be installed
as the work progresses. Other trades shall be consulted in advance and provisions
made for the installation of their work to avoid unnecessary cutting and patching.
All sleeves for pipe supports shall be built in. Columns shall have remolded filler.
Mason shall assist in setting all window, door and louver frames occurring in
masonry work, fill in the joint in exterior work between masonry and frames with
mortar to within 12.7 mm of face of frame and rake out the joint to provide space
for caulking not less than 19 mm deep.
3.08.11 The Contractor shall leave out or cut all chases and openings as required for the
installation of the work of other trades, and make tight around same if required.
Cutting and patching of masonry shall be performed only by masons. Masons shall
02047-5
build in or cut out all reglets for flashing as evidently required. Cutting and raking
shall be avoided as far as possible by cooperation with the trades involved.
3.08.12 All joints of exterior masonry at the perimeter of door, window and louver frames
shall be not less than 9.5 mm nor more than 12.7 mm wide, shall be raked out and
cleaned to a minimum uniform depth of 19 mm (3/4 in), and shall be filled with
caulking compound forced into place with a pressure gun and the face of joint
neatly finished.
3.08.13 All masonry shall be cleaned, and all defects repaired as follows before
acceptance of the work.
3.08.14 Masonry shall be cleaned with trisodium phosphate and detergent, 0.24 liters (1/2
cup) of each to each 3.8 liters of water. Before cleaning, all dirt, excess loose
mortar shall be scraped or brushed off and masonry saturated with clean water.
The cleaning solution shall be scrubbed on with stiff brushes as required and
rinsed off thoroughly with clean water until all mortar, dirt and cleaning solution are
removed.
3.08.15 As the cleaning progresses, all joints shall be examined for cracks, holes and
imperfect pointing. Defective joints shall be cut out and repaired by tuck pointing.
- END OF SECTION -
02047-6
SECTION 02048
SEALANT
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 Joint sealant specified herein shall be applied for various materials for interior and
exterior around windows and doors, glazing and other works as indicated on the
Drawings or directed in the Specification.
1.01.2 The work shall include primer, joint cleaner, joint filler, bond breaker and other
related accessories.
• American Society for Testing and Material (ASTM)

1.03.1 The Contractor shall comply with the applicable reference standards listed in
specified herein.
1.03.2 Security of train operation:
The Contractor shall fully responsible for safety of train operation in accordance with
Section 01011: “SECURITY OF RAILWAY OPERATIONS”
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
1.04.2 Manufacturer’s technical literature, data and full installation instruction shall be
02048- 1
submitted.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
2.01.1 Polysulphide sealant shall be two-component, chemical curing, non-sagging type

confirm to ASTM D 116-1, and capable of being continuously immersed in water,
withstand movement up to 15% of joint width. The temperature range shall be
throughout 4 to 27 degree C for satisfactorily handling.
2.01.2 Silicon sealant shall be one component, chemical curing, capable of withstanding
movement of up to 20% of joint width and satisfactorily handled through a
temperature range of 4 to 27 degree centigrade.
2.01.3 Primer shall be non-staining type recommended by sealant manufacturer to meet

the application.
2.01.4 Joint cleaner shall be non-corrosive type by sealant manufacturer and compatible
with joint forming materials
2.01.5 Joint filler shall be round, closed cell formed Styrofoam (density 30 kg/m3),
polyethylene, polyurethane, PVC or synthetic rubber form rod, oversized by 30 –
50%.
2.01.6 Bond breaker shall be pressure sensitive type recommended by sealant

manufacturer to meet the application.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION:
3.01.1 Width of joint shall not be less than 8 mm nor greater than 12 mm unless otherwise
indicated.
3.01.2 Depth of sealant over backing filler and at thinnest section shall be more than 7 mm.
In case where the width of the joint is wider than 19 mm, the depth shall be more
than 10 mm.
3.01.3 Joint surface shall be free from the dirt, dust, laitance or other matter or particles
inhibitive to complete and secure adhesion. Joint cleaner shall be used where
required. Any temporary materials used to form joint shall be removed prior to work.
3.01.4 Joint surface shall be primed in accordance with sealant manufacturer’s instruction.
3.01.5 Joint filler shall be installed as required to provide the proper joint depth and width
using wood or other gauging tools formed for the purpose. Also filler shall not be
bend, twisted or stretched.
02048- 2
3.02 INSTALLATION:
3.02.1 Polysulphide sealant shall be installed for concrete, mortar and metal surface. So
that it shall be installed around the windows, doors or as specified on the drawings.
3.02.2 Silicon sealant shall be installed for glass, aluminum, metal and Glass Fiber
Reinforced Cement joints.
3.02.3 Polyuretane sealant shall be mixed installed for expansion joints and floor joints.
3.02.4 Mixing components shall be for more than 10 minutes and the maximum volume of
mixed material shall be 3 liters.
3.02.5 Sealant shall be extruded into place and be accurately applied in a continuous
operation to the full joint or pocket depths and widths required. Sufficient pressure
shall be applied to ensure complete and continuous contact and adhesion.
3.02.6 Surface of sealants shall be furnished smooth and approximately level with and
parallel to adjacent finish surfaces.
3.02.7 Sealant surfaces may be slightly below, but never higher than adjacent into joint
surface unless otherwise specified.
3.02.8 Where edges of joints are rounded or otherwise eased off, recess sealant into joint
just sufficient to avoid contact with such edge.
- END OF SECTION -
02048- 3
SECTION 02049
BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This work shall consist of bituminous membrane water proofing as shown on the
Drawings and as described in the specification including rising area of perimeter
walls, and all related work to complete waterproofing work for the following parts.
• American Society for Testing and Material (ASTM);

specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
1.04.2 Shop drawings which shall be indicated details of water proofing layer especially
around the roof drain, floor drain, under threshold of door and connection with
sanitary fixtures and etc.
1.04.3 Manufacturer’s instruction for surface preparation and application, technical data of
materials.
1.04.4 Sample of each type of asphalt saturated felt.
02049 - 1
1.04.5 Sample of the complete water proofing membrane.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
2.01.1 Membrane, Asphalt, Primer: shall be specified herein before.
2.01.2 Membrane shall be as follows:
- Base Sheet JIS A 6005, class 30 kg;

- Middle Sheet JASS & special 1-11 chart: finished weight not less than 1500
g/m2;
- Top Sheet JIS A 6005, class 30 kg.
2.01.3 Mortar for preparation and protection layer shall be as specified in the Plaster
Clause of this specification.
2.01.4 Elastic joint material shall be Elastic or equivalent.
2.01.5 Roof drain shall be cast iron three pieces type suitable for membrane water proofing.
2.01.6 Asphalt shall be JIS A 6011: Type 3 or 4 as recommended by Manufacturer for

installation requirement
2.01.7 Primer shall be cut-back asphalt conforming to JASS 8.8.1.6 or ASTM D 41.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION ON SCREEDING:
Screeding shall form a smooth surface for receiving waterproofing layer. At

perimeter wall corner shall be rounded and rise up not less than 50 mm above water
proofing layer unless otherwise specified. A slope of at least 1% shall be formed to
the lowest point
3.02 SURFACE REQUIREMENT:
3.02.1 Ridges fins shall be removed and void, cracks filled to leaves a smooth and flat
surface. Surface shall be cleaned completely and dust, debris and loose particles
removed. And also shall be firm and free from grease, oil and other foreign matter
detrimental to adhesion and monolithic application of water proofing.
3.02.2 A 45°chamfer or fillet as detailed shall be formed at intersection of vertical and

horizontal surfaces.
02049 - 2
3.03 INSPECTION:
3.03.1 After completion of the above mentioned preparation work, the Engineer shall
inspect the work and no application of primer shall be commenced before approval
of the Engineer for preparation of the surface.
3.03.2 Membrane Assembly:
The membrane shall be built-up over screeding as detailed below:
- Primer 1 coat 0.3 l/m²;

- Asphalt 1st coat 1.0 kg/m²;
- Base sheet 1 layer 0.65 kg/m²;
- Asphalt 2nd coat 1.0 kg/m²;
- Middle sheet 1 layer 1.6 kg/m²;
- Asphalt 3rd coat 1.0 kg/m²;
- Top sheet 1 layer 1.5 kg/m²;
- Asphalt 4th coat 1.0 kg/m²;
- Asphalt 5th coat 1.0 kg/m².
3.03.3 Primer shall be applied at a dosage of 0.3 litters per square meter.
3.03.4 Asphalt shall not be heated above 230°C, and bitumen above 200°. Hot asphalt
shall be applied at the rate of not less than 1.0 kg/m².
3.03.5 Base sheet shall be started at the low point either parallel or perpendicular to the
slope and each sheet shall be lapped 100mm over the preceding one, and
membrane shall be continued up vertical surfaces.
3.03.6 A further coating at 1.0 kg/m² of hot asphalt shall be applied.
3.03.7 The middle sheet coating shall be applied as the base sheet but joint shall be offset
from those sheets by one-third of a sheet width.
3.03.8 The top of the sheet shall be applied as before but with joint offset from those of
middle sheet by one-third of a sheet and be between lap of base and middle sheets.
3.03.9 The entire membrane shall be finished with two (2) coats of asphalt applied with
brush, each applied at a minimum of 1.0 kg/m² in opposite directions.
3.03.10 Reinforcement membrane shall be applied where they are static or moving.
3.03.11 After applying the membrane, the area shall be closed off to prevent unauthorized
traffic until a protection layer is applied.
3.04 PERIMETER EDGES:
3.04.1 At perimeter wall or others, the membrane assembly shall be turned up not less than
150 mm above finish elevation of covering materials, unless otherwise specified.
3.04.2 Each sheet shall fit closely into corner without voids and unsupported areas of
sheets.
02049 - 3
3.04.3 At vertical corners sheet shall be cut, trimmed, double overlapped, all laps and joints
shall thoroughly be seated.
3.05 PROTECTION LAYER:
3.05.1 Prior to proceeding with the next sequence of finishing, all the horizontal area of
water proofing membrane shall be properly covered by a mortar layer to protect the
surface. The thickness of mortar screeding shall be more than 10 mm.
3.05.2 The surface shall be finished by steel trowel and maintain at least 1% slope to roof
drain.
3.05.3 All layers or plies of assemblies shall be smooth, flat and fully adhering.
- END OF SECTION -
02049 - 4
SECTION 02050
MISCELLANEOUS STEEL
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 Miscellaneous steel works shall include all steel work items as necessary to
complete interior or exterior of Line Buildings. The Contractor shall take field
measurements prior to the preparation of shop drawings and fabrication.
1.01.2 Work shall include the following items:
- Steel frame work to support finishing which shown on the Drawing;

- Steel frame work for prefabricated floor panel (pre-casting unit type floor panel);
- Steel manhole cover and cable pit frame with accessories;
- Galvanized steel pipe handrail for a part of platform and station building
securities;
- All bolts, anchors, inserts, and other accessories required for the work; and
- Anti-corrosive painting to all steel surfaces in this Cause.
JIS G 3101 grade SS 400: Structural Steel Shapes and Plates;

JIS G 3444 grade STK 400: Steel Pipes;
JIS G 3350 grade SSC 400: Light Gauge Steel;
JIS B 1186 grade F 10T: High-strength Bolts and Nuts;
JIS B 1180 & B 1181grade 4T: Standard Machine Bolt and Nuts;
• American welding Society (AWS)

• American Institute of Steel Construction (2005), Specification for Structural Steel
Building
• AISC Specification for structural Steel Building – ASD 1989
• AISC Steel Design Guide
• SNI 03-1726-2002, Indonesian Guidelines to the Seismic Design Building
• UBC (Uniform Building Code) 1997
• PPPURG 1987, Indonesia Guidelines to the load Design For House Building
02050-1
• AISI, American Iron and Steel Institute (1996)
specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
“SUBMITTALS” and as specified herein
1.04.2 Complete Shop Drawings for all items of work shall be submitted showing materials,
thickness, dimensions, construction method and details, elevation to adjacent works,
erection detail and schedules, and all other details to fully illustrate of work.
PART 2: PRODUCT
2.01 MATERIALS:
2.01.1 Steel materials where required shall conform to requirements under this section,
unless otherwise specified.
2.01.2 Main Structure member for station shed using Hot-Rolled SS-400.
2.01.3 Purlin/Girt using for station shed SPHC Painted Finish Product.
2.01.4 Metal Sheet Wall and Roof for station shed using Spandex Zincalume 0.40 TCT
include accessories like ridge capping, gable flashing, and using a fastener or screw
as per specification from factory recommendation, galvanized finish.
2.01.5 Anchor Bolts using grade A307 (grade 4.6) galvanized, and for main frame
connection bolts using Hi-Tensile Bolt Grade 8.8 and common bolts using Grade 4.6,
galvanized finish.
2.01.6 Wire mesh shall be galvanized steel mesh. The size of wire shall be 6 mm and
spacing shall be 100mm for both directions.
2.02 FABRICATION:
2.02.1 All members of steel frames shall be of the shapes and sizes indicated on the
Drawings, work shall be in the shop fitted and assembled. Work that cannot be
permanently shop-assemble shall be completely assembled, marked and
disassembled in the shop before shipment. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to
assure himself that the shop-fabricated items will properly the field conditions.
2.02.2 Cutting of steel shall be by sawing and shearing machinery. Cut shall be accurate,
02050-2
clean and sharp without deforming or bending the metal. Holes shall be drilled or
cleanly punched and shall be formed by burning. Connections shall conform to
section of this specification. Welds shall be continuous, except where spot welding is
specifically permitted.
2.03 PAINTING:
2.03.1 Anti-corrosive Paint shall be as schedule:
- 1st coat (primer) Epoxy zinc-rich 150 micron d.f.t;

- 2nd coat (finish) Polyurethane 50 micron d.f.t.
2.03.2 Surface to be painted shall be solvent-cleaned to remove oil and grease before
applying paints or surface treatment. Surface that contains loose rust, loose mill
scale and other foreign substance shall be mechanically cleaned by power brushing
or sandblasting (SA-2.5/SP-10 or SP11).
2.03.3 After cleaning, one coat of ferrous metal primer shall be applied immediately to all
ferrous surfaces to receive paint.
2.03.4 Shop-coated metal shall be protected from corrosion before and after installation by
treating corroded area immediately upon detection. Abraded or corroded spots on
shop-coated material shall be re-coated with primer similar to the shop-coat.
2.03.5 After assembled work in the shop or in the field, damaged or abraded portions of
shop prime paint shall be touched-up with the specified metal primer and the
Contractor shall spare paint material for touch-up about 3% of total material painting.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
3.01.1 The contractor must submit Construction Method and Erection/Installation drawing
before install the materials at site.
3.01.2 The contractor will install material after get a permit by owner / project manager.
3.01.3 The contractor shall prepare tools to support work and safety tools for man worker.
3.01.4 The work of this section shall be installed square, level or plumb, straight, flat and
true to line or radius. Unless otherwise specified, work to be built into concrete or
masonry shall be anchored by bolts into embedded inserts or with expansion shields,
work attached to structural steel shall be anchored by bolts or screws. Powder
actuated fasteners shall not be permitted unless approved by the Engineer.
Where bolts or screws are exposed to view, they shall be flat and countersunk with
projecting ends cut off flush with or adjacent material.
3.01.5 All necessary drilling, tapping, cutting or other preparation of surrounding

construction in the field shall be accurate, neat and as necessary for attachment and
02050-3
support of the work of this section.
3.01.6 Bolt of steel connection shall be unfinished bolts except as otherwise specified or
indicated, unfinished bolted connection shall be drawn up tight and threads
deformed so that nuts cannot become loose. Items shall be free from distortion or
defects.
3.01.7 Item damaged in the course of installation shall be replaced and in case of field
welding, it shall be in accordance with the specification. Field welded parts shall be
painted as specified.
- END OF SECTION -
02050-4
SECTION 2051
WOOD WORK
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This section shall consist of rough and finished carpentry work including fasteners,
finishing wood surfaces (if required), wood treatment and other necessary
accessories to complete the work for the following items:
- Structural and non structural framing work;

- Wood doors and window work;
- Desk for passenger at lobby ticket;
- Kitchen set furniture;
- Other miscellaneous wood work.
1.01.2 The contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment to complete
the work.
The codes and standards listed below a part of this specification:

• NI – 5 (PKKI – 78) Frame quality and class
• SII 0778 – 83 Track plywood quality
specified herein.
02051 - 1
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
1.04.2 Shop Drawing:
Shop drawings of each item of carpentry work shall be submitted which show type,
dimension and finishing of material and method of connection and items indicated
by the Engineer.
1.04.3 Samples:
Cut samples of each type of wood material and other fasteners or hardware
indicated by the Engineer.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 LUMBER:
2.01.1 “Kamper Kalimantan” wood shall be grade A and dry kiln processed with a
durability class of II and strength class of II according to NI-5 (PKKI-78):
- Absolute stress in bending shall 10 N/mm²;

- Absolute compression shall be 8.5 N/mm²;
- Modulus elasticity shall be 10,000 N/mm²;
- Moisture content shall not exceed 20% at the time of delivery to the site.
2.01.2 “Jati Jawa Timur” wood (Tectona Grandis, Teak) shall be grade A and dry klin
processed with a durability class of I – II according to NI –5 (PKKI-78):
- Absolute stress in bending shall 10 N/mm²;

- Absolute compression shall be 11 N/mm²;
- Modulus elasticity shall be 12,500 N/mm²;
- Moisture content shall not exceed 15% at the time of delivery to the site.
2.01.3 Lumber shall be surfaced on four sides and conform to the standard patterns
shown in the current grading rules for the species.
2.01.4 All wood shall be treated against fungal decay and insect attack in strict
accordance with the recommendation of the Forest Products Research of
Indonesia. Treatment shall be carried out after all cutting and shaping is completed
and care is to taken to avoid damage to surfaces of treated wood in subsequent
handling. If treated wood is unavoidably cut or damaged a liberal application of
preservative is to be made to cut or damaged surfaces or affected piece discarded.
All treated wood is to be dry before incorporation in the works.
02051 - 2
2.02 TEAK PLYWOOD:
Teak plywood shall be more than 4 mm thick and premium grade conforming to SII
0778 – 83. Adhesive shall be water resistant and bonding shall be high pressure
process conforming to SII 0778 – 83.
2.03 FASTENERS:
2.03.1 Nails shall be standard commercial quality and spacing as shown on the Drawing
and as required to adequately transmit design forces.
2.03.2 Other fasteners shall be as shown on the Drawings and as required to secure
complete installation of wood work. All steel fasteners shall be galvanized. Toggle
bolts shall be used for anchorage to block masonry, expansion shields and lag
bolts for anchorage to concrete and bolts or power activated studs for anchorage
to steel.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 WOOD FRAME:
3.01.1 Frames shall be constructed straight and plumb with cuts accurately made for full
bearing of members. Each item, unit or assembly shall be tightly and rigidly
secured in place and free from movement and defect or damage. Maximum
spacing of repeated members shall be 380 mm unless otherwise shown. Joints
shall have crowned edges uppermost with full bearing over entire plate width. Use
continuous pieces of the longest possible length.
3.01.2 Cutting and notching shall not be permitted except as indicated on the drawings or
as hereinafter specified:
1. Notches or holes in joints or rafters shall not be over 1/6 the depth of the
member, provided the notch or hole is a minimum of 3 times the depth of the
member from the end;
2. Notches in sill plates shall not be over 1/3 the width of the member and only if
anchorage is provided on each side of the notch as required for ends of
pieces; and
3. Holes for pipes shall be drilled at the centerline of the stud or top plate.
3.01.3 Framing anchors shall be provided as indicated on Drawings and as required to

complete the work. Bolt hole shall be bored 1 mm larger than the diameter of the
bolt to be installed. Provide washers under head and nut of all bolts. When
indicated on Drawings, provide steel plate washers; otherwise, provide standard
steel cut washers.
3.01.4 Blocking or wood ground of thickness and sizes as indicated or required to secure
work shall be provide. Wood backing behind all joints, ends and wherever else
necessary to properly install finish materials shall be provided. Wood grounds, nail
02051 - 3
strips and blocks, blocking and other like members or pieces required to secure
and complete the work shall be furnished.
3.02 WOOD DOORS:
3.02.1 Wood doors shall be trimmed to fit their openings with the following clearances:
- Hinge side: 2.7 mm;

- Lock side: 5.4 mm;
- Top: 5.4 mm;
- Bottom: 7.5 mm maximum, except over applied thresholds or where
3.02.2 Wood door frames shall be installed plumb and square in locations shown with a
maximum diagonal distortion of 2 mm, and shall be shimmed and fastened
securely to wall construction as detailed Protection from damage or soiling shall be
provided.
3.02.3 Hardware, other accessories and installation methods related to wood door work
other than described in this Clause shall be as specified in Section 02053:
“DOORS AND WINDOWS”.
3.02.4 Finishing of wood doors shall conform to Section 02054: “PAINTING”.
3.03 BUILT-IN FURNITURE:
3.03.1 Work shall be made in accordance with approved shop drawings. Carpentry items
shall be cut and fitted plumb or level, true to line. Fasteners shall be concealed and
finishing nails set down for puttying. All mechanical and electrical items affecting
this work shall be properly placed.
3.03.2 Hardware fixtures and accessories shall be fixed in accordance with

manufacturer’s instruction, and plastic laminate applied where indicated. Joints
and corners shall be hairline.
3.03.3 Finishing shall be in accordance with the Section 02054: “PAINTING”.
3.03.4 Handling:
Store and handle wood materials at the construction site in manner to prevent
damage and deterioration.
- END OF SECTION -
02051 - 4
SECTION 02052
GLASS AND GLAZING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 Glass shall be provided in the locations indicated. Glazing may be performed in
the shop or in the field using glass of the quality and thickness specified.
Section 02042: “LINE BUILDINGS”.
JIS A 5752 Putty for Metal Sash Glazing;

JIS A 5753 Putty for Wooden Fittings;
JIS R 3201 Sheet Glass.
specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
1.04.1 Submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 01008:

1.04.2 Certificates of compliance attesting that the glass meets the requirements
specified shall be furnished in accordance with the requirements specified herein.
Labels or marking affixed to the glass will be accepted in lieu of certificates.
02052 - 1
1.04.3 Glazing compounds shall be delivered to the site in the manufacturer’s unopened
containers. Glass shall be stored in safe, dry locations and shall not be unpacked
until needed for installation.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL
2.01.1 Clear glass shall conform to JIS R 3201-81, Class A or equivalent. Glass
thickness of 5 mm shall be provided for fixed window and jalousie window.
2.01.2 Putty shall conform to JIS A 5752, Grade 2 for aluminum joinery and JIS A 5753
for wooden fittings;
2.01.3 Glazing accessories shall be provided as required to supplement the accessories

provided with the items to be glazed and to provide a complete installation,
including glazing points, clips, shims, setting blocks, and spacer strips.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
3.01.1 Glazing shall be performed in accordance with the approved installation

instructions of the glass manufacturer.
3.01.2 Glass surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned with labels, paint sports, putty, and
other defacement removed, and shall be clean at the time the work is accepted.
- END OF SECTION -
02052 - 2
SECTION 02053
DOORS AND WINDOWS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This work shall consist of furnishing and fixing doors and windows of various types
and materials conforming to this specification and shown on the Drawings, including
finishing, hardware, glazing, anchors and all other accessories related to complete
the work.
1.01.2 Items shall be as follows:
1. Wooden doors and windows;

2. Steel doors and frames;
3. Aluminum doors, windows and louvers.
The following Codes and Standards are intended to provide an acceptable

level of quality for materials and products. The Contractor may propose alternative
codes and standards provided that they give an equivalent degree of quality as the

specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
The Contractor shall submit as follows:
1.04.1 Shop Drawings which indicate location of all doors and windows, detail of frame with
material thickness, hardware list, method of reinforcement, fixing method with type
and location of anchors, and other directed by the Engineer.
1.04.2 Cut sample of each kind of frame with finishing specified and approved.
1.04.3 The size, typical joints and connection, welding, seam treatment and other
02053 - 1
characteristics.
1.04.4 Full range of color sample of finishing.
1.04.5 Sample of each type of hardware with manufacturer’s technical data and
catalogues.
1.04.6 Sample of each type of glass with manufacture’s technical data and catalogues.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 WOODEN DOORS AND WINDOWS:
2.01.1 Material for wooden door and windows shall be Kamper as specified under Section
02051: “WOOD WORK”.
2.01.2 Door thickness shall be 40 mm, Doors and Windows shall be free from warp, joints
shall be undamaged, surface shall be in satisfactory condition for further finishing
required.
2.01.3 Top and bottom edges shall be given three(3) coats varnish as specified in Section
02054: “PAINTING” of this specification. Doors shall be fabricated with approved
water resistant adhesive.
2.01.4 Glass or other opening where shown on the Drawings, shall be to the sizes indicated
with appropriate and substantial mitered molding units and be watertight when
required for exterior locations.
2.01.5 Door faces shall be recessed into frame as manufacturer’s standards but not less
than 3 mm.
2.01.6 Frame width shall match the thickness of wall or interior partition and be of uniform
width throughout unless otherwise indicated or approved.
2.01.7 Finish hardware shall be fixed as manufacturer’s standard. Unless otherwise

specified as requirements of Section 02051: “WOOD WORK” of this specification.
2.01.8 Door glazing and other stops are to be removable where required and integral with
frame elsewhere and of 1.6mm thickness where removable. All stops shall be sized
to properly received and fit the doors, glass or other items required, including
allowance for glazing or other accessories.
2.01.9 Factory fitted removable stops to respective opening corners shall be mitered at
corners and cut square and butt end to edge elsewhere. They shall be set loose with
fastenings uniformly spaced not over 150mm from ends and 400mm center in
between.
2.01.10 The adhesive for all doors shall be non-staining when doors are scheduled to
receive natural finish. Door shall have a clearance of 1.6 mm at the side and top and
as required at the bottom for the specified location to provide to minimum adequate
clearance of the floor coverings.
02053 - 2
2.01.11 The lock edges of the doors shall be beveled at the rate of 3 mm in 50 mm for single
door, and 1.6 mm in 50 mm for of pairs of door.
2.02 STEEL DOORS:
2.02.1 Steel Sheet shall be prime quality commercial or furniture grade galvanized steel,
cold rolled, stretcher leveled, surface free from defects inhibitive to first quality
finishing. Appearance and thickness shall be as indicated.
2.02.2 Insulation shall be manufacturer’s standard incombustible, moisture resistant,

chemically inert material performed for the purpose and as approved, and shall be
provided for cores of all hollow steel doors.
2.02.3 Flush type shall be 40 mm thickness throughout with edges beveled for latch stile at
single doors and meeting stile at double doors, other edges square.
2.02.4 Face panel shall be 1.6 mm thickness without intermediate seams and mated at long
edges welded at 50 mm centers and exposed joints continuously filled.
2.02.5 Top and bottom edges shall be reinforced with continuous 1.6mm thickness steel
channel welded to the faces, and shall be flushed and made watertight when
required for exterior locations.
2.02.6 Face shall be internally reinforced using continuous 1 mm thick inter locking
channels spaced at not more than 150 mm centers, and each channel spot welded
to each face at 100 mm centers.
2.02.7 Reinforced mountings shall be provided for cylindrical lockets and latch sets.
2.02.8 Doors and frames shall be reinforced for all finish hardware items, but this may be
omitted for push plates and kick plates.
2.02.9 Doors shall be protected for shipping as necessary.
2.02.10 All internal void shall be sound deadened using approved insulation.
2.03 ALUMINUM DOORS AND WINDOWS:
2.03.1 Material of the Aluminum extrusion shall conform to aluminum alloy: Architecture
billet 45(AB.45) or equivalent and as bellows:
- Ultimate strength 185 N/mm²; (Temper T6)

- Yield strength 151 N/mm²;
- Shear strength 117N/mm²;
- Density 2.71 g/cm².
Thickness shall be as follows, unless otherwise specified:
- Glass Molding 1.8 mm;

- Exposed Flushing 1.6 mm;
02053 - 3
- Concealed Flushing 0.8 mm.
2.03.2 Power coating of coloring process shall be in combination with anodizing that shall
form an oxide-film by means of electro-chemical process. Inorganic metal color
particles shall be deposited and fixed electrolytically at the very base of the process
of anodic pores of anodic film.
2.03.3 The coating shall be sealed in hot deionized-water which close off the pores and
permanently scales in the color particles.
2.03.4 The thickness of the film shall be more than 20 microns. Color shall be chosen from
manufacture’s standard ranges by the Engineer.
2.03.5 Bolts shall be stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized carbon steel only, Screws shall be
exposed head type, countersunk flush. Connection between aluminum and steel
shall be stainless only and shall be exposed only where permitted and shall be
aluminum finished to match work with which it is used.
2.03.6 All seals shall be replaceable vinyl strips designed to fit extruded aluminum
accessory member.
2.03.7 Frame shall be extruded section not less than 70 mm depth, exterior glazed type
shall have integral retainer slots and be with continuous vinyl weather stripping at
contact surfaces.
2.03.8 Glazing bead shall be extruded rectangular snap-in type, single length only each
side required, corner mitered and neatly fitted.
2.04 ALUMINUM LOUVERS FOR WINDOWS AND DOORS, WINDOW SCREEN AND
RELATED ACCESSORIES:
2.04.1 Each type shall be designed and produced as a completely coordinated system of
components complying in all respects with the sizes, types, designs, appearance
and finishing shown as specified or approved by the Engineer.
2.04.2 Member deflection shall not exceed 1/175 th of total member length under a uniform
wind load of 12 N/mm² or 2.5 mm total for a horizontal member due to actual glass or
panel weights.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 FACTORY ASSEMBLY ONLY:
3.01.1 All work shall be installed in straight alignments parallel to building or column lines.
Units shall be set plumb, square and level, edges uniformly spaced and shimmed for
sealant recesses. Members shall free from movement, other than allowances
permitted for thermal variations.
3.01.2 Installation shall be free from exposed fastenings, unnecessary cuts, holes or blank
02053 - 4
plates and exposed steel connection or reinforcing, other than as particularly shown,
specified or approved.
3.01.3 Installation shall be watertight throughout free from leaks or entry of water into
through interior or concealed spaces of structure other than via waterways or
provisions for drainage or particularly provided for or approved.
3.01.4 Movable or mechanical items or devices shall be serviced and adjusted to operate
smoothly, quietly, easily and free from squeaking or binding.
3.01.5 Welding shall be in concealed location only and exposed surfaces shall be free from
evidence of welding.
3.01.6 Exposed intermediate joints in linear members shall only be permitted where shown
or approved by the Engineer.
- END OF SECTION -
02053 - 5
SECTION 02054
PAINTING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This section covers, field painting of all wood, plaster, concrete, mortar and metal
surfaces, (both interior and exterior), of line buildings and other related structures
except the structural steel of bridge superstructure.
complete the Work.

Section 02038 “ROAD FACILITY”
Section 02039 “FENCING”
Section 02044 “CONCRETE WORK IN BUILDING”
Section 02051 “WOOD WORK”
Section 02056 “GYPSUM BOARD”
Section 02057 “CEILING WORK”
Section 02058 “FURNITURE”
The following Codes and standards are intended to provide an acceptable level of
and standards provided they give an equivalent degree of quality as the referenced
codes and standards and are submitted for the Engineer review and approval in
advance of their use.
• Steel Structure Painting Council (SSPC):
SP 1 Solvent Cleaning;
SP 3 Power Tool Cleaning;
SP 6 Commercial Blast Cleaning;
SP 10 Near -White Blast Cleaning.
ASTM D 16-27, 28, and 29 Definition of Terms;

ASTM D 2200 Preparation of steel surfaces for paint;
ASTM D 2805 Test for hiding power of paints;
ASTM D 2833 Methods of testing architectural paints.
02054 - 1
K 5400 Testing Methods for Organic Coating;

K 5511 Ready Mixed Paints;
K 5516 Ready Mixed Paint (Synthetic Resin Type);
K 5626 Zinc Dust Anticorrosive Paint;
K 5627 Zinc Chromate Anticorrosive Paint;
K 5663 Synthetic Resin Emulsion Paints.
specified herein.
1.03.2 Mock-up:
The Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with paint application, provide mock-ups or
field samples, of each substrate to be painted. The mock-ups or field samples shall
be painted to demonstrate method of application, finish texture, color and quality of
workmanship. The size and location of the mock-ups or field samples shall be
determined by the Engineer.
1.03.3 Quality Control:
The Contractor shall provide the necessary Quality Control Program to ensure he
meets fully his responsibilities and obligations for quality control of surface
preparation, application of protective coatings and paint-systems, wherever the
execution is performed.
1.03.4 Maintenance Material:
Upon completion of the work, submit to the Engineer a minimum of 3 one-gallon

containers or the equivalent in liters of each type and color of paint used. No
separate payment will be made for this material.
Containers shall be unopened, tightly sealed and clearly labeled with type of paint,
color and location or locations used.
1.04.1 Deliver paint materials in sealed original labeled containers, and each label should
provide bearing manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, color designation,
date of manufacture and instructions for mixing and/or thinning.
1.04.2 Provide adequate, enclosed and well-ventilated storage facilities separate from
storage of other building materials. Store paint materials at a minimum ambient
temperature of 7 degrees C.
1.04.3 Containers of paint or components shall not be opened except for immediate use.
Materials older than the manufacturer's recommended or extended shelf life shall
02054 - 2
not be used and shall be removed from the site.
1.04.4 Take all necessary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS:
1.05.1 Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not
apply finishes unless the moisture content of surfaces is below the following
maximum:
1. Plaster: 12%;
2. Masonry, concrete, and concrete block: 12%;
3. Wood (interior): 15%;
4. Wood (exterior): 15%.
1.05.2 The Contractor shall read and follow carefully the label instructions on each
container in regard to minimum and maximum allowable surface temperatures for
each specific product prior to application. In general no coating shall be applied
when the substrate surface temperature is below 10 degrees C or above 48 degrees
C. No painting shall be applied above 90% relative humidity. No exterior painting
shall be applied during conditions of blowing sand.
1.05.3 Provide adequate and continuous ventilation during interior application. If required,
provide sufficient heating facilities to maintain temperatures above 10 degrees C for
24 hours before, during and 48 hours after application for coatings.
1.05.4 Provide adequate lighting on surfaces during application.
1.05.5 No painting work shall be done until the building is enclosed and weather-tight.
1.06 PROTECTION:
1.06.1 Adequately protect surfaces not being painted from paint and damage. Repair
damage as a result of inadequate or unsuitable protection to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
1.06.2 Provide sufficient drop cloths, shields and protective equipment to prevent spray or
droppings from fouling surfaces not being painted and in particular, surfaces within
storage and preparation areas.
1.06.3 Place cotton waste, cloths and materials which may constitute a fire hazard in
closed metal containers and remove from site daily.
1.06.4 Remove all electrical plates, surface hardware, fittings and fastenings, prior to paint
application. These items are to be carefully stored, cleaned and re-installed on
completion of work in each area. Do not use solvent to clean hardware that may
remove permanent lacquer finish. Items which it is not practical to remove shall be
taped over. Do not use any tape containing chlorides on stainless steel surfaces.
02054 - 3
1.07 SUBMITTAL:
“SUBMITTALS” as specified herein.
1.07.2 Schedule of surfaces to receive paint, type of paint proposed and manufacturer’s
literature, including instructions for surface preparation, product application and
recommended dry film thickness. If requested, the Contractor shall furnish written
proof of the suitability for the material he proposes to use, with specific references to
the climatic conditions in Indonesia.
1.07.3 Provide three sets of color charts for all paints shown on the Painting Schedule.
After review of color selection, submit three 300-mm x 300-mm samples of each
color. Identify each sample as to finish, color name and number, sheen name, gloss
units and batch number.
1.07.4 Three copies of suppliers' factory Quality Control program containing details of
suppliers program for testing, monitoring and reporting shall be submitted to the
Engineer for review on the quality of materials being supplied for use in the Work.
1.07.5 Provide three copies of the Contractor's on-site Quality Control program outlining
the procedures proposed to be used for the execution and testing of the work as
required by the Specification.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL:
2.01.1 All goods and products covered by these specifications shall be, when available,
from a local manufacturer or supplier. Procurement of all goods and products
manufactured outside of the country must be approved by the Engineer.
2.01.2 All coating materials (paints) shall be furnished by a manufacturer, regularly

engaged in the manufacture of coatings for industrial application. All coatings shall
be the manufacturer’s best-grade for the intended substrate.
2.02 MATERIALS:
2.02.1 Coating materials shall be of generic type for various substrates. All materials
proposed shall be subject to review and acceptance by the Engineer.
2.02.2 Coatings shall be ready-mixed, except for field catalyzed coatings. Pigments shall
be fully ground maintaining a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and
uniformly dispersed to a complete homogeneous mixture for brush, roller or airless
spray application, as recommended by the manufacturer.
2.02.3 Coatings shall have good flowing properties and be capable of drying or curing free
of streaks, runs or sags.
2.02.4 Colors, texture and degree of gloss shall be as shown on the Finish Schedule. Tint
02054 - 4
prime and intermediate coats shall be approximately to the shade of the final coat
but with sufficient variation to distinguish them from the preceding coat. Use
products of the same manufacturer for succeeding coats. Where red lead primer is
used, subsequent coats may be the product of another manufacturer.
2.02.5 If ferrous metals are shop contained in primer, the Contractor shall make every effort
to determine the type of primer used. If this is not possible or the primer is not
compatible with the proposed finish coat, a barrier coat as recommended by the
coating manufacturer may be required prior to application of finish coat.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION:
The Contractor shall examine all substrates, adjoining construction and the
conditions under which the work will be done. Do not proceed with the work until all
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION:
3.02.1 General:
1. Prepare surfaces to receive paint; thoroughly clean off substances that may
interfere with proper adhesion of paint. Paint on dry surfaces only;
2. Fill dents, cracks, hollow places, open joints and other irregularities with a filler
suitable for the purpose and, after setting, sand to smooth finish; and
3. Prime surfaces not more than 8 hours after cleaning or as recommended by the
coating manufacturer.
3.02.2 Metals:
1. Cleaning:
Clean bare metal or remove oil, grease, soil, salts and contaminants by solvent
cleaning in accordance with SSPC-SP 1. Remove loose rust and loose mill
scale by power tool chipping, de-scaling, sanding, wire brushing and grinding in
accordance with SSPC-SP 3. Surfaces to receive organic zinc rich primers shall
have surface preparation in accordance with SSPC-SP 6 or SSPC-SP 10 as
recommended by the coating manufacturer;
2. Shop-Primed Ferrous Surfaces:
Remove oil, grease, soil, salts and contaminants by solvent cleaning in

accordance with SSPC-SP1. Exercise care to prevent damage to shop coat.
Touch-up abraded or marred shop coats with paint used for priming; and
02054 - 5
3. Galvanized Surfaces:
Remove water-soluble dirt and chemicals with water and detergent, and
solvent-soluble contaminants with solvent. Rinse, allow to dry, then power or
hand abrade to remove oxides.
3.02.3 Concrete and Masonry:
1. Concrete shall be free from dirt, loose or excess mortar, efflorescence or any
film left from incompatible form oils or concrete curing compound. If form oils or
incompatible curing compounds are used, the surface shall receive a sweep
sandblast. Patch cracks and other blemishes, too large to be covered by paint;
and
2. Masonry shall be free from dirt, loose or excess mortar and efflorescence, and
thoroughly dry. Patch cracks and other blemishes, too large to be covered, by
block filler.
3.02.4 Plaster Work - Gypsum and Keene's cement:
1. Plaster must be hard and dry. Test plaster surfaces with a moisture meter and
do not proceed with painting until the moisture content satisfies the
recommendation of the respective paint manufacturer;
2. Remove grit, mildew, loose particles and repair surface irregularities before
paint is applied. Repair cracks and holes with patching plaster, properly keyed
to the existing plaster and sandpaper smooth; and
3. Primer plaster surfaces. Spackle imperfections in the plaster that become

visible after the prime coat is applied. Make flush with adjoining surface, and
spot prime with the prime coat material. If the prime coat does not dry to a
uniform sheen over the entire surface, the areas that indicate suction shall be
spot primed before applying succeeding coats.
3.02.5 Woodwork:
1. Sand smooth and remove loose edges, slivers or splinters and then brush to
remove dust. All sanding shall be done with the grain, and never across it;
2. Clean knots, pitch streaks or visible sap spots and treat with knotting sealer.
Prime or stain surfaces followed by caulking and filling of nail holes, seams and
joints with compounds which match the finish color. Sand surfaces smooth with
No. 00 sandpaper and remove dust; and
3. Paint fire-retardant treated wood with one coat of moisture resistant sealer
immediately after installation.
3.03 APPLICATION:
3.03.1 Mixing:
Mix materials thoroughly and strain if necessary, before using. Two component
02054 - 6
products shall be mixed with a power mixer and only in mixing pails placed in
suitably sized non-ferrous or oxide resistant metal pans. Do not adulterate
ready-mixed materials except in accordance with the manufacturer's printed
instructions. Coatings shall be applied by brush, roller or airless spray as
recommended by the manufacturer for each specific coating.
3.03.2 Application:
Apply materials with care, in strict conformance with the manufacturer's

recommendations and at a uniform rate that will produce the manufacturer's
recommended Wet Film Thickness (W.F.T.) and Dry Film Thickness (D.F.T.). W.F.T.
shall be checked periodically with a wet film gauge. Coating shall show no runs,
holidays, sag, crawls or other defects. Finish surface shall be uniform in sheen, color
and texture:
1. Allow coats to dry thoroughly before succeeding coats are applied; allow a
minimum of 24 hours between applications on any one surface unless
otherwise specified by the coating materials manufacturer;
2. Sandpaper under coats on interior metal thoroughly and uniformly to provide a

smooth, even surface for finish coats; and
3. Block filler on concrete block shall be applied by brush, squeegee, trowel or

roller being careful to force the material into pores in order to produce a
relatively smooth finish.
3.04 INSPECTION BY CONTRACTOR:
3.04.1 The following particular requirements shall be carried out by the Contractor:
Checking blast cleaned surfaces.
3.04.2 Regular mill scale detection tests shall be carried out using the "Copper Sulphate"
method of test.
3.04.3 Checking wet film thickness:
1. Wet film thickness gauges of an approved type shall be provided for each
painter to check the rate of paint application. Checking dry film thickness; and
2. The thickness of the built-up dry film after each paint coat applied to steel or
other magnetic surfaces shall be measured systematically, with a dry film
thickness gauge. Holiday detection on steel and iron surfaces.
3.04.4 The Contractor shall use a suitable and approved methods of detecting pinholes in
the coating system after trials on test plates.
3.04.5 The sweep voltage on high-voltage dc equipment shall not exceed half the voltage
required to spark through the complete paint system specified.
02054 - 7
3.05 REPAIR OF DAMAGED PAINT SYSTEM:
3.05.1 Areas of paint on steel work which have been damaged shall be mechanically wire
brushed to clean bare metal and the edges of the undamaged paint shall be
smoothed with sandpaper to a gentle bevel.
3.05.2 After the bare metal is exposed, it shall be cleaned to remove all corrosion, by blast
cleaning if necessary, and be thoroughly cleaned, free from all salt or oil deposits
and completely dry before painting.
3.05.3 The paint system shall then be applied to bring the areas up to the original thickness
and standard as the undamaged areas, each coat of new paint over-lapping the
existing coat by at least 50 mm.
3.05.4 Areas of paint on which weld spatter, concrete or other adherent matter has fallen
shall be cleaned or washed free of the adherent material immediately, and any
repair or making good of the affected surface to its original standard shall be carried
out.
3.05.5 Where epoxy coatings are damaged, suitable repair material supplied by the
manufacturer of the original coating shall be applied in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
3.05.6 All paint for repairing damaged paint-work shall be applied on fully prepared,
thoroughly clean and dry surfaces.
3.06 CLEANING:
3.06.1 As work proceeds and upon completion, promptly remove paint where spilled,
splashed or spattered.
3.06.2 During progress of work, keep premises free from any unnecessary accumulation of
tools, equipment, surplus materials and debris.
3.06.3 Upon completion of work, leave premises neat and clean, to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
- END OF SECTION -
02054 - 8
SECTION 02055
STONE CLADDING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This work shall consist of following elements of stone cladding including mortar bed,
fixing accessories, joint pointing and other related incidentals to complete the work.
- Marble floor, wall and column of natural stone cladding;

- Granite floor finish and treads of step;
- Granite counter of ticket booth;
- Granite plinth.
• Industrial Standard Indonesia (SII).
specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
Submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 01008

The contractor shall submit the followings for approved by the Engineer.
- Shop drawings which shall show the all tile and stone arrangement of each
elements including joints and fixing details;
- Full range of available color sample;
- Sample of selected types.
02055 - 1
PART 2: PRODUCT
2.01 MATERIALS:
2.01.1 Marble and natural stones shall be first class local products.
2.01.2 Granite shall be imported first class product equal to “Imperial Red” or “Indian Red”
2.01.3 Material shall be sound with uniform and favorable working qualities with very limited
natural faults.
2.01.4 Direction of veining shall continue direction over surfaces for marbles, and even
pattern surfaces for granite.
2.01.5 Unit size of marble and granite shall be 600 mm x 400mm and thickness shall be 20
mm.
2.01.6 Surface of marble and granite for walls, floors and counters shall be factory-polished
finish.
2.01.7 Surface of granite for step tread shall be factory fabricated sand blast and non-slip
finish.
2.02 SETTING MATERIALS:
2.02.1 Unless otherwise specified, horizontal and vertical anchors of reinforcing steel bar
shall be installed to receive clamps for wall marble or stone. Spacing of reinforcing
bar shall be in accordance with stone joints.
2.02.2 Clamps shall be brass wires not less than 3 mm diameter. Adhesive to fill holes for
clamps shall be non-staining type.
2.02.3 Cleaner shall be as commercial neutral liquid type especially prepared for marble
and granite works with a pH factor between 7 and 10, free from crystalline salts or
soluble alkaline salts, and biodegradable and phosphate free.
2.02.4 Sealer shall be a commercial penetrating type, free from harmful alkali or acid
content, especially prepared for marble and granite works a pH factor between 7 and
10. It shall not discolor or have a flashing point less than 35°C.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION:
3.01.1 Substrate surfaces shall be smooth, clean, dry and free from foreign materials, and
otherwise in the condition required by the materials manufactures.
3.01.2 Substratum surface shall be free from variation in plane exceeding 6.0mm in 3
02055 - 2
meters.
3.01.3 Bonding or other tests shall be conducted for moisture or other substratum
conditions per material manufacture’s instructions and as necessary to assure
proper adhesion.
3.01.4 Installation of anchors shall be concealed from below as approved by the Engineer.
3.01.5 Joint in top shall be straight and butted tightly with sealant and when complete, each
unit shall be set square.
3.01.6 Shims shall be provided as required to ensure uniform supports.
3.01.7 All units and joints shall be flush, level and straight across adjoining tile faces, and
shall be fully bonded into place and free from hollow sounds when inspected by
tapping.
3.01.8 Exposed surfaces shall be clean and free from scratches, broken units, chips,
cracks, miss-aligned, or improperly made joints or stains, discoloration or other
defects or damage.
- END OF SECTION -
02055 - 3
SECTION 02056
GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 The work consist of fixing double thickness (12 mm on the top of 9 mm) gypsum
board on steel or wooden framing for ceiling and wall works, including steel or wood
backing frame, joint finishing with special steel devices, joint finishing with joint tape
and joint compound to receive finishing.
• Standar Industrial Indonesia (SII).
specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
1.04.1 Submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 01008:

1.04.2 Manufacture’s catalogue and samples not less than 600 x 600 of 9 mm and 12 mm
thickness gypsum board shall be submitted for the Engineer’s approval.
02056 - 1
PART 2: PRODUCT
2.01 MATERIALS:
2.01.1 Paper faced gypsum board 9 mm and 12 mm thickness shall be of a total weight not
less than 15 kg/m².
2.01.2 The 12 mm thickness board shall have tapped edges.
2.01.3 Self tapping rust proofed countersunk steel screws shall be 5 mm x 30 mm long.
2.01.4 Steel frames shall be as specified in Section 02050: “MISCELLANEOUS STEEL” of

this specification.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 CONSTRUCTION:
3.01.1 Boards shall be fixed at 200 mm intervals in center and 100 mm interval on edges,
and screws shall be not more than 16 mm from board edges.
3.01.2 Joints in 12 mm board shall not coincide with joints in 9 mm backing board except at
finishing edges.
3.01.3 Screw heads shall be slightly recessed into face of board with joints and screw
heads skimmed with gypsum plaster. All faces shall be free from chips, scores and
other damage.
3.01.4 Finishing joint compound shall be applied in a thin uniform layer to all joints and
angles to be reinforced.
3.01.5 Joint reinforcing rape shall be immediately applied centered on the joint and seated
in the compound.
3.01.6 Sufficient compound, approximately 40 mm to 80mm must remain under the tape to
provide proper bounding.
3.01.7 A thin skim coat shall then be immediately applied to embed the tape, but not to
function as a second coat. The embedded coat shall be thoroughly dry
approximately 24 hours prior to application of second coat. The second coat of joint
compound shall be applied over the embedded coat, filling the panel taper flush with
surface.
3.01.8 The finish coat shall be spread evenly over and extend at least 51 mm beyond
second coat on all joints and feather to a smooth uniform finish.
3.01.9 Three coats shall be applied to all bead and trim, extending compound slightly
beyond the earlier coat and properly feathering from ground to place of surface.
- END OF SECTION -
02056 - 2
SECTION 02057
CEILING WORK
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This work shall consist of the following items to complete suspended ceiling work:
- Powder coated aluminum rectangular tube ceiling for Ticket Hall Area;
- Aluminum long sheet ceiling for Staircase and toilets etc;
- Gypsum Board ceiling including joint tape, filler and sealer to receive paint or vinyl
wall covering;
- Acoustic ceiling;
- Calcium silicate board ceiling;
- Cornice of Teak or Aluminum around wall and ceiling.
1.01.2 Suspension components to suspend above mentioned types of ceiling including

inserts, rods, adjusters and all required member to install rods from floor slab or
structural member. Bracing for hangers shall be also included into this work.
1.01.4 Access hatch for maintenance purpose of equipment shall be provided.
SECTION 01007: “QUALITY ASSURANCE / CONTROL PROGRAMME” and
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
Submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 01008:
02057 - 1
PART 2: PRODUCT
2.01 MATERIALS:
2.01.1 All suspension system including steel members, bracing for hangers and
accessories shall be galvanized steel, stainless steel or aluminum alloy.
2.01.2 Insert or anchors to receive suspension rods shall be as shown on the Drawings.
2.01.3 Rods shall be more than 9mm, and adjusters shall be considered. Hangers shall be
at not more than 1.2mm centers and less than 300 mm from each end.
2.01.4 Aluminum tube ceiling: This ceiling is not ready made type but shall be designed
specially for this project if necessary. The contractor shall be responsible for the
detail of fixing method to meet the design drawing as shown on the Drawing.
2.01.5 Aluminum Long Sheet Ceiling material shall need to be approved by the Engineer.
2.01.6 Gypsum Board Ceiling shall be followed as Section 02056: “GYPSUM BOARD”.
2.01.7 Acoustic Tiles ceiling shall be incombustible mineral fiber conforming to SII 0695 –
82, and shall be factory coated with primer and two coats of PVA emulsion.
2.01.8 Acoustic tiles shall be normally 600 x 1200 x 12mm and loose laid in extruded
aluminum angle or tee section suspension grid.
2.01.9 Calcium Silicate Board Ceiling shall be 600 x 1200 x 12mm of calcium silicate
material conforming to JIS A 5418. The weight shall be more than 4.8 kg/m2 with
perforated finishing.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 CONSTRUCTION:
3.01.1 Suspension components shall be straight and free from twists before installation.
3.01.2 Rods shall be adjusted so that the whole of the carrying angles or tees lie in a true
horizontal plane.
3.01.3 Where suspension rods are longer than 3.0 meters, the braces shall be installed so
that whole the frame system is firm and rigid.
3.01.4 On completion the installation shall be free from unsupported edges and be neatly
cut and trimmed round light boxes and other opening required.
3.01.5 Tiles and sheeting shall be flat, true to plane and free from visible defects.
- END OF SECTION -
02057 - 2
SECTION 02058
FURNITURE
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 The furniture work shall consist of supplying and installing the furniture with fittings
required for the various rooms.
1.01.2 Built-in furniture work consists of constructing the kitchen sink and cupboard as
shown on the Drawings:
- Kitchen sink with cabinet shall consist of a concrete counter with ceramic tile
finishing, stainless steel sink, teak wooden cabinet including hardware surface
finishing and all necessaries accessories;
- Cupboard above the sink which fixing to wall shall be including hardware, surface
finishing and all necessary accessories;
- Built-in cupboard, closet and racks shall be indicated on the Drawings or directed
by the Engineer including all necessary finishing, hardware and accessories.
specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
Submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 01008:
02058 - 1
PART 2: PRODUCT
2.01 MATERIAL:
2.01.1 Material and Workmanship of each item for furniture and fittings to be supplied shall
be of the Manufacturer’s first class quality and shall be new and free from scratches,
dents or any other defects.
2.01.2 The listed Manufacturer’s catalogue numbers is given for the information only. The
Contractor may free to propose the furniture from any other source of equal or better
standard.
2.01.3 Prior to placing any order for supply of furniture and fittings, the Contractor shall
provide sample for approved by the Engineer. No order for furniture shall be placed
prior to the Engineer’s written approval of the proposed furniture.
PART 3: EXECUTION
Not Applicable.
- END OF SECTION -
02058 - 2
SECTION 02059
BUILDING MECHANICAL SYSTEM
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This specification sets forth the basic requirements of the works to design,
manufacture, furnish and install the mechanical systems for the station buildings,
multipurpose room, and equipment building as shown on the Drawings. The work
also includes the testing and commissioning thereof.
1.01.2 Scope of works:
The following items shall be included in this:
1. Water supply system including bore hole (well), supply pumping, water tower
tank, piping and fittings with complete accessories;
2. Drainage piping and fittings with complete accessories;
3. Sanitary fixtures;
4. Septic tank and infiltration; and
5. Portable fire extinguisher.
1.01.3 Manufactures and Suppliers:
1. Manufacturers and suppliers shall have regularly produced, manufactured and/or

installed materials, equipment and goods of the types required. Goods proposed
for approval shall have been in service for at least two (2) years and documentary
proof of performance will be required before approval can be given; and
2. Manufacturers and suppliers will be asked to provide repair and maintenance

services beyond the requirements of this Contract and proof of this capacity will
be required before approval can be given.
• Indonesian Codes and References:
- Standard Nasional Indonesia (SNI 03-7065-2000). Codes of design for

plumbing systems.
02059 - 1
- Standar Nasional Indonesia (SNI 03-6481-2000 ), Plumbing systems

- Design and Maintenance of Plumbing Systems, Soufyan M. Moer Bambang
- Standard Nasional Indonesia (SNI 03-3987-1995), Codes for design,
Installation of light fire extinguisher for protection in houses and buildings.
• Other Codes and Standards:
- Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS);

- Japanese Fire Protection Codes; and
- National Fire Protection Association, Code and Standards (NFPA).
The Contractor shall comply with the applicable reference described in SECTION
01007: “QUALITY ASSURANCE / CONTROL PROGRAMME” and criteria specified
herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
Prior to placing orders with manufacturers or suppliers for plant and equipments, the
Contractor shall submit the following information to the Engineer for approval.
1.04.1 Full documentary description of materials, equipment and goods, with results of
testing carried out to demonstrate suitability.
1.04.2 Full shop drawings showing detailed dimensions, layout, sizes of equipment,
method of laying, securing and installing materials, equipment and goods.
1.04.3 Samples of material, equipment and goods as required including color samples.
1.04.4 Proposal for factory testing of equipment, materials or goods.
1.04.5 Proposal for supervision of installation by specialists of the sub-contractor employed

by the Contractor, if necessary.
1.04.6 Proposal for site testing and commissioning of equipments.
PART 2: MATERIAL
2.01 MATERIALS:
2.01.1 External and Internal Piping Works for Water and Drainage Services:
1. PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Fittings) 10 kg/cm²; JIS K 6741;
2. Socket type fittings with manufacture’s recommendation or flexible elastomeric

seal joint (complying with the test pressure vs. working pressure); and
3. Valves (gate type, check and foot valves) shall be cast bronze body, trimmed with
02059 - 2
screwed ends, working pressure 0.5 N/mm² or manufacture’s recommendations.
4. Water tower tank capacity 500 ltr, made of fiberglass included inlet and outlet dia.
25 mm
5. Connection between pipe and fitting PVC have to use appropriate glue to the
type of pipe, according to manufacturer’s recommendation pipes.
6. The way of connecting pipe shall be follow specification from factory.
2.01.2 Water Supply Pump Unit:
1. Packaged Type Jet-pump and motor unit, Water Rate: 40 lit/min, Total Head: 35
meters (from suction level to highest point of outlet), including complete pressure
type operation accessories; and
2. Steel made with anti-corrosion paint and finishing.
2.01.3 Bore Hole:
1. 1.2 m diameter, 10.0 m in depth from ground level;
2. 1.5 m reinforced concrete covering of top of bore hole; and
3. Maintenance water proofing cover for top of bore hole.
2.01.4 Sanitary Fixtures and Fitting:
1. Eastern type of water closet, Urinal, including wall mounted coupling faucet and
floor drain;
2. Wash basin faucet and sink drain, built-in type made of ceramic tile with counter;
3. Faucet and drainage fitting shall be made of bronze body with chromed finish and
manufacture’s standard;
4. Water stand faucet, coupling end; and
5. All materials shall be of the Manufacturer’s first class quality or standard and/or
custom made factory fabricated items and approved by the Engineer.
2.01.5 Septic Tank:
1. Concrete shall be conforming to Section 02068: “CONCRETE” of this

Specification;
2. Compressing strength of reinforced concrete cover shall be H class;
3. And a concrete cover shall be provided with two (2) handlebars, using SR16 steel
bars conforming to JIS G 3191;
4. Red brick shall be locally available product as specified in Section 02045: “WALL
AND FOUNDATION” of this Specification;
02059 - 3
5. PVC Vent pipe shall be provided;
6. Water proofing mortar 12 mm on both interior and exterior wall finish;
7. Leakage test shall be done for approval of the Engineer; and
8. Infiltration system shall be constructed in accordance with the approved shop

drawings.
2.01.6 Potable Fire Extinguishers:
1. The fire extinguishers shall be of the portable type, FE-36 (HFC-236fa –

Hexafluoropropane) type; Capacity 9.9 lbs, Effective of time discharge 15 second,
Discharge range 4 m (minimum);
2. Wall-mounted on a bracket rigidly fixed to the wall;
3. The bracket shall be of chromium plated mild steel or stainless steel; and
4. Quantities of fire extinguisher at each new station building shall be minimum 2

(two) units.
- END OF SECTION -
02059 - 4
SECTION 02060
BUILDING ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
This Section covers electrical systems for new line buildings inclusive of power
receiving, power supply, lighting fixtures for exterior and interior, socket outlets,
and relevant services as shown on the Drawings.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORKS:
1.02.1 The following works shall be included in this Section:
1. Power supply for equipment and buildings, and supply and installation of
Control Panel for new and existing building;
2. Lighting Fixtures (Building and external of limited platform area
3. Socket outlet; Lighting Fixtures.
4. Lighting system for new watchmen hut;
5. Rehabilitation work for Signal Equipment Building; and
6. Lighting fixtures and socket-outlet for Mushola, Location Case.
7. Lightning systems
8. Public address systems
1.02.2 Works included:
The works included in this scope of works are described but not limited to the
following clauses.
1.02.3 Design, supply, installation, tests and commissioning the electrical power
distribution, lighting and small power systems for line building to be newly
constructed.
1.02.4 Design, supply, install and tests the electro-magnetic protection systems for line
buildings to fully comply with the requirements specified in Section 09007
“ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE PROTECTION SYSTEM” of this
Specification.
1.03.1 The following Codes and Standards are intended to provide an acceptable level of
02060 - 1
1.03.2 The International Electro Technical Commission (IEC) codes and standards and
recommendations shall be applied as a minimum regardless of any national
standard (SNI) which may normally have been utilized in the manufacture, design
or installation of any equipment. The latest issues shall be used and are defined
as the issues (including recently published case ruling, interpretation of standards,
addenda) in force at the date award of Contract.
1.03.3 The following standards or corresponding local standards may be used.

In these instances the Contractor shall be required to demonstrate the
equivalency of the standard used. Latest issues shall be used as defined above for
IEC codes and standards and recommendations:
1. Standard Nasiona Indonesia (SNI 04-0225-2000) General Requirement for

electrical installation;
2. Standard Nasional Indonesia (SNI 03-2398-2001), Methods for design
artificial lighting systems in building;
3. Standard Nasional Indonesia (SNI 7391 : 2000), Road Lighting in downtown
area;
4. Standard Nasional Indonesia (SNI 03-7015-2004), Lightning protection
systems of structures.
5. National Electrical Code (NEC);
6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA);
7. National Electric Safety Code (NESC); and
8. Japanese Standards and Codes (JIS, JEM, JEC).
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
1.04.2 The Contractor shall submit detailed shop drawing to the Engineer for approval.
The shop drawings shall show all cabling and wiring diagrams of connection to the
PLN and to the line buildings and its interior power distribution system wiring
diagram, location of distribution boards, lighting fixtures, switches, power outlets,
power ratings, and their material specifications.
1.04.3 The Contractor shall submit catalogs, technical data and manufacturer’s
installation instructions of all materials to be provided in accordance with the
requirements of this section, if applicable.
1.04.4 The Contractor is advised that the electrical materials not mentioned in this
section, but obviously required to maintain the electrical system in the line
buildings to be functional, shall be recommended and included in the shop
drawings for approval.
02060 - 2
PART 2: MATERIAL
2.01 ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY:
Electrical power supply from the wayside cases shall be as follows:
- 220V, 50 Hz;
- 1-phase, one neutral,
- The Contractor shall be responsible for calculating power demand
requirements in coordination and liaison with the Signalling Contractor.
2.02 CABLES AND WIRES:
2.02.1 Power cable shall have copper or aluminium conductor, cross-linked polyethylene
insulation and neoprene jacket.
2.02.2 Wires for lighting and single phase socket outlet circuits shall be 600V class,
single copper conductor wires, cross-linked polyethylene insulated.
2.03 LIGHTING SYSTEM:
2.03.1 The following lighting fixtures and lamps shall be provided in accordance with the
drawings:
1. Fluorescent type:
- Type: Surface mounted, metal box, white colored; and

- Lamp: Tubular fluorescent lamp.
2. Edison Screw Lamp:
- Type: Surface mounted type without cover; and

- Lamp: Screw in circular or exposed fluorescent lamps.
3. High pressure sodium (SON) 150 W for platform:
a. The model, appearance and each type of fixture shall be of the description
as shown on the Drawings and specification;
b. The high pressure sodium type fixture shall be used high grade power
ballast;
c. Capacitor used as a part of the ballast shall be furnished with the proper
discharging device which will reduce terminal voltage of the capacitor to
50V or less with in 1 minute;
d. Sodium gas shall be enclosed in luminous tube; and
02060 - 3
e. Colour temperature shall be 2100k and luminous energy shall be off

continuous spectrum.
2.03.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for calculating the rating and quantity of
lighting fittings to be supplied.
2.03.3 Ballast for fluorescent rapid-start lamps shall be high power factor, with built-in
automatic resetting thermal protection, rated at 55 degrees C ambient temperature
and designed for 220 V, 50 Hz, AC operation.
2.03.4 Lighting fittings shall be provided with a corrosion resistant finish on all interior and
exterior parts. Lighting fittings shall be complete in every respect including lamps,
control gear, and accessories such as gasket, mounting brackets, and metal
fittings for surface mounting.
2.03.5 Local switches and socket outlets shall be of flush type and shall give overlapping
metal plate with rounded corners and beveled edges. Switch box and outlet box
shall be galvanized cast iron or steel pattern with adjustable grids.
2.03.6 All local switches shall be 25 A rating of 1-way and 2-way types as indicated on
the Drawings.
2.03.7 Socket outlets shall be according to DIN standard two-pin type for live and neutral
with grounding connection, and the rating capacity shall be in accordance with SNI
04-0225-2000 (PUIL) regulations.
2.03.8 Socket outlet shall be made of bakelite inserts around the pin apertures.
2.03.9 Distribution board shall be wall-mounted type and shall be equipped with circuit
breaker with copper buss. Distribution board shall be provided with a single main
breaker and shall conform to voltage rating, number of phases and wires specified
hereinbefore.
2.03.10 Distribution board shall be totally enclosed, dust proof and vermin proof (IP 54),
factory fabricated to size and dimension shown on the approved shop drawings.
2.03.11 Enclosure shall be made of steel sheet with hinged door which can be opened
without any obstruction through 180 degree and fitted with a locking device and
second cover to protect the inside wires of panel.
2.03.12 Arrangement of the enclosure shall be such that the circuit breaker cannot be
operated without opening the hinged door and it shall be necessary to remove the
second cover to obtain access to the interior of the panel.
2.03.13 Enclosure shall be of ample size provided with wiring gutters at the sides, top and
bottom to accommodate maximum number of circuit cables.
2.03.14 A directory holder with clear plastic plate and metal frames shall be mounted on
the inside of each door.
2.03.15 Circuit Breaker shall be of molded case type. Molded case circuit breaker shall be
manually operated, quick-make, quick-break, and trip free operating mechanism.
02060 - 4
2.03.16 Circuits for small power shall be protected by ground fault detection circuits
breakers rated as specified in Section 09007: “ELECTROMAGNETIC
INTERFERENCE PROTECTION SYSTEMS” of this Specifications.
2.03.17 Circuit breakers shall be single, double, or triple as required.
2.03.18 Ground rods shall fully comply with Section 09007: “ELECTROMAGNETIC
INTERFERENCE PROTECTION SYSTEMS” of this Specification.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 LIGHTING SYSTEM WIRING:
3.01.1 Lighting system wiring shall be installed in accordance with requirement of SNI 04-
0225-2000 (PUIL) regulation, or equivalent regulation as approved by the
Engineer.
3.01.2 Wiring for the line buildings shall be concealed to maximum extent possible. If
wiring is not installed in conduit and exposed, it shall be enclosed in plastic
enclosures, strong enough to withstand the application of anticipated loads and
not easily breakable. Wiring in plastic enclosures shall be laid on corners of wall,
where it shall not be on obstruction to the personnel working in the line buildings.
3.01.3 The Contractor shall design and modify the existing lighting system wiring and
fittings in the existing signal cabins to provide continuous operation of the lighting
system during power failures.
3.02 DISTRIBUTION BOARD:
3.02.1 The Contractor shall install distribution board such that the height of the top of
distribution board shall not exceed 1800 mm from the floor and as approved by the
Engineer.
3.02.2 The Contractor shall provide all steel shapes and appurtenances necessary for the
support of the distribution board. Where the distribution board is installed and
energized during the line building construction, the Contractor shall place
temporary covers over the opening at all times, except when work is being
performed.
3.02.3 The Contractor shall perform insulation resistance test on the distribution board.
3.02.4 Mounting height of local switches shall be at 1.5 m from the floor, unless otherwise
approved.
3.02.5 Mounting height of socket outlets shall be at 35 cm from the floor, unless
otherwise approved.
02060 - 5
3.02.6 Ceiling mounted lighting fixture shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.
3.02.7 Special care shall be taken by the Contractor in order not to damage completed
wall, ceiling, roof or other structures during installation of lighting fixtures, switches
and socket outlets. Damages done thereto shall be restored or replaced to their
original conditions, at the Contractor’s expense, as directed by the Engineer.
3.02.8 A complete grounding system shall be provided in full compliance with Section
09007 “ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE PROTECTION SYSTEM”. The
system shall satisfy all local codes and requirements.
3.03 LIGHTNING SYSTEM
3.03.1 The contractor shall install lightning Conductor/Air Terminal (Splizen) system
electrostatic non-radioactive type, head unit type early streamer emission with
standard SNI 03-7015-2004 and PLN regulation, included analog lightning strike
3.03.2 Lightning pole GIP shall used, higher than 10 meter and diameter variable.
3.03.3 Down conductor/cable NYY 70 mm shall be used and grounding copper earth
road dia. 5/8 inch R = 2 ohm
3.04 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
3.04.1 The contractor shall install Public Address at each station building.
Data public address equipment is:
1. Mixer amplifier, power: 120W, input: mix. 16W,via 1.2 Kohm, speaker output :
180/120W
2. Table Top Microphone, portable undirectional, rated impedance 200 ohm,

frequency 100 Hz to 16 kHz.
3. 5Coloumn Metal Speaker, rate input 30/40W, sound pressure level 105 dB/92
dB, impedance 500-8 ohm.
- END OF SECTION -
02060 - 6
SECTION VI-1: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
SECTION 02061
PUBLIC UTILITY
PART I : GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.03.1 This section covers the material and construction requirements for protection
Public Utilities such as electrical cable installation, cable telecommunications, oil
and gas pipes and water pipes that pass over or under the railway. It also includes
the relocation of electric poles and telecommunications poles, telecommunications
cables masts along the railway line which will be constructed for the new railway
and installation of pumps and pipelines for the irrigation of the pump room in Gerak
Dam Kebasen including testing and commissioning.
1.03.2 The work shall also include trenching, cable relocation, installation of protector for
underground utilities, backfill and compact and installation of wire net to protect
aerial cable over the railway.
1.03.3 The contractor shall provide all labour, materials, tools and equipment required to
complete the work.
1.03.4 Prior to the commencement of the work, the Contractor shall be responsible for
coordination with related Authority that owned the utilities and should carried out
the field observation together to study the condition of existing utility installation on
site.
1.03.5 For underground utilities, the Contractor shall be responsible for investigation of
underground utilities with the excavations test (Test Pit) at the point which
indicated there are underground utilities and it shall be witnessed by the related
Authority.
1.03.6 Utilities and protector (casing) that were installed under the railway path should not
be disjointed (monolite).
1.03.7 Utilities to be Installed must be labelled or marked to identify its related Authority
who owns it.
Section 01011 “SECURITY OF TRAIN OPERATIONS”

Section 01018 “SURVEY“
Section 02011 “BORROW MATERIAL“; and
Section 02012 “FILLING, GRADING AND EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION”.
02061 - 1
1.02 APPLICABLE CADES AND STANDARD:
quality for materials and product. The contractor may propose alternative codes
and standards as long as they give an equivalent degree of quality as the
referenced codes and standards and are submitted for the engineer’s review and

• American National Standards Institute (ANSI);
04-0225-2000 General requirement for electrical

installation
04-6918-2002 Construction gauge and requirement distance
minimum for on medium high voltage power
cable (SUTT) and extra high voltage power
cable (SUTET)

• Minister decree of Republic Indonesia (KM)
53 Tahun 2000 The intersection and/or the intersection

between Railway Line with other buildings
300.K/38/M.PE/1997 Safety Pipe Suppliers of Oil and Gas
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL:
1.03.1 The Contractor shall comply with the applicable reference described in Section
01007: "QUALITY ASSURANCE /CONTROL PROGRAMME” and criteria specified
herein.
1.03.2 Security of Train Operation:
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the safety of train operation in
accordance with Section 01011: "SECURITY OF RAILWAY OPERATION".
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
1.04.1 Submittals shall be made accordance with the requirements of Section 01008:
"SUBMITTALS" and as specified herein.
1.04.2 The contractor shall prepare and submit well planned the Work Programme on the
basis of coordination with related agencies.
The Work Programme should describe the sequence of work, working methods
and equipment that will be used to get the working done and maintaining safety
and security of train operations.
02061 - 2
PART 2: MATERIAL
2.01 PRECAST CONCRETE PLATE AND MARKERS OR STAKES FOR

UNDERGROUND UTILITIES:
2.01.1 Concrete shall be of Class K conforming to Section 02068: "CONCRETE".
2.01.2 Reinforcing steel bars shall conform to Section 02070: “REINFORCING STEEL
BAR”. Round bar of 8 mm in diameter shall be arranged with spacing 50 mm in
both ways.
2.02 PIPE, PUMPS AND ACCESSORIES:
2.02.1 Steel Pipe

Material : Black Steel Pipe (BSP) Sch 40 or ASTM A. 120.
2.02.2 Fittings
Material : Wrought Steel Butt Welding Fittings ANSI B 16.9 Sch 40.
2.02.3 Flanged
Material : Forged Steel RF Class 300 Ib.
2.02.4 Gate Valve

Material : Cast Iron
Type : Flanged, Wing Silent Type with Stainless Steel Disk, Hand
Wheel Operated with Position Indicator, ANSI / 225 psi.
2.02.5 Check Valve

Type : Flanged End, Stainless Steel Disk, Anti Water Hamer, ANSI /
225 psi.
2.02.6 Strainer
Type : Y Pattern, Stainless Steel Perforated Screen, Bolted Bonnet,
Flanged End.
2.02.7 Flexible Joint/Flexible Connection

Material : Neoprene Rubber (Pressure Strength max = 14 kg/cm2).
Type : Base Frame Cast Iron/Steel.
2.02.8 Pressure Gauge

Type : Diaphragm Gauge.
Indication : Bar.
Size : Ø 75 mm.
Connection : Flens (Temperatur Operasi -100 C - 500 C).
2.02.9 Water Pump

Type : Centrifugal/End Suction
02061 - 3
Capacity : 250 Liter/second

Head : 22 meter
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 RELOCATION OF ELECTRIC POLES AND TELECOMMUNICATION POLES:
3.01.1 Relocation of Electric poles and Telecommunication poles shall be coordinated

with the related Authority A new location shall be approved by Engineer, Related
Authority and Working Unit.
3.01.2 Installation of an Electric pole and Telecommunication poles shall be followed with
the standard of related Authority.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF UTILITY PROTECTOR IN THE AERIAL:
3.02.1 Each Electric cables and Telecommunication cables which pass over railway lines
shall be protected by wire net protection.
3.02.2 Electric cables and Telecommunication cables which crossing above railway lines
should be located a minimum of 10 m from the top of rail, whereas for medium and
extra high voltage power cables should be a minimum of 12.5 m from the top of
rail.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF UTILITY PROTECTOR IN THE UNDERGOUND:
3.03.1 Before the excavation work to be carried out, the point of excavation indicated on
the reference drawing shall be confirmed. Excavation work shall be carefully
executed.
3.03.2 If the utility does not match with the depth required for installation, then it should be
installed deeper than required.
3.03.3 Installation of the protector (casing) shall be done carefully, so as not to cause
damage to the utility line.
3.03.4 Backfill material shall be placed in uniform layers and shall be not be placed until
de-watering work is completed and dried
3.03.5 Compaction shall be done with the electrical compactor as to be equal to the
surrounding earth density, or to maximum dry density of 90 percent.
3.03.6 Compaction shall be done with method layer by layer compaction accordance with
the specification.
02061 - 4
3.04 RELOCATION OF OPTICAL FIBER CABLE IN THE UNDERGROUND:
3.04.1 Excavation for the cable shall be accordance with a specified route.
3.04.2 The location of replacement shall be at least 10 meters from the outer side of the
building or their location shall be approved by the Engineer and Working Unit.
3.04.3 Excavation and replacement of underground cable shall be taken place safe
enough from the construction of track and no disturb for train operation.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF PIPES, FITTINGS AND FIXTURES:
3.05.1 The pipes to be installed in the underground shall be coated by corrosion resistant
material which the work is done at the factory. If coating be executed on the site
done in field, the corrosion resistant material shall be zinchromate paint or layered
of bitumen coated by polyethylene.
3.05.2 Exposed plumbing pipe shall be coated by zinchromate and then painted.
3.05.3 Flanged connections should be equipped with ring of rubber and shall be fastens
eventy.
3.05.4 All fixtures shall be fitted well and it is free of dirt that will interfere the flow and
shall be attached tight to its place.
3.05.5 High pressure pipe shall be installed in the concrete beam with pipe connection tee
and elbow.
3.05.6 All pipes must be fastened with strong hanger or rigid anchor to fix the inclines and
prevent the occurrence of vibrations.
3.05.7 Horizontal pipe shall be hung with hanger which can be adjusted at a distance of
not more than 2.5 m.
3.05.8 All pipelines that pass through the building shall use flexible joint to prevent pipe
break from building movement.
3.05.9 Hanger or pipe base shall be screwed/attached to the building with ramset or
dynabolt.
3.05.10 Vertical pipeline shall be supported with a strong clamp with distance of no more
than 3 m.
3.05.11 Underground pipe shall be installed at a depth of minimum 1 m, while for passing
under the railway a minimum depth shall be 1.5 m equipped with a
protector/casing. The foundation pit shall be fairly stable and flat for the pipe to be
placed properly.
02061 - 5
3.06 INSTALATION OF WATER PUMP:
3.06.1 Foundation for the placement of the water pump shall be made of reinforced
concrete and finished flat surfaces.
3.06.2 The water pump shall be installed at the same level as electric motor.
3.06.3 The Silencer vibration shall be installed between the pump and the foundation.
3.06.4 The installation of water pump shall consist of installation of panel and wiring
cable.
3.06.5 The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure the system’s works and to install a
few additional components needed.
3.07 DRAINAGE CONTROL BOX AND MAN HOLE:
3.07.1 Base of Drainage Control Box shall be made of reinforced concrete and watertight,
whereas the lid should be airtight.
3.07.2 Drainage Control Box must be equipped with a sleeve for pipes to insite and
outsite waters.
3.07.3 Man Hole shall made of reinforced concrete and it’s equipped with a handle for
easy opening.
3.08 TESTING AND COMMISIONING:
3.08.1 Contractors are required to test of the entire pipelines and auxiliary equipment
such as: valve, flexible joint, pipe connections, etc. Including pumps and wiring
installation.
3.08.2 The test procedure for the pipeline are as follows:
• Testing pressure conducted at 20 kg/cm2 pressure for 24 hours, and should

not experience a decrease in water pressure.
• Contractor must record the test results and reported to the Engineer for
evaluation and approval.
3.08.3 Testing of the pump are as follows:
• Capacity, Water Flow, rpm, Pressure.

• Current and Voltage of the motor.
• Contractor must record the test results and reported to the Engineer for
evaluation and approval.
3.08.4 Broken and Failure Test:
If fail for a part or whole, it should be re-examined until the Engineer and/or the
Employer approve.
- END OF SECTION -
02061 - 6
SECTION 02062
SUB-GRADE PREPARATION
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 The work shall applicable for preparation of sub-grade to be required for the new
roadbed for tracks in embankment and cutting, level crossing approach roads.
Materials to be used for the sub-grade shall be supplied by the work specified in
Section 02063: “SUB-BASE and/or Section 02064: “SUB-BALLAST”.
1.01.2 The Contractor shall complete the work with the line, grades, sections, and
dimensions as shown on the Drawings.
1.01.3 The Contractor shall furnish all labor, tools and equipment required to complete
the work.

Section 02063 “SUB-BASE”; and
Section 02064 “SUB-BALLAST”.
T 180 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 10-16 (4.54 kg)

Rammer and 18-in. (457-mm) Drop; and
T 221 Repetitive static Plate Load Tests of Soils and Flexible

Pavement Components for Use in Evaluation and Design of
Airport and Highway Pavements.
B1556 Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Core Method
A 1215 Method of Plate Load Test on Soils for Road.

02062- 1
specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:

PART 2: PRODUCTS
Not Applicable
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 TEMPLATES AND STRAIGHTEDGE:
The Contractor shall provide and use straight edge to check the accuracy of the
work and ensure adherence to the requirements of these Specifications.
3.02 PRIOR WORK:
3.02.1 Culverts, drainpipes, French drain and any other structures below the sub-grade
level, including the complete fully compacted backfill over them, shall be
completed before work is commenced on the sub-grade.
3.02.2 Ditches, drains, outlets for drainage, and wing-walls for culverts shall be in
operative condition as to ensure prompt and effective drainage and to avoid
damage to the sub-grade by surface water.
3.02.3 Any sub-grade areas failing to meet the planned elevation due to settlement or
any other cause, or which have become damaged since completion of earthwork,
shall be removed, material replaced or added, re-compacted and finished to the
specified lines, grades and cross section as directed by the Engineer.
3.02.4 No work shall be commenced on the preparation of the sub-grade before the prior
works herein described have been approved by the Engineer.
3.03 TEST SUB-GRADE:
3.03.1 Prior to commencement of permanent sub-grade construction, the Contractor shall

construct test sub-grade using the materials for sub-grade specified in Section
02063: “SUB-BASE” and Section 02064: “SUB-BALLAST” for tracks and roads
respectively at the locations selected by the Contractor and approved by the
02062- 2
Engineer. The size of the test sub-grade shall 3 times of the width of compaction
equipment by 20m long.
3.03.2 The Contractor shall perform the trial compaction and determine the maximum dry
density of the compacted material when they are compacted to the required
strength of 110 MN/m³ tested by means of JIS A 1215 “Plate Load Test on Soils
for Road”.
3.03.3 The Contractor shall submit laboratory and field test results as specified below for
material and equipment that are most appropriate for the work, and also for
determination of the thickness of fill material of each layer, intervals between
successive filling works and testing method for approval by the Engineer.
Test Item Application Testing

Code
a. Moisture Content ASTM D 2216

b. Unit Weight ASTM D 2937
c. Specified Gravity ASTM D 854
d. Grain Size Analysis ASTM D 421-422
e. Liquid and Plastic Limits ASTM D 4218
f. Plate-load testing ASTM D 1194, JIS A 1215
g. Density of Soil ASTM D 1556
3.03.4 When there are any changes in material or compaction equipment, then a new
sub-grade test shall be performed, and standard shall be revised accordingly.
3.03.5 The Contractor shall determine compaction velocity and frequency for
obtaining required soil coefficient.
3.03.6 The Contractor shall also select the types of compaction equipment.
3.03.7 The Contractor shall be well aware of the information regarding over compaction
and work efficiencies of the compaction equipment.
3.04 COMPACTION:
3.04.1 Material shall be spread and compacted in layers of approximately equal

thickness. The maximum thickness of any one layer shall not exceed 10-cm in
compacted thickness, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
3.04.2 Material which does not conform to the requirements of these

specifications, shall be reworked and thoroughly re-compacted to conform to the
specified requirements at the Contractor’s own expenses. Reworking shall include
the full depth of the layer involved. Additions of thin layers to make-up insufficient
thickness will not be permitted.
3.04.3 Sub-grades shall be constructed in layers of uniform thickness and each layer
shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D 1556 “Density of Soil in Place by the
Sand-Cone Method”. Test results shall not less than 95% of the maximum dry
density obtained from the trial compaction.
02062- 3
3.04.4 The test as specified shall be performed by at least one (1) group of test for each
100-meter long construction lot.
3.04.5 One (1) group of test shall consist of three (3) individual tests to be provided at the
location of the center and the locations 2.0-m a part toward both sides along the
perpendicular to the centerline of the railway.
3.06 PROTECTION OF COMPLETED WORK:
3.06.1 Any part of sub-grade that has been completed shall be protected against drying
out, cracking and damage, and these from default of the Contractor shall be
repaired as directed by Engineer at his own expense.
3.06.2 The finished sub-grade shall be covered with successive layer of ballast or
bituminous course immediately.
3.07 TRAFFIC AND REPAIRS:
3.07.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for all the consequences of traffic being
admitted to the sub-grade, and may prohibit such traffic if he has provided a
detour or is operating half width construction.
3.07.2 The Contractor shall repair any ruts or ridges occasioned by his own traffic or that
of others by re-shaping and compacting with suitable equipment of the size and
type necessary for such repair.
3.07.3 The Contractor shall arrange for sub-grade preparation and sub-base or base
placing to follow each other closely.
3.08 TOLERANCES:
3.07.1 The tolerance for final preparation of sub-grade shall not exceed:
- Alignment (horizontal control) + 20 mm to – 20 mm; and

- Profile and Elevations (vertical control) + 25 mm to – 25 mm.
3.07.2 The Engineer may waive certain requirements, apply other tolerances, as he may
deem necessary, and as on appropriate for the case at hand.
3.07.3 When a 3-m straightedge is laid on the surface parallel to or at right angles to the
centerline, the surface variation from the lower edge of the straightedge shall not
exceed 12-mm.
- Compacted sub-grade 12 mm
- END OF SECTION -
02062- 4
SECTION 02063
SUB-BASE
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This Section covers the requirement of materials to be placed on the sub-grade for
roads where asphalt treated base course applied.
1.01.2 The work shall cover and include obtaining, loading, hauling, placing, initial
compacting of sub-base with the line, grades, sections, and dimensions as shown
on the Drawings.
complete the work.

CONSTRUCTION”; and
Section 02037 “APPROACH ROAD”.
submitted for the Engineers review and approval in advance of their use.
01007: “QUALITY ASSURANCE / CONTROL PROGRAMME” and the criteria
specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:

02063 - 1
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 ALL MATERIAL SHALL COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THESE

SPECIFICATIONS:
Materials shall consist of well-graded sand gravel conforming to the following

requirements and standards.
Sieve Designation (mm) Percentage Passing by Weight
37.5 100 %
19.0 65 % to 81 %
9.5 42 % to 60 %
4.75 27 % to 45 %
2.36 18 % to 33 %
1.18 11 % to 25 %
0.425 6 % to 16 %
0.075 0 % to 8 %
- Liquid Limit (AASHTO T89) 25 % max.

- Plasticity Index (AASHTO T90) 6 % max.
- Sand Equivalent (AASHTO T176) 25 % min.
- Loss by Abrasion (AASHTO T96) 40 % max.
- Minimum Dry Density (AASHTO T180) 2.0 g/cm2
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 HANDLING AND SPREADING:
Sub-base material shall be hauled and placed in the manner approved by the
Engineer. Disturbed or rutted finished ground materials shall be removed from the
fill, disposed of in an approved manner and replaced.
3.02 INITIAL COMPACTION:
3.02.1 Immediately following final spreading and smoothing, each layer shall be compacted
to full width by means of smooth wheel power rollers, pneumatic tired rollers or other
approved compaction equipment. Rolling shall progress gradually from the low to
the high point of the cross section parallel to the centerline of carriageway, and shall
continue until the entire surface has been rolled.
3.02.2 Any irregularities or depression that develop shall be corrected by loosening the
material at these places and adding or removing material until the surface is smooth
and uniform. At all places not accessible to the roller, the material shall be
compacted thoroughly with approved tampers or compactors. The material shall be
both graded and rolled until a smooth, even surface has been obtained.
02063 - 2
3.02.3 Where the surface fails to meet the tolerance requirement the Contractor shall
remove and replace the sub-base as directed by the Engineer without any additional
cost.
3.03 TOLERANCES:
3.03.1 The following tolerances for sub-base and pavement construction after completion
of the work shall not be exceeded. The Engineer may waive certain requirements,
apply other tolerances as he may waive certain requirements, and apply tolerances
as he may necessary and as are appropriate for the case at hand:
- Alignment (horizontal control): + 20 mm to – 20 mm;
- Profile and Elevations (vertical control): + 20 mm to – 20 mm; and

(Top of compacted sub-base course)
- Thickness of compacted granular sub-base: + 10 % to – 5%.
3.03.2 When a 3-meter Straightedge is laid on the surface parallel to and perpendicular to
the centerline, the surface variation from the lower edge of the straightedge shall not
exceeds:
Compacted sub-base course: 8 mm.
- END OF SECTION -
02063 - 3
SECTION 02064
SUB-BALLAST
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This Section covers the requirement of materials to be placed on the sub-grade for
tracks in embankment and cutting area.
1.01.2 The work shall cover and include purchasing, loading, hauling, placing and initial
compacting with the line, grades, sections, and dimensions as shown on the
Drawings.
complete the work.

Section 02062 “SUB-GRADE PREPARATION”
• American Association for State Highway and Transportation Officials Standards

(AASHTO)
specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:

02064 - 1
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL:
2.01.1 Sub-ballast shall consist of granular fill of well-graded crushed or uncrushed gravel,
stone, rock fill sand or a well-mixed combination of any of these.
2.01.2 Deleterious substances shall not be present in sub-ballast materials more than the
following amounts:
Deleterious Substances ASTM Method of Test Amount
Soft and friable pieces C 235 5.0 %
Clay Lumps C 142 0.5%
2.01.3 The grading of sub-ballast material, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136,
shall conform to the following requirements:
Maximum size 4mm
Passing 50 mm (2”) 100 %
Passing 25 mm (1”) 90% to 100%
Passing 9,5 mm (2/8”) 50 % to 84 %
Passing 2 mm (No.10) 26 % to 50 %
Passing 0,425 mm (No.40) 12 % to 30 %
Passing 0,075 mm (No.200) 0 % to 10 %
2.01.4 Sieve shall conform to requirements as follows:
Characteristic ASTM Method of Test Requirements
Liquid Limit D 423 Less than 35
Plasticity Index D 424 Less than 9
02064 - 2
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL:
Ground surface to receive sub-ballast, immediately before spreading, shall conform

to the compaction and elevation tolerance specified for the material involved, which
shall be free of loose or extraneous material, according with requirement specified
3.02 EXECUTION:
3.02.1 Sub-ballast material shall be hauled and placed by the trucks or earth moving
equipment in such a way that rutting or disturbance of the completed ground surface
is completely avoided. Disturbed or rutted finished ground materials shall be
removed from the fill, disposed of in an approved manner, and replaced.
3.02.2 Sub-ballast placing shall be commenced when new roadbed construction on the
embankment and cutting area is completed, and as approved by the Engineer.
3.02.3 Sub-ballast material shall be delivered to the work in uniform mixture and shall be
deposited on the ground at a uniform quantity per linear meter and at a rate which
will provide the required compacted thickness within the grade tolerance specified.
3.02.4 Segregation shall be avoided and the sub-ballast shall be free from pockets or
concentration of coarse or fine material, and from material not uniform in mixture.
3.02.5 Initial compaction shall be thorough, uniform by means of suitable equipment, and
finally compacted to conform to the specified requirement. During compaction work,
materials shall be kept to their optimum moisture content as directed by the
Engineer.
3.02.6 Sub-ballast material shall be compacted within the same day of spreading.
3.02.7 When placing the sub-ballast or during any other operations, the sub-ballast material
shall not be mixed with other materials. Sub-ballast material, which has become
contaminated with other materials shall be removed and replaced.
3.02.8 The surface of the finished sub-ballast at any point shall be not less than 200 mm
from the grades shown on the Drawing.
- END OF SECTION -
02064 - 3
SECTION 02065
BITUMINOUS PRIME COAT AND TACK COAT
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
This work shall consist of furnishing and applying bituminous materials to a

previously prepared base course surface or an existing pavement surface in
accordance with these Specifications and to the width as shown on the cross
sections or as instruction by the Engineer.
Section 02066 “ASPHALT CONCRETE SURFACE COURSE ASPHALT

COURSE”.
M81 Rapid-curing cut-back asphalt; and
M82 Medium-curing cut back asphalt.
specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:

02065 - 1
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
2.01.1 Prime Coat:
1. The grade (with temperatures of application in degrees C) shall be MC-70

(430C – 850C); and
2. If blotter materials are required, when directed by the Engineer, dry sand or
stone screenings free from dirt or cohesive material shall be applied.
2.01.2 Tack Coat:
The grade (with temperatures of application in degrees C) shall be RC-250 (600C

– 1000 C).
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EQUIPMENT:
The equipment to be used for the application of these materials shall be approved
by the Engineer before the commencement of these works.
3.02 WEATHER LIMITATIONS:
The prime coat shall be applied only with the approval of the Engineer. The
surface to be treated shall be dry or slightly damp. No application of these
materials shall be allowed when the surface is very wet.
3.03 PREPARATION OF SURFACE:
3.03.1 Immediately before applying the prime coat or tack coat, all loose material, dirt,
clay, or other objectionable material shall be removed from the surface to be
treated. To assure a uniform spread of the bituminous material, the surface
prepared for treatment, if excessively dry, shall be lightly sprinkled with water
immediately before the application, as directly.
3.03.2 Before applying the tack coat material the existing pavement surface shall be
patched and cleaned and shall be free from irregularities to provide a reasonably
smooth and uniform surface to receive the treatment.
3.03.3 The edges of existing pavements, which are to be adjacent to new pavement,
treated shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the application.
02065 - 2
3.04 APPLICATION OF MATERIAL:
3.04.1 Prime coat material shall be applied to the width of the suction to be primed by
means of a bitumen distributor in a uniform, continuous spread. The rate of
application with usually be in the range of 1.0 to 2.5 kg/m3 and the Engineer will
determine the rate to the applied.
3.04.2 Tack coat material shall be uniformly applied with a bitumen distributor within 24
hours preceding placement of the covering course. The Engineer will specify the
rate of application, which will usually be in the range of 0.4 to 0.8 kg/m2.
3.04.3 Care shall be taken that the application of bituminous material at the junction of
spreads is not more than the specific amount. Excess bituminous materials shall
be squeegee from the surface. Skipped areas or deficiencies shall be corrected.
- END OF SECTION -
02065 - 3
SECTION 02066
ASPHALT CONCRETE SURFACE COURSE

ASPHALT BINDER COURSE
AND
ASPHALT TREATED BASE COURSE
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
This work consist of aggregate and bituminous material mixed in a central plant
and spread and compacted on a prepared surface in accordance with these
Specifications and in close conformity with the lines, grades, thickness, and typical
cross sections shown on the Drawings or established by the Engineer.
Section 02065 “BITUMINOUS PRIME COAT AND TACK COAT”.
• American Association for State Highway and Transportation Officials Standards

(AASHTO)
A 1102 Method of Test for Sieve Analysis of Aggregate;

A 1110 Method of Test for Specific Gravity and Absorption Coarse
Aggregate;
A 1111 Method of Test for Surface Moisture in Fine Aggregate;
A 1121 Method of Test for Abrasion of Coarse Aggregate by Use of the Los
Angeles Machine;
A 1201 Method of Preparing Soil Samples for Grain-Size
Analysis and Physical Tests;
A 1205 Method of Test for Liquid Limit of Soils;
A 1206 Method of Test for Plastic Limit of Soils;
A 1210 Method of Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using
Rammer;
A 1214 Method of Test for Density of Soil by the Sand Replacement Method;
Z 8801 Sieves for Testing Purpose;
02066 - 1
specified herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:

PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
2.01.1 Composition of Mixtures:
The bituminous material shall be composed of a mixture of aggregate, filler and

hydrated lime, if required, and asphalt cement. The several aggregate fractions
shall be sized, uniformly graded and combined in such proportions that the
resulting composite blend meets the job-mix formula and the following index of
retained strength as determined in accordance with AASHTO T245.
Item Asphalt Treated Asphalt Concrete

Base Course Binder and Surface Course
Stability 700 900
Flow (mm) 2.5 – 4.0 2.5 – 4.0
Voids in total mix (%) 4–6 3–5
Voids filled with asphalt (%) 65 - 75 75 - 85
In calculating the void characteristic of the mixture the Contractor shall allow for
the asphalt absorbed by the aggregated and use the effective specific gravity of
aggregate and the maximum specific gravity of the loose paving mixture (AASHTO
T209).
The several aggregated and filler fractions for the mixture shall be sized, graded,
and combined in such proportions that the resulting composite blend meets one of
the grading requirements tabulated below.
- Grade A shall be used for asphalt treated base course;

- Grade B shall be used for asphalt binder course;
- Grade C shall be used for asphalt surface course.
02066 - 2
Sieve Designation Percentage Passing by weight

Inch (mm)
Grade A Grade B Grade C
2’ (50.0) 100 - -
1 1/2’(37.5) 95-100 - -
1’ (25.0) 70-90 100 -
3/4“ (19.0) - 95-100 100
1/2 “ (12.5) 45-70 68-86 95-100
3/8 “ (9.5) - 56-78 74-92
No. 4(4.75) 25-50 38-60 48-70
No. 8(2.36) 17-40 27-47 33-53
No. 16(1.18) - 18-37 22-40
No. 30(0.600) 7-22 11-28 15-30
No. 50(0.300) - 6-20 10-20
No. 200(0.075) 0-6 0-8 4- 9
Before stockpiling aggregate, the Contractor shall submit a proposed job-mix

formula in writing, for review and approval or modification by the Engineer in
setting the job-mix to be used with the proposed materials. The formula submitted
shall proposed definite single values for:
- The percentage of aggregate passing each specified sieve;

- The percentage of bituminous materials to be added, on the total aggregate
basis;
- The temperature of the mixture leaving the mixer;
- The temperature of the mixture of the mixture delivered on the road; and
- The grade of bituminous material.
Value shall be proposed within the limits specified for the particular type of
bituminous concrete called for.
The Engineer will determine a job-mix formula with single values for the above-
mentioned and so notify the Contractor in writing.
The mixture furnished by the Contractor shall conform to this job-mix formula
within the grading ranges previously tabulated and within the following range of
tolerances:
Item Tolerance
Aggregate passing No. 4 (4.75 mm) + 7 % to – 7 %
And larger sieve
Aggregate passing No. 8 (2.36 mm) + 4 % to – 4 %

Through No. 50 (0.300 mm) sieve
Aggregate passing No. 200 (0.075 mm) sieve + 2 % to – 2 %
Bituminous material + 0.4% to – 0.4 %
Temperature leaving the mixer +60C–60C

0 0
Temperature delivered on the road +6 C–6 C
02066 - 3
When unsatisfactory results make it necessary, the Engineer may establish a new
job-mix formula and so notify the Contractor in writing. Should a change in sources
of material be proposed, a new job-mix formula will be established before the new
material is used.
The plant mixed material will be tested after blending or mixing at the plant or
before final incorporation in the work.
2.01.2 Coarse Aggregate:
The coarse aggregate (retained on the 2.36-mm sieve) shall consist of clean,
tough, durable fragments free from an excess of flat, elongated, soft or
disintegrated pieces and free from stone coated with dirt or other objectionable
material.
The percentage of wear when tested according to AASHTO T96, shall be as

follows:
- For use in asphalt base course: not more than 50 %; and

- For use in asphalt surface course: not more than 40 %.
The sodium sulphate soundness loss shall not exceed 9 percent, nor shall the
magnesium sulphate soundness loss exceed 12 percent. When crushed gravel is
used, not less than 50 percent of the particles by weight retained on the 4.75 mm
sieve shall have at less one fractured face.
2.01.3 Fine Aggregate:
The fine aggregate (passing No. 8 sieve) shall have general characteristics and
soundness in accordance with AASHTO M29.
2.01.4 Filler:
Mineral filler, when required, shall consist of limestone dust, Portland cement, or
other non-plastic mineral matter from sources approved by the Engineer.
Mineral filler shall be dry, flowing free from lumps and other objectionable material
and when tested by means of laboratory sieve, shall meet the following gradation
requirements:
Sieve Designation (mm) Percentage Passing by Weight
No. 30 (0.60) 100 %

No. 100 (0.150) 95 – 100 %
No. 200 (0.075) 65 – 100 %
2.01.5 Asphalt Cement:
Asphalt Cement shall be of penetration grade 60–70, and shall conform to the
requirements of AASHTO M20.
02066 - 4
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EQUIPMENT:
Equipment of mixing and batching plant for asphalt concrete material shall be
proposed by the Contractor and be approved by the Engineer.
3.02 EXECUTION:
3.02.1 Preparation of Bituminous Material:
The bituminous material shall be heated to the specified temperature in a manner

that will avoid local overheating and provide a continuous supply of the bituminous
material to the mixer which shall not be more than 2 oC above the specified
temperature.
Asphalt cements shall not be used while it is foaming above 175 oC at any time.
3.02.2 Preparation of Aggregates:
1. The aggregates for the mixture shall be dried and heated to the required
temperature. Flames used for drying and heating shall be properly adjusted to
avoid damage to the aggregate and to avoid soot on the aggregate;
2. Immediately after heating and drying, the aggregates shall be screened into
three or more fraction as specified and conveyed into separate compartments
ready for batching and mixing with bituminous material;
3. When asphalt cement is used, the temperature of the aggregates as introduced

into the mixer, including the tolerance permitted by the job-mix formula, shall
not exceed that at which the asphalt cement has a Saybolt Furol viscosity of
100 seconds, determined by AASHTO T72; and
3. It shall not be lower than is required to obtain complete coating and uniform
distribution of the aggregate particles and to provide a mixture of satisfactory
workability.
3.02.3 Mixing:
1. The dried aggregate shall be combined in the mixer in the amount of each
fraction of aggregates required to meet the job-mix formula. The bituminous
material shall be measured or gauged and introduced into the mixer in the
amount specified by the job-mix formula;
2. After the required amounts of aggregate and bituminous material have been
introduced into the mixer, unless otherwise specified, the material shall be
mixed until a complete and uniform coating of the particles and a through
distribution of the bituminous material throughout the aggregate is secured.
Wet mixing time will be determined by the Engineer for each plant and for each
type of aggregated used; and
02066 - 5
3. For plant mix bituminous pavement, the mixture shall be produced as closely as
practicable to the lowest temperature that will produce a workable mix within
the specified temperature range.
3.02.4 Transporting, Spreading and Finishing:
1. The mixture shall be transported from the mixing plant to the point of use by
vehicles conforming to the requirements, item 3 of this clause;
2. No loads shall be sent out so late in the day as to prevent completion of the
spreading and compaction of the mixture during daylight hours unless with the
Engineers approval and satisfactory illumination is provided;
3. Each vehicle shall be weighed after each loading at the mixer and a record
shall be kept of the gross weight, tare, net weight, and time of day of each load
operation. The mixture shall be delivered at a temperature between 125°C and
160°C for asphalt mix;
4. The mixture shall be laid upon an approved surface, spread and struck off to
the grade and elevation established. Bituminous pavers shall be used to
distribute the mixture either over the entire width or over such partial width as
may be practical;
5. The longitudinal joint in one layer shall be offset from that in the layer
immediately below by approximately 15 cm, however, the joint in the top layer
shall be at the center line of the pavement if the roadway comprises two lanes
of width, or at lane lines if the roadway is more than 2 lanes in width, unless
otherwise directed;
6. On areas where irregularities or unavoidable obstacles make the use of

mechanical spread and finishing equipment impracticable, the mixture shall be
spread, raked and lute by hand tools. For such areas the mixture shall be
dumped, spread and screeded to give the required compacted thickness;
7. When production of the mixture can be maintained and when practical, pavers
shall be used in echelon to place the surface course in adjacent lanes;
8. The Contractor shall carry out such test as are necessary to determine the
uncompacted thickness of mixture to be laid for compaction to conform to the
required finished depths; and
9. The uncompacted material immediately behind the paver shall then be

measured at frequent intervals and adjustments made to ensure conformity
with the nominal depths.
3.02.5 Compaction:
1. After the bituminous mixture has been spread, struck off and surface
irregularities adjusted, it shall be thoroughly and uniformly compacted by
rolling;
02066 - 6
2. The specific gravity of the consolidated mixture, as determined by AASHTO

T230 shall be not less than 95 percent of the specific gravity of laboratory
compacted specimens composed of the same materials in specified
proportion;
3. Laboratory specimens will consist of cylinders of the mixture compacted by the

procedures of AASHTO T167. For aggregates containing particles with
diameters over 1 inch, 6 inch by 6 inch cylinders will be used and the
procedures of T167 modified to employ 10 repetitions of a molding load of 85
kg /cm2 with no appreciable holding time after each application of the full load;
4. The surface shall be rolled when the mixture is in the proper condition and
when the rolling does not cause undue displacement, cracking or shoving.
5. The number, weight and type of rollers furnished shall be sufficient to obtain
the required compaction while the mixture is in a workable condition;
6. The sequence of rolling operations and the selection of roller types shall
provide the specified pavement density;
7. Unless otherwise directed, rolling shall begin at the sides and proceed
longitudinal parallel to the road centerline, each trip overlapping one-half the
roller width, gradually progressing to the crown of the road;
8. When paving in echelon or abutting a previously placed lane, the longitudinal

joint should be rolled first followed by the regular rolling procedure. On super-
elevated curves, the rolling shall begin at the low side and progress to the high
side by overlapping of longitudinal trips parallel to the centerline;
9. Roller shall move at a slow but uniform speed with the drive roll or wheels
nearest the paver. Rolling shall be continued until all roller marks are eliminated
and at least the minimum density indicated above has been attained. Care shall
be exercised in rolling not to displace the line and grade of the edges of the
bituminous mixture;
10. To prevent adhesion of the mixture to the rollers, the wheels shall be kept
properly moistened with water or water mixed with very small quantities of
detergent or other approved material. Excess liquid will not be permitted;
11. Along forms, headers, walls and other places not accessible to the rollers, the
mixture shall be thoroughly compacted with hot hand tampers, smoothing irons
or with mechanical tampers;
12. On depressed areas, a trench roller may be used or cleated compression

strips may be used under the roller to transmit compression to the depressed
area;
13. Any mixture that becomes loose and broken, mixed with dirt, or is in any way
defective shall be removed and replaced with fresh hot mixture, which shall be
compacted to conform to the surrounding area; and
02066 - 7
14. Any area showing an excess or deficiency of bituminous material shall be

removed and replaced. No traffic shall be permitted on the final course in less
than 12 hours after completion unless authorized by the Engineer.
3.02.6 Joints, Trimming Edges and Clean-up:
1. Placing of the bituminous paving shall be as continuous as possible. Rollers

shall not pass over the unprotected end of a freshly laid mixture unless
authorized by the Engineer;
2. Transverse joints shall be formed by cutting back on the previous run to expose
the full depth of the course. Where pavers are not used in echelon to place the
surface course in adjacent lanes and where the edges of the previously laid
wearing course are, in the opinion of the Engineer, in such condition that the
quality of the completed joint will be affected, longitudinal joints shall be
trimmed to a vertical face and to a neat line;
3. The exposed edges of the completed mat shall be cut off true to the required
lines. Material trimmed from the edges and any other discarded or rejected
bituminous mixture shall be removed from the roadway and disposed of by the
Contractor as instructed by the Engineer; and
4. When directed by the Engineer, a brush coat of bituminous material shall be

used on contract surfaces of joints just before additional mixture is placed
against the previously rolled material.
3.02.7 Surface Tolerance:
The variation of the surface from the testing edge of a straightedge between any
two contacts with the surface shall not exceed the allowable tolerance stipulated
below.
For base course, the test for conformity shall be made immediately after initial
rolling and variation shall be corrected by removing or adding materials as may be
necessary.
Rolling shall then be continued as specified. Removal or addition of material to the

surface course will not be permitted after rolling has commenced. Work on surface
course shall be carefully controlled to ensure that material as laid will conform to
the allowable tolerances stipulated below.
The following tolerances for pavement construction after completion of the work
shall not be exceeded the Engineer may waive certain requirements and apply
other tolerances as he may deem necessary and as are appropriate for the case
at hand.
Alignment (horizontal control) +20-mm to – 20-mm
Profile and Elevations (vertical control)
- Compacted asphalt treated base course +15-mm to – 15-mm

- Compacted asphalt concrete surface course +10-mm to – 10-mm
02066 - 8
When a 3-m straightedge is laid on the surface parallel to and perpendicular to the
centerline, the surface variation from the lower edge of the straightedge shall not
exceed.
- Compacted asphalt treated base course 6-mm

- Compacted asphalt concrete surface course 4-mm
3.02.8 Overlay and Regulating:
Where the Contract requires the overlay of an existing pavement, this shall be
carried out strictly in accordance with the Engineer’s instructions. The Engineer
may instruct that a layer of the pavement be laid over a partial width or to a
restricted length if this is necessary to facilitate the regulation of levels.
3.03 SAMPLING AND TESTING:
3.03.1 Samples shall be neatly cut with a saw, core drill or other similar equipment.
3.03.2 The Engineer shall be entitled to be present during the carrying out of any tests,
and shall be given one day’s clear notice on each occasion of such intention.
3.03.3 The Contractor shall supply and finish new material to backfill voids left by
sampling.
3.03.4 Bituminous concrete shall be accepted density on a lot basis. A lot shall be divided
into five equal sub-lots. One test shall be made for each sub-lot. Pavement density
shall be determined by taking, for each lot, the average density of five laboratory
prepared specimens, taken from trucks delivering mixture to the site.
3.03.5 The location of sampling sites within a lot’s placement area shall be chosen on a
random basis. In addition to the tests, which are run on randomly selected sites,
the Engineer reserves the right to test any area, which appears defective and to
require further compaction of areas that do not have at least 90% of the
Laboratory Marshall Density.
3.03.6 Each lot of compacted pavement shall be acceptable with respect to density is
equal to or greater than 98% of the average density of the laboratory prepared
specimens, and when no individual determination deviates more than 1.8% from
the average field density. Five-field density determination shall be made from each
lot. Cores taken from the pavement shall be used to test the field density.
- END OF SECTION -
02066 - 9
SECTION 02067
STEEL STRUCTURES
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This section covers the construction of steel structures for aqueduct and other
miscellaneous structures as shown on the Drawings.
1.01.2 The Contractor shall furnish all labour, material tools and equipment to complete
work.
1.01.3 Steel for bridge superstructure shall be referred to Section 03001:“STRUCTURAL

STEEL”

Section 02038 “ROAD FACILITY”
Section 05017 “TRACK LAYING ON STEEL BRIDGES”

• American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO);
• Steel Structure Painting Council (USA);
• Standard Nasional Indonesia (SNI);
• American National Standards Institute (ANSI);
• Steel Structure Painting Council (SSPC).
Comply with the applicable reference standards listed in Section 01007: “QUALITY
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
02067 - 1
1.04.2 Overall Schedule:
Before any technical submittals are made, the Contractor shall submit his
proposed schedule for all Shop Drawing submittals, materials approvals, and
fabrication processes.
1.04.3 Shop Drawings:
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the Shop Drawings for his approval.
1.04.4 Materials:
Before use of any materials, the Contractor shall submit for the following
documents the Engineer’s approval:
1. Manufacturer’s certificates for bolts, nuts, washers, wire mesh and filler for
welding.
2. Mill test certificates for steel pipe and structural steel. These shall include the
names and locations of steel mills, analysis of chemical and physical
properties, and shall be properly correlated to the various grades of structural
steel to be used in the project.
1.04.5 Welding Plan:
The Contractor shall not proceed with any welding until Engineer has approved his
Welding Plan.
This Plan shall include the following:
1. All information on welding procedures, equipment, additives and preheating

during the welding operations.
2. Detail of non-destructive testing methods to be used for specific typical joints.
3. Precautions with regard to welding shrinkage.
4. Possible treatment of completed welds by grinding with indication of grinding

direction, etc.
5. Procedures and programme of welding sequence (for each component and for
welding components together).
After approval of this submittal, welding procedures and sequences shall be

followed without deviation.
The Engineer will require confirmation as to the suitability of the details contained
in the welding plan, by tests as prescribed in JIS or in the A.W.S “Standard
Qualification Procedure”.
02067 - 2
1.04.6 Painting Plan:
The Contractor shall in ample time before the commencement of the surface
treatment, prepare and submit for approval of a detailed program relating to the
execution of the works, in the workshop, at the site, and etc., as well as the
methods used, and a time schedule for the individual treatments. The program
shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
1.04.7 Erection plan:
Prior to the start of fabrication the Contractor shall submit for the Engineer’s
approval a full description including Shop Drawings of his proposed erection
method including:
1. Sequence of erection;
2. Use of temporary support, falsework, beams and bracing;
3. Connection details;
4. Erection camber diagrams to show the vertical position of the structure at
each stage of the erection process;
5. Design calculation to cover the various stages in the erection process;
6. Type of equipment to be used during erection;
7. Safety device.
The Engineer’s approval of the above details will not relieve the Contractor for his
contractual obligations or his responsibility to provide proper methods, equipment,
workmanship and safety precautions.
1. Painting certification:
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the certification stating that
requirements pertaining to pre-paint cleaning and painting of steel have been
performed in accordance with the Specifications.
2. Connection records:
The Contractor shall maintain records of shop welding procedures, employed

with date of qualification and identification of symbol. Records shall also be
maintained of all bolts tested and the corresponding torque values if torque
control is used. These records shall be freely available for the use of the
Engineer and shall be submitted to the Engineer on completion of shop
fabrication work.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
Materials shall conform to the requirements of the following specifications or

equivalent other international standards.
02067 - 3
2.01.1 Structural Steel:
JIS G 3101 SS 400 H-shaped steel, channel, angle, plate, and anchor bolt;
JIS G 3466 STKR 400 Square shaped steel pipe;
JIS G 3444 STK 400 Round shaped steel pipe;
JIS G 3350 SSC 400 Light gauge steel;
JIS G 3112 SR 235 Steel rod; and
JIS G 3551 Wire mesh.
2.01.2 High tensile strength bolt and nut:
JIS B 1186 F10T High tensile strength bolt and nut.
2.01.3 Ordinary bolt and nut:
JIS B 1180 and 1181 4T Ordinary bolt and nut.
All steels shall be delivered with certificates and delivery shall be in accordance
with the requirement of the current edition of JIS G 3191, G 3192, G 3193 and G
0303 including the requirement to produce analysis, carbon equivalent, tolerances,
inspection and testing, and marking.
Structural steel shall be stored above the ground on platform, skids, or other
supports. It shall be kept free from dirt, grease, and other foreign matter, and shall
be properly protected in order to minimise corrosion.
2.01.4 Filler metal:
JIS D5016 and 4316 or AWS DI.1-81 Filler metal.
All material to be used for welding shall be products of a recognised manufacture,

and the Contractor shall when requested by the Engineer furnish the
manufacturer’s certification that the electrodes, welding rods, and other products
used for welding meet the requirement of the Specifications.
2.01.5 Anti-corrosive paint:
1. Paint shall be scaled in containers that clearly show the designated name,
formula or specification number, batch number, colour, date of manufacture,
manufacture’s directions, and expire date for use.
2. Material shall conform to the specifications shown in the painting schedule

herein and to the requirement hereinafter specified. Unless otherwise so
approved by the Engineer all paints and primers to be used for this work shall
be provided by one manufacturer.
Anti-corrosive paint shall be as follows:
a. At mill shop:
- shot blasting;
- etching primer (JIS K5633).
02067 - 4
b. At fabrication shop:
- lead suboxide primer (JIS K5623).
c. At site:
- same materials as at fabrication shop.
3. Where anti-corrosive paints are specified that do not comply with any of the
above specifications, they shall be supplied only by recognised manufactures,
and samples and technical data shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval.
4. In any anti-corrosive paint system (viz. Primer, undercoats, and intermediate

coat) each coat of anti-corrosive paint shall be compatible with the other, and
to ensure this, all anticorrosive paint shall be obtained from the same
approved manufacturer with a guarantee of compatibility.
2.01.6 Finish paint:
1. Paint shall be scaled in containers that plainly show the designated name,
formula or specification number, batch number, colour, date or manufacture,
manufacturer’s directions, and expire date for use.
2. Material shall conform to the specifications shown in the painting schedule

herein and to the requirements hereinafter specified. Unless otherwise so
approved by the Engineer all paints and primers to be used for this work shall
be provided by one manufacturer.
3. Finish paint shall be as follows:

- Vinyl acrylic finish paint;
- Polyurethane paint (non-yellowing);
- Epoxy resin paint, high build;
- Epoxy resin micaceous iron oxide paint;
- Alkyd resin finishes paint.
2.01.7 Galvanising:
1. Galvanising shall in generally conform to the requirements of AASHTO M-111

or JIS H8641 class 3-55C and JIS H0401.
2. Material thinner than 3.2 mm may be galvanised before fabrication in

conformance with the requirements of ASTM A525. Galvanising of iron and
steel hardware and nuts and bolts shall conform in the specification of
AASHTO M-232 or equal.
02067 - 5
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL:
3.01.1 Fabrication and erection inclusive of bolting and painting for steel structure shall
be performed generally in accordance with Section 03001: “STRUCTURAL
STEEL” except the field welding.
3.01.2 Field welding to be applied for steel structure of this section shall conform to the
followings:
1. Marking shall be performed accurately and elaborately using full size

templates, prior to making cuts, the dimensions and grade of materials shall
be checked.
Cutting shall be done automatically. Hand cutting may be used exceptionally,
about the connection, if approved by the Engineer. In such cases, the joint
edges shall receive a finishing treatment, with planning and grinding tools.
Cutting by shearing machine may be used for plates not exceeding 10-mm in
thickness provided that the rate edge is fully enclosed in a weld.
2. Oxygen cutting may be used provided a smooth and regular surface with free
from cracks and notches is occurred and provided that the roughness of
oxygen cut-surface shall be according with the Engineer’s instruction.
3. All cut plate edges that will not be welded shall be ground to planeness and all
edges of plates and actions that will not be welded shall be rounded to the
appropriate radius for painting.
3.02 FIELD WELDING:
3.02.1 All welding shall be planned and executed using the most suitable materials and
working methods for the particular purpose.
3.02.2 Welding requirements shall conform in all respects to the following sections
AWS D1.1-8 or equivalent standards.
3.02.3 All welding shall be executed by skilled, experienced welders holding valid welding
examination qualifications based on the qualification tests specified
A welder shall be qualified for each process used.
3.02.4 Prior to commencement of any welding, the joint shall be carefully free from rust,
scale, slag, and burrs.
3.02.5 Where two welds for structural reasons have to cross each other, the Contractor
shall be followed according to the Engineer’s instructions.
3.02.6 During the assembly work, the components shall be held in position and supported
in such a manner that no unfavourable inherent stresses or deformation shall
develop. Drilling of holes for temporary assembly for welding purposes shall not be
accepted.
02067 - 6
3.02.7 Welding tolerances:
1. The members to be connected by welding shall be so prepared that they fit

exactly together, without being forced into position.
2. The tolerances concerning the gap between parts to be welded, eccentricity,

and departure from theoretical alignment, dimensions of the cross section of
groove welded joints; etc. shall conform to Section 3.3. Assembly, of AWS D1-
1-81, except that the gap between parts to be joined by fillet welds shall not
exceed 5-mm for all fillet welds. Tolerances of weld profiles shall correspond to
Section 3.6 of AWS DI-1-81.
3.02.8 Welding procedure qualifications tests:
The Contractor shall perform test welds of the types of welding seams to be
applied in the structure, according to a program to be agreed upon with the
Engineer. The quality of the test welds shall be approved by the Engineer prior to
execution of the welding work in question. The test welding shall be made from
working positions corresponding to the actual working during construction.
3.02.9 Welding inspection:
1. The Contractor shall prepare a detail program for control of welds in

consultations with the Engineer and the established program must not be
deviated from without the Engineer’s consent.
2. The Contractor’s control program shall assure satisfactory inspection in the

workshops to fulfil the stipulation laid down in AWS D1.1-81, Section 9.25.
3. The Contractor’s control shall be performed at his own expense and shall
correspond to the following schedule:
a. Preparation for welding:
- Visual inspection of edge preparation;

- Visual inspection of surface conditions for cracks, gaps and other
items that may cause any defect of welding.
b. Visual inspection under and after welding:
- All welds shall be visually inspected in accordance with AWS D1.1-81,

Section 9.25.1.
c. Non-destructive testing of welds:
- Welds that are subject to radiographic or magnetic particle testing in

addition to visual inspection shall be unacceptable if the radiographic
or magnetic particle testing shows any of the types of discontinuities
given in AWS D1.1-81, Section 9.25.2;
- Welds that are subject to ultrasonic testing, in addition to visual
inspection, are acceptable if they meet the requirement of table 9.25.3
in AWS D1.1-81; and
02067 - 7
- Welds that are subject to dye penetrate testing, in addition to visual

inspection, shall be evaluated on the basis of the requirements for
visual inspection.
d. Scope of non-destructive testing of weld:
- Fillet welds shall be tested by the most suitable of either the magnetic
particle test or the dye penetrate test;
- Butt welds shall be tested by the most suitable of either the
radiographic test or the ultrasonic test; and
- The method of non-destructive testing for a specific weld shall be
elaborated in consultation with the Engineer.
- END OF SECTION -
02067 - 8
SECTION 02068
CONCRETE
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This section specifies standards of mass and reinforced concrete, concrete
materials and workmanship to be adopted in casting concrete that is related to the
Civil Work, Bridge Work, Railway Building Facilities Work and other works.
1.01.2 Unless specifically provided in these Specifications, concrete shall be

manufactured, transported, placed, cured, finished and tested by the Contractor in
accordance with the provisions of Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS) or other
equivalent standards approved by the Engineer.

Section 02023 “SIPHON”;
Section 02024 “OPEN CHANNEL”;
Section 02026 “FRENCH DRAIN”;
Section 02030 “RETAINING WALL”;
Section 02039 “PRE-CAST CONCRETE FENCE”;
Section 02040 “PLATFORM”; and
Section 03007 “CAST IN-PLACE CONCRETE PILES”.
A1103 Method of Test for Amount of Material Finer than 0.075 mm

Sieve in Aggregate;
A1104 Method of Test for Bulk Density of Aggregates and Solid
Content in Aggregates;
A1105 Method of Test for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregate;
A1102 Method of Test for Sieve Analysis of Aggregates;
A1109 Method of Test for Density and Water Absorption of Fine
Aggregates;
A1110 Method of Test for Density and Water Absorption of Coarse
Aggregates;
A1137 Method of Test for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in
Aggregates;
A1111 Method of Test for Surface Moisture in Fine Aggregate;
02068 - 1
A1121 Method of Test for Resistance to Abrasion of Coarse

Aggregate by Use of the Los Angeles Machine;
A1101 Method of Test for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete;
A1107 Method of Sampling and Testing for Compressive Strength
of Drilled Cores of Concrete; and
A1108 Method of Test for Compressive Strength of Concrete.
A1126 Method of Test for Soft Particles in coarse Agregate by
Scratching
R5210 portland Cement
C29/C29M-09 Standard Test Method for Bulk Density (x201C; Unit Weight
x201D;) and Voids in Aggregate;
C40/C40M-11 Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine
Aggregates for Concrete;
C136-06 Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and
Coarse Aggregates;
C128-07a Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density
(Specific Gravity) and Absorption of Fine Aggregate;
C127-07 Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density
(Specific Gravity) and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate;
C142/C142M-10 Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles
in Aggregates;
C123/C123M-11 Standard Test Method for Lightweight Particles in
Aggregate;
C70-06 Standard Test Method for Surface Moisture in Fine
Aggregate;
C535-09 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of
Large-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in
the Los Angeles Machine;
C143/C143M-10a Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement
Concrete;
C42/C42M-11 Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled
Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete; and
C39/C39M-11a Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of
Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.
C150-11 Standard Specification for Portland Cement
C117-04 Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 75x03BC
C260/C260M-10a Standard Specification for Air-entraining Admixtures for
Concrete
C494/C494M-11 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for
Concrete
D994/D994M-11 Standard Specification Performed Expansion Joint Filter for
Concrete
15-2049-2004 Cemen Portland

(AASHTO)
02068 - 2
T71-08 Standard Method of Test for Effect of Organic

Impurities in Fine Aggregate on Strength of Mortar
Comply with the applicable requirements referred in Section 01007: “QUALITY

1.04 SUBMITTALS:

1.04.1 Drawings and Schedules:
The Contractor shall submit the Shop Drawings for form works, temporary
supports and bar bending schedules for any modifications in reinforcement
necessary to conform to the Work Program.
Such Shop Drawings and schedules shall be approved by the Engineer before any
concrete placement in the construction.
1.04.2 Samples:
If so instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall deliver the samples of cement,
aggregate and sand to an approved testing agency for the independent tests as
described herein.
1.04.3 Certificates:
Certificates of tests from the suppliers of materials shall be submitted. Such

certificates shall certify that the materials concerned have been tested in
accordance with the requirements specified for the materials and shall include
comparative tables showing that the test results satisfy the required values given in
the relevant standard.
1.04.4 Test reports:
The Contractor shall submit copies of the results of all tests carried out following
the requirements of this clause.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
2.01.1 General:
Any material to be supplied and used, which is not covered in this section, shall
conform to the requirements stipulated in other applicable sections.
02068 - 3
2.01.2 Cement:
1. Cement to be used for concrete and mortar shall be furnished by the Contractor
and shall conform to the requirements of JIS R5210: “Portland Cement” or SNI
15-2049-2004: “Semen Portland” or ASTM C150-11: “Standard Specification
for Portland Cement” or equivalent. The use of any other type of cement shall
be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
2. Cement shall be delivered in the manufacturer’s bags or in bulk.
3. Each consignment shall be sampled at the mill and shall be accompanied by

test certificate issued by the manufactured. The Engineer will have the right to
attend the sampling and testing at the mill at any time.
4. If delivery is not directed from the factory, the intermediate storage and delivery
arrangements shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
5. Cement shall be stored in a damp-proofed storehouse having a floor more than

30 cm above the ground. Cement shall be stored in such a manner that the
“first-in” can be “first-out” and inspection of stock quality can be easily
performed.
6. Proper spacing shall be provided between piles of cement. Not more than 13
bags shall be permitted to be piled up, and this number shall be limited to 7
bags when the storage period is expected to be longer than 60 days.
7. No cement, which has been stored at the site for more than 60 days, shall be
used in the work unless re-testing proves it to be satisfactory.
8. The Contractor shall use only one brand of any one type of Indonesian cement
for the construction of this project.
9. Portland cements complying with ASTM C150-11 are designated as follows:
1) Type I - For use where the special properties specified for any other type
are not required;
2) Type IA – Air-entraining cement for the same uses as Type I, where air-
entrainment is desired;
3) Type II – For general use, more especially when moderate sulphate

resistance is desired;
4) Type IIA – Air-entraining cement for the same uses as Type II, where air-
5) Type II(MH) – For general use, more especially when moderate heat of
hydration and moderate sulphate resistance are desired;
6) Type II(MH)A – Air-entraining cement for the same uses as Type II(MH),
where air-entrainment is desired;
7) Type III – For use when high early strength is desired;
02068 - 4
8) Type IIIA – Air-entraining cement for the same uses as Type III, where air-
9) Type IV – For use when low heat of hydration is desired; and
10) Type V - For use when high sulfate resistance is desired.
Unless otherwise provided, or called for in the special provisions, Type I shall
be furnished. Similar specification is SNI 15-2049-2004: “Cemen Portland”.
10. The contractor shall make a weekly report showing on a daily basis what
quantity has been received and consumed during the week, and in what
portions of the works the cement has been used.
2.01.3 Aggregate:
1. General:
Fine and coarse aggregate for concrete shall be produced from rock material.
The raw materials shall be processed at the crushing plant. The processing
shall include crushing, screening and washing to produce fine and coarse
aggregate conformed to the requirements of these specifications. Water used
for the washing shall be treated by settling before discharging.
2. Fine Aggregate:
Fine aggregate for concrete shall consist of natural sand or, subject to the
approval of the Engineer, other inert materials with similar characteristics
having clean, hard and durable particles and it shall be free from objectionable
quantities of dust, silt, clay, organic matter, and other impurities.
Marine sand containing soluble chlorides shall not be used in pre-stressed

concrete work or in ordinary reinforced concrete work unless otherwise
approved in writing by the Engineer.
The fine aggregate shall be uniformly graded and meet the grading
requirements as shown in the following Table.
Table: 02068.1 GRADING OF FINE AGGREGATE
Sieve Designation Percentage passing by

weight
(mm) (%)
10.0 100
5.0 90 – 100
2.5 80 – 100
1.2 50 - 90
0.6 25 - 65
0.3 10 - 35
0.15 2 - 10
02068 - 5
Sieve analysis of fine aggregate shall be made in accordance with JIS A1102
or ASTM C136-06. The grading requirements given above are the extreme
limits to be used in determining the suitability of material from all possible
sources of supply.
The grading of material from any one source shall not vary in composition
beyond the range of values that govern the selection of a source of supply. For
the purpose of determining the degree of uniformity, a fineness module
determination shall be made upon representative samples, submitted by the
Contractor, from such sources as he proposes to use.
If the fineness modules of fine aggregate varies by more than 0.20 from the
value used in selecting concrete proportions, the fine aggregate shall be
rejected unless suitable adjustment of mix proportions are made with the
The amount of deleterious substances in fine aggregate shall not exceed the
limits shown in Table 02068.2.
Treatment of other deleterious substances, which are not shown in the table,
shall be determined on the directions of the Engineer. Test for material finer
than 0.075 mm sieve shall be made in accordance with JIS A 1103 or ASTM
C117-04 (Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 75x03BC; m
(No.200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing):
Table 02068.2 LIMITS FOR DELETERIOUS SUBSTANCES IN FINE

AGGREGATE
Item Maximum percentage by weight

Clay lumps 1.0
Material finer than 0.075 mm sieve 5.0 *
Material coarser than 0.300 sieve 0.5**
floating on a liquid having a specific
gravity of 1.95
Notes:
* In the case of crushed aggregate if the material finer than 0.075 mm
consists of the dust of fracture essentially free from clay or shale, these
percentages may be increased to 5 and 7 percent, respectively.
** This requirement does not apply to manufactured sand produced from blast
furnace slag.
All fine aggregate shall be free from deleterious amount of organic impurities.
Approximate determination of the presence of injurious organic impurities in
natural sand shall be in accordance with JIS A 1105, or ASTM C40/C40M-11
(Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregate for Concrete).
Aggregate subjected to the colorimetric test for organic impurities and
producing a colour darker than the standard shall be rejected.
However any sand that fails to meet the above requirement, may be used
provided that the compressive strength of mortar specimens using the same
sand is more than 95 % of that of mortar specimens using the same sand
washed by a 3% solution of sodium hydroxide and then by water, and
approved by the Engineer. Testing age of mortar specimens shall be 7 and 28
02068 - 6
days for normal Portland cement. Compressive strength of mortar specimens

shall be determined by AASHTO T71-08 (Standard Method of Test for Effect
of Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregate on Strength of Mortar).
3. Coarse Aggregate:
The coarse aggregate shall consist of one or more of the following crushed
stone, gravel, blast furnace slag or other approved inert materials of similar
characteristic having clean and hard durable pieces. It shall be free from
objectionable quantities of flat or elongated particles, organic matter, chlorides
or other deleterious matter.
Coarse aggregates which will cause “alkali – aggregate reaction” with Portland
cement shall not be used.
The coarse aggregate shall be uniformly graded and shall meet the grading
requirements shown in the following Table 03001.3:
Table 02068.3 GRADING OF COARSE AGGREGATES
Sieve size Percentage Passing by Weight

(mm) Type I Aggregate Type II Aggregate
37.5 100 -
25 90 - 100 100
19 - 90 - 100
12.5 25 – 60 30 – 70
4.75 0 - 10 0 - 10
Type I aggregate shall generally be used for reinforced concrete construction.
Type II aggregate shall generally be used for post –tensioned concrete

construction and for reinforced concrete work where specified on the Drawings.
Sieve analysis of coarse aggregates shall be made in accordance with JIS A

1102 (Method of Test for Sieve Analysis of Aggregate) or ASTM C136-06
(Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates).
The amount of deleterious substance in coarse aggregate shall not exceed the
limits prescribed in Table 03001.4. Treatment of other deleterious substances
which are not shown on the table shall be determined by the direction of the
Engineer:
Table 02068.4 LIMITS FOR DELETERIOUS SUBSTANCES IN

COARSE AGGREGATES
Item Maximum percentage by weight

Clay lumps 0.25
Soft particles 5.0
Material finer than 0.075 mm size 1.0 *
Material floating on liquid having 1.0 **
Specific gravity of 1. 95
02068 - 7
Notes:
* In case of crushed aggregate, if the material finer than 0.075 mm sieve
consists of the dust of fracture essentially free from clay or shale, this
percentage may be increased to 1.5.
** This requirement does not apply to manufactured aggregate produced

from blast furnace slag.
Test for material finer than 0.075 mm sieve shall be made in accordance with
JIS A1103 (Method of Test for Amount of Material Finer than 0.075 mm Sieve
in Aggregate) or ASTM C117-04. Test for Soft Particles shall be made in
accordance with JIS A1126 (Method of Test for Soft Particles in Coarse
Aggregate by Scratching).
4. Storage:
Aggregate shall be delivered, stored and handled so as to avoid mixing with

different sizes, breakage, and contaminate with deleterious matter and
retaining of water.
The aggregate shall be stored at free draining storage for at least 48 hours
before use and fine aggregate shall not be down to 50 cm above the bottom of
the stockpile.
All storage facilities shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and shall
be such as to permit easy access for identification and inspection.
Sufficient aggregate shall be maintained at the site at all times to assure

continuous placement of concrete at a rate consistent with the requirements of
the concreting schedule.
If the aggregate is stockpiled on the ground, the sites of stockpiles shall be

cleared, graded evenly for drainage, and sprinkled if required.
5. Moisture Control:
The free moisture content of the fine aggregate and of the smallest size group
of coarse aggregate, as delivered to the mixers, shall be controlled so as not
to exceed 4.0% and 1.0%, respectively, by weight of the saturated surface by
aggregates unless higher limits are allowed by the Engineer.
The moisture content of the other sizes of the coarse aggregate shall be
controlled so that the aggregates are delivered to the mixers with the least
amount of free moisture and the least variation in free moisture and the least
variation in free moisture as practicable under job conditions.
The contractor may accomplish the required moisture control by use of free
drainage storage, covered transportation and storage mechanical dewatering
devices, or any other means acceptable to the Engineer.
2.01.4 Water:
All water used in concrete shall be subject to the Engineer’s approval. Water used
in mixing, curing or other designated applications shall be potable water clean and
02068 - 8
free from oil, salt, acid, alkali, sugar, vegetable or any other substances likely to be
injurious to the finished product.
If required by the Engineer the water shall be tested for comparison with distilled
water by means of a standard cement test for soundness, time of set, and mortar
strength. Indication of unsoundness, change in time of setting of plus or minus 30
minutes or decrease in mortar strength more than 10% compared with distilled
water shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the water supply.
Where the source of water is relatively shallow, the intake shall be so enclosed as
to exclude silt, mud, grass or other foreign materials.
2.01.5 Admixtures:
1. General:
The contractor shall furnish and use, upon approval of the Engineer, concrete
admixtures so as to improve workability and finishability of concrete or mortar.
Admixtures other than those for improving workability and finishability may be
used upon approval of the Engineer.
Admixtures shall be accompanied with the manufacturer’s certification with the

specifications provided herein. The Engineer will reject admixtures proposed
by the Contractor when he deems such admixtures are unsatisfactory to
produce a high degree of uniformity throughout the course of the work.
The Contractor shall, if the Engineer deems it necessary, submit samples and
performance tests on samples of the admixtures prior to shipment and after
delivery at the site.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any difficulties arising or damages

occurring as a result of the selection and use of admixtures such as delay or
difficulty in concrete placing or damage to the concrete during form removal.
All costs incidental to use of admixtures shall be included in the unit prices
stated in the Bill of Quantities for applicable items for concrete in which the
admixtures are used.
2. Air Entraining Agent:
An approved air entraining agent shall be used to produce the specified

amount of stable entrained air in the concrete mixture, and shall conform to
the requirement of ASTM C260/C260M-10a: “Standard Specification for Air-
entraining Admixtures for Concrete”.
The required air content of the concrete is as follows:
Maximum Aggregate Size Total Air %

of Concrete (mm) by volume
25 4.5 plus minus 1.5

40 4.5 plus minus 1.5
02068 - 9
3. Water Reducing Admixture:
A water-reducing admixture that does not retard the initial set of the concrete
shall be added to the concrete during mixing in the amount approved by the
Engineer. This admixture shall conform to the requirements of ASTM
C494/C494M-11: “Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for
Concrete”, Type A.
4. Initial Set Retarding Admixture:
An initial set retarding admixture shall be added to the concrete during mixing
in the amounts as approved by the Engineer in order to obtain the retardation
of the initial set of the concrete. This mixture shall conform to the requirements
of ASTM C 494/C494M-11, Type B and D.
5. Compatibility:
The compatibility of admixtures, where two or more kinds of admixtures are

used in one batch, shall be tested in a manner as directed by the Engineer.
6. Storage:
Liquid or powdered admixture for concrete shall be kept in waterproof stores

with adequate provision for the prevention of water absorption. Storage shall
be so arranged that the materials shall be used as same quality as they
arrived at site.
Sufficient quantities of admixtures shall be kept in storage to ensure

uninterrupted concrete placing.
2.01.6 Pre-moulded Expansion Joint Filler (Asphaltic or other Composition Joint Filler):
Expansion joint filler shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D994/D994M-11:

“Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete
(Bituminous Type)”. The filler for each joint shall be furnished in a single piece for
the full depth and width required for the joint unless otherwise authorised by the
Engineer.
When the use of more than one piece is authorised for a joint, the abutting shall be
fastened securely and held accurately to shape by stapling or other positive
fastening satisfactory to the Engineer.
2.01.7 Water Stop:
Water stop to construction and movement joints shall conform to the requirements
of and shall be generally be manufactured from Styrene Butiadene Rubber,
Chloroprene Rubber or equivalent approved by the Engineer.
Water stop shall be furnished in as long length as possible and to the profiles as
shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer. Where joints are required
these shall be formed by vulcanising or other methods as recommended by the
manufacturer.
02068 - 10
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 MIX PROPORTIONS:
3.01.1 Mix Proportions:
1. The mix proportion of all concrete shall be as approved by the Engineer.
2. The Contractor shall propose the mix proportion of concrete for the approval of
the Engineer together with the data enough for the Engineer to make
judgement, sufficiently in advance to the intended placing of concrete. And, if
directed, the adjustment of mix proportion shall be proposed by the Contractor.
3. The Engineer may direct the Contractor to change the mix proportion from
time to time at his opinion. In such case the Contractor shall no longer be
entitled to use the previous mix proportion and he shall propose a new mix
proportion for the approval of the Engineer.
4. The table below gives particulars of classes of concrete to be placed in the

various types of structures.
Table 02068.5 CLASSIFICATION OF CONCRETE
Class Design Strength Description

N/mm2
S 40 Pre-stressed concrete girder
A 30 Level Crossing Slab
B 30 Cast in Pile
C1 24 Box Culvert, RC Beam, Platform Edge Beam
C2 24 Pier, Pile Top, Siphon
D 21 Slope Protection, Manhole, Retaining Wall,
Open Channel, Concrete Curb, Concrete Wall
E 24 Tunnel Portal Wall, Potal Part Lining
F 21 Abutment
G 24 Tunnel Roadbed Concrete Bed inside
Tunnel, Potal Part Invert
H 21 Tunnel Invert
I 21 Tunnel Lining
J 18 Facility, Signal Foundation
K 18 Platform Pavement
L 15 Leveling Concrete
02068 - 11
Table 02068.6 STANDARD PROPORTIONS OF CONCRETE FOR USE IN

STRUCTURES
Design Max size MAX/Water Tentative

Class Strength of aggre- Slump Cement Cement Content
N/mm2 gate Ratio W/C
S 40 25 8.5 ± 2.5 40 410
A 30 25 8.0 ± 2.5 40 370
B 30 25 18.0 ± 2.5 50 370
C1 24 25 8.0 ± 2.5 55 330
C2 24 25 8.0 ± 2.5 60 330
D 21 25 8.0 ± 2.5 60 300
E 24 25 15.0 ± 2.5 60 320
F 21 25 8.0 ± 2.5 60 300
G 24 25 12.0 ± 2.5 60 280
H 21 40 8.0 ± 2.5 60 280
I 21 40 15.0 ± 2.5 60 280
J 18 25 8.0 ± 2.5 60 280
K 18 25 8.0 ± 2.5 70 250
L 15 25 8.0 ± 2.5 70 250
5. Compressive strength of concrete at the age of 28 days measured by the

testing method as stipulated in Subsection 3.02 shall be more than 80% of the
design strength stated above in a probability not less than 95% and more than
the design compressive strength in a probability not less than 75%.
6. Unless otherwise specified, water-cement ratio by weight for concrete Classes

S to J shall not be more than 60% and that for Classes K and L shall be less
than 70%.
7. Cement content stated above are only tentative and the Engineer may order
the Contractor to vary the cement contents of any class or classes of concrete
during the course of the works, and for such change in cement contents the
Contractor shall not claim any compensation for the unit prices stated in the
Bill of Quantities.
3.01.2 Trial mixes:
1. At least 60 days prior to the start of permanent concrete work, the Contractor
shall produce trial mixes for each of the classes of concrete specified under
the supervision of the Engineer, using the entire aggregate produced and
batched, and concrete mixing plant provided for the execution of the work.
2. Such trial mixes shall be produced until concrete has been produced in
conformity with these specifications.
3. No separate payment for trial mixes shall be made and all cost incidental to
trial mixes except for furnishing and installing testing equipment shall be
included in the unit prices stated in the Bill of Quantities for the applicable
items of concrete.
02068 - 12
3.02 TESTS OF CONCRETE AND CONCRETE MATERIAL:
1. Except where otherwise specified, sampling and testing of concrete material,

fresh concrete and hardened concrete shall be conducted by the Contractor
under the direction of the Engineer in accordance with JIS or approved
equivalent. Such tests of concrete aggregates, fresh concrete and hardened
concrete will include, but be not limited to, those listed below,
Test Designation No.
- CONCRETE
Sampling fresh concrete JIS A1115

Compressive strength JIS A1108, JIS A1132
Slump JIS A1101
Air Content JIS A1118
Unit weight JIS A1116
- AGGREGATE
Material passing 0.074 mm sieve JIS A1103

Surface moisture JIS A1111
Organic impurities JIS A1105
Sodium sulphate soundness JIS A1122
Grading of aggregate JIS A1102
Los-Angeles Abrasion JIS A1121
Unit weight JIS A1104
Specific gravity and absorption JIS A1109, JIS A1110
Alkaline reactivity test ASTM C227-10, ASTM C289-07
2. The Contractor shall execute the routine test of concrete to determine the
compressive strength, slump and air content. The number and frequency of
the tests of fresh concrete shall be as directed from time to time by the
Engineer, provided that such tests shall be made at least once for each class
of concrete which is produced during a shift.
3. In general, frequency of sampling from the trucks shall be once every 10

trucks at random, twice for 11 to 20 trucks at random, and there times for 21
to 30 trucks at random.
4. The compressive strength of the concrete shall be determined by testing

sampled specimens in 15 cm diameter and 30 cm height of cylinder, three of
which shall be tested at 7 days and three at 28 days for each of concrete
which are produced during the sift. The tests of concrete aggregates shall be
made as directed form time to time by the Engineer.
5. Result of the routine test shall be submitted to the Engineer in the approved
forms and in such intervals that the Engineer may direct.
02068 - 13
6. The Engineer will make the check test of concrete material, fresh concrete and
hardened concrete when he deems it necessary. The Contractor shall fully
assist the Engineer in the check test.
7. The Contractor shall provide such facilities, material and labour as may be
necessary for producing, handling and waste disposal of representative
samples for tests specified in this Section. Sample will be required of all-
concrete ingredients and fresh concrete at aggregate plants, batching and
mixing plants and at the forms where concrete is being placed.
8. All batching and mixing plants shall be equipped with sampling devices and
facilities approved by the Engineer for obtaining samples of water, cement,
aggregates, admixtures and fresh concrete. Such sampling devices will be
used frequently and should be designed to ensure that representative samples
of appropriate size of the required material are obtained with the minimum
disruption of the Contractor’s production of aggregate and concrete.
9. No separate payment for the provisions specified in this Section shall be made
and all cost incidental to samplings, testing and providing sampling devices
and facilities except for furnishing and installing testing equipment shall be
included in the prices stated in the Bill of Quantities for the applicable items for
concrete. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional compensation
for any delays or cost incurred in the provisions of the test.
3.03 BATCHING:
3.03.1 General:
1. Batching of cement, admixtures, fine and coarse aggregates entering each

batch of concrete shall be made by weighing measurement. Unavoidable use
of volumetric measurement of ingredients because of special circumstances of
the jobsite shall be strictly subject to the approval of the Engineer.
2. All measuring devices shall be capable of ready adjustment to compensate for

the varying moisture content of the aggregate and to change the weights of
the materials being batched
3. The combined accuracy of batching equipment in feeding and measuring the

material shall be within the following limits:
Cement and water 1%

Aggregate and admixtures 3%
3.03.2 Calibration of measuring devices:
1. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, check tests of equipment used for
measuring water, cement, and the admixtures shall be made in the presence
of the Engineer, at least once in every two weeks, and tests of equipment
used for measuring fine and coarse aggregate at least once in every month.
After completion of check test, the Contractor shall make such adjustment;
repair or replacements as the Engineer may deem it necessary to secure
02068 - 14
satisfactory performance before further use of the measuring or recording

devices is allowed.
2. The Contractor shall provide standard test weight and any other auxiliary
equipment required for checking the operating performance of each scale or
other measuring devices. Periodical tests according to the manufacturer’s
instruction shall be made in the presence of the Engineer in such a manner
and at such intervals as may be directed by the Engineer.
3.03.3 Batching and weighing equipment:
1. Each weighing unit shall include a visible spring less dial which will register the
scale load at any stage of the weighing operation or shall include an over-and-
under indicator which will show the scale in balance at no load and when
loaded to the beam setting.
2. The weights of the components of each batch shall be automatically recorded

and the records shall be submitted to the Engineer, at such intervals that the
Engineer may direct.
3. Each weighing indicator and water measuring device shall be in full view of the
operator and the weighing equipment shall be so arranged that the operator
may conveniently observe the operation of the bin gates and also the
materials discharging into the mixer. The arrangement for controlling the
measuring and mixing operations shall be such that the mixer cannot be
charge with a fresh batch until it has been emptied of the previous one.
4. The batching equipment shall be so constructed and arranged that the

sequence and timing of the batcher discharge gates can be controlled to
produce an intermixture of the aggregate, water and cement as the materials
pass through the charging hopper into the mixer.
5. The batching control shall be so interlocked that a new batching cycle cannot
be started until the entire weighing hoppers are completely empty.
6. The weighing hoppers shall be constructed in such a manner that will permit
convenient removal of overweight material in excess of the prescribed
tolerances, and acceptable facilities shall be provided for readily obtaining
from the batches representative samples of the materials for testing.
7. The operating mechanism in the water measuring device shall be such that no
leakage will occur when the valves are closed and that the discharge valve
cannot be opened until the filling valve is closed.
8. The device for adding admixtures shall be interlocked with the batching and
discharging operation of the water so that the batching and discharging of the
admixture will be automatic. The measuring device for cement shall be
automatic.
9. The batching equipment shall include an accurate recorder for marking a

continuously visible combined record on a single chart of the separate
measurement of each concrete ingredient, including all mixing water and
admixture and of consistency of the concrete during the mixing process.
02068 - 15
3.04 MIXING:
1. The batched ingredients of concrete shall be so mixed in power-driven batch

mixer as to produce a homogeneous mass of uniform consistency. Hand
mixing shall not be used for permanent structures and, when used for
temporary structures, it shall be strictly subject to the approval of the Engineer.
2. The quantity of materials in each batch shall not exceed the normal continuous
rated capacity of the mixer and the speed of rotation shall be controlled within
the deviation of 1 rpm from the manufacturer’s recommended speed.
Components shall be fed into the mixing drum so as to ensure the most
efficient use of the mixing period and to avoid any loss of material.
3. Unless otherwise directed or approval by the Engineer, the mixing of each

batch shall continue not less than the following numbers of minutes, after
ingredients except the full amount of water and admixtures are in the mixer.
Capacity of mixer Time of mixing

(Cubic meter) (Minutes)
---------------------------------- ---------------------------
3 to 2 2.5
2 to 1.5 2
1.5 or less 1.5
4. The minimum mixing period specified above is predicated on proper control of

the speed of rotation of the mixer and of the introduction of the materials
including water into the mixer. The mixing time shall be increased when, in the
opinion of the Engineer, the charging and mixing operations fail to result in the
required uniformity of compositions and consistency.
5. The efficiency of mixing operation shall be determined by means of measuring

the difference in unit weight of mortar mixed in the batch mixer in conformity
with JIS A1119: “Method of Test for Variability of Freshly Mixed Concrete by
Measuring Mortar and Coarse Aggregate”. The unit weight of two samples of
air-free mortar taken form the first and last portion of the batch as discharge
from the mixer shall not vary more than 1 percent from the average weight of
the two mortar samples.
6. Furthermore, the unit weight of two samples of coarse aggregate taken form
the first and last portion of the batch as discharge from the mixer, each of
which is 50 litters in volume, shall not vary more than 8 percent from the
average weight of the two coarse aggregate samples.
7. The Contractor in the presence of the Engineer shall make these
measurements at the time as directed by Engineer. No separate payment will
be made for these measurements and the cost thereof shall be included in the
unit prices of the applicable items for concrete stated in the Bill of Quantities.
8. The re-mixing of partially hardened concrete with or without additional cement,

aggregate, or water will not be permitted.
9. Mixers shall be periodically cleaned as directed by the Engineer.
02068 - 16
3.05 TRANSPORTATION:
1. The method and equipment used for transporting concrete shall be such that
concrete having the required composition and consistency shall be delivered
to the point of placement without objectionable segregation and without loss of
slump in excess of 2.5 cm, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
2. Addition of water to concrete after it has been discharged from the mixer or re-
tempering will not be permitted.
3. In case that concrete is transported by the following types of equipment, the

equipment shall be installed and handled according to the following
precautions.
3.05.1 Agitator truck:
The agitating speed of the drum shall be between 2 and 4 rpm. The volume of
mixed concrete in the drum shall not exceed the manufacture’s rating nor exceed
70 percent of the gross volume of the drum.
The interval between feeding of water into the mixer drum and final discharging of
the concrete from the agitator shall not exceed 1.0 hour. During this interval, the
mixture shall be agitated continuously at the speed mentioned above. Upon
approval of the Engineer, truck mixer may be used instead of agitator trucks for
transportation of central–plant- mixed concrete.
3.05.2 Chute:
In general, transportation of concrete by the use of chutes will not be permitted

unless approved by the Engineer. The chute shall have a section with round
corners and shall have a proper fixed slope so as to allow the concrete to flow
satisfactorily and without segregation. The lower end of chute shall be provided
with a drop chute not less than 0.6 m in height to avoid segregation of falling
concrete. Chutes shall be protected from the direct rays of the sun.
3.05.3 Concrete pump or placer:
Delivery pipes shall be so installed as to permit easy removal. Before starting

pump or operation, about one cubic meter of mortar with the same proportions of
water, admixture, cement and sand as designated shall be pumped into the pipe.
The pipe shall be set as straight as possible. Air boosters shall not be used except
in conditions that the outlet of pipes is completely embedded at least 2 meters in
fresh concrete.
The use of concrete pump or placer shall in general be limited to tunnel work and
locations where other transportation and placement methods are deemed
impracticable by the Engineer.
3.05.4 Belt conveyer:
Transporting concrete by belt conveyers will not be permitted unless approved by

the Engineer. Belt conveyers shall be used with such precautions that belts are
02068 - 17
protected from rain, wind and sunlight, and that a proper hopper or vertical chute at
least 0.6 m in depth is used at the end of each conveyer.
3.05.5 Bucket:
Buckets shall be such that concrete will be delivered to the point of placement
without segregation. The bucket shall be equipped with a flexible drop chute not
less than 0.6 m in height.
3.06 PLACING OF CONCRETE
3.06.1 General:
1. At least 30 days before placing concrete for the permanent works, the
Contractor shall submit Work Program showing the methods of concrete
placement he proposes to use, to the Engineer for his approval.
2. No concrete shall be placed until all formwork, installation of parts to be

embedded and preparation of surfaces involved in the placing have been
complete by the Contractor and the completion has been inspected and
3. Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, no concrete shall be placed in

rain and standing water, and in no case shall concrete be placed in running
water.
4. If in emergency it is necessary to stop placing concrete before a section is

completed, stop ends shall be placed as the Engineer may direct and the
resulting joint shall be deemed a construction joint.
5. Concrete in piers and abutments shall be placed in a single continuous

operation unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or agreed by the Engineer.
6. Slab spans shall be placed in one continuous operation and in one layer for
each span unless otherwise stated on the Drawings. Concrete shall be placed
from the centre of the span and simultaneously working toward both ends.
7. Concrete bridge beam shall be placed in a single continuous operation for

each span unless otherwise stated on the Drawings. Concrete shall be placed
from the centre of the span and simultaneously working toward both ends.
8. Where horizontal construction joints are allowed in walls, struts, posts and
other structural members, concrete shall not be placed on top of other
concrete, which has not been allowed to set for 12 hours or more.
9. The slabs of box culverts shall be placed for their full depth in one layer or
mass and allowed to set for not less than 12 hours before any additional work
is done on them. Before concrete is placed in sidewalls, bottom slabs shall be
cleaned of all shavings, sticks, sawdust and other extraneous material.
10. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval his proposals for
pouring culverts before commencing culvert construction. Concrete shall not
02068 - 18
be placed more than one meter high relative to the concrete already placed
and casting concrete shall proceed in a systematic manner.
11. The Contractor shall furnish communication facilities between the mixing plant
and placing site where necessary or desirable as determined by the Engineer.
3.06.2 Preparation for placing:
1. Immediately before concrete is placed, all surfaces of rock foundations to

which concrete is to be bonded shall be cleaned of oil, mud, organic matter,
wooden pieces, objectionable coating, debris, loose rock fragments, or other
perishable materials by use of high-velocity air-water jets or other effective
means approved by the Engineer.
2. The surfaces of rock foundation shall be moistened thoroughly at least 18

hours before placing concrete and standing water shall be removed.
3. The surfaces of soil or sand and gravel foundations to which concrete is to be

placed shall be free from standing or running water, wooden pieces or other
objectionable materials above-mentioned. For soil or sand and gravel
foundation, the foundation shall be in damp condition before placing concrete.
4. The surfaces of construction joints of old concrete including the surface of

block-outs, on which new concrete is to be placed, shall be roughened and
cleaned by chipping, high-velocity air-water jet, wire brushing or other
approved method, and kept moist for at least 18 hours prior to placing new
concrete after the above mentioned treatment of the joints. Cleaning shall
consist of the removal of all laitance, loose or defective concrete, coating, and
foreign materials.
5. The surfaces of all contraction joints shall be cleaned thoroughly of accretions

of concrete or other foreign materials by scrapping, chipping or other means to
the satisfaction of the Engineer. Contraction joints shall be applied by a
bituminous coat approved by the Engineer to prevent bond.
3.06.3 Placing:
1. After the surface has been prepared satisfactorily, all approximately horizontal
surface of rock and construction joint of mass concrete shall be covered with a
layer of over-sanded mix. The mix shall have a proportion of cement and sand
as directed by the Engineer. The over-sanded mix shall be spread uniformly in
a layer of 1.5 – 2 cm in thickness and then concrete shall be placed
immediately upon it.
2. Any concrete, which has become so stiff that proper placing cannot be
assured unless re-tempered, shall be wasted at the Contractor’s expense.
3. Concrete shall be deposited in vertical dropping to minimise segregation and

be placed so carefully as not to exert unfavourably impact on the reinforcing
bars or forms assembled. The vertical free drop of falling concrete shall not
exceed 1.5 m. Care shall be taken in placing concrete through reinforcing bars
to minimise segregation.
02068 - 19
4. All formed concrete, except lining concrete for underground structures, shall
be placed in horizontal layers; the thickness thereof shall not exceed 0.5 meter.
The height of one lift of concrete placing shall not be more than 1.5 m unless
approved by the Engineer. The time between successive, lifts shall be at least
24 hours for all structures. This time may be extended to 96 hours in case of
massive structures if approved by the Engineer.
5. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, all concrete shall be placed in its
final position within 1 hour after feeding of water into the mixer drum.
6. Cold joints shall be avoided where practicable. In the event of equipment

breakdown, or if for any other reason continuous placing will be interrupted,
the contractor shall thoroughly consolidate the concrete at such joints to a
reasonably uniform and stable slope while the concrete is plastic. The
concrete at the surface of such cold joints shall be cleaned and wetted as
required for construction joints before being covered with fresh concrete.
3.06.4 Temperature of concrete:
Temperature of concrete when it is being place shall be not more than 32° C. If the
Engineer deems it necessary to do so, the contractor shall employ effective means,
such as pre-cooling of mixing water and/or placing at night, to maintain the
temperature of the concrete, as it is placed, below 32° C.
3.06.5 Consolidation:
1. Each layer of concrete shall be immediately consolidated with suitable

appliances so that the concrete is compacted to the maximum practicable
density and closes snugly against all surfaces of forms and embedded
materials.
Subsequent layers of concrete shall not be placed until the layers previously
placed have been worked thoroughly as specified.
2. In general, concrete shall be consolidated with electric or pneumatic power-

driven internal-type vibrators, operating at a speed of at least 7,000-rpm when
immersed in concrete. The vibrating head shall be inserted in concrete
vertically and at least 5 cm into the underlying layer. Where it is difficult to use
internal vibrators, concrete may be consolidated with the external-type vibrator
or compacted with the hand-plunger as directed by the Engineer. The external-
type vibrator shall be operated at a speed of 8,000 rpm and large enough to
effect consolidation.
3. Care shall be exercised to avoid contact of the vibrating head with surface of
the forms or embedded objects to avoid excessive local vibration. Application
of the vibrators shall be made systematically as such intervals that the zones of
influence overlap and the concrete are properly compacted. Over-vibration,
causing segregation and surface laitance, or tending to bring an excessive of
water to the surface, shall be avoided.
02068 - 20
3.07 CURING AND PROTECTION OF CONCRETE:
1. The Contractor shall protect all concrete against injury or harmful effect due to
sudden drying, loading, shock or vibration until it has hardened sufficiently to
prevent damage. Exposed finished surfaces of concrete shall be protected
from the direct rays of the sun for at least the first 3 days after placement. All
concrete and mortar surfaces shall be kept continuously moist for at least 7
days after placement.
2. The method of keeping concrete moist shall be by wet burlap, wet cotton mats,
continuous sprinkling or spraying with water, as may be necessary to keep the
concrete from drying, or by other methods approved by the Engineer. Water
curing shall be handled so as to prevent the formation of unsightly stains on
concrete surfaces, which will be permanently exposed. The water shall be free
from oil and salts, which may stain the concrete.
3. Ponding of floors and slabs is effective in reducing cracking and wear.
4. Membrane-forming curing compound:
Under certain conditions it is desirable to cure concrete by applying to the

exposed surfaces, a sealing membrane immediately after form removal. It will
restrict evaporation of the mixing water, and if this be properly applied, then
under most conditions, concrete retain enough moisture for adequate curing.
5. Curing compounds must be of such composition that it will remain intact as a

sealing coat for at least 28 days.
6. Sealing compound is applied in one coat by spraying. A complete and

thorough coverage will be assured by moving the spray gun containing one-
half of the compounds, back and forth in one direction for a given area, and
the remainder at right angles to this direction.
7. All concrete shall be adequately protected from damage. No fire or excessive

heat including the heat resulting from the welding of steel or reinforcing bars
shall be permitted near or in direct contract with concrete at any time. All
conduits and other openings in the concrete shall be closed during the entire
curing period.
3.08 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS:
1. Construction joints shall be located where shown on the Drawings, or

permitted or instructed by the Engineer. Construction joints shall be
perpendicular to the principal lines of stress and shall be located at points of
minimum shear in general.
2. At horizontal construction joints, details shall be as approved by the Engineer.

Before placing fresh concrete, the surfaces of construction joints shall be
sandblasted or washed and scrubbed with a wire brush to expose clean
aggregate, drenched with brush to expose clean aggregate, or drenched with
water until saturated, and kept saturated until the new concrete is placed.
Immediately prior to placing new concrete the forms shall be drawn tight
02068 - 21
against the concrete already in place and the old surface shall be coated
thoroughly with a 15mm thick neat cement mortar. Concrete in substructures
shall be placed in such a manner that all horizontal construction joints will be
truly horizontal.
3. Where vertical construction joints are necessary, reinforcing bars shall extend
across the joint in such a manner as to make the structure monolithic. Special
care shall be taken to avoid construction joints through panelled wing walls or
other large surfaces which are to have an architectural finish.
4. Necessary dowels, long-transfer devices, and bonding devices shall be placed

as shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer.
5. The method for disposing of wastewater employed in cutting, washing and

rinsing of concrete surface shall be such that the wastewater does not stain,
discolour, or affect exposed surfaces of the structures.
3.09 FORMWORK:
3.09.1 General:
1. Forms shall be used, wherever necessary or particularly directed by the

Engineer, to confine concrete and shape it to the required lines.
2. The forms shall have sufficient strength and rigidity to hold the concrete and to
withstand the pressure resulting from placement and vibration without
deflection. The surfaces of all forms to be in contact with the concrete shall be
clean, rigid, smooth, and sufficiently tight to prevent loss of mortar.
3. All exposed joints, edges, and external corners shall be chamfered not less
than 2 cm at 45 except as otherwise directed by the Engineer. Internal
corners shall be filleted where indicated or required by the Engineer.
4. Immediately before concrete is placed, precaution shall be taken to see that all
forms are in proper alignment, and that all form supports are thoroughly
secured and tighten.
5. Whenever directed by the Engineer, the contractor shall submit the Shop
Drawings of the forms for the approval of the Engineer before manufacturing
the forms.
3.09.2 Material:
1. All materials used in the forms shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Lumber shall be sound, straight, and free from warp, decay and loose knots,
and shall be dressed smooth and uniform in width and thickness prior to
fabrication of formwork.
2. Form to be used in water passages and for concrete, which will ultimately be
exposed to view, shall be faced either with plywood applied with phenolic film
or steel and shall be free of all defects which will be reproduced as blemishes
on the concrete surfaces.
02068 - 22
3. Where plywood applied with phenolic film is used, it shall be non-warping,

non-wrinkling and manufactured with special waterproof glues. In so far as is
practicable, the plywood sheets shall be of uniform width and length.
Especially for exposed concrete, the Contractor shell use stiff propping system
to support the formwork.
3.09.3 Construction tolerances:
Variation in alignment, grade and dimensions of the structure from the established
alignment, grade and dimensions shown on the Drawings shall be within the
tolerances specified in this paragraph. Concrete work that exceeds the tolerance
limits specified herein shall be remedied or removed and replaced by the
Contractor at his own expense.
1. Elevation and positions.
- Top of lean concrete under foundations +10 mm to 20 mm

- Plan position of substructures 10 mm
- Span length -30 mm to + 25 mm
2. Verticality
- Verticality of substructures and walls 0.2%
3. Appearance of Exposed Vertical Surfaces
- Tolerance for offset at form joints 5 mm

- Tolerance for flatness 5 mm over 2 m
4. Appearance of Exposed Vertical Surfaces
- Tolerance for joint offsets 2 mm (nominal)

- Tolerance for flatness 5 mm over 2 m
5. Dimensions
- Tolerance for dimensions of piers,

Walls, Abutments, slabs, etc. 10 mm
6. Flatness of Slabs
- Bridge deck slabs and top and bottom

Slabs of box culverts 10 mm over 4 m
7. Concrete Cover and Spacing for Reinforcing Steel
- Concrete cover for superstructures -0 mm to + 5 mm

- Concrete cover for other structures -0 mm to + 10 mm
- Spacing -10 mm to + 10 mm
02068 - 23
3.09.4 Installation and preparation:
1. Forms shall be installed so that the joint marks on concrete surfaces are in
alignment both horizontally and vertically, and the joints between surfaces
shall be smooth. All edges or corners of the concrete exposed permanently
shall be chamfered as prescribed.
2. Before placing concrete, all forms shall be rigid and tight and shall be
thoroughly cleaned, and all wooden chips, saw dust, dry mortar lumps, foreign
matter and excess water shall be removed from the forms.
3. The surfaces of the forms shall be oiled with a commercial mineral oil of a type
approved by the Engineer. The form oil shall be applied before the
reinforcement is placed. Forms, which have been left in place for such a
period that they have dried out shall receive further surface treatment as
4. Where forms for continuous surfaces are placed in successive lifts, care shall
be taken to fit the forms tightly over the entire surface so as to prevent leakage
of mortar from the concrete and to maintain accurate alignment of the surface.
5. Forms to be used more than once shall be maintained in serviceable condition

and shall be thoroughly cleaned before being reused. Forms on exterior faces
on walls shall be kept clean by means of splashboards.
6. Internal ties consisting of bolts and rods shall be so arranged that embedded
metal shall terminate not less than 3 cm from the formed surface of the
concrete after forms are removed where the maximum size of aggregate is 40
mm, and not less than 5 cm where the maximum size of aggregate is 80 mm
or larger. Wire ties through forms shall not be used unless authorised by the
Engineer. Holes left after the removal of ties shall be filled with dry pack mortar.
3.09.5 Removal:
Forms shall not be removed until the concrete has hardened and is of sufficient
strength to carry its own weight safely, together with any construction loads likely
to be imposed upon it. Forms shall be removed only with the approval of the
Engineer and, in general, the forms shall be left for the periods not less than the
following numbers of days after the concrete is placed:
Description General Absolute Concrete Strength

Minimum As % of Design
Centering under bridges,
Beams of frames 14 days 7 days 80 %
Floor slabs 14 days 7 days 80 %

Walls 3 days 1 day -
Columns 5 days 2 days -
Sides of beams and all 3 days 1 day -

Other vertical surfaces
02068 - 24
Care shall be taken in removing forms to prevent damage to the concrete.
3.10 FINISHES AND FINISHING:
3.10.1 General:
1. The classes of finishes and the requirements for finishing concrete surfaces
shall be specified in this clause. Surface irregularities in finishes, as described
herein, shall be distinguished from construction tolerances which are allowable
deviations from established lines, grades and dimensions which described in
Subsection 3.09.3.
2. Surfaces irregularities are designated “abrupt” and “gradual” for the purposes
of classifying finishes. Offsets resulting from displaced, misplaced, or
mismatched forms or loose knots in forms, or other similar form of defects
shall be considered “abrupt” irregularities and will be checked by direct
measurement.
3. All other surface irregularities shall be considered “gradual” irregularities and

will be measured as a departure from the testing edge of a 1.5-m template for
formed surfaces and of a 3-m template for unformed surfaces.
4. Finishing of concrete surfaces shall be performed only by skilled workmen.
3.10.2 Formed Surfaces:
The classes of finish for formed surfaces are designated by use of symbols F1, F2,
F3, and F4.
F1: Finish F1 is a finish applied to formed surfaces, which will be covered by fill
material or by concrete. Correction of surface irregularities measured as
previously described shall be required only for depression, which exceed 25
mm, when measured as previously described.
F2: Finish F2 is a finish applied to formed surfaces which will be permanently

exposed and where a reasonably attractive appearance is required. Surface
irregularities measured as previously described shall not exceed 6 mm for
abrupt irregularities and 15 mm for gradual irregularities.
F3: Finish F3 is a finish applied to formed surfaces, which will be permanently

exposed to public view and where an attractive appearance is paramount.
Surface irregularities measured as previously described shall not exceed 3
mm for abrupt irregularities and 6 mm for gradual irregularities.
F4: Finish F4 is a finish applied to formed surfaces for which alignment and
evenness of surface are of paramount importance from the standpoint of
eliminating destructive effects of water action. Surface irregularities, measured
as previously described, shall not exceed 3 mm for abrupt irregularities not
parallel to the direction of flow, 6 mm for abrupt irregularities parallel to the
direction of flow, and 10 mm for all gradual irregularities. Gradual irregularities
that have a slope steeper than 1 vertical to 20 horizontal and all abrupt
irregularities in excess of the allowed limits shall be ground to a slope of 1
02068 - 25
vertical to 20 horizontal, except that abrupt irregularities such as pitting shall

be remedied in accordance with the provisions in Subsection 3.11.
3.10.3 Unformed surface:
1. The classes of finish for unformed surfaces are designated by use of symbols
U1 and U2.
2. Finish U1 is a screeded finish applied to unformed surfaces, which will be

covered by fill material or by concrete. Finish U1 is also the first stage of finish
U2. Finishing shall consist of sufficient leveling and screeding to produce
uniform surfaces. Surface irregularities measured as previously described
shall not exceed 10 mm.
3. Finish U2 is a floated finish applied to unformed surfaces of waterway or

surfaces which will be generally exposed to view. Floating shall be started as
soon as the screeded surface has stiffened sufficiently, and shall be the
minimum necessary to produce a surface that is free from screed marks and is
uniform in texture. Surface irregularities for waterways shall be measured in
accordance with the requirements of finish F4. Surfaces irregularities of areas
other than waterways measured as previously described shall not exceed 3
mm.
4. No separate payment shall be made for the work under this clause. The cost
thereof shall be included in the appropriate unit price of concrete work stated
in the Bills of Quantities.
3.11 DAMAGED OR DEFECTIVE CONCRETE SURFACES:
1. Defective concrete and concrete damage from any cause shall be removed
and replaced with acceptable concrete by the Contractor at his own expense.
Irregularities of alignment due to inaccurate finishing of surfaces, bulging of
forms, or other defects shall be rectified by and at the expense of the
Contractor.
2. Patching and finishing work shall be done only by skilled workmen and shall
be subject to the inspection of the Engineer. Before final acceptance of the
work, the Contractor shall clean all exposed concrete surfaces of all
encrustation of cement, mortar, or grout, and shall remove all unsightly stains
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3. All porous and fractured concrete and surface concrete, to which additions are
required to bring it to prescribed lines, shall be removed by chipping openings
into the concrete to bare the reinforcement. The extent and dimensions of the
chipped openings shall be as directed by the Engineer.
4. The chipped openings shall be sharp-edged and keyed and shall be filled to
the required lines with fresh concrete or dry patching mortar as directed by the
Engineer. Where concrete is used for filling, the chipped openings shall not be
more than 8 cm in depth and the fresh concrete shall be reinforced and
doweled to the surface of the openings, as directed by the Engineer.
02068 - 26
5. Mortar for patching shall consist by volume of one part of cement, two parts of
regular concrete sand, and just enough water so that after thorough mixing of
the ingredients the mortar will barely hold together when compacted by
squeezing with the hand.
6. The mortar shall be fresh when placed and any mortar that is not used within
two hours after preparation shall be wasted. Immediately prior to mortar
application, the surface to which the mortar is to be bonded shall be
dampened, and then scrubbed with a small quantity of mortar using a wire
brush.
7. Where repairs are more than 3 cm deep, the mortar shall be applied in layers
not more than 2 cm thick to avoid sagging. After each layers, except the last,
is placed, it shall be thoroughly roughened by scratching with a trowel to
provide an effective bond with the succeeding layers.
8. The last of finishing layer shall be smoothed with a trowel to form a continuous
surface with the surrounding concrete. The additional of a small quantity of
water to the finished surface of the patch to aid in securing a smooth finish will
be permitted, but other than this no additional water shall be used.
9. All patches on exposed surfaces shall be neat and smooth and as near as
possible of the same colour as the adjoining concrete. All patches shall be
thoroughly bonded to the surfaces of the chipped opening and shall be sound
and free from shrinkage, cracks and drummy areas.
10. In repairing damaged or defective concrete at important locations, the

Contractor shall use epoxy resin bonding if directed by the Engineer.
11. All patches and repairs shall be kept continuously damp for a period of not
less than 7 days and kept out of the direct rays of the sun for at least 7 days
immediately following completion of the patch or repair.
3.11 BACKFILL AND ROAD FILLS:
1. All spaces which have been excavated and the volumes of which are not
occupied by the concrete structure shall be backfilled and compacted with
acceptable material in accordance with the provisions of Section 02010:
“STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL”.
2. If there is likelihood of water accumulating behind any wall, the backfill shall
not be placed until after the retaining, diaphragm or spandrel walls are 28 days
old. No fill shall be placed over slabs until the concrete is 28 days old or until
test specimens indicate the concrete has attained the required 28 day strength.
3.12 LOADINGS:
Track traffic or heavy construction equipment shall not be allowed on reinforced

concrete structures until 28 days have elapsed from the last placing of concrete
except as noted below. If it is proposed to use the structure at the earlier date,
extra test specimens shall be made. The structure may be used when tests of
02068 - 27
these specimens show that the concrete has attained its specified 28 days
strength.
3.13 CLEANING UP:
Upon completion of the structure and before final acceptance the Contractor shall
remove all falsework, falsework piling, etc. down to 1.0-m above the finished
ground line. Excavated or useless materials, rubbish, etc. shall be removed from
the site and the site shall be left in a neat and presentable condition to the
- END OF SECTION -
02068 - 28
SECTION 02069
CEMENT MORTAR
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
This work shall consist of preparing and furnishing mortar for stone masonry and any
other incidental works in accordance with this specification.
Section 02029 “STONE MASONRY”; and

Section 02068 “CONCRETE”.
Not Applicable

1.04 SUBMITTALS:

PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
Cement to be used for this works shall be in accordance with the Portland cement
specified in Section 02068: “CONCRETE”;
Fine aggregate to be used for this works shall be in accordance with the fine
aggregate specified in Section 02068: “CONCRETE”;
Water to be used for this works shall be in accordance with the water specified in
Section 02068: “CONCRETE”; and
Hydrated lime to be used for this works shall be Type N specified in ASTM
C207-06(2011): “Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes”.
02069 - 1
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXECUTION:
1. All the materials except the water shall be mixed in an approved mortar mixer
until the mixture assumes a uniform color, after which the water shall be added
and the mixing continued. Mortar shall be mixed only for those quantities
required for immediate use. Mortar that is not used within 45 minutes after water
has been added shall be discarded in an approved manner.
2. Unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer, masonry mortar shall be

composed of one part Portland cement and three parts fine aggregate by
volume to which hydrated lime may be added in an amount equal to 10 percent
of the cement by weight, with sufficient volume of water added to make the
mixture workable
- END OF SECTION -
02069 - 2
SECTION 02070
REINFORCING STEEL BARS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
This work shall consist of furnishing, fabricating and placing steel reinforcing bars
of the type and size provided in accordance with these Specifications and in
conformity with the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

Section 02023 “SIPHON”;
Section 02024 “OPEN CHANNEL”;
Section 02027 “MANHOLES, DRAIN PIPED AND MAT”;
Section 02030 “RETAINING WALL”;
Section 02039 “PRE-CAST CONCRETE FENCE”;
Section 02040 “PLATFORM”;
Section 03007 “CAST IN-PLACE CONCRETE PILE”; and
Section 04001 “TUNNELING”.
A615/A615M-096 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbone-

Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
A370-11 Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical
Testing of Steel Products
• The American Associantion of State Highway and Transportation Officials

(AASHTO)
M31 Grade 60

G3112 Grade SD 345, SR 235
02070 - 1
07-2052-2002 Grade BJTD 35, BJTP 24

1.04 SUBMITTALS:

1.04.1 Drawings and Schedules:
The Contractor shall submit the Shop Drawings and Bar Bending Schedules for
any modifications in reinforcement necessary to conform to the Work Program.
Such drawings and schedules shall be approved by the Engineer before any steel
reinforcement is cut or placed in the site.
1.04.2 Samples:
If so instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall deliver the samples of steel
reinforcing bars to an approved testing agency for the independent tests as
described herein.
Certificates of test from the suppliers of materials shall be submitted. Such

certificates shall certify that the materials concerned have been tested in
accordance with the requirements of the specification and shall include
comparative tables showing that the test results satisfy the required values given
in the relevant standard.
1.04.4 Test reports:
The Contractor shall submit copies of the results of all tests carried out following
the requirements of this clause.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
Reinforcing steel bars shall conform to the requirements of the specifications

described below.
02070 - 2
2.01.1 The reinforcing steel bars for concrete reinforcement shall be in accordance with
the following.
Table 02070.1. RENFORCING STEEL BARS
Indonesia Standard Japanese Standard

BJTD35 G 3112 SD345
BJTP24 SR235
2.01.2 Design Stress:
Design yield stress shall be as shown in the Table below.
Table 02070.2. DESIGN YIELD STRESS
Type Design yield

stress (N/mm2)
SD345 345 (BJTD35)
SR235 235 (BJTP24)
2.01.3 Weight and section area of reinforcing bar shall be as shown in the Table below.
Table 02070.3. DEFORMED BAR
Bar Nos. Effective Effective Effective

Unit Weight Cross Section Perimeter
(kg/m) Area (mm2) (mm)
D - 10 0.617 78.54 31
D - 13 1.04 132.7 41
D - 16 1.58 201.1 50
D - 19 2.23 283.5 60
D - 22 2.98 380.1 69
D - 25 3.85 490.9 79
D - 29 5.18 662.5 91
D - 32 6.31 804.2 101
Table 02070.4. PLAIN BAR
Bar Nos. Nominal Nominal Nominal

Unit Weight Cross Perimeter
Section
(kg/m) Area (mm2) (mm)
φ6 0.222 28.27 18.8

φ8 0395 50.27 25.1
φ10 0.617 78.54 31.4
φ12 0.888 113.1 37.7
φ14 1.12 153.9 44.0
φ16 1.58 201.1 50.3
φ19 2.23 283.5 59.7
02070 - 3
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 CONSTRUCTION:
1. Any Bar Bending Schedule given in the Drawings is for the Contractor’s
convenience only and it shall be checked and supplemented as necessary
before the start of fabrication work.
2. Reinforcing steel bars shall be accurately formed to the required shapes and
dimensions and shall be fabricated in a manner that will not damage the
material.
3. Unless otherwise permitted, all reinforcing steel bars requiring bending shall
be bent cold. Should the Engineer approve the application of heat for field
bending of the reinforcing steel bars, precautions shall be taken to assure that
the physical properties of the steel shall not be materially altered.
4. Reinforcing steel bars that cannot be straightened by means of fabrication

shall not be used. Bars partially embedded in concrete shall not be bent
except as shown on the Drawings or otherwise permitted.
5. Qualified labours shall be employed for cutting and bending, and proper
appliances shall be provided for such work.
6. Reinforcing steel bars before being positioned shall be cleaned and free from
rust, dirt, mud, loose scale, paint, oil or other foreign substance that destroys
or reduces the bond.
7. Reinforcing steel bars shall be accurately placed in proposition, so that they

are firmly held during placing of concrete. Reinforcing steel bars for erection
shall be used when needed.
8. Reinforcing steel bars shall be tied at all intersections by using annealed iron
wire of 0.9 mm or larger diameter, or suitable clips.
9. Distances from the forms shall be maintained correctly by means of metal

hangers, mortar blocks, metal supports or other supports approved by the
Engineer.
10. Reinforcing steel bars shall be inspected by the Engineer after placing. When
concrete works are delayed after placing reinforcing steel bars, they shall be
cleaned and inspected again by the Engineer before placing of concrete.
11. The clear distance between parallel bars adjacent to concrete surfaces shall
not be less than 11/2 times the nominal diameter of the bars and 11/2 times
the maximum size of coarse aggregate nor less than 4 cm.
12. When it is necessary to splice reinforcing bar at points other than those shown
on the Drawings, positions and methods of splicing shall be determined based
on strength calculations by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer for
his approval.
02070 - 4
13. In lapped splices, the reinforcing steel bars shall be lapped with the required
length shown on the Drawings and securely wired together at several points
by using annealed iron wire larger than 0.9 mm.
14. Exposed reinforcing steel bars intended for bonding with future extensions
shall be effectively protected from damage and corrosion.
15. Welding of reinforcing steel bars shall be done only if detailed on the
Drawings or authorized by the Engineer in writing.
16. Substitution of different size of reinforcing steel bars shall be permitted only
upon the specific authorization of the Engineer and shall be of an equivalent
to the design size or larger.
17. Lap slices are not permitted for tension reinforcing steel bars larger than 30
mm in diameter pursuant to the requirements of PBI: “Indonesian Concrete
Regulations”.
3.02 TESTS:
The Engineer may, at his discretion, decide that any consignment of reinforcement
be subjected to independent tests and no reinforcement of that consignment shall
be used in the works until it has been tested and accepted by the Engineer. Such
tests as the tension test and the bending test shall be carried out in accordance
with ASTM A370-11: “Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical
Testing of Steel Products” and ASTM A615/A615M-09b: “Standard Specification
for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement”.
- END OF SECTION -
02070 - 5
SECTION 02071
RETAINING PILE
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This section covers the construction of retaining pile and other miscellaneous
structures as shown on the Drawings.
1.01.2 The Contractor shall furnish all labour, material tools and equipment to complete
the work;

OPERATIONS”
Section 02016 “FOUNDATION WORK’
Section 03007 “CAST-IN-PLACE CONRETE PILES”

• British Standard (BS);
• Deutsche Industrie Norm (DIN).
02071 - 1
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
1.04.2 Before commencement of the work, the Contractor shall prepare a well-planned
Work Program for approval by the Engineer. This Work Program shall include the
outline of the work within the window time, preparatory arrangement of the work,
required temporary facilities, proper assignment of personnel and other means
necessary for proper performance of work.
1.04.3 Drawings and Works Specifications which provide the full details of materials,
plant and operations involved in the construction of bored pile wall, including:
1. The methods of forming and cleaning the joints between the bored piles;
2. Schedule of guide pile construction and utilities relocation;
3. The sequence of boring and concreting the piles;
4. Monitoring and maintaining the stability of neighbouring properties, streets,
highways, services and other underground structures;
5. Monitoring and maintaining the stability of the bored pile wall trench;
6. Monitoring the deviation of bored pile wall during the construction and details
of proposed corrective measures to be implemented, if necessary;
7. Equipment and procedures for checking and proving the cleanliness of trench
bottoms and soundness of foundation material, prior to concreting;
8. The mixing, transporting and placing equipment for the bentonite slurry;
9. Treatment and disposal of contaminated bentonite slurry;
10. The type, source, chemical and physical properties of the bentonite to be
used.
Certificates for each consignment of materials to be incorporated to the Works

from the suppliers. These shall state the grade and quality of the material in the
consignment, and the results of all tests carried out thereon.
1.04.5 Construction Records:
Construction records which list detailed information for each pile as placed.
Records shall include but not be limited to such items as excavation, cage
placement, concreting, pile size, slurry control tests, slurry disposal, concrete
cylinder test results.
02071 - 2
1.04.6 Bentonite Certificate:
With each shipment of bentonite delivered to the Site, a certificate from the
manufacturer of the bentonite, stating from which consignment the material
delivered to the Site has been taken, and showing apparent viscosity range
(centipoises). Gel strength range (N/m) for solids in water, and methods of test
used to determine these properties.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE:
2.01.1 Concrete work shall be in accordance with the requirements specified in Section
02068: “CONCRETE”, Section 02069: “CEMENT MORTAR” and Section 02070:
“REINFORCING STEEL BARS” and the requirements specified herein.
2.01.2 Concrete shall have minimum cylinder strength of 35 N/mm2. Slump shall not
exceed 75mm.
2.01.3 The concrete shall contain a minimum cement content of 400 kg/m3 and
aggregates shall not exceed 20mm maximum size. The free Water/Cement Ratio
shall not exceed 0.40.
2.01.4 All cast in-situ concrete used shall be ready mixed concrete, produced by a
supplier in close proximity to the site and subject to the approval of Engineer.
2.01.5 The Contractor shall arrange to have a trial mix in the presence of the Engineer
prior to the commencement of field work. The trial mix shall be carried out in
accordance to the design mix submitted to the Engineer.
2.01.6 Concrete admixture shall only be used with permission of the Engineer, and shall
be used strictly in accordance with Section 02068: “CONCRETE”.
2.01.7 The Contractor shall ensure that the Engineer shall have access to the supplier’s
mixing plant at all times for inspection and checks on quality of concrete supplied.
Each load shall be accompanied by a delivery note stamped with the time of
mixing and stating the consignee and quantities of each material in the mix
including water and additives.
2.02 REINFORCEMENT:
2.02.1 Reinforcing bars shall comply with Section 02070: “REINFORCING STEEL
BARS”.
2.02.2 Welding of reinforcement shall conform to the relevant provisions and requirement
of AWS D1.4.
2.02.3 Steel reinforcement shall be stored in clean conditions, free from loose rust and
loose mill scale at the time of fixing in position and subsequent concreting work.
02071 - 3
2.03 BENTONITE:
2.03.1 Bentonite used in the bored pile support slurry shall be as specified in API SPEC
13A.
2.03.2 Certification:
All bentonite used in the slurry should have a manufacture certificate.
2.04 WATER:
Water used for dispersion of bentonite shall be within the limits of 6 to 8 for pH
and care shall be taken to exclude saline water or water contaminated by slats.
2.05 ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS or INGREDIENTS:
If the Contractor wished to use materials other than bentonite, or if he wishes to

use different ingredients of bentonite from those specified above, he shall obtain
written approval from the Engineer. Proposed materials or ingredients shall be
non-hazardous and non-toxic. Any alternative materials or ingredients utilized will
be equal or superior in performance and quality to those originally specified by
Technical Specifications.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL:
3.01.1 The work shall be carried out in accordance with a method statement which has
been approved by the Engineer. This method statement shall include, inter alia,
length of temporary casing, details of the constituent materials of any drilling fluid
used for stabilization, the method of inspection, details of the concrete design mix,
concreting method, the minimum time between the completion of one pile and the
commencement of the next, and the pattern of construction.
3.01.2 The Contractor shall ensure that damage does not occur to completed piles
through his method of working, and a schedule of a pile installation programme
shall be submitted to the Engineer. The proposed sequence and timing of pile
installation shall be such that the installation works shall not cause any damage to
adjacent piles. Piling works shall not commence until approval of the Engineer has
been obtained.
3.01.3 The maximum pile deviation tolerance is 75 mm in ether direction from its design.
3.01.4 The maximum verticality tolerance of bored cast in-situ at any level is 1 in 150.
3.01.5 Should piles be installed outside these tolerances affecting the design of the
structure, the Contractor shall propose remedial design and carry out immediate
remedial measure to the approval of the Engineer.
02071 - 4
3.02 PILE EXCAVATION:
3.02.1 The Contractor shall carry out own test along the proposed wall alignment to
determine the bedrock level. Probing of bedrock shall carried out along the
proposed wall line at intervals to be agreed by the Engineer.
3.02.2 Piles shall not be bored next to other piles which have recently been cast less than
24 hours or contain unset concrete.
3.02.3 Irrespective of the presence of ground water, the sides of all boreholes shall be
kept intact and no loose material shall be permitted to fall into the bottom of the
boreholes. All boreholes shall have a full casing to support the sides of all boring.
3.02.4 By using a temporary casing, the bottom of casing shall be kept a minimum of one
(1) metre or more below unstable strata to prevent the inflow of soil and the
formation of cavities in the surrounding ground.
3.02.5 Temporary casings shall be thin walled mild steel cylindrical casing, spirally welded
or other similar construction. The dimensions and quality of the casing shall be
adequate to withstand without damage or distortion all handling, construction and
ground stresses to which they will be subjected, including preventing concrete
from within the pile from displacing soft soil or soil squeezing in and displacing
fresh concrete.
3.02.6 The casing shall be free of significant distortion, of uniform cross-section

throughout each continuous length and free from internal projections and
encrusted concrete which might prevent the proper formation of pile. The joints of
casings shall be reasonable watertight.
3.02.7 If temporary casings are damaged during installation in a manner which prevents
the proper formation of the pile, such casings shall be withdrawn from the bore
before concrete is placed, repaired if necessary, or other action taken as may be
approved to continue the construction of the pile.
3.02.8 Rock coring:
1. Rock coring shall means coring of sound bedrock using a coring bucket or
approved method. The used of chisel is not allowed. Coring of rock other than
two items specified below shall not be considered as coring in rock, and will
only be considered as boring in soil:
a. Rock socket length;

b. Cavity roof (in limestone formation).
2. Coring of inclined rock surface, limestone pinnacles, cavities and soil below
boulder/floater shall be considered as boring in soils.
3. Socket length shall be measured from the flattened horizontal bedrock

surface. This flat horizontal surface shall be probed using Kelly bar or steel
bar at a minimum of five positions over the borehole to confirm sound bedrock
for socketing.
02071 - 5
3.02.9 Spillage and Disposal:
All reasonable steps shall be taken to prevent the spillage of drilling fluid on the
site in areas outside the immediate vicinity of boring. Discarded drilling fluid shall
be removed from the site without delay. In disposal of unwanted drilling fluid, the
Contractor shall comply with relevant government regulations and shall propose a
proper disposal method to be approved by the engineer.
3.02.10 Inspection:
1. All pile excavations shall be inspected for their full length before concreting.
2. Inspection will be carried out from the ground level at the sole discretion of the
Engineer prior to concrete being placed in the borehole. For such inspection
to be carried out safely, the Contractor shall provide all facilities and
assistance to enable the said inspection to be done. In the course of
inspection any loose or soft material in the borehole which is likely to affect
the performance of the pile shall be removed to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
3. The base of the boring shall be inspected by approved method for wet hole
and by means of a light for dry hole to ensure that all loose, disturbed and/or
remoulded soil is removed and that the sides of the boring will remain stable
during the subsequent concreting operations. The vertically and position of the
boring shall be checked to ensure that they meet the specified tolerances.
4. The borehole shall be protected from the possibility of any surface water
entering the hole from time to time and until the hole is completed and ready
to be concreted.
5. Surplus earth resulting from piling operations shall be used where required or
removed from site as directed by the Engineer.
3.03 REINFORCEMENT:
3.03.1 Reinforcement shall be free from rust and mud and not be placed until inspected
and accepted;
3.03.2 Reinforcement shall be sufficiently rigid to ensure that they remain at their correct
level during the lifting and placing of the concrete and the extraction of temporary
lining tubes;
3.03.3 Reinforcement shall be maintained in its correct position during concreting of the
pile. The minimum cover to all reinforcement shall not be less than 75mm unless
stated otherwise.
3.03.4 Concrete spacer shall be provided at every 3m interval, size and minimum yield
strength of reinforcement shall as specified in Section 02070: “REINFORCING
STEEL BARS”.
3.03.5 The main longitudinal reinforcing bars in piles not exceeding 12 meters in length
shall be in one continuous length unless otherwise specified. In piles longer than
12 meters and required to be reinforced throughout their full lengths when
specified, joints with staggered laps of alternate bars will be permitted in main
02071 - 6
longitudinal bars at 12 meter nominal intervals unless otherwise specified in the

Drawings.
3.03.6 The Contractor shall submit for approval a method statement on the manner by
which he intends to lower reinforcement cages into pile shafts. Where tack welding
is carried out on pile reinforcement for the purpose of hoisting, such welding shall
be located only within the top 100mm of each reinforcement cage.
3.03.7 Where the top of a reinforcement cage being lowered is to be lapped to the next
cage, as in the case of tension piles exceeding 12 meters in length, the Contractor
shall provide adequate sacrificial steel to compensate any lapped reinforcement
which has been tack welded, where such tack welding is the requirement of the
Contractor for his hoisting operation. Sacrificial steel shall be of the same grade
and size as that of the compensated bar.
3.03.8 If required by the Engineer, reinforcement cages shall be flushed with fresh water
to remove accumulated salts or other deposits immediately prior to lowering into
the pile shaft.
3.04 CONCRETING:
3.04.1 Concrete to be placed under drilling fluid shall placed using a tremie concrete pipe;
3.04.2 Before placing concrete, agreed measures shall be taken by the Contractor to
ensure that there is no accumulation of contaminated drilling fluid, silt or other
deleterious material at the base of the bore.
3.04.3 A sample of the drilling fluid shall be taken from the base of bore using an
accepted sampling device. If the drilling fluid does not comply with the
specification, concrete placement shall not proceed and the Contractor shall
modify or replace the drilling fluid to meet the requirements of this specifications.
3.04.4 The tremie concrete shall consist of a series of metal pipes with internal diameter
not less than 250mm. The receiving hopper shall have a capacity at least equal to
that of the pipe it feeds. At all times, a sufficient quantity of concrete shall be
maintained within the pipe to ensure that the pressure from concrete exceeds that
from the water or drilling fluid.
3.04.5 The hopper and pipe of the tremie shall be clean and watertight throughout. The
pipe shall extend to the base of the bore and a sliding plug or barrier placed at the
discharge outlet of the pipe to prevent direct contact between the first charge of
concrete in the tremie pipe and drilling fluid. If the plug or barrier is sacrificial, it
shall not be retained in the mass concrete.
3.04.6 The tremie pipe outlet shall be kept at least 1.5 meters below the surface of the
concrete at all stages in the pour. The Contractor shall develop a system of level
checks for the concrete and pipe outlet to ensure that this requirement is met. The
tremie pipe shall be withdrawn upward gently behind the concrete level, and shall
not be subject to any shock or violent movement either in dislodging the concrete
within the pipe or for any other reason.
02071 - 7
3.04.7 The concrete for each pile shall be from same source. All holes bored shall be
concreted within the same day. In the even of rain, the Contractor is to provide
adequate shelter to keep the hole dry and to concrete under cover.
3.04.8 Temporary casings shall be extracted while the concrete within remains sufficiently
workable. Temporary casings shall be extracted in not more than 2 hours after
concreting has completed.
3.04.9 The top of the pile shall be brought above the required cut-off level by an amount
sufficient to ensure a sound concrete at cut-off level and the surplus removed.
3.04.10 The actual volume of concrete used for each pile must be measured with the
calculated volume required. If the difference between these two volumes indicates
a possible necking, the Contractor shall propose and carry out appropriates tests
and measures to the approval of the Engineer to ensure the adequacy of the pile.
3.04.11 Any consequences causing the pile rejected by the Engineer due to supply of
concrete shall be on contractor’s own risk.
-END OF SECTION-
02071 - 8
SECTION 02072
GROUND ANCHOR
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This specification deals with permanent ground anchors and shall be read in
conjunction with the conditions of contract and the Specification for Excavation.
The Contractor shall comply fully with the requirements of this specification in the
design, erection and installation of ground anchors.
1.01.2 Where works are ordered to be performed by the Contractor but are not specified
in this specification, the Contractor must carry them out with full diligence and
experience as are expected for works of this nature and shall comply with the
relevant clauses of the Applicable Codes and Standards.
1.01.3 The contract comprises the provision of all labour, tools, plants, materials,
transportation and all necessary equipment for the following works:
1. Design, supply, construct, install and test ground anchors as part of a

permanent ground retaining system to support with safety the sides of open
excavations;
2. Any other incidental works necessary to ensure the safety and satisfactory
performance of the permanent earth retaining system.

OPERATIONS”
Section 02016 “FOUNDATION WORKS”
Section 03004 “PRE-STRESSED CONCRETE GIRDER”
02072 - 1

• Deutsche Industrie Norm (DIN);
• British Standard (BS).
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
1.04.2 The Contractor shall include in the submission of the tender, for the Engineer’s
review, his proposed design of ground anchors in connection with the permanent
earth retaining system for excavation works. Unit rates of ground anchors shall be
based on the allowable anchor forces required for the safe and adequate
performance of the permanent retaining system. The Contractor’s submission of
calculations and shop drawings shall include the following information:
1. Anchor layout;
2. Anchor design details;
3. Anchor structural and geotechnical design capacity;
4. Grade and properties of the tendon material;
5. Percent of tendon ultimate load at working load;
6. Method and details of anchor fabrication;
7. Details of double corrosion protection for permanent applications;
8. Method and details of proposed grouting procedure;
9. Grout/concrete – cement type, strength, additives;
10. Anchor load, length, and bond diameter;
11. Anchor free stressing length and de-bonding details;
12. Initial prestress of anchor;
13. Anchor bond design details;
14. Endorsement by the Contractor’s Professional Engineer;
15. Any other information required by the Engineer in this review of the
Contractor’s design;
16. Anchor head protection;
17. Waler Beam design and details.
02072 - 2
The review of the Contractor’s design by the Engineer does not in any way
absolve or reduce the duties and responsibilities of the Contractor to ensure the
safety and adequacy of his works.
1.04.3 Prior to commencement of works, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer,
detailed method statements for the installation of ground anchors. The method
statements shall be a document containing:
1. A detailed construction sequence;

2. Proposed drilling method;
3. Proposed installation method;
4. Proposed stressing method and equipment;
5. Proposed provisions for stressing or distressing;
6. Material, plant and labour requirements at each construction stage;
7. Shop drawings showing, among other things, details of all special
requirements for the construction activities;
8. Method of testing.
If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit, such information

pertaining to the methods of construction which the Contractor proposes to use,
and such calculations of the stresses and deflections that will arise in the
permanent works or any part thereof during construction from the use of such
methods, as will enable the Engineer to decide whether the permanent works can
be executed with safety.
The Engineer shall inform the Contractor in writing within 14 days after receipt of
the Contractor’s method statement either.
1. That the Contractor’s proposed methods have the consent of the Engineer; or
2. The proposed methods fail to meet the requirements of the contract.
In the latter event, the Contractor shall take such steps or make such changes in
the proposed methods as may be necessary to meet the Engineer’s requirements
and to obtain his consent. The Contractor shall not change the methods that have
received the Engineer’s consent without further consent in writing of the Engineer.
Works shall commence at such times when and not before the Engineer has given
his consent to the method of construction.
1.04.4 The Engineer shall inspect the installation of anchors and will monitor anchor
stressing acceptance tests to ensure the Contractor’s anchor design and
construction method will produce the suitable anchorage system in the soil/rock
conditions encountered on site.
The testing of concrete and grout shall be in accordance with Section 02068:
“CONCRETE”
02072 - 3
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
2.01.1 General Requirements:
The requirements listed in the following clauses shall apply, wherever relevant, to
materials used in all anchors except when otherwise agreed by the Engineer. The
handling, storage and use of materials shall comply with manufacturers’
instructions.
An anchor shall not contain materials that are mutually incompatible with each
other and the surrounding environment.
All anchors shall have a double corrosion protection.
2.01.2 Tendons:
Prestressing tendons shall comply with the following:
1. High tensile steel wire and wire strand with a minimum tensile strength of
1855 N/mm2;
2. Wire steel strand to JISG 3109 or ASSHTO M203/M203M (ASSTM
A416/A416A);
3. Hot rolled or hot rolled and processed high tensile alloy steel bars to
Steel wire and wire strand shall be in coils of sufficiently large diameter to ensure
that the steel wire and wire strand pay off straight.
Alloy steel bars shall be straight.
A certificate shall be submitted to the Engineer containing the following particulars

on the prestressing tendons:
1. The manufacturer’s name and the date and place of manufacture;

2. Cast analysis;
3. Diameter, cross sectional area and unit mass;
4. Results of test for mechanical properties, including the characteristic breaking
load, characteristic 0.1% proof load, elongation at maximum load, relaxation
and modulus of elasticity;
5. Results of tests for ductility of prestressing wires.
2.01.3 Cement grout:
Cement grout shall be as specified in ASTM C150.

Cement used for grouting anchors shall comply with Section 02068:
“CONCRETE”.
Grout shall consist of ordinary Portland cement and water with a water/cement
ratio of 0.40-0.45. Sand, PFA and high alumina cement shall not be used unless
02072 - 4
Water shall be taken from public supply of potable water.
2.01.4 Greases:
Then greases used shall be formulated and manufactured for the specific purpose
of corrosion protection and to provide lubrication to prestressed high tensile steel
tendons. Greases shall be water displacing, self-healing, thixotropic and shall be
resistant to microbiological degradation. The properties of grease shall be such
that, in the process of pumping, voids are filled and intimate contact is established
between the grease and all the steel surfaces of a strand or tendon.
Any grease to be used shall be accompanied by test certificates and shall be used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Different types of grease shall not be allowed to come into contact with each other
in any part of the anchor.
2.01.5 Plastics:
Sheathing, ducting and other plastic components for tendon protection shall be
made from high density thermoplastic material and the wall thickness shall be at
least 1.0mm.
The finished internal and external surfaces of the sheathing and ducting shall be
smooth, clean and free from flaws, pin holes, bubbles, cracks and other defects.
The material used shall be homogeneous, thermally stable and chemically inert
and shall be resistant to chemical, bacterial and fungal attack. Sheathing, ducting
and other plastic protective components shall not contain any substances that will
promote corrosion.
Plastic components shall be covered to prevent exposure to ultraviolet light from

direct or indirect sunlight.
All plastics to be used in an anchor shall be accompanied by test certificates and

shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
All plastics used in an anchor shall be resistant to slip in the region of the fixed
anchor length and shall be capable of withstanding the effect of load transfer.
The Contractor shall also provide the following information:
1. Product identification details (including name of manufacturer, brand name,

type and date of manufacture product);
2. Outer and inner diameter;
3. Wall thickness;
4. Amplitude and pitch, in mm, for corrugated sheathing or ducting;
5. Standard length in m;
6. Jointing details.
2.01.6 Metal Ducting:
Metal ducting shall only be used with the agreement of the Engineer.
02072 - 5
Metal ducting shall be suitable protected against corrosion, resistant to slip in the
region of the fixed anchor length, and capable of withstanding the effect of load
transfer.
The information specified in Clause 2.01.5 shall also be provided for metal
ducting.
2.01.7 Rubber Rings:
Rubber rings used in the corrosion protection system shall be manufactured from
materials which comply with BS 2494: 1990.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 DRILLING:
3.01.1 Holes for anchors shall be formed by drilling method. The drilling method used
shall be subjected to the agreement of the Engineer. Full temporary casing shall
be installed to maintain a clean and open shaft and prevent wash out of fines
outside the casing in all holes. Grouting shall be carried out with the temporary
casing inside the hole and after fresh grout emerge from the hole, then only the
temporary casing can be slowly retrieved while grouting continue. Any alternative
method shall be approved by the Engineer.
3.01.2 The drillholes shall be provided in accordance with the Drawings. The drillhole
entry point shall be positioned within a tolerance of + 75mm. Deviation in
alignment shall not exceed 1 in 30. Deviation from straight shall not exceed 20mm
in any 3m length of drillhole.
3.01.3 A record of all drilling procedures and times shall be recorded, which shall be
made available to the Engineer.
3.01.4 No drilling through the reinforcement of contiguous bored pile is allowed.
3.01.5 If the drillhole proves unacceptable, the Contractor shall seek instruction from the
Engineer as to whether the hole is to be grouted and redrill, re-provided as a
drainage hole or grouted and abandoned. Anchor shall be inserted within 24
hours of completion of the accepted drilling except where otherwise agreed by the
Engineer.
3.02 ANCHOR INSTALLATION:
3.02.1 All equipment used for handling and insertion of the anchor shall be such that will
not damage the anchor tendon and corrosion protection,
3.02.2 Grout tubes shall be flushed with water or compressed air.
02072 - 6
3.02.3 The anchor bonded lengths as indicated in the approved design submissions shall
be considered the minimum bonded lengths, and shall be located within the
specified bond zone of the anchorage stratum.
3.02.4 All anchors shall be installed through the casing.
3.02.5 A record showing the anchor type, length, position and installation date for each
anchor shall be maintained. The installation of anchor will be inspected or
witnessed by the Engineer on the following stages:
1. End of bore;
2. Insertion of tendon;
3. Grouting;
4. Completion of installation.
3.03 GROUTING:
3.03.1 Batching of the dry materials shall be by weight. The amount of water used shall
be measured by a calibrated flowmeter or a measuring tank.
3.03.2 The grout material shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer capable of impairing a
high shear action to the grout components so that a colloidal grout of uniform
consistency is produced in a mixing time of less than five minutes.
3.03.3 The grout mixing process shall utilise a recirculating system where the grout is
continuously discharged and recharged into mixing during the mixing period. After
mixing, the grout shall be kept continuously agitated.
3.03.4 The grout shall be passed through a nominal 1.2mm sieve prior to injection. The
grout shall be used as soon as possible after mixing and in any case within 30
minutes of adding cement unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer.
3.03.5 The pump used for grout injection shall be of the positive displacement type, i.e. it
shall be actuated by a piston or screw. A flowmeter and a pressure gauge shall be
provided. The Engineer’s approval of the equipment shall be obtained prior to its
use.
3.03.6 The grouting operation shall be undertaken within 24 hours of the anchor being
inserted except where otherwise agreed by the Engineer. The procedure adopted
shall ensure that there are no air or water inclusions left in the grouted zone.
3.03.7 The grouting pressure adopted shall be the minimum consistent with undertaking
the operation and shall avoid damage to surrounding buildings, land, structure,
street and services.
3.03.8 Grouting shall proceed at a slow, steady rate and shall continue until injected grout
of the same composition and consistency as that mixed has been emerging from
the outlet for at least one minute.
3.03.9 A record giving full details of the grouting operation for each anchor shall be
supplied to the Engineer prior to a request seeking his acceptance of the anchor.
02072 - 7
3.03.10 The primary grout shall be pumped into the anchor hole through a grout pipe
provided for that purpose until the hole is filled to the top of the anchorage zone.
The grout shall always be injected at the lowest point on the bond length. After
grouting, the hydrostatic pressure due to gravity of the grout body must be 0.02
N/mm2 per vertical meter.
3.03.11 The free stressing length shall be flushed-out to remove any access grout above
the bond length with specially provided flushing tubes.
3.03.12 After grouting, the anchors shall remain in an undisturbed condition until the
necessary grout strengths have been achieved.
3.03.13 The grout shall not remain in the mixer for a period exceeding 45 minutes.
3.04 CORROSION PROTECTION:
3.04.1 Tendon:
1. The tendon shall be given adequate corrosion protection which shall remain
effective throughout the design service life of the anchorage. The
effectiveness of the protection shall not be impaired during storage, transport,
installation and stressing of the anchorage. The steel shall not suffer
mechanical damage when the plastic sheathing is removed.
2. In the zone defined by the free tendon length, the corrosion protection shall
not affect the freedom of the tendon to expand.
3. Before the corrosion protection is applied, any substances (e.g. dirt, grease,
loose rust particles) likely to impair the serviceability of the tendon (e.g. bond
or corrosion resistance) shall be removed from its surface.
4. Prestressing steel tendons shall not develop more than rust bloom (a uniform
layer of rust without wide pitting, visible to the naked eye and removable by
wiping with a dry cloth) up to the time the anchorage is installed. Prestressing
steel and preassembled anchorages shall be stored in a dry place.
3.04.2 Joints in Tendon:
The corrosion protective system applied to the joint assembly shall be at least
equivalent to that given to the free tendon length and shall not hinder deformation
of the tendon.
3.04.3 Anchor Head:
The anchor head shall be protected against corrosion. The end cap for protection
of the anchor head shall be made of galvanised or stainless steel. The corrosion
protection between anchor head and the proximal end of the plastic sheathing in
the zone defined by the free tendon length shall include the seal at the proximal
end. If anchorages require restressing or inspection during the service life, care
shall be taken to ensure that regrouting at the anchor head is possible.
02072 - 8
3.04.4 Waler:
All the steel components of waler beam, anchor head and bracket system shall be
galvanised steel.
3.05 CORROSION PROTECTION:
3.05.1 Proof of suitable of the corrosion protection system shall be provided for
permanent anchorages.
This proof shall among other things:
1. Provide information on whether the components of the corrosion protection

system are compatible.
2. State that the system provides a degree of corrosion protection equivalent to

that of proven systems.
3. State that the corrosion-protective agent will not adversely affect the
properties of the tendon neither during its application nor subsequently under
service conditions.
4. State that the protection of the tendon extends over the full length of the
sheathing and the tendon is tightly sealed.
5. State that the anchored zone the corrosion protection does not affect the
freedom of the tendon to expand.
3.05.2 The corrosion protection of the tendon and the anchorage components shall be
factory-applied.
3.05.3 For corrugated sheath, the grout cover in the anchorage zone shall be 10mm
minimum, and the same thickness being required for compression anchorages.
- END OF SECTION -
02072 - 9
SECTION 04001
TUNNELLING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
1.01.1 This section covers the requirements for constructing, furnishing, delivery, placing,
jointing, installing, finishing and all other works as required for completion of the
railway tunnel works (NOTOG and KEBASEN).

Section 02031 “GRASSING”
Section 02067 “STEEL STRUCTURES”
Section 05018 “TRACK LAYING ON SLAB TRACK”
• ASTM – American Society for Testing and Materials:
A 36 Standard Specifications for Carbon Structural Steel;

A 82 Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement;
A 185 Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain for Concrete;
A 615 Standard Specifications for Deformed and Plain Carbon – Steel
Bars for Concrete Reinforcement;
C 31 Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test
Specimens in the Field;
C 33 Concrete Aggregates;
C 39 Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens;
C 117-04 Test Method for Materials Finer than 75-x03BC, m (No. 200) Sieve
in Mineral Aggregates by Washing;
C 138 Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air Content
(Gravimetric) of Concrete;
C 150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement;
C 172 Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete;
C 227-10 Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of
Cement-Aggregate Combinations (Mortal-Bar Method);
04001 - 1
C 231 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete
by the Pressure Method;
C 233 Standard Test Method for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete;
C 260 Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete;
C 494 Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete;
D 2412-11 Standard Test Method for Determination of External Loading
Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading;
D 345-02 Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Calcium Chloride
for Roads and Structural Applications;
D 4595-09 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Geotextiles by the
Wide-Width Strip Method;
D 4632-08 Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of
Geotextiles;
D 4533-11 Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of
Geotextiles; and
D 4751-04 Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of
Geotextiles.
• AASHTO – American Association of State Highway and Transportation

Officials:
T026-79-UL Method of Test for Quality of Water to Be Used in Concrete; and
M031 Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for
Concrete.
• ACI – American Concrete Institute:
304R-00 Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete;

305R-10 Guide to Hot Weather Concreting;
308R-01 Guide to Curing Concrete;
309R-05 Guide for Consolidation of Concrete; and
318-11 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and
Commentary.
• AWS - American Welding Society:
D11.2-8 Guide for Welding Iron.
• JIS - Japanese Industrial Standards:
A 1102 Method of Test for Sieve Analysis of Aggregate;

A 1103 Method of Test for Fine Particle passing 0.074 mm Sieve;
A 1104 Method of Test for Bulk Density of Aggregates and Solid Content
in Aggregates;
A 1105 Method of Test for Organic Impurities in the Aggregate;
A 1108 Method of Test for Compressive Strength of Concrete;
A 1109 Method of Test for Density and Water Absorption of Fine
Aggregates;
A 1111 Method of Test for Surface Moisture in the Aggregate;
A 1115 Method of Sampling Fresh Concrete;
A 1121 Method of Test for Resistance to Abrasion of Coarse Aggregate by
Use of the Los Angeles Machine;
A 1122 Method of Test for Soundness of Aggregate by Use of Sodium
Sulfate;
04001 - 2
A 1218 Method of Test for Soil Permeability;

A 5372 Precast Reinforced Concrete Products;
A 5751 Oil Based Caulking Compound for Buildings;
A 5758 Sealants for Sealing and Glazing in Buildings;
A 6204 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete;
G 3101 Rolled Steels for General Structure;
G 3112 Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement;
G 3444 Carbon steel tubes for general structural Purposes;
G 3452 Carbon Steel Pipes for Ordinary Piping;
G 3471 Corrugated Steel Pipes and Sections;
G 3551 Welded Steel Wire and Bar Fabrics
K 6252 Rubber, Vulcanized or Thermoplastic – Determination of Tear
Strength;
K 6741 Unplasticized Poly (vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipes;
K 6761 Polyethylene Pipes for General Purposes;
K 6773 PVC Water-stop Strips;
K 6922-1 Plastic-Polyethylene (PE) Moulding and Extrusion Materials – Part
1: Designation System and Basis for Specifications;
L 1096 Testing Method for Woven and Knitted Fabrics; and
R 5210 Portland Cement.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

1.03.1 Before Construction:
Before starting construction of new tunnels, safety surveillance shall be carried out
as follows:
1. General:
As to assessment of the influence of new tunnels’ excavation on the existing

tunnels, it was found out that deformations of the existing tunnels are
infinitesimal extent. However, due consideration should be given to safety of
train operations on the existing track. Consequently, investigation before
construction and daily surveillance must be carried out to identify any
unforeseen adverse conditions during the construction period.
2. Cleaning of Existing KEBASEN Tunnel:
Prior to the excavation of the new KEBASEN tunnel, the Contractor shall clean
the surface of the adjacent existing tunnel lining to detect deformation, cracks,
leakage of the tunnel. The Contractor shall prepare and submit a deformation,
cracks, leakage development diagram (drawing) to the Engineer after
observation and measurement of the locations and extent of the defective
linings.
Sixty three (63) days before cleaning work commence, the Contractor shall
prepare and submit detailed work plan comprising a work schedule, work
method, and equipment to be used to the Engineer for his approval.
04001 - 3
For the cleaning, the Contractor shall take due precautions to prevent
accumulation of dust inside the tunnel so as not to cause any interference to
train operations. Where any irregularities found on the surface of the tunnel
lining during the cleaning, the Contractor shall immediately report to the
Engineer, and a remedial step shall be submitted to the Engineer for his
approval.
Site lighting system for work sites and areas where observations and
measurements are to be conducted shall comply with the requirements under
Clause 1.06-5 “Lighting System” bellow or otherwise directed by the Engineer.
However, illumination shall be tuned off during the passage of trains. Also, any
facilities for the cleaning of the tunnel lining shall not interfere with the
construction gauge.
3. Establishment of Control Standard:
Displacement measurements of both new tunnels and the existing KEVASEN

tunnel shall be taken to provide a base control standard.
The following warning level comprises three steps, which must be adapted as
necessary to suit the control standard to actual conditions on site.
The control standard values are set out as follows or as approved by the
Engineer:
- Existing KEBASEN Tunnel:
Crown Displacement: 5 mm
Horizontal Displacement: 10 mm
- New Tunnels
Crown displacement: 20 mm
Horizontal displacement: 40 mm
Warning Level and Action Required

Warning Level Action Aim of Warning Level
I Confirm the measured value and ½ of allowable value
notify the section in charge
II Increase the measuring and ¾ of allowable value
discuss countermeasures
III Stable the excavated area, stop Allowable value
new excavation and implement
countermeasures
These control standard values are established based on the past record, which
need to be adjusted as necessary analyzing actual record of displacements and
change in surrounding environment during construction.
04001 - 4
1.03.2 During Construction:
Observations and Measurements:

During the construction of new tunnels, the following observations and
measurements shall be carried out:
New NOTOG AND & KEBASEN Tunnels Existing KEBASEN Tunnel

Observation of inside of tunnel Observation of tunnel lining
Crown and wall displacement Crown and wall displacement
Ground settlement above tunnel
1.03.3 After Construction:
After completion of construction of new tunnels and removal of all tracks inside the
existing tunnels, steel fences shall be installed at four (4) entrances of the existing
tunnels. The steel fences shall have a height more than two (2) meters for
preventing people entering the tunnel without permission. The steel fences shall
have a door with a door lock from outside.
After completion of construction of new tunnels and tunnel portal walls, the painting
and decoration of six (6) portal walls and the installation of marks, signs and
signboards shall be carried out. The design of tunnel portals, marks and signs shall
be submitted to the Engineer for his approval before carrying out the works.
1.03.4 Instrumentation:
1. General:
The Contractor shall furnish, install, maintain and take readings of instruments
for the measurement of ground settlement and displacement of new tunnels and
the existing KEBASEN tunnel.
The instruments to be supplied, installed and maintained shall include, but not
limited to, electronic theodolite with an integrated coaxial electro-optical
distance-measuring system (total station), reflex targets.
All readings and measurements shall be taken by the Contractor to monitor

displacements of new tunnels and the existing KEBASEN tunnel, and ground
settlements around the new tunnels in order to evaluate ground stability. The
data shall be submitted to the Engineer on a daily basis. The Engineer may
direct adjustment of support elements or modifications to the excavation plan on
the basis of the measured data.
Damaged or missing instruments shall be repaired or replaced by the

Contractor as soon as possible at no additional cost to the Employer.
The following various measurements shall be made to the new tunnels and the
existing KEBASEN tunnel to detect ground movements and underground
opening displacement:
04001 - 5
2. Observation of New Tunnels and Existing KEBASEN Tunnel:
The Contractor shall observe conditions of inside of new tunnels and the
existing KEBASEN tunnel subject to the following provisions and/or others as
instructed and approved by the Engineer so as to assure safety in tunnels, and
judge the appropriateness of the construction method of support, and shall
notify the results of observation to the Engineer.
Observation and inspection shall be performed mainly around new tunnel faces
and the existing lining surface every day, in order to grasp the geotechnical
conditions and inspect the effects of the support.
Observation and inspection results such as geotechnical conditions (rock type,

strike and dip of strata, fault seam, etc.), water leakage and deformation of
support shall be arranged in figures and submitted to the Engineer once a
month for his review.
3. Measurement of Crown and Wall Displacement of New Tunnels:
The Contractor shall supply and install reflex targets on shotcrete of new tunnels
in the pattern shown on the Drawing or as directed by the Engineer. The reflex
targets shall be installed as soon as practicable after excavated opening was
supported and lined with shotcrete. Measurement shall be taken at intervals of
10 to 20 meters along the length of the tunnel, with five (5) measurement points
per section.
The measurement of crown and wall displacement is to monitor a change in size

of the tunnel, and the effectiveness of primary supports.
Reflex targets shall be securely attached to shotcrete surface and located as

shown on the Drawing or directed by the Engineer. The total station shall be
used to measure the change in size of the tunnel during underground
excavation work.
Reflex targets shall be of approved non-corrosive material, and shall be

installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Measuring device
shall be an electronic theodolite with an integrated coaxial electro-optical
distance-measuring system (Total Station) or other equivalent device. The
device to be used shall be proposed by the Contractor and approved by the
Engineer.
Measuring shall be made at once or twice daily until the heading has advanced
a distance of five times the tunnel width or otherwise directed by the Engineer
and weekly thereafter until the final underground excavation lining is
constructed.
4. Measurement of Crown and Wall Displacement of Existing KEBASEN Tunnel:
The Contractor shall supply and install reflex targets on the lining of the existing
tunnel in the pattern shown on the Drawing or as directed by the Engineer.
Measurement shall be taken at intervals of 10 to 20 meters along the length of
the tunnel, with seven (7) measurement points per section.
04001 - 6
The measurement of crown and wall displacement is to monitor a change in size

of the tunnel induced by the excavation of the new tunnel.
Reflex targets shall be securely attached to the existing lining surface prior
construction, and located as shown on the Drawing or directed by the Engineer.
The total station shall be used to measure the change in size of the tunnel
during the construction work for the adjacent new tunnel.
Reflex targets shall be of approved non-corrosive material, and shall be

installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Measuring device
shall be an electronic theodolite with an integrated coaxial electro-optical
distance-measuring system (Total Station) or other equivalent device. The
device to be used shall be proposed by the Contractor and approved by the
Engineer.
Measuring shall be made at once or twice daily until the heading has advanced
a distance of three (3) times the tunnel width or otherwise directed by the
Engineer and weekly thereafter until the final underground excavation lining is
constructed.
5. Measurement of Ground Surface Settlement above New Tunnels:
The Contractor shall supply, a levelling instrument (auto-level) and levelling

staffs for measurement of the ground surface settlement above the new tunnels
at the locations as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
Measurement shall be taken at intervals of 5 meters along the length of the
tunnel where overburden depth is less than the width of tunnel (D), 10 meters
where overburden depth is from D to 2D, with at least five (5) measurement
points per section. The measurement section shall perpendicular to the tunnel
advance direction.
The measurement of ground surface settlements is to monitor the effects of

tunnel excavation to the surrounding ground and structures.
Ground surface settlement measurement shall be made once daily before and
until the heading has advance a distance of three (3) times the tunnel width or
as directed by the Engineer and weekly thereafter until the final underground
excavation lining is constructed.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
The Contractor shall submit the following documents/reports to the Engineer for his
review and approval.
1.04.1 Before Construction:
(1) Detailed plan for driving excavation and support. The excavation and support
plan may be revised by the Contractor during the progress of work depending
on actual physical and/or geological conditions encountered, and the revised
plan shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval. An alternative plan may
be submitted to the Engineer for his approval to perform the required work in the
case of the failure of machinery used.
04001 - 7
(2) Shop Drawings and other necessary documents requested by the Engineer.
(3) A complete description of the proposed equipment together with documentation

certifying the previous successful performance of the equipment for the
excavation of a tunnel of similar dimensions and under similar geological
conditions.
(4) An outline of the arrangement of machinery, equipment and facilities, the

system of excavation and hauling, and the progress schedule in construction
period.
(5) Manufacturer’s specifications, installation/operation manuals and instructions

for the following products including laboratory test reports and other data as
required to show the compliance with specified requirements:
- Structural steel (rock bolts), including certified copies of mill reports covering
chemical and physical properties;
- High strength bolts, including nuts and washers;
- Unfinished bolts and nuts;
- Structural steel primer paint; and
- Manufacturer’s data on other waterproofing membrane, geotextile sheets,
ground water discharging hoses, and any other products and materials
deemed necessary for the work.
(6) Fourteen (14) days prior to waterproofing work, a dewatering plan to discharge
groundwater leakage to outside the tunnel.
(7) Plans and detailed drawings of his temporary electric power supply system, and
temporary power distribution system.
1.04.2 During Construction:
Locations of face at the start and the end, survey results, details of rock support
installed, men and plant engaged, elapsed time for tunnel works and unusual
occurrences.
1. Daily reports covering the previous day’s work. This report shall include but not
limited to:
- Advance face;
- At start and end of rounds;
- Cross section and results of any observation and measurement made;
- Details of rock support installed, including rock bolts, shotcrete, steel wire
mesh reinforcement, steel support, concrete, and any other material used;
- Number and classification of men and equipment engaged in each operation;
- Elapsed time for each of the operations: moving and set-up of machine,
mucking, installation of supports, extending services (vent-line, water lines,
etc.), downtime delays;
- Total cycle time per round;
- Unusual occurrence, rock-falls, zones of instability, inflow of water,
occurrence of gas, and any accident sustained by workmen;
- Safety programs against rock-falls, displacement or settlement of any
04001 - 8
material surrounding excavated hollow space, and flammable and toxic

gases; and
- Measurement Results implemented during construction.
1. Delivery and Storage:
Deliver all materials to the job site properly marked to identify the structure for
which it is intended.
2. Replacements:
In the event that delivered materials were damaged, immediately make all
repairs and replacements necessary for the acceptance of the Engineer at no
additional cost.
1.06 TEMPORARY FACILITIES REQUIRED DURING CONSTRUCTION:
1. Electric Power Supply and Distribution System:
The Contractor shall provide for his own use all necessary temporary electrical
equipment and materials such as diesel generator units, transformers,
switch-gear, protective equipment, meters and distribution lines to surface and
tunnel work sites and temporary buildings, including staff quarters and labour
camps. A concrete batching plant shall be provided by the Contractor at
locations adjacent to the work-site from which concrete can be supplied without
delay.
2. Water Supply System:
The Contractor will be permitted to take water from a well or from a local river for
his own use free of charge, however, shall at all times keep his use of water to
the minimum.
Temporary water supply system shall be operated and maintained by the

Contractor until Taking-Over certificate is issued or such a longer period as may
be directed by the Engineer.
The Contractor’s method of storage of water for construction purpose shall be in

accordance with the proposals as approved by the Engineer
3. Stockyard:
Ample areas shall be secured for stockpiling all products, equipment, tools and
materials required for tunnel works at location(s) readily accessible to the work
site. Watchmen shall be deployed throughout the project life to prevent
materials from pilferage.
04001 - 9
4. Ventilation for Excavation:
The Contractor shall provide, install and maintain an appropriate ventilation

system for the tunnel works. The volume of required fresh air shall be largely
calculated. The following requirements shall apply to construction sites.
The air breathed by persons in sites shall contain not less than 17 percent of
oxygen, and shall not contain a concentration of contaminants such as gases,
vapours and dust greater than safe amount for their health, having regard to the
combined effects of several contaminants.
The ventilation system shall be of a sufficient capacity to maintain an air velocity

of not less than 15 m/min. in the construction sites. Particular care shall be
taken to prevent the stagnation of air. The design of the ventilation system shall
provide for the type and size of all equipment suitable for the site, as well as for
the safe hygienic limits for exposure of workers to any multiple toxic and
objectionable gases that may occur in the site.
For each person working in the tunnel construction sites, a minimum amount of
3 m3/min. of fresh air shall be provided.
Where diesel powered equipment is used in the site, the minimum quantity of
fresh air to be supplied shall be 3 m3 /min., for each kW of power employed
within the site in addition to the requirements for personnel.
During excavation work, the ventilation system and the ventilation duct shall be
terminated not more than 30 meters from the face. Use of internal combustion
engines burning gasoline or liquefied petroleum gases, propane, butane,
propylene, butylenes shall be expressly forbidden.
The Contractor shall submit, for approval, proof from prospective supplier of
diesel powered equipment for use inside a tunnel that the proposed equipment
conforms to the requirements of approved mining standards.
5. Lighting System:
The Contractor shall provide the following illumination in the construction sites.
- Design illumination – 100 lux

- Minimum measured illumination – 60 lux
All power and lighting wires shall be adequately insulated, securely installed
and regularly checked for any damage.
6. Temporary Drainage System:
The Contractor shall supply, install, maintain and operate all necessary
diversions, pumping and other equipment to remove water from the site, and
discharge water to the outside.
Where water bearing away seams (layers) or broken ground occurs, a means of
relieving or controlling the flow of water into the tunnel, such as relief hoses,
shall be provided before installation of the outer lining shotcrete. Care shall be
04001 - 10
taken to avoid plugging relief hose during shotcrete.
7. Temporary Waste Water Treatment System:
The Contractor shall supply, install, maintain and operate all necessary facilities
and equipment to treat waste water from construction site. The quality of waste
water shall be monitored and treated to keep its quality under Indonesian
environmental standards before discharging to the outside.
PART 2: PRODUCT
2.01 MATERIALS:
1. Rolled Steel Bolts:
Comply with ASTM A36 except where otherwise applicable.
2. Reinforcing Bars:
Comply with ASTM A615 or JIS G 3112, SD 345.
3. Rock Bolts and Forepoling Bolts:
Rock bolts and filling-type forepoling bolts shall be 25 mm in nominal diameter

of high yield deformed steel bar complying with SD 345 of JIS G 3112, or
equivalent quality as approved by the Engineer, and be of the type as shown on
the Drawings.
The rock bolts and forepoling bolts shall be threaded at one end and pointed at
the other to facilitate the placing operation.
The respective lengths of rock bolts or filling-type forepoling bolts and their
capacities are shown on the Drawings. The Engineer may direct variations of
the length and capacity depending on the site rock conditions.
4. Long Steel Pipe Forepoling (LSPF) Bolts:
The LSPF bolts shall have an inner diameter more than 114.3 mm in nominal
diameter of carbon steel tube complying with STK400 of JIS G 3444 or
equivalent quality material as approved by the Engineer and be of the type as
5. Grouting Material for LSPF Bolts:
Grouting material shall be of silica-resin type of material that has the following
properties:
- Foaming Ratio: 4 - 8 times

- Compressive Strength (N/mm2): 3.9 ±0.5 (foaming ratio: 3 times)
04001 - 11
6. Cement:
Comply with the requirements in Section 02068: “CONCRETE”.
7. Aggregates:
Comply with the requirements in Section 02068: “CONCRETE” for both coarse
and fine aggregates.
8. Water:
Comply with the requirements in Section 02068: “Concrete.”
9. Admixtures:
Comply with the requirements in ASTM C260 or JIS A 6204 for air entraining
agents. The use of special cement or admixture shall be approved by the
Engineer even when used by the Contractor at his own expense. The use of the
admixture shall be proved harmless to the work crew.
10. Shortcrete:
Generally, the quality of cement, coarse aggregates, fine aggregates and water
for shotcrete shall comply with the requirements in section 02068:
“CONCRETE.”
In particularly, the fine aggregates shall be uniformly graded and have the finest
modulus in the range of 2.8~3.2. The maximum size of aggregates shall be
10~15 mm. The grading of coarse and sand aggregates shall be determined to
satisfy the design criteria by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
11. Steel Wire Mesh:
Comply with JIS G 3551, Welded Wire Mesh of 5.0 mm in diameter with 150 mm
opening, or equivalent quality as approved by the Engineer.
12. Steel Arch Support:
Comply with JIS 3101, Grade SS400 steel or equivalent quality as approved,
and to the shapes as shown on the Drawings.
13. Waterproof Membrane:
Waterproof membrane shall be Ethylene Vinyl Acetate (EVA) polymer sheet in

the thickness of 0.8 mm bonded with Polypropylene or Polyester non-woven
permeable fabric in the thickness of 3 mm.
- EVA polymer seat shall comply with the requirements in JIS K6773 for
specific gravity, hardness, tensile strength, elongation, softening temperature
and chemical resistance, and with JIS K 6252 for tear strength or equivalent
quality as approved by the Engineer.
- Polypropylene or Polyester non-woven permeable fabric shall comply with

04001 - 12
the requirements in JIS L 1096, for thickness, tensile strength, elongation,

tear strength, and with JIS A 1218 for permeability or equivalent quality as
14. Drainage Filter Mat (Polyester, Mono-filament, Non-woven Fabric):
The filter mat shall comply with the requirements in JIS L 1096 for thickness,
tensile strength, elongation, tear strength, and with JIS A 1218 for permeability
or equivalent quality as approved by the Engineer. (Considering the impact at
time of placing lining concrete, resistance strength shall be more than 75 kN/m2
at a compression ratio of 20%).
15. Drain Pipes:
- Steel Drain Pipes and Fittings:
Comply with JIS G3452, Carbon Steel Pipes for Ordinary Piping, or
equivalent as approved.
- Corrugated Steel Pipe:
Comply with JIS-G3471, Corrugated Steel Pipes and Sections or equivalent

quality as approved.
- Reinforced Concrete Drain Pipe:
Comply with JIS A5372, Precast Reinforced Concrete Products, or

equivalent quality as approved.
- PVC Drain Pipes:
Comply with JIS K6741, Unplasticized Poly (vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipes or
equivalent quality as approved.
- HDPE (High Density Polyethylene) Drain Pipes:
Comply with JIS K 6922-1, Plastics – Polyethylene moulding and extrusion

materials – Part 1: Designation System and Basis for Specifications, JIS K
6761 and ASTM D 2412 or equivalent quality as approved.
16. Soil Cement:
Cement to be used for producing soil cement shall be in accordance with JIS R
5210: “Portland Cement”.
Standard mixing ratio of the cement and soil are as follows:
Design Compressive Cement/1.0m3 of

Strength Soil
1 N/mm2 100kg
Actual mixing ratio of the cement with dug soil at site shall be examined so that
04001 - 13
required compressive strength of the soil cement equal to 1.0 N/mm2 can be
obtained. Selected mixing ratio shall be approved by the Engineer.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 CONSTRUCTION:
3.01.1 Underground Excavation:
1. General:
The tunnel excavation shall be carried out in accordance with the principles of
the New Austrian Tunnelling Method (NATM).
The term “Underground Excavation” means all required excavation for tunnel,
refuge niches and other underground structures other than open-cut excavation
to establish tunnel.
The underground excavation shall be carried out by “mechanical excavation”;

drilling and blasting shall not be used because the adjacent existing tunnel is
most likely adversely affected.
2. Cross Section Design:
Underground excavation shall be carried out to the lines as shown on the

Drawings or as established by the Engineer.
The pay-line as shown on the Drawings are the outside limits to which
measurement for payment of excavation shall be made, and measurement for
payment shall in all cases be made for the pay-line regardless of whether the
limits of the actual excavation fall inside or outside of the pay-line as long as
designed cross section is obtained.
3. Support Pattern Type:
The support patterns for supporting excavated ground along the tunnel shall be
classified into the following ten (10) types, as shown in the Drawings:
(1) NOTOG Tunnel
- Type A-N:
Type A-N pattern is for supporting the excavation through IIN and IN-2
class rocks which are generally stable. The support members are eight
(8) rock bolts and min. 100-mm thickness of shotcrete with steel wire
mesh. Rock bolts shall be installed at the interval of 1.5 m in the
longitudinal direction.
04001 - 14
- Type B-N:
Type B-N pattern is for supporting the excavation through IN-2 class
rock. The support members are ten (10) rock bolts, H125-type steel
supports at upper sections, and min. 125-mm thickness of shotcrete
with steel wire mesh. Rock bolts, and steel supports shall be installed
at the interval of 1.2 m in the longitudinal direction.
- Type C-N:
Type C-N pattern is for supporting the excavation through IN-2 class
rock. The support members are fourteen (14) rock bolts, H125-type
steel supports at upper and lower sections, and min. 150-mm
thickness of shotcrete with steel wire mesh. Rock bolts, and steel
supports shall be installed at the interval of 1.0 m in the longitudinal
direction.
- Type D-N:
Type D-N pattern is for supporting the excavation through IN-2 class
rock. The support members are eight (8) rock bolts, nineteen point five
(19.5) forepoling bolts, H150-type steel supports at upper and lower
sections, and min. 150-mm thickness of shotcrete with steel wire mesh.
Rock bolts, forepoling bolts, and steel supports shall be installed at the
interval of 1.0 m in the longitudinal direction.
- Type SP-N1:
Type SP-N1 pattern is for supporting the excavation through Is class

rock and tunnel portal. The support members are eight (8) rock bolts,
twenty point five (20.5) forepoling bolts, H150-type steel supports at
upper and lower sections, and min. 150-mm thickness of shotcrete with
steel wire mesh. Rock bolts, forepoling bolts, and steel supports shall
be installed at the interval of 1.0 m in the longitudinal direction.
- Type SP-N2:
Type SP-N2 pattern is for supporting the excavation through Is class

rock and tunnel portal. The support members are eight (8) rock bolts,
twenty-Five (25) long steel pipe forepoling bolts, H150-type steel
supports at upper and lower sections, and min. 150-mm thickness of
shotcrete with steel wire mesh and 100-mm thickness of face shotcrete.
Rock bolts and steel supports shall be installed at the interval of 1.0 m
in the longitudinal direction. Long steel pipe forepoling bolts shall be
installed at the interval of 9.0 m in the longitudinal direction.
(2) KEBASEN Tunnel
- Type B-K:
Type B-K pattern is for supporting the excavation through IIN - IN-2
class rock and IIN – IN-1 class rock which are generally stable. The
04001 - 15
support members are ten (10) rock bolts, H125-type steel supports at
upper section, and min. 125-mm thickness of shotcrete with steel wire
mesh. Rock bolts and steel supports shall be installed at the interval of
1.2 m in the longitudinal direction.
- Type C-K:
Type C-K pattern is for supporting the excavation through IN-2 class
rock. The support members are fourteen (14) rock bolts, H125-type
steel supports at upper and lower sections, and min. 150-mm
thickness of shotcrete with steel wire mesh. Rock bolts and steel
supports shall be installed at the interval of 1.0 m in the longitudinal
direction.
- Type D-K:
Type D-K pattern is for supporting the excavation through IL class rock.
The support members are eight (8) rock bolts, nineteen point five
(19.5) forepoling bolts, H150-type steel supports at upper and lower
sections, and min. 150-mm thickness of shotcrete with steel wire mesh.
Rock bolts, forepoling bolts, and steel supports shall be installed at the
interval of 1.0 m in the longitudinal direction.
- Type SP-K:
Type SP-K pattern is for supporting the excavation through IL class

rock and tunnel portals. The support members are eight (8) rock bolts,
twenty point five (20.5) forepoling bolts, H150-type steel supports at
upper and lower sections, and min. 150-mm thickness of shotcrete with
steel wire mesh. Rock bolts, forepoling bolts and steel supports shall
be installed at the interval of 1.0 m in the longitudinal direction.
4. Determination of Support Pattern Type:
Initial determination of the support pattern type encountered shall be agreed

between the Engineer and the Contractor according to the conditions exposed
in the freshly excavated opening.
A change in support pattern type shall be determined only if there is a significant

change in the types and quantities of the primary support means required.
The Contractor shall regularly monitor support elements with instruments and
observations of the tunnel. The results of measurements shall be made
available and reported to the Engineer.
Any additional support materials taken by the Contractor other than support
materials shown on the Drawings or stated on the Bill of Quantities, or agreed to
or ordered by the Engineer shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
04001 - 16
5. Excavation Procedures:
Bench cut method shall be the typical excavation method for tunnel excavation;
in addition, other proper excavation procedures shall be adopted to accomplish
the designed cross section when encountered unstable material to be
excavated or unexpected conditions of the face.
During the excavation work, the Contractor shall, at his full responsibility,
maintain the lines shown on the Drawings by accurate surveying as approved
by the Engineer.
All excavation shall be carefully performed. The Contractor shall use

mechanical excavation techniques which will produce a smooth final profile with
minimum over-breakage by minimizing the extent of stressing or fracturing rock.
At least fourteen (14) days before the work, the Contractor shall submit his
detailed mechanical excavation plan to the Engineer for approval.
All plans shall be subject to review by the Engineer. This review shall not relieve
the Contractor of his complete responsibility for methods, means, procedures,
accuracy, adequacy and safety of the mechanical excavation, exercising proper
supervision and field judgement, and producing the design lines specified
herein.
Any and all over-excavation performed by the Contractor for any purpose or
reason, except as may be directed, and due to the fault of the Contractor shall
be at the expense of the Contractor. The Engineer may direct that all such
over-excavation shall be backfilled with shotcrete or concrete and the cost of
furnishing and placing the backfill shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
6. Mucking:
All excavated soil and rock shall be disposed of with reasonable measures or
stockpiled in spoil banks as directed by the Engineer.
During mucking, muck-pile shall be wetted down with fine water sprays, if it’s
required.
3.01.2 Primary Supports of Underground Excavations:
1. General:
The Contractor shall furnish and install primary support for the underground
excavations as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
Primary support shall consist of individual elements such as shotcrete, steel

wire mesh, grouted rock bolts, forepoling bolts, steel supports and temporary
supports, or combination thereof.
Measures will be related to chosen heading procedure, the rock type and the
results of crown and wall displacement measurements. The routine installation
of support elements in conjunction with excavation work is an integral part of the
NATM, with the ability to vary the support elements to suit the exposed ground
conditions.
04001 - 17
The support elements described elsewhere and shown on the Drawings for any
particular rock type are to be taken as typical and may be varied in quantity
and/or thickness as approved or directed by the Engineer to suit the actual
exposed ground conditions.
Primary support shall be installed immediately after completion of each round of
the tunnel excavation.
Where ground condition so warrants installation of support, the Engineer may

direct the Contractor to install support up to the face from muck-pile immediately
after excavation and the Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional
payment for complying with such directions.
The Contractor shall maintain on the site an adequate supply of the various
support elements for the excavation of the work, and delay due to lack of
support elements shall not give the Contractor any rights to claim for extension
of completion dates.
2. Grouted Rock Bolts and Forepoling Bolts:
- General:
The Contractor shall furnish and install grouted rock bolts and forepoling
bolts in underground excavation as shown on the Drawings or as directed by
the Engineer. Rock bolts and forepoling bolts complete with all required
accessories including bearing plates, nuts, washers, filling and grouting
materials shall be supplied by the Contractor. The use of chemical resin
anchors or cement grout anchors shall be subject to approval by the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall plan his equipment and operations for underground
excavation so that routine installation of rock bolts can be carried out as
excavation proceeds at the face.
The installation of grouted rock bolts and forepoling bolts shall be under the
direct supervision of personnel having at least two (2) years of experience in
rock bolting works. The Contractor shall keep on site, ready for immediate
use, a sufficient stock of rock bolts and accessories to avoid delay to the
work.
- Installation of Pattern:
Rock bolts and forepoling bolts shall be installed in conformity to patterns in

underground excavation in order to form structural entities. The required
patterns with rock bolts and forepoling bolts shall be installed as shown on
the Drawings, or as directed by the Engineer.
The rock bolts and forepoling bolts, and methods of installation in

underground excavation, including the drill hole diameter and length, and the
details of the equipment necessary to drill the hole, to clean out the drilled
hole, to install and grout the rock bolts in the hole and to test the anchorage,
shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, manual subject
to approval by the Engineer.
04001 - 18
When rock bolt or forepoling bolt support is directed, the hole shall be drilled
and cleaned out, and the rock bolts and forepoling bolts shall then be
installed without delay. The forepoling bolts shall be installed before the next
excavation.
Standard percussion drilling equipment may be used for drilling rock bolt and
forepoling bolt holes. The holes shall be drilled to the size and depth
recommended by the manufacturer’s instructions or manual approved by the
Engineer.
- Testing of Rock Bolt Installations:
The Engineer will select rock bolts for pullout tests, and the Contractor shall
test such bolts using a calibrated hydraulic jack. All tests shall be witnessed
by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide and maintain the tools,
equipment and labour to perform these tests. As an average, one bolt in 200
of the rock bolts installed shall be tested. The tests should be performed
more than 3 days after installing a rock bolt, at tunnel crown or tunnel spring
line or other positions which are instructed by the Engineer.
The pullout strength shall be at a level equivalent to the yield strength of the
rock bolt (usually, yield strength of the thread portion). The rock bolt could be
judged to be adequate, if it exhibits about 80% of the stipulated pullout
strength. Any rock bolt which does not meet the test shall be rejected. The
decision whether to replace defective rock bolts shall be made by the
Engineer.
Prior to installing the bolts, the rock surface shall be prepared for accepting
the washer plates. Such prepared bearing surfaces shall be normal to the
axes of the holes and if necessary tapered plates or washers shall be used.
When requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall check the installed
bolts by pullout test. In case of a significant load decrease, the bolts shall be
re-tensioned to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Where necessary, rock bolts may be used in conjunction with small steel
beams, steel plates, lagging or wire netting. The wire net shall be of welded
wire type in accordance with approved standards.
Each permanent rock bolts shall be provided with two independent forms of
protection against corrosion at all points of the entire surface of the
completed installation. The Contractor shall submit his proposal for corrosion
protection to the Engineer for his approval.
To carry out the excavation work without delay, the Contractor shall always
have stockpile of sufficient quantities of rock bolts of various types and
length, wire mesh and other accessories.
04001 - 19
3. Shotcrete:
- General:
The Contractor shall apply shotcrete to crown and wall of underground

excavation as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
Shotcrete shall mean concrete with or without admixture, pneumatically
applied at high velocity onto a prepared rock surface. Both dry-process and
wet-process methods shall be used.
Where shotcrete support is required, the Contractor shall apply shotcrete in

conformity to the thickness shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer. The thickness required on the Drawings and Specifications are the
minimum thickness of the shotcrete layer as measured over rock points.
Successive layers shall be placed to achieve the required support thickness.
- Design Strength:
The compressive strength shall be satisfied as follows:
24 hours: 5.0 N/mm2 minimum; and

28 days: 18.0 N/mm2 minimum.
- Mix Proportions:
The Contractor shall propose the mix proportion of shotcrete for the approval
of the Engineer together with the data enough for the Engineer to make
judgement. And if directed, the adjustment of mix proportion shall be
proposed by the Contractor.
The table below gives the reference values for mix proportions of shotcrete.
Item Unit Standard value

Max. size of aggregates mm 10~15
Finest modulus of sand 2.8~3.2
Slump: pumping type cm 8±2
air type cm 14±2
Water-cement ratio (W/C) % 50~60
Sand-aggregate ratio (s/a) % 60~65
Cement content (C) kg/m3 360
Air content % 4.5±1.5
- Equipment:
 Water supply system:
Shall consist of a positive displacement pump capable of supplying water

through a regulating valve with non-pulsating flow and accurately
controllable by nozzle man, in sufficient amount and at a pressure above
operating air pressure recommended by the manufacturer of the
shotcrete delivery machine. A suitable water pressure and flow meter
04001 - 20
shall be fitted to the water supply system.
 Air supply system:
Shall be capable of supplying the shotcrete machine and hose with air at
the pressures and volumes recommended by the manufacturer of the
machine. A suitable air pressure meter shall be fitted to the air supply
system adjacent to the shotcrete machine. No air supply systems shall be
used that delivers air contaminated by oil or that is incapable of
maintaining constant pressure.
 Shotcrete machine:
Shall have an acceptable performance record in applying coarse

aggregate shotcrete as specified herein. The shotcrete machine shall be
capable of introducing material to the delivery hose at a uniform rate, with
ejection from the nozzle at velocities that will afford adherence of material
to the surface to be treated with a minimum rebound and maximum
adherence and density.
The entire system shall be so arranged that the nozzle man may use air
and water in any combination to prepare surfaces on which shotcrete will
be applied.
Equipment, including protective equipment for the nozzle man shall be

provided to allow application of shotcrete to surface at an approximate
distance of 1 meter from the nozzle.
- Field Trials:
Field trials shall be made to demonstrate the capability of the equipment,

workmanship and materials under field conditions at least fourteen (14) days
prior to the actual application of shotcrete in underground or surface works.
The field application of each mix selected for field trial shall be made on
overhead horizontal and/or vertical test panels to simulate construction
conditions.
Fifty (50) to Sixty (60) mm diameter cores shall be taken from each overhead
horizontal and each vertical test panel. With the exception of cores for
one-day strength, all cores shall be taken one day before testing.
Cores shall have a length as 2.0 times of a diameter and shall be tested for
their one (1) and twenty-eight (28) day strength. The average strength of all
cores as a minimum shall be as follows:
Compressive strength 1 day 5 N/mm2 minimum; and

Compressive strength 28 days 18 N/mm2 minimum.
The minimum strength obtained by testing shall be not less than 80% of the
above-mentioned values. Mixes failing to meet the above requirements will
be rejected. All phases of field trail work shall be performed in the presence
of the Engineer.
04001 - 21
The Engineer will inform the Contractor in writing, of his acceptance of mixes
which meet the requirements of this Section. No shotcrete mix shall be used
in field trials if the mix has not been approved by the Engineer.
The actual proportions of ingredients determined and approved by the

Engineer on the basis of trial mixes and field trials shall be used in the actual
application of shotcrete and shall not be varied without the written approval
of the Engineer.
- Workmanship:
The work shall be performed by experienced workmen.
Nozzle men shall have previous satisfactory experience in the application of

coarse aggregate shotcrete in underground projects or shall work under the
immediate supervision of a foreman or instructor with such experience.
Each nozzle man shall demonstrate, to the satisfaction of the Engineer,

acceptable proficiency in the application of shotcrete in field trials to vertical
and overhead test panels before commencing shotcrete work in
underground for the project.
- Preparation:
Wherever shotcrete is required, the Contractor shall clean and prepare the
surfaces to receive the coating. Loose or shattered rock debris, soil or other
loose material and any oil film or otherwise objectionable substances shall
be removed from the surfaces. After the loose material has been removed,
the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned with water under pressure and/or
compressed air. Any remaining water shall be blown off by compressed air.
Any seepage water emerging locally shall be dealt with by local sealing with
drainage measures.
- Application:
No shotcrete shall be applied to the work until the quality of workmanship and
the compressive strength of the shotcrete as determined from test panels is
approved.
After the specified preparation has been carried out and immediately before
shotcreting, the surface shall, where required, be thoroughly cleaned and
wetted with a strong blast of air and water. Application shall commence at the
bottom of vertical and near vertical surface and each layer of shotcrete shall
be built up by making several passes of the nozzle over the working area.
Shotcrete shall be built up in successive layers such that sagging and

bleeding does not occur. Wherever practicable, rock surfaces shall be
rendered free of water flowing over or seeping through the surface to be
shotcreted immediately before the shotcrete is applied.
The thickness of the shotcrete to be applied shall be as shown on the

Drawings, or as approved or directed by the Engineer. During the
04001 - 22
application, the thickness shall be determined by an approved means.
The distance of the nozzle from the work shall be between 600 mm and
1,500 mm and the nozzle shall generally be held perpendicular to the
application surface. The shotcrete shall emerge from the nozzle in a steady
uninterrupted flow. When the flow becomes intermittent from any cause, the
nozzle operator shall direct it away from the work until it again become
uniform.
All rebound and other loose material shall be removed by air jets or approved
means from the surface of each layer as work proceeds.
During application of the shotcrete, any remaining water flowing over or

seeping through the surfaces to which the shotcrete is to be applied shall be
diverted by the use of panning, pipes, felt strips or other approved means.
Where directed, formed holes of 75 mm diameter PVC or PE pipe outlets
shall be provided in the shotcrete as directed to relieve water pressure on the
shotcrete.
Layer thickness shall mainly be governed by the requirements that the

material shall not slump or sag and is dependent on factors such as position
of reinforcement, plan of application, mix design, constituents and use of
admixtures. Where thick layers are to be applied it is important that the
leading edge be maintained at a slope. Where successive layers of shotcrete
are necessary to achieve the required overall thickness, each layer of
shotcrete shall first be allowed to stiffen, all laitance and loose material be
removed and the surface be wetted using a strong blast of air and water
before the next layer of shotcrete is placed.
Construction joints shall be tapered at approximately 30 degrees unless

otherwise directed. The entire joint shall be thoroughly cleaned and wetted
before placing adjacent shotcrete. Reinforcement shall be cleaned up any
previously deposited hardened material which might prevent a proper bond
or encasement.
A proportion of shotcrete will rebound. Such rebounded shotcrete shall not

be reused but shall be removed to disposal at the expense of the Contractor.
All rebounded shotcrete shall be removed from the Works and disposed of by
the Contractor as part of the work under this Clause.
The Contractor shall ensure that the shotcrete application operation is

adequately lit by floodlight and he shall provide adequate ventilation facilities
and take such other measures as necessary for safety of his workmen,
including provision of face protection of nozzle men.
- Test on site:
• Compressive strength test for shotcrete.
Test shall be performed one (1) test per every twenty (20) m and tested for
twenty four (24) hour and twenty eight (28) day strength. As for twenty
four (24) hour strength test, it shall be performed according to the
Engineer approved method and be taken at three (3) points per one (1)
04001 - 23
time.
As for twenty eight (28) day strength, cores shall have five (5) cm
diameter and ten (10) cm height after capping, core shall be taken from
installed shotcrete in the form for testing at same condition as applying in
site.
• Measurement of shotcrete thickness.
Shotcrete thickness shall be measured at five (5) points per every twenty
(20) m during primary excavation (approximately 100 m) and afterward
per every fifty (50) m at arch section and at one (1) point each at side wall,
total seven (7) points. Test hole diameter shall be minimum thirty two (32)
mm and all test shall be witnessed by the Engineer. In case of lack of
thickness, the Contractor shall apply additional shotcrete as required
thickness. Any shotcrete which does not meet the required value shall be
removed and re-performed. The Contractor shall supply and install all
material, tools, equipment and labour with own cost.
- Repair:
Shotcrete which lacks uniformity, exhibits segregation, honeycomb,

lamination, shows cracking shall be regarded as defective shotcrete. The
Engineer may order removal of defective shotcrete and order its replacement
with acceptable shotcrete, or other remedial measures without additional
cost to the Employer. Shotcrete shall not be placed over a defective
shotcrete layer until the required remedial measures have been taken. Any
remedial measures directed by the Engineer to correct defective shotcrete
shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
4. Steel Wire Mesh:
The Contractor shall submit his procedure for the fixing of steel wire mesh for
approval prior to beginning of installation. Short bolt (surface anchors), rock pins
driven into joints or shotcrete onto a previous layer, shoot-in studs, or any
combination of these means are acceptable provided the steel wire mesh
closely follows the geometry of the excavation. Under no circumstances shall
space between the underlying surface and the steel wire mesh is more than 5
cm.
The Contractor shall furnish and place steel wire mesh on the surface of
underground excavation in conjunction with the installation of rock bolts or steel
supports. Steel wire mesh shall be properly placed and anchored to prevent
possible rock falls. A minimum overlap of 15 cm shall be used at joints.
5. Steel Support:
- General:
The Contractor shall furnish and install permanent steel support to support
the crown and side walls of underground excavation as shown on the
Drawing or as directed by the Engineer.
04001 - 24
Permanent steel supports shall be complete with all bolts, tie rods, footplates
and other accessories required for assembly of the supports and supporting
them in place until the lining concrete is placed.
Temporary steel supports that are not required to be in place as the

permanent work shall be removed unless such removal is determined
impracticable by the Engineer.
Type and size of the steel supports, its miscellaneous details, location and
spacing shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval. The clear
distance between the flanges of the installed supports shall not be less than
30 cm unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
- Installation:
The steel support shall be installed to the proper lines and grades and shall
be maintained by the Contractor in the proper condition and alignment until
the lining concrete is placed about them. The Contractor shall securely brace
the supports with tie rods, and shall use the minimum practicable amount of
timber blocking and wedges between the steel arch supports and the rock.
Any steel supports installed improperly or damaged by the Contractor’s
operation shall be adjusted or repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the
Engineer within 24 hours after notification by the Engineer.
Temporary timber collar braces shall be furnished and installed by the

Contractor where required to install the steel supports, and shall be removed
before lining concrete unless such removal is determined impracticable by
the Engineer. At such time, any redundant timber blocking and wedges shall
also be removed.
The Contractor may, to facilitate his operation, place permanent steel

support at a greater distance from the inside finishing surface of concrete
lining than that shown on the Drawings or specified by the Engineer,
provided that any increase in quantity of steel supports and any excavation
and concrete lining outside the pay-line as shown on the Drawings, required
thereby shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
Permanent steel supports required for the section shall be in accordance

with Shop Drawings submitted by the Contractor and approved by the
Engineer.
- Steel Lagging:
If necessary, steel laggings shall be installed between flanges of steel

supports.
The steel lagging shall be plain or profile sheet of at least 5-mm thickness.
The steel shall conform to JIS A 5528.
The lagging shall be placed between the flanges of steel supports and fixed
in position by wedging off of the front flange of the steel support using
hardwood timber wedges. The space between the lagging and the
excavated profile may be filled with concrete or discrete timber packing.
04001 - 25
- Temporary Support:
Temporary timber or steel supports including bracing shall be provided

where necessary until permanent steel arch support is installed, and also for
support of temporary excavations such as tunnel drifts, and as may be
otherwise required for construction purposes.
Supports that are not required to remain in place, which can safely be
removed, may be removed subject to the direction or agreement of the
Engineer. Removed supports in good condition may be reused.
Suitable temporary timber, which may be used to support the crown and side
walls of the concrete lining, is placed and every precaution shall be exercised
as to timing and extent of removal to prevent accidents.
Temporary steel supports shall conform to the requirements specified

hereinbefore for permanent steel arch supports or other requirements
approved by the Engineer. When the Contractor’s method for removal of
such temporary timbering is unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, the
Engineer may instruct the Contractor to suspend the work and the Contractor
shall follow the directions of the Engineer. An ample supply of temporary
timbering shall be stocked on site to meet any emergency demand for
temporary support.
- Tunnel Markers:
The Contractor shall maintain chainages (length marker) marked on the

tunnel walls every 50 meters. The markings shall be clear and painted in an
approved colour and shall not lag more than 100 meters from the face.
3.01.3 Lining, Invert, Refuge Niche and Other Concrete Structures:
Placing of concrete for linings of the tunnel and refuge niches shall be carried out
using sets of travelling steel forms. The number and length of the steel form
elements will be determined by the required daily progress and the minimum
formwork removal time.
Removal of formwork shall not be permitted until the concrete has reached at least
2.0 N/mm2 cylinder compressive strength and has been cured for not less than
fifteen (15) hours or as approved by the Engineer after the completion of concreting
of that element.
Equipment for concrete transport and placing shall be of such a design and capacity
as to guarantee the continuous poring of the lining. The placing system shall provide
the optimum filling of the arch vertex.
Placing of lining concrete shall be carried out after waterproofing has been installed.
In the event of equipment breakdown, or if for any reason continuous placing is

interrupted, the Contractor shall thoroughly consolidate the concrete at such joints to
a uniform and stable slope while the concrete is plastic. If cold joints occur, the
concrete surface at the such joints shall be cleaned as required for construction joint
as specified in Section 02068: “Concrete”, and moisturized before being covered
04001 - 26
with fresh mortar and concrete.
The method of concreting shall be approved by the Engineer. Concrete shall be

consolidated by immersion vibrators.
Concreting wok for roadbed concrete, centre passage, cable box and portal walls
shall be carried out complying with the requirements as specified in Section 02068:
“Concrete.” The dimensions of concrete shall be as shown on the Drawings.
There are two types of refugee niches: medium and small types. The refuge niches
shall be constructed at both sides of a tunnel as the staggered arrangement. The
small-type refuge niches shall be constructed at the interval of 20 meters from each
tunnel portal. While the medium-type refuge niches shall be constructed at the
interval of 100 meters from each tunnel portal. The size, shape and location of
refuge niches shall be as shown in the Drawings.
The minimum compressive strength of each element at age 28 days shall be as

follows or as approved by the Engineer:
Lining concrete (Type A-N): 21 N/mm2 minimum

Lining concrete (Type B-N, B-K): 21 N/mm2 minimum
Lining concrete (Type C-N, C-K): 21 N/mm2 minimum
Lining concrete (Type D-N, D-K): 21 N/mm2 minimum
Lining concrete (Type SP-N1, SP-N2, SP-K): 24 N/mm2 minimum
Invert concrete (Type A-N): 21 N/mm2 minimum
Invert concrete (Type B-N, B-K): 21 N/mm2 minimum
Invert concrete (Type C-N, C-K): 21 N/mm2 minimum
Invert concrete (Type D-N, D-K): 21 N/mm2 minimum
Invert concrete (Type SP-N1, SP-N2, SP-K): 24 N/mm2 minimum
Refuge Concrete 21 N/mm2 minimum
Concrete bed 24 N/mm2 minimum
Roadbed concrete: 24 N/mm2 minimum
Transition Slub concrete 24 N/mm2 minimum
Ballast Stopper 24 N/mm2 minimum
Centre passage concrete: 21 N/mm2 minimum
Plain Conceret 21 N/mm2 minimum
Cable box concrete: 21 N/mm2 minimum
Portal walls concrete: 24 N/mm2 minimum
Replacement Concrete 18 N/mm2 minimum
Concrete with wide cracks shall be repaired by the Contractor without additional cost
to the Employer. The Contractor shall prepare and submit the drawings of cracks
with their length and width, and their repair method to the Engineer for approval.
Any remedial measures directed by the Engineer to correct concrete cracks shall be
at the expense of the Contractor.
3.01.4 Waterproofing:
1. Surface Treatment:
Prior to installation, the unevenness of ground surface shall be smoothed with

shotcrete to prevent any damage on waterproof sheets. Protection caps shall be
attached to all heads of the rock bolts to prevent the damage to waterproof
04001 - 27
sheets.
2. Installation:
Waterproof sheets shall be installed between shotcrete and lining concrete as

recommended by the manufacturer’s specification at locations and as shown on
the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
3.01.5 Drainage System:
1. Centre Drainage and Cross Drainage:
Centre drainage and cross drainage pipes (High Density Polyethylene) shall be
provided at locations as shown on the Drawings. Base concrete shall be placed
at locations where ditches are excavated and the HDPE pipes shall be securely
installed.
Aggregates for backfill shall be of 10mm ~ 30mm in diameter. The surface of

backfilled aggregates shall be covered with waterproof sheets to prevent the
backfilled aggregates from clogging due to concrete works.
2. Longitudinal Drainage behind Lining Concrete:
Longitudinal drainage behind lining shall be installed at the locations as shown

on the Drawings. Care shall be exercised for joints with waterproof sheets.
3. Drainage Pit:
Catch basins shall be provided at locations as shown on the Drawings or as

directed by the Engineer. All drainage pipes shall be carefully joined with the
catch basins to prevent any leakage. All concreting work for catch basin shall
comply with Section 02068: “CONCRETE.”
4. Joints and Sealing:
- Construction Joints:
Concreting shall be carried out continuously up to construction joints, the

position and arrangement of which shall be as shown on the Drawings or as
approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit a drawing with full
details of proposed joints (in addition to those shown on the Drawings and
specified by the Engineer) including the shuttering and reinforcement details,
well in advance to enable the Engineer to consider the implication of the
proposal.
Construction joints in highly stressed parts and in water-retaining structures

shall be avoided as far as possible.
- Contraction/Expansion joints:
The Contractor shall provide contraction/expansion joints as shown on the

Drawings or elsewhere as directed by the Engineer. The joint material will
consist of a layer of bituminous coating on the face of the first concrete.
04001 - 28
5. Formwork:
Formwork shall be in accordance with Section 02068: “CONCRETE” or as

instructed by the Engineer.
- END OF SECTION -
04001 - 29
RAILWAY DOUBLE TRACKING ON JAVA SOUTH LINE PROJECT III, CIREBON – KROYA
BIDDING DOCUMENT, PART2-WORKS REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 04002
SHOTCRETE AND ROCKBOLT FOR SLOPE PROTECTION
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
1.01.1 Work Included: This section covers the requirements for furnishing, delivery, placing,
jointing, installing and finishing and all other work as required for completion of slope
protection works around railway tunnel portals.

Section 02068 “CONCRETE“
Section 03001 “STRUCTURAL STEEL“
Section 02067 “STEEL STRUCTURE“
1.02 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
and standards provided they given an equivalent degree of quality as the referenced
codes and standards and are submitted for the Employer review and approval in
advance of their use.
• ASTM – American Society for Testing and Materials
A 82-90a Steel, Wire, Plain for Concrete Reinforcement

A 185 Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement
C 31-91 Test Method for Making and Curing Concrete Compressive and
Flexural Strength Test Specimens in the Field
C 33-82 Concrete Aggregates
C 39-81 Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens,
C 117-90 Test Method for Materials Finer than No. 200 (75 mm) Sieve in
Mineral Aggregates by Washing
C 138-92 Test Method for Unit Weight, Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric)
of Concrete
C 150-81 Portland Cement
C 172-90 Practice for Sampling Fresh Concrete
C 231-91b Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Pressure Method
C 233-93 Test Method for Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
C 260-77 Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
C 494-82 Type A Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
D 2125 Elastic Joint Filler
D 345-90 Test Method for Sampling Calcium Chloride for Roads and
Structural Application
D 4533 Tear Strength of Geotextile (Trapezoid method)
04002 - 1
D 4751 Puncture Resistance
• AASHTO – American Association of State Highway and Transportation

Officials:
T26 Quality of Water to be used in Concrete
• ACI – American Concrete Institute
304 Recommended Practices for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting

and Placing Concrete
305 Hot Weather Concreting
308 Recommended Practice for Curing Concrete
309 Recommended Practice for Consolidation of Concrete
318-95 Building Code Requirement for Structural Concrete
• AWS - American Welding Society
D.1.1 Code of Practice of Welding
• JIS - Japanese Industrial Standards
A 1102 Grading of Aggregate

A 1103 Material passing 0.074 mm sieve
A 1104 Unit Weight of Concrete
A 1105 Organic Impurities
A 1108 Compressive Strength of Concrete
A 1109 Specific Gravity and Absorption
A 1111 Surface Moisture
A 1115 Sampling of Concrete
A 1121 Los-Angeles Abrasion
A 1122 Sodium Sulfate Soundness
A 5302 Reinforced Concrete Pipes
A 5751 Oil Based Caulking Compound for Buildings
A 5758 Polysulfide Sealing Compound for Buildings
A 6204 Air Entraining Agent
G 3112-85 High-yield deformed steel bar
G 3452-84 Carbon Steel Pipes or Ordinary Piping
G 3471-77 Corrugated Steel Pipes and Sections
R 5210 Portland Cement
K 6741-84 Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride Pipes
K 6773 PVC water-stop strips
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
The Contractor shall comply with the applicable reference in Section 01007:
“QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL PROGRAMME” and the criteria specified
herein.
04002 - 2
1.04 SUBMITTALS
location, route, structure, materials to be used, calculation, schedule and other
necessary information shall be described.
1.04.3 The Contractor shall submit the Shop Drawings with structural calculation to verify
stability of structures to the Engineer for approval.
PART 2: PRODUCT
2.01 MATERIALS
2.01.1 Rolled Steel Bolts:
Comply with ASTM A36 except where otherwise applicable.
2.01.2 Reinforcing Bars:
Comply with ASTM A615 or JIS G 3112, SD 295A.
2.01.3 Rock Bolts:
Rock bolts shall be 25 mm in nominal diameter of high yield deformed steel bar
complying with SD 345 of JIS G 3112-85, or equivalent quality as approved by the
Engineer, and be of the type as shown on the Drawings. The rockbolt shall be
threaded at one end and pointed at the other to facilitate the placing operation. The
sleeve diameter shall be selected in accordance with the drill hole in order to ensure
the optimum filling of the hole.
The respective lengths of rock bolts and their capacities are shown on the Drawings.
The Engineer may direct variations of the length and capacity depending on the site
rock conditions.
2.01.4 Cement:
Comply with the requirements in Section 02068 “CONCRETE.”
2.01.5 Admixtures:
Comply with the requirements in ASTM C260-86 or JIS A 6204 for air entraining
agents. The use of special cement or admixture shall be approved by the Engineer
even when used by the Contractor at his own expense. The use of the admixture
shall be proved harmless to the work crew.
04002 - 3
2.01.6 Aggregates:
Comply with the requirements in ASTM A136; however, the maximum aggregate
size for shotcrete shall be 15mm. All aggregate shall be uniformly well graded. The
combined aggregate shall have a moisture content at the time of mixing with cement
of not less than 2 % and not more than 6 % of the oven dry weight of the aggregate.
2.01.7 Water:
Comply with the requirements in Section 02068: “CONCRETE”.
2.01.8 Steel Wire Mesh:
Comply with JIS 3551-80 Welded Wire Mesh of 5.0 mm in diameter with 150 mm
opening, or equivalent quality as approved by the Engineer.
2.01.9 Anchor Bolts:
Comply with ASTM A307, non-headed type with heavy hexagonal nuts unless
otherwise indicated.
2.01.10 High Strength Threaded Fasteners:
Comply with ASTM A325, heavy duty hexagonal structural bolts, heavy duty
hexagonal nuts, and hardened washers, shall be quenched and tempered
medium-carbon steel bolts, nuts and washers,
2.01.11 Metallic Non-shrink Grout:
Shall be non-corrosive, durable, non-shrink and shall be that upon which design is
based.
2.01.12 Drainage Filter Mat
Polyester, mono-filament, non-woven fabric: The filter mat shall comply with the
requirements in JIS 1096 for thickness, tensile strength, elongation, tear strength,
and with JIS 6301 for permeability or equivalent quality as approved by the Engineer.
(Considering the impact at time of placing lining concrete, resistance strength at a
compression ratio of 20% shall be more than 75 kn/m2).
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
3.01.1 The Contractor shall perform surveys and measurements, including sub surface
survey and soil investigation in accordance with Section 01018 “SURVEY” for
planning the shotcrete and rockbolt works.
3.01.2 The Contractor shall using suitable material and structure for shotcrete and rockbolt
and shall submit his proposal in his Work Program to the Engineer for approval.
04002 - 4
3.02 EXECUTION
1. Grouted rock bolts and fore-poling:
- General:
The Contractor shall furnish and install grouted rock bolts and fore poling in
slope excavation as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
Rock bolts, complete with all required accessories, including bearing plates,
nuts and washers, shall be supplied by the Contractor. The use of chemical
resin anchors or cement grout anchors shall be subject to approval of the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall plan his equipment and operations for slope
excavation so that routine installation of rock bolts can be carried out as
excavation proceeds at the face.
The installation of grouted rock bolts and fore-poling bars shall be under the
direct supervision of personnel having at least two years of experience in
bolting techniques. The Contractor shall keep on site, ready for immediate
use, a sufficient stock of rock bolts and accessories to avoid delay to the
work.
- Installation pattern:
Rock bolts shall be installed in patterns in underground excavation in order

to form structural entities. The required patterns in which the rock bolts shall
be installed as shown on the Drawings, or as directed by the Engineer.
The rock bolts and methods of installation in slope excavation, including the
drill hole diameter and length, and the details of the equipment necessary
to drill the hole, to clean out the drilled hole, to install and grout the rock bolt
in the hole and test the anchorage, shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions manual and subject to approval of the
Engineer.
When rock bolt support is directed, the hole shall be drilled and cleaned out,
and the rock bolts shall then be installed without delay.
Standard percussion drilling equipment may be used for drilling rock bolt.
The holes shall be drilled to the size and depth recommended by the
manufacturer’s instructions manual and approved by the Engineer.
- Testing of rock bolt installations:
The Engineer will select rock bolts for pullout tests, and the Contractor shall
test such bolts using a calibrated hydraulic jack. All tests shall be witnessed
by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide and maintain the tools,
equipment and labour to perform these tests. As an average, one bolt in
200 of the rock bolts installed shall be tested. Any rock bolt which does not
meet the test will be rejected. The decision whether to replace defective
rock bolts will be made by the Engineer.
04002 - 5
Prior to installing the bolts, the rock surface shall be prepared for accepting
the washer plates. Such prepared bearing surfaces shall be normal to the
axis of the hole and if necessary tapered plates or washers shall be used.
Ungrouted rock bolts shall be installed using special tools as recommended

by the manufacturer. They shall be tensioned, using a torque wrench, to a
value as directed and in accordance with the recommendations of the
manufacturer.
When requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall check the installed
bolts by pullout test. In case of a significant load decrease, the bolts shall be
re-tensioned to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Where necessary, rock bolts may be used in conjunction with small steel
beams, steel plates, lagging or wire netting. The wire net shall be of welded
wire type in accordance with approved standards.
Each permanent rock bolts shall be provided with two independent forms of
protection against corrosion at all points of the entire surface of the
completed installation. The Contractor shall submit his proposal for
corrosion protection to the Engineer for approval.
To carry out the slope excavation work without delay, the Contractor shall
always have on stock sufficient quantities of rock bolts, of various types and
length, wire mesh and other accessories.
2. Shotcreting:
- General
The Contractor shall apply shotcrete to slope excavation as shown on the

Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Shotcrete shall mean concrete
with or without admixture, pneumatically applied at high velocity onto a
prepared rock surface. For slope support, the dry application process shall
be used.
Where shotcrete support is required, the Contractor shall apply shotcrete to

give a thickness shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
The thickness required on the Drawings and Specifications are the
minimum thickness of the shotcrete layer as measured over rock points.
Successive layers shall be placed to achieve the required support
thickness.
- Equipment
• Water supply system:
Shall consist of a positive displacement pump capable of supplying

water through a regulating vale with non-pulsating flow and accurately
controllable by nozzle man, in sufficient amount and at a pressure above
operating air pressure recommended by the manufacturer of the
shotcrete delivery machine. A suitable water pressure and flow meter
shall be fitted to the water supply system.
04002 - 6
• Air supply system:
Shall be capable of supplying the shotcrete machine and hose with air at
the pressures and volumes recommended by the manufacturer of the
machine. A suitable air pressure meter shall be fitted to the air supply
system adjacent to the shotcrete machine. No air supply systems shall
be used that delivers air contaminated by oil or that is incapable of
maintaining constant pressure.
• Shotcrete machine:
Shall have an acceptable performance record in applying coarse

aggregate shotcrete as specified herein. The shotcrete machine shall
be capable of introducing material to the delivery hose at a uniform rate,
with ejection from the nozzle at velocities that will afford adherence of
material to the surface to be treated with a minimum rebound and
maximum adherence and density.
The entire system shall be so arranged that the nozzle man may use air
and water in any combination to prepare surfaces on which shotcrete will
be applied.
Equipment, including protective equipment for the nozzle man shall be

provided to allow application of shotcrete to surface at an approximate
distance of 1 meter from the nozzle.
- Field Trials
Field trials shall be made to demonstrate the capability of the equipment,

workmanship and materials under field conditions at least fourteen (14)
days prior to the actual application of shotcrete in slope surface works.
The field application of each mix selected for field trial shall be made on
overhead horizontal and/or vertical test panels to simulate construction
conditions.
Sixty (60) mm diameter cores shall be taken from each overhead horizontal
and each vertical test panel. With the exception of cores for one-day
strength, all cores shall be taken one day before testing.
Cores shall have a length/diameter ratio of 2.0 and shall be tested for their
one and three day strength. The average strength of all cores as a
minimum shall be as follows:
Compressive strength 1 day 8 N/mm2 minimum

The minimum strength obtained by testing shall be not less than 80% of the
above-mentioned values. Mixes failing to meet the above requirements will
be rejected. All phases of field trail work shall be performed in the presence
of the Engineer.
04002 - 7
The Engineer will inform the Contractor in writing, of his acceptance of

mixes which meet the requirements of this Section. No shotcrete mix shall
be used in field trials if the mix has not been approved by the Engineer.
The actual proportions of ingredients determined and approved by the

Engineer, on the basis of trial mixes and field trials, shall be used in the
actual application of shotcrete and shall not be varied without the written
- Workmanship
The work shall be performed by experienced workmen.
Nozzle men shall have had previous satisfactory experience in the

application of coarse aggregate shotcrete in slope projects or shall work
under the immediate supervision of a foreman or instructor with such
experience.
Each nozzle man shall demonstrate, to the satisfaction of the Engineer,

acceptable proficiency in the application of shotcrete in field trials to vertical
and overhead test panels before commencing shotcrete work slope.
- Preparation
Wherever shotcrete is required, the Contractor shall clean and prepare the
surfaces to receive the coating. Loose or shattered rock debris, soil or other
loose material and any oil film or otherwise objectionable substances shall
be removed from the surfaces. After the loose material has been removed,
the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned with water under pressure and/or
compressed air. Any remaining water shall be blown off by compressed air.
Any seepage water emerging locally shall be dealt with by local sealing with
drainage measures.
- Application
No shotcrete shall be applied to the work until the quality of workmanship

and the compressive strength of the shotcrete, as determined from test
panels, is approved.
After the specified preparation has been carried out and immediately before
shotcreting, the surface shall, where required, be thoroughly cleaned and
wetted with a strong blast of air and water. Application shall commence at
the bottom of vertical and near vertical surface and each layer of shotcrete
shall be built up by marking several passes of the nozzle over the working
area.
Shotcrete shall be built up in successive layers such that sagging and

bleeding does not occur. Wherever practicable, rock surfaces shall be
rendered free of water flowing over or seeping through the surface to be
shotcreted immediately before the shotcrete is applied.
The thickness of the shotcrete to be applied shall be as shown on the
04002 - 8
Drawings, or as approved or directed by the Engineer. During the

application, the thickness shall be determined by an approved means.
The distance of the nozzle from the work shall be between 600 mm and
1,500 mm and the nozzle shall generally be held perpendicular to the
application surface. The shotcrete shall emerge from the nozzle in a steady
uninterrupted flow. Should the flow becomes intermittent by any cause, the
nozzle operator shall direct it away from the work until it again become
uniform.
All rebound and other loose material shall be removed by air jets or
approved means from the surface of each layer as work proceeds.
During application of the shotcrete, any remaining water flowing over or

seeping through the surfaces to which the shotcrete is to be applied shall
be diverted by the use of panning, pipes felt strips or other approved means.
Where directed, formed holes of 75mm diameter PVC pipe outlets shall be
provided in the shotcrete, as directed, to relieve water pressure on the
shotcrete.
Layer thickness shall mainly be governed by the requirements that the

material shall not slump or sag and is dependent on factors such as
position of reinforcement, plan of application, mix design, constituents and
use of admixtures. Where thick layers are to be applied it is important that
the leading edge be maintained at a slope. Where successive layers of
shotcrete are necessary to achieve the required overall thickness, each
layer of shotcrete shall first be allowed to stiffen, all laitance and loose
material remove and the surface wetted using a strong blast of air and
water before the next layer of shotcrete is placed.
The position of contraction joints and the method of forming shall be subject
to approval by the Engineer. Contraction joints shall be formed at right
angles to the face for at least half the depth of the layer being placed.
Construction joints shall be tapered at approximately 30 degrees unless
otherwise directed. The entire joint shall be thoroughly cleaned and wetted
before placing adjacent shotcrete. Reinforcement shall be cleaned of any
previously deposited hardened material which might prevent a proper bond
or encasement.
A proportion of shotcrete will be rebound. Such rebound shotcrete shall not

be reused but shall be removed to disposal at the expense of the Contractor.
All rebound shotcrete shall be removed from the Works and disposed of by
the Contractor as part of the work under this Clause.
The Contractor shall ensure that the shotcrete application operation take
such other measures as necessary for safety of his workmen, including
provision of face protection of nozzle men.
- Curing
All shotcrete surfaces shall be kept continuously wet for at least five (5)
days.
04002 - 9
- Repair
Shotcrete which lacks uniformity, exhibits segregation, honeycombing,

lamination, showing cracking shall be regarded as defective shotcrete. The
Engineer may order removal of defective shotcrete and order its
replacement with acceptable shotcrete, or other remedial measures without
additional cost to the Employer. Shotcrete shall not be placed over a
defective shotcrete layer until the required remedial measures have been
taken. Any remedial measures directed by the Engineer to correct defective
shotcrete shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
3. Steel Wire Mesh:
The Contractor shall submit his procedure for the fixing of steel wire mesh for
approval prior to beginning of installation. Short bolt (surface anchors), rock pins
driven into joints or shotcrete onto a previous layer, shoot-in studs, or any
combination of these means are acceptable provided the steel wire mesh
closely follows the geometry of the excavation. Under no circumstances shall
space between the underlying surface and the steel wire mesh is more than 15
cm.
The Contractor shall furnish and place steel wire mesh on the surface of slope
excavation in conjunction with the installation of rock bolts or steel supports.
Steel wire mesh shall be properly placed and anchored to prevent possible rock
falls. A minimum overlap of 15 cm shall be used at joints.
04002 - 10

Notog

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Notog

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

KEMENTERIAN PERHUBUNGAN

DIREKTORAT JENDERAL PERKERETAAPIAN

PEMBANGUNAN TEROWONGAN KEBASEN BH. 1464

BALAI TEKNIK PERKERETAAPIAN WILAYAH JAWA BAGIAN TENGAH

INTRODUCTION AND SCOPE OF WORK

2.01.3 Unless expressly provided for or implied in the Conditions of Contract or

1. If the Engineer considers that the Contractor has inserted an excessive

3.01 SCOPE OF WORK:

3.01.1 Civil Work:

1. The scope of Civil Work of this Project involves:

a. The provisions of approximately 98.6 km of a new roadbed adjacent to

b. The provisions of civil structures related to the requirements of the

a. Demolition and clearing works of existing structures within the Project

b. Roadbed construction comprising of earth embankments, cutting and

c. Soil improvement work for roadbed at swampy areas by use of suitable

d. Platform and drainage system improvement at every station yard;

e. Drainage system by use of stone masonry open U-ditch or L-ditch,

f. Retaining wall by use of reinforced concrete or stone masonry to protect

g. Improvements of level crossings; and

Box Culvert Work is tabulated as follows:

New Box Culvert Existing Box Culvert

844 Box Culvert 2.00X3.00 Box Culvert 2.00X3.00

1428 Box Culvert 3.00X1.50 Non-Touch 3.00

3.01.2 Bridge Work

1. The scope of Bridge Work of this Project involves:

In general, Bridge Work is divided into two categories; construction of bridges

1438 New WTT 50 2 -

RCS : Reinforced Concrete Slab WTP : Welded Through Plate Girder

2. The major works required for the existing bridge:

3.01.3 Track Work:

1. The scope of track work is generally divided into three categories:

a. Construction of New Second Track:

With total length of 81.4 kilometres, new second track is to be

b. Modification of Station Layout:

Existing station layouts need modifying to meet the double tracking

c. Rehabilitation of Existing Track:

On a scale of 41.4 kilometres long, existing tracks are to be rehabilitated

In addition to the above 27.1 kilometres long existing tracks are to be

2. Major works included are:

b. In general, the new track is composed of 1000 m long continuous welded

c. The track structure outside tunnel is generally constructed of sub-ballast,

f. The track structure in tunnel is constructed of concrete slab, sleeper pad,

3.01.4 Facility Work

1. The station buildings to be constructed are Purwokerto and Kebasen stations.

2. Construction of 7 new mushola rooms including utilities.

4. Construction and upgrading of 25 watchman huts between Cirebon to Prupuk

5. Installation of approximately 1960m of new security fence (wire mesh fence)

6. Rehabilitation and construction of lighting system on existing main platform

7. Modification of additional toilet for JRK in existing PT KAI’s building at

9. Construction of new 10 passenger toilet.

3.01.5 Tunneling Work

2. The major work items included in Tunneling Works are as follows:

a. Excavation of a new tunnel and refuge niches;

b. Installing primary supports: steel wire mesh, shotcrete, rock bolts,

c. Construction and installation of drainage facilities: waterproof sheet,

d. Construction of secondary supports: lining concrete and invert concrete;

e. Construction of structures inside a tunnel or at tunnel portals: roadbed

f. Cleaning, observation and measurement works of an existing tunnel

3.01.6 Signalling and Telecommunications Work

3.01.6.1 Scope of Supply

The scope of supply shall include:

1. Provision of new functional electronic interlocking system for double track

3. Modification and/or increase capacity of signalling power supply;

4. Provision of new UPS system including new batteries;